Om CXT 20713

*DCY*
CH570 and CH670 Sugar

Cane Harvesters (S.N.
170001— )
*OMCXT20713*
OPERATOR'S MANUAL
CH570 and CH670 Sugar Cane
Harvesters
OMCXT20713 ISSUE D7 (ENGLISH)
*OMCXT20713*
John Deere Catalão

Export Edition
PRINTED IN U.S.A.
Introduction
Foreword
READ THIS MANUAL carefully to learn how to operate equipment as described in this manual. The warranty is
and service your machine correctly. Failure to do so explained on the warranty certificate or statement which
could result in personal injury or equipment damage. you should have received from your dealer.
This manual and safety signs on your machine may also
be available in other languages. (See your John Deere This warranty provides you the assurance that John
dealer to order.) Deere will back its products where defects appear within
the warranty period. In some circumstances, John Deere
THIS MANUAL SHOULD BE CONSIDERED a permanent also provides field improvements, often without charge
part of your machine and should remain with the machine to the customer, even if the product is out of warranty.
when you sell it. Should the equipment be abused, or modified to change
its performance beyond the original factory specifications,
MEASUREMENTS in this manual are given in both the warranty will become void and field improvements
metric and customary U.S. unit equivalents. Use only may be denied. Setting fuel delivery above specifications
correct replacement parts and fasteners. Metric and inch or otherwise overpowering machines will result in such
fasteners may require a specific metric or inch wrench. action.
RIGHT-HAND AND LEFT-HAND sides are determined by THE TIRE MANUFACTURER'S warranty supplied with
facing in the direction of forward travel. your machine may not apply outside the U.S.
WRITE PRODUCT IDENTIFICATION NUMBERS (P.I.N.) If you are not the original owner of this machine, it is in
in the Specification or Identification Numbers section. your interest to contact your local John Deere dealer to
Accurately record all the numbers to help in tracing the inform them of this unit's serial number. This will help John
machine should it be stolen. Your dealer also needs these Deere notify you of any issues or product improvements.
numbers when you order parts. File the identification
numbers in a secure place off the machine.
WARRANTY is provided as part of John Deere's support
program for customers who operate and maintain their
DX,IFC1 -19-03APR09-1/1
Identification View
T8T1917 —UN—07MAY15
WM05597,0000E76 -19-29JAN15-1/1
041717
PN=2
Contents
Page
Page
Safety Features
Machine Safety Features....................................05-1 Service Tires Safely..........................................10-19
Keep Hands Away from Knives ........................10-19
Avoid Contact With Moving Parts .....................10-20
Safety Stay Clear of Harvesting Units .........................10-20
Recognize Safety Information ............................10-1 Decommissioning — Proper Recycling
Follow Safety Instructions...................................10-1 and Disposal of Fluids and Components .....10-21
Use Seat Belts....................................................10-1 Remove Accumulated Crop Debris ..................10-21
Instructional Seat................................................10-2
Support Machine Properly ..................................10-2
Practice Safe Maintenance.................................10-3 Safety Signs
Emergency Exit ..................................................10-3 Replace Safety Signs .........................................15-1
Tilt the Cab .........................................................10-4 Operator’s Manual..............................................15-1
Keep Passengers and Children Off Machine .....10-4 Repair and Maintenance ....................................15-1
Protecting Bystanders ........................................10-5 Seat Belt .............................................................15-2
Avoid Backover Accidents ..................................10-5 Emergency Exit ..................................................15-2
Use Steps and Handholds Correctly ..................10-5 Avoid Burns or Smoke Inhalation .......................15-2
Handle Electronic Components and Service Machine Safely ......................................15-3
Brackets Safely ..............................................10-6 Operate and Service Machine Safely .................15-3
Prevent Machine Runaway.................................10-6 Avoid Low Hanging Power Lines........................15-3
Service Safety ....................................................10-7 Starter.................................................................15-4
Service Machines Safely ....................................10-8 Avoid Topper Disks.............................................15-4
Work In Ventilated Area......................................10-8 Avoid Topper Assembly ......................................15-4
Install All Shields and Guards.............................10-9 Avoid Hot Surface...............................................15-5
Wear Protective Clothing....................................10-9 Avoid Cooling Fan ..............................................15-5
Handle Fuel Safely—Avoid Fires........................10-9 Avoid Cooling System ........................................15-5
In Case of Fire ..................................................10-10 Hydraulic Oil and Gas Under Pressure ..............15-6
Avoid Static Electricity Risk When Refueling....10-10 Raise Cab...........................................................15-6
Prepare for Emergencies.................................. 10-11 Avoid Base Cutter...............................................15-7
Avoid Hot Exhaust ............................................ 10-11 Avoid Chopper Drum and Extractor Fan ............15-7
Protect Against High Pressure Spray ............... 10-11 Avoid Extractor Area...........................................15-7
Do Not Open High-Pressure Fuel System........10-12 Avoid Elevator Area............................................15-8
Service Drive Belts Safely ................................10-12 Avoid Elevator Area............................................15-8
Service Accumulator Systems Safely...............10-12 Avoid Crop Dividers............................................15-8
Handling Batteries Safely .................................10-13 Avoid Crop Dividers............................................15-9
Avoid Heating Near Pressurized Fluid Lines ....10-13 Avoid Side Knives (If Equipped) .........................15-9
Service Cooling System Safely ........................10-14
Use Safety Lights and Devices.........................10-14 Operator's Station
Use Cylinder Safety Stops................................10-15 General View of Controls and Instruments.........20-1
Safe Transport of Harvester .............................10-15 Manual Storage Location....................................20-1
Remove Paint Before Welding or Heating........10-16 Emergency Exit ..................................................20-2
Avoid High-Pressure Fluids ..............................10-16 Brake Pedals (Wheel Machines Only)................20-2
Use Caution on Hillsides ..................................10-17 Floor Pedals (Track Machines Only) ..................20-2
Use Caution On Slopes When Turning ............10-17 Elevator Swing Pedals (If Equipped) ..................20-3
Harvester Elevator Safety.................................10-17 Adjust Floor Pedals (If Equipped).......................20-3
Avoid Electrical Power Lines ............................10-18 Seat Safety Switch .............................................20-4
Park Machine Safely.........................................10-18 Adjust ComfortCommand™ Operator's
Follow Tire Recommendations .........................10-18 Seat (Style A) .................................................20-5
Continued on next page
Original Instructions. All information, illustrations and specifications in this

manual are based on the latest information available at the time of publication.
The right is reserved to make changes at any time without notice.
COPYRIGHT © 2017
DEERE & COMPANY
Moline, Illinois
All rights reserved.
A John Deere ILLUSTRUCTION ™ Manual
i 041717
PN=1
Contents
Page Page
Adjust ComfortCommand™ Operator's

Seat (Style B) .................................................20-6 Lights and Signals
Adjust Left-Hand Armrest and Seat Light Switches ....................................................35-1
Back (Style A) ................................................20-7 Front and Rear Lighting Locations .....................35-2
Adjust Left-Hand Armrest and Seat Side Lighting Locations ......................................35-4
Back (Style B) ................................................20-7 Turn Signals .......................................................35-5
Adjust Instructional Seat.....................................20-8 Cab Interior Light ................................................35-5
Refrigerator (If Equipped) ...................................20-8 Map Light............................................................35-5
Seat Belts ...........................................................20-9
Adjust Armrest Control Console .........................20-9 Digital Cornerpost Display
Adjust Armrest Display .......................................20-9 Upper Cornerpost Display ..................................40-1
Auxiliary Power Outlet Strip..............................20-10 Lower Cornerpost Display ..................................40-2
Fire Extinguishers.............................................20-10
Fire Extinguisher Locations .............................. 20-11
Steering Column............................................... 20-11 GreenStar™ 3 2630 Display Screens
Windshield Wiper and Windshield Armrest Display Navigation
Washer Switch .............................................20-12 (GreenStar™ 3 2630 Display)........................45-1
Side Wiper Switches (If Equipped) ...................20-12 Display Navigation..............................................45-2
Service ADVISOR™ Diagnostic Connector .....20-13 Display Icon Identification...................................45-3
Sugarcane—Main Screen ..................................45-4
Lower Region Information ..................................45-5
Overhead Control Panel Configure Lower Region Information..................45-6
Overhead Control Panel .....................................25-1 Configure Detail Machine Information ................45-7
After Market Radios............................................25-1 Floating Crop Dividers and Contour
Program Radio for Local Area Frequency ..........25-1 Base Cutter Height Control (If Equipped).......45-8
Radio Controls....................................................25-1 Alarm and Operator Controls Setup ................. 45-11
Antenna ..............................................................25-2 Primary Extractor Screen .................................45-13
Communications/CB Radio Mounting.................25-2 Engine Setup Screen........................................45-14
Maximum Harvester Speed and
CommandTouch™ Armrest Console Steering Aggressiveness (Track
Armrest Console Controls ..................................30-1 Machines Only) ............................................45-16
Harvesting Functions Switch ..............................30-2 Track Steer Bias (Track Machines Only) ..........45-17
Auxiliary Functions Switch..................................30-2 Varitorque (Wheel Machines Only)...................45-18
Engine Speed Switches......................................30-3 Elevator Screen ................................................45-19
Travel Speed Switches (Wheel Machines) .........30-3 Harvester Activity Monitor.................................45-20
Travel Speed Switches (Track Machines) ..........30-4 Shift Configuration ............................................45-21
Park Brake Switch ..............................................30-4 Adjust Row Width .............................................45-22
Positive Traction Switch (If Equipped)................30-5 Download Harvester Activity Monitor Data .......45-23
Road Transport Disconnect Switch ....................30-5 Diagnostics .......................................................45-25
Propulsion Encoder ............................................30-5 Diagnostics—Readings ....................................45-25
Multi-Function Lever Controls.............................30-6 Diagnostics—Calibrations ................................45-26
Multi-Function Lever and Palm Adjustment........30-7 Brightness Level and Boundary Box Color.......45-26
Harvesting Functions Quick Stop Switch............30-7 Regional Settings, Languages,
CommandARM™ Controls .................................30-8 Time/Date Settings, Units of Measurement ..45-28
Operator Interface Controls ................................30-9 Diagnostic Readings, About, Display Tests ......45-30
Topper Switches .................................................30-9 Message Center Application.............................45-32
Crop Divider Tilt Switches (If Equipped) ...........30-10 Layout Manager Application .............................45-34
Side Knife Switches (If Equipped) ....................30-10 Access Manager Application ............................45-34
Primary Extractor Switches ..............................30-10
Secondary Extractor Switches (If Equipped) .... 30-11 Operating the Engine
Knockdown Rollers Tilt Switches (If Avoid Hot Exhaust ..............................................50-1
Equipped)..................................................... 30-11 Access the Engine Compartment .......................50-1
Elevator Switches .............................................30-12 Battery Disconnect Switch..................................50-1
ClimaTrak™ Automatic Temperature Control ...30-13 Engine Idling.......................................................50-2
Light Switches ..................................................30-14 Start the Engine..................................................50-2
Radio Function Switches (If Equipped) ............30-14 Use a Booster Battery / Battery Charger ............50-3
Cold Weather Warm-Up .....................................50-3
ii 041717
PN=2
Contents
Page Page
Stop the Engine ..................................................50-4

Floating Crop Divider and Contour Base Cutter
Driving the Harvester Height Control (If Equipped)
Driving or Transporting the Harvester Floating Crop Divider and Contour
on Public Roads .............................................55-1 Base Cutter Height Control ............................65-1
Travel Speeds ....................................................55-1 Calibrate System ................................................65-2
Move the Harvester ............................................55-1 Set Crop Divider Pressures and Base
Park Brake Switch ..............................................55-2 Cutter Target Height .......................................65-5
Park the Harvester..............................................55-3 Set End of Row Heights .....................................65-7
Backup Alarm .....................................................55-3 Advanced Setup .................................................65-7
Operate Floating Crop Dividers System .............65-8
Operate Contour Base Cutter Height
Operating the Harvester
Control System.............................................65-10
Sugar Cane Flow................................................60-1
Set Base Cutter Pressure Target Range .......... 65-11
Topper System....................................................60-1
Monitor Crop Divider Position...........................65-12
Operate Topper System......................................60-2
Crop Divider........................................................60-3
Crop Divider Floating Side Walls (If Equipped) ..60-3 Harvesting Hints
Adjust Outer Crop Divider Side Skirts Harvesting Tips...................................................70-1
(If Equipped)...................................................60-4
Adjust Inner Crop Divider Side Skirts Harvesting Sugar Cane
(If Equipped)...................................................60-5 Harvesting Safety Tips .......................................75-1
Adjust Crop Divider Height .................................60-6 Harvesting Conditions ........................................75-1
Adjust Crop Divider Hydraulic Tilt (If Equipped) ..60-6 Planting for Mechanical Harvesting ....................75-1
Adjust Crop Divider Manual Tilt (If Equipped) ....60-7 Harvesting a Field...............................................75-2
Operate Crop Dividers........................................60-7 Standard Harvesting...........................................75-3
Knockdown Rollers.............................................60-8 Harvesting Over a Ditch .....................................75-4
Adjust Hydraulically Adjustable Harvesting on a Headland ..................................75-5
Knockdown Rollers Tilt (If Equipped) .............60-8 Pulling a Wagon On the First Row .....................75-6
Adjust Manually Adjustable Knockdown Harvesting a Large Field ....................................75-7
Rollers Tilt (If Equipped).................................60-9
Base Cutter.......................................................60-10 Transporting the Harvester
Base Cutter Angles (CH570) ............................ 60-11 Loading Procedure .............................................80-1
Adjust Base Cutter Angle (CH570)................... 60-11 Towing Procedure...............................................80-4
Base Cutter Angles (CH670) ............................60-12
Adjust Base Cutter Angle (CH670)...................60-12
Adjust Front Plate on Base Cutter Fuel, Lubricants, and Coolant
Disks (CH670)..............................................60-13 Engines with Tier 3-Stage IIIA/MAR-I
Adjust Rear Plate on Base Cutter Disks Emission Control ............................................85-1
(CH670)........................................................60-13 Handle Fuel Safely—Avoid Fires........................85-1
Operate Base Cutter.........................................60-14 Avoid Static Electricity Risk When Refueling......85-2
Feed Rollers .....................................................60-14 Diesel Fuel..........................................................85-3
Operate Feed Rollers .......................................60-15 Handling and Storing Diesel Fuel .......................85-4
Butt-Lifter Feed Roller ......................................60-15 Lubricity of Diesel Fuel .......................................85-4
Billet Length Manual Adjustment (If Testing Diesel Fuel .............................................85-4
Equipped).....................................................60-15 BioDiesel Fuel ....................................................85-5
Chopper System...............................................60-16 Minimizing the Effect of Cold Weather
Operate Chopper System.................................60-17 on Diesel Engines ..........................................85-7
Elevator Basket ................................................60-17 Supplemental Diesel Fuel Additives ...................85-8
Primary Extractor..............................................60-18 Diesel Engine Coolant (engine with wet
Operate Primary Extractor................................60-18 sleeve cylinder liners) (Tier 2/Stage
Elevator System ...............................................60-19 II and Tier 3/Stage III).....................................85-9
Operate Elevator System .................................60-20 Operating in Warm Temperature Climates .......85-10
Secondary Extractor (If Equipped) ...................60-20 Testing Coolant Freeze Point ...........................85-10
Operate Secondary Extractor (If Equipped) .....60-21 Water Quality for Mixing with Coolant
Elevator Discharge Flap ...................................60-21 Concentrate.................................................. 85-11
John Deere COOL-GARD™ II Coolant
Extender....................................................... 85-11
iii 041717
PN=3
Contents
Page Page
Diesel Engine Break-In Oil — Change Hydraulic Filters ..................................100-4

Non-Emissions Certified and Replace Prefilter Element (Tier 2/Stage
Certified Tier 1, Tier 2, Tier 3, Stage II and Tier 3/Stage III)...................................100-5
I, Stage II, and Stage III ...............................85-12 Change Pump Drive Gear Case Oil .................100-6
Diesel Engine Oil — Tier 2 and Stage II...........85-13 Change Chopper Gear Case Oil ......................100-7
Diesel Engine Oil — Tier 3 and Stage III..........85-14 Change Base Cutter Gear Case Oil .................100-8
Diesel Engine Oil Service Interval for Change Final Drive Oil .....................................100-9
Operation at High Altitude ............................85-14 Lubricate Base Cutter.......................................100-9
Engine Oil and Filter Service Intervals Rear Axle Service...........................................100-10
— Tier 2 and Stage II Engines .....................85-15
Engine Oil and Filter Service Intervals Maintenance—Every 25 Hours or Daily
— Tier 3 and Stage IIIA — Clean Machine Using Compressed Air.............105-1
PowerTech™ Plus Engines..........................85-16 Check Engine Oil Level ....................................105-1
Oilscan™ and CoolScan™...............................85-17 Check Hydraulic Oil Level ................................105-2
Oil Filters ..........................................................85-17 Check Engine Coolant Level ............................105-2
Fuel Filters........................................................85-17 Check Fuel Level..............................................105-2
Alternative and Synthetic Lubricants ................85-18 Inspect Blades ..................................................105-3
Lubricant Storage .............................................85-18 Check Lights.....................................................105-3
Mixing of Lubricants..........................................85-18 Check Hydraulic System ..................................105-4
Hydraulic Fluid..................................................85-19 Check Air Intake System ..................................105-4
Pump Drive, Base Cutter, and Chopper Check Engine Air Pre-filter ...............................105-5
Gear Case Oil ..............................................85-19 Clean Engine Air Pre-filter Outer Screen..........105-5
Final Drive Gear Oil ..........................................85-20 Lubricate Suspension Cylinders .......................105-5
Grease..............................................................85-20 Lubricate Upper Knockdown Roller ..................105-7
Lubricate Lower Knockdown Roller ..................105-7
Lubrication, Maintenance, and Intervals Lubricate Topper Assembly ..............................105-8
Required Emission-Related Information.............90-1 Lubricate Manual Tilt Crop Dividers .................105-8
Important Considerations ...................................90-1 Lubricate Hydraulic Tilt Crop Dividers
Service Your Harvester at Specified Intervals ....90-1 (If Equipped).................................................105-9
Check Hour Meter Regularly ..............................90-1 Lubricate Steering Cylinders (Wheel
Parts Catalog......................................................90-1 Machines).....................................................105-9
Service Records .................................................90-1 Lubricate Primary Extractor ............................105-10
Harvester Component Locations ........................90-2 Lubricate Secondary Extractor (If Equipped) ..105-10
Service Interval Chart—First 100 Hours.............90-2 Lubricate Elevator Swing Table ...................... 105-11
Service Interval Chart—Every 25 Lubricate Feed Roller Pivots .......................... 105-11
Hours or Daily ................................................90-3 Lubricate Side Knives (If Equipped) ...............105-12
Service Interval Chart—Every 50 Hours.............90-3 Check Pump Drive Gear Case Oil Level ........105-12
Service Interval Chart—Every 100 Hours...........90-4 Check Base Cutter Gear Case Oil Level ........105-13
Service Interval Chart—Every 250 Hours...........90-4 Check Chopper Gear Case Oil Level .............105-13
Service Interval Chart—Every 500 Hours...........90-4 Clean Harvester of Mud and Debris ...............105-13
Service Interval Chart—Every 1000 Hours.........90-5 Check Track for Broken Parts (If Equipped)...105-14
Service Interval Chart—Every 1500 Hours.........90-5 Check Fire Extinguisher .................................105-14
Service Interval Chart—Every 2000 Hours.........90-5
Service Interval Chart—Every 3000 Hours.........90-5 Maintenance—Every 50 Hours
Service Interval Chart—Every 4500 Hours.........90-5 Inspect Elevator Support Cable........................ 110-1
Check Wear on Crop Divider Stops.................. 110-1
Fluids Analysis Check Wear on Feed Roller Cradle Stops ....... 110-1
Fluids Sample Collecting Schedule (If Check Wear on Elevator Bumper Stops........... 110-1
Applicable) .....................................................95-1 Drain Water From Fuel Filters .......................... 110-2
Important Considerations ...................................95-1 Check Final Drive Oil Level .............................. 110-2
Engine Oil Sample Collection ............................95-2 Check and Adjust Chopper Timing................... 110-3
Final Drives Oil Sample Collection ....................95-3 Tighten Chopper Flywheel Clutch Nut.............. 110-6
Hydraulic Fluid Sample Collection......................95-5 Check and Adjust Elevator Chain Tension ....... 110-7
Coolant Sample Collection .................................95-6 Check Suspension Cylinder Safety Stops ........ 110-8
Check Topper Boom Safety Stop ..................... 110-8
Maintenance—First 100 Hours Check Cab Tilt Safety Stop .............................. 110-8
Change Engine Oil and Replace Filter .............100-1
iv 041717
PN=4
Contents
Page Page
Maintenance—Every 100 Hours Maintenance—Every 1500 Hours

Change Final Drive Oil ..................................... 115-1 Replace Engine Safety Filter ............................135-1
Inspect Base Cutter Gear Case Change Hydraulic Filters ..................................135-2
Mounting Hardware...................................... 115-2 Check Chopper Drum Hardware ......................135-3
Inspect Elevator Slat Mounting
Hardware and Alignment.............................. 115-2 Maintenance—Every 2000 Hours
Inspect Primary Extractor Fan Assembly ......... 115-3 Check Engine Intake and Exhaust
Check Wheel Cap Screws Torque.................... 115-4 Valves Clearance .........................................140-1
Maintenance—Every 250 Hours Maintenance—Every 3000 Hours

Change Final Drive Oil .....................................120-1 Flush Coolant System (Tier 2/Stage II
Rear Axle Service.............................................120-2 and Tier 3/Stage III)......................................145-1
Lubricate Crop Divider Scrolls and Replace Thermostats and Gaskets
Outer Scrolls ................................................120-4 (Tier 2/Stage II And Tier 3/Stage III) ............145-3
Lubricate Elevator Chain Sprocket ...................120-5 Replace Torsional Dampener Blocks................145-3
Lubricate Base Cutter.......................................120-5
Lubricate Chopper Bearings.............................120-6
Lubricate Chopper Curtain Agitator (If Maintenance—Every 4500 Hours
Equipped).....................................................120-6 Grease Front Wheel Hub Bearings ..................150-1
Lubricate Sill Roller Bearing (If Equipped)........120-7 Change Engine Vibration Dampener,
Lubricate Feed Roller Bearings ........................120-7 Engine Isolators, Cooling Package
Change Engine Oil and Replace Filter .............120-8 Isolators and Chopper Vibration Isolators ....150-1
Check Belt Wear (Tier 2/Stage II and
Tier 3/Stage III)...........................................120-10 Maintenance—As Required
Check Tensioner Spring Tension (Tier Cab Tilt Procedure............................................155-1
2/Stage II and Tier 3/Stage III) ...................120-10 Clean Cab Glass ..............................................155-3
Check Tires for Damage and Proper Wash Machine..................................................155-3
Inflation.......................................................120-10 Windshield Washer Reservoir ..........................155-4
Check Fuel Tank Breather .............................. 120-11 Do Not Modify Fuel System..............................155-4
Fill Fuel Tank ....................................................155-5
Fuel Shutoff Valve ............................................155-5
Maintenance—Every 500 Hours
Drain Fuel Tank ................................................155-6
Change Engine Oil and Replace Filter .............125-1
Service Fuel Tank .............................................155-7
Replace Engine Primary Filter..........................125-3
Bleed Fuel System ...........................................155-7
Check Engine Vibration Isolators .....................125-4
Engine Air Filters Maintenance.........................155-8
Check Engine Crankshaft Dampener ...............125-4
Remove and Install Air Conditioning
Check Cooling Package Vibration Isolators .....125-5
Fresh Air Filter............................................155-10
Check Chopper Vibration Isolators...................125-6
Visually Inspect Coolant Pump Weep Hole ......125-6
Recirculation Filter ..................................... 155-11
Check Elevator Wear Strips .............................125-7
Clean Radiators.............................................. 155-11
Remove and Install Elevator Chain Slats .........125-8
Checking Cooling System ..............................155-13
Check Open Crankcase Vent (OCV)
Draining Cooling System ................................155-13
(Tier 2/Stage II and Tier 3/Stage III).............125-9
Fill Cooling System.........................................155-13
Bleed Air From Coolant System .....................155-14
Maintenance—Every 1000 Hours Flush Coolant System ....................................155-15
Change Pump Drive Gear Case Oil .................130-1 Add Hydraulic Oil............................................155-17
Change Chopper Gear Case Oil ......................130-2 Change Hydraulic Oil......................................155-18
Change Base Cutter Gear Case Oil .................130-3 Remove and Install Base Cutter Blades.........155-18
Check Torsional Dampener Blocks...................130-4 Base Cutter Blade Service .............................155-19
Check Seat Belts ..............................................130-5 Remove and Install Chopper Blades ..............155-19
Check Accumulators Pre-Charge Pressure......130-5 Adjust Billet Deflector Shield ..........................155-20
Replace Fuel Filters (Tier 2/Stage II Adjust Chopper Deflector Plate (CH670)........155-20
and Tier 3/Stage III)......................................130-5 Remove and Install Topper Blades.................155-21
Replace Prefilter Element (Tier 2/Stage Remove and Install Vine Cutter Knives
II and Tier 3/Stage III)...................................130-8 (If Equipped)...............................................155-22
v 041717
PN=5
Contents
Page Page
Remove and Install Side Knife Blades Carrier Roller Lubrication..................................170-1

(If Equipped)...............................................155-22 Remove and Install Track Shoes......................170-2
Adjust Shredder Topper Shear Plates Track Alignment................................................170-2
(If Equipped)...............................................155-23 Track Tension Adjustment ................................170-3
Remove and Install Primary Extractor
Fan Blades .................................................155-24 Jack Locations
Start Up Procedure After Extractor Jack Locations..................................................175-1
Blade Replacement....................................155-25
Adjust Primary Extractor Chain Tension .........155-26
Track Shoe Inspection Torque........................155-26 Fire Prevention
Recommended Fire Prevention........................180-1
Fire Prevention .................................................180-1
Service—Electrical System Fire Extinguisher Operation..............................180-2
Welding Near Electronic Control Units .............160-1 Charge Water Fire Extinguisher .......................180-3
Keep Electronic Control Unit Handle Fuel Safely—Avoid Fires......................180-4
Connectors Clean ........................................160-1 Prepare for Emergencies..................................180-4
Battery Disconnect Switch................................160-1 Remove Accumulated Crop Debris ..................180-5
Fuse Center......................................................160-2 Fire Extinguishers.............................................180-5
Check and Clean Ground Connections ............160-4 Fire Extinguisher Locations ..............................180-5
Check Lights, Connectors, and Harnesses ......160-4 In Case of Fire ..................................................180-6
Handle Batteries Carefully................................160-5 Clean Engine Compartment .............................180-6
Service Batteries ..............................................160-6
Safety Rules When Replacing Halogen Bulbs ..160-8
Replace Cab Headlight Bulb ............................160-9 Machine Cleanout
Adjust Cab Headlights ......................................160-9 Clean Out Machine (Periodic) ..........................185-1
Replace Cab Halogen Light Bulb ...................160-10 Clean Out Machine (Annual) ............................185-8
Adjust Cab Halogen Lights .............................160-10
Replace Topper Boom Light ...........................160-10 Storage
Adjust Topper Boom Light .............................. 160-11 Prepare Machine for Storage ...........................190-1
Safety Rules When Replacing High Remove Machine From Storage.......................190-1
Intensity Discharge (HID) Xenon Lights ..... 160-11
Replace High Intensity Discharge Troubleshooting
(Xenon) Light Bulb (If Equipped)................160-12 Engine ..............................................................195-1
Adjust High Intensity Discharge Electrical System ..............................................195-5
(Xenon) Lights (If Equipped) ......................160-13 Lubrication System ...........................................195-7
Replace Beacon Light Bulb ............................160-13 Cooling System ................................................195-8
Replace Front Turn Signal Bulb .....................160-14 Air Intake ..........................................................195-9
Replace Tail Lights .........................................160-14
Replace Field Lights .......................................160-15 Diagnostic Trouble Codes
Replace Cab Interior Light..............................160-16 Accessing Diagnostic Trouble Code Menu.......200-1
Replace Map Light..........................................160-16 Diagnostic Trouble Code Priorities ...................200-2
Wheels and Tires Calibration Procedures

Service Tires Safely..........................................165-1 Calibration Procedures .....................................205-1
Tire Information ................................................165-1 Calibration Procedures—When to Calibrate.....205-1
Grease Front Wheel Hub Bearings ..................165-2 Calibration Error Codes ....................................205-2
Recommended Tools for Changing Tire ...........165-2
Change a Tire...................................................165-3
Tire Performance..............................................165-4 Specifications
Checking Tire Pressure ....................................165-4 Fluid Capacities ................................................210-1
Tire Failure .......................................................165-5 Component Specifications................................210-2
Proper Air Inflation............................................165-5 Engine Specifications .......................................210-3
Tire Over-Inflation.............................................165-5 Dimensions.......................................................210-4
Under-Inflation ..................................................165-6 Weight ..............................................................210-4
Sidehill Harvesting............................................165-6 Torque Specifications .......................................210-5
Unified Inch Bolt and Screw Torque Values......210-6
Metric Bolt and Screw Torque Values...............210-7
Tracks
Track Components ...........................................170-1
vi 041717
PN=6
Contents
Page
Machine Identification Numbers

Interpret Product Identification Number............215-1
Identification Numbers......................................215-2
Product Identification Plate...............................215-2
Product Identification Number ..........................215-2
Engine Serial Number ......................................215-3
Pump Drive Gear Case Serial Number ............215-3
Chopper Gear Case Serial Number .................215-4
Keep Proof of Ownership .................................215-4
Keep Machines Secure ....................................215-4
vii 041717
PN=7
Contents
viii 041717
PN=8
Safety Features
Machine Safety Features
T8T1918 —UN—18MAY15
A—Cab Safety Features: D—Mechanical Safety Stops J— Reflectors and Reflective P—Brush Rails and Service
Operator Presence System, (Topper and Lift Cylinders) Tape Access
Seat Belts, Horn, Emergency E—Shields and Guards K—Safety Decals Q—Windshield Cleaning Steps
Exit Hammer, Park Brake, F— Backup Alarm L— Warning Lights and Turn R—Battery Disconnect Switch
Turn Signals, Door Lock, G—Fire Extinguishers Signals S—Engine Door Safety Switch
Mirrors H—Rear View Mirrors M—Slip-Resistant Platforms
B—Handrails I— Slow Moving Vehicle Sign N—Slip-Resistant Ladders and
C—Driving Lights, Handholds Handrails
O—Emergency Exit Door
In addition to the safety features shown here, other manual contribute to the safe operation of this machine
components and systems, safety lights on the machine, when combined with the care and concern of a capable
and safety messages and instructions in the operator’s operator.
WM05597,0000ED4 -19-18MAY15-1/1
05-1 041717
PN=11
Safety
Recognize Safety Information
T8130000497 —UN—14FEB13
T8130000498 —UN—14FEB13
Figure A Figure B
Figure A: This symbol is used for a specific hazard as The additional blocks of the safety sign will be pictorials of
shown in the pictorial in the center of the triangle. the avoidance action to be taken to avoid the hazard.
Figure B: This symbol is used for a general alert.
WM05597,000089D -19-01MAR13-1/1
Follow Safety Instructions

Carefully read all safety messages in this manual and on
your machine safety signs. Keep safety signs in good
condition. Replace missing or damaged safety signs. Be
sure new equipment components and repair parts include
the current safety signs. Replacement safety signs are
TS201 —UN—15APR13
available from your John Deere dealer.
There can be additional safety information contained on
parts and components sourced from suppliers that is not
reproduced in this operator's manual.
Learn how to operate the machine and how to use controls
properly. Do not let anyone operate without instruction.
Keep your machine in proper working condition.
If you do not understand any part of this manual and need
Unauthorized modifications to the machine may impair the
assistance, contact your John Deere dealer.
function and/or safety and affect machine life.
DX,READ -19-16JUN09-1/1
Use Seat Belts

Use the seat belt whenever you operate the harvester, or
ride as an observer.
H47137 —UN—25OCT95
KR43067,0000BB9 -19-25SEP12-1/1
10-1 041717
PN=12
Safety
Instructional Seat
The instructional seat, if so equipped, has been provided
only for training operators or diagnosing machine
problems.
TS1730 —UN—24MAY13
DX,SEAT,NA -19-22AUG13-1/1
Support Machine Properly

Always lower the attachment or implement to the ground
before you work on the machine. If the work requires
that the machine or attachment be lifted, provide secure
support for them. If left in a raised position, hydraulically
supported devices can settle or leak down.
TS229 —UN—23AUG88
Do not support the machine on cinder blocks, hollow tiles,
or props that may crumble under continuous load. Do not
work under a machine that is supported solely by a jack.
Follow recommended procedures in this manual.
When implements or attachments are used with a
machine, always follow safety precautions listed in the
implement or attachment operator's manual.
DX,LOWER -19-24FEB00-1/1
10-2 041717
PN=13
Safety
Practice Safe Maintenance

Understand service procedure before doing work. Keep
area clean and dry.
Never lubricate, service, or adjust machine while it is
moving. Keep hands, feet, and clothing away from
power-driven parts. Disengage all power and operate
controls to relieve pressure. Lower equipment to the
ground. Stop the engine. Remove the key. Allow machine
to cool.
Securely support any machine elements that must be
raised for service work.
Keep all parts in good condition and properly installed.
Fix damage immediately. Replace worn or broken parts.
Remove any buildup of grease, oil, or debris.
On self-propelled equipment, disconnect battery ground
cable (-) before making adjustments on electrical systems
or welding on machine.
On towed implements, disconnect wiring harnesses from
tractor before servicing electrical system components or
welding on machine.
Falling while cleaning or working at height can cause
serious injury. Use a ladder or platform to easily reach
each location. Use sturdy and secure footholds and
handholds.
DX,SERV -19-28FEB17-1/1
Emergency Exit
In an emergency, the right-hand door may be used as
an exit.
Seat belt may be cut and windshield , right-hand, or
left-hand door window glass broken with hammer to exit
T8T1771 —UN—06JAN15
cab in an emergency.
CAUTION: Do not use hammer on rear

window. It will not shatter.
WM05597,0000E2C -19-22MAY15-1/1
10-3 041717
PN=14
Safety
Tilt the Cab

The entire cab tilts forward, providing access to engine
compartment for maintenance and repair by a qualified
technician. The cab pivots at front, raised by a single
hydraulic cylinder. Make sure that there are no people
near the machine. Be sure that windows and doors are
closed, articles are removed from cab and refrigerator
(if equipped) and topper boom is completely lowered to
T8140000100 —UN—04MAY15
prevent damage. Shut OFF engine and remove key.
Verify that cab safety stop is engaged before entering area
below cab. (See Cab Tilt Procedure in Maintenance—As
Required section).
WM05597,0000E2D -19-18MAY15-1/1
Keep Passengers and Children Off Machine

When moving the harvester, only allow the operator and
one trainee or one service technician in the harvester.
Never allow passengers other than the operator and
trainee to be in the harvester and no passengers are
allowed on the platform areas of the machine.
Passengers are subject to injury such as being thrown
off the machine. Passengers also obstruct the operator's
view resulting in the machine being operated in an unsafe
manner.
Children should never be allowed on the machine or in the
harvester cab when the engine is running.
The instructional seat should only be used for instruction
or short periods of machine observation, and not for the
accommodation of children.
WM05597,00012F9 -19-19MAY15-1/1
10-4 041717
PN=15
Safety
Protecting Bystanders
Be sure everyone is clear of the harvester before starting
the engine or moving the steering wheel.
CM989999005 —UN—06JAN00
AG,T803324,47 -19-14JUL99-1/1
Avoid Backover Accidents

Before moving machine, be sure that all persons are clear
of machine path. Turn around and look directly for best
visibility. Use a signal person when backing if view is
PC10857XW —UN—15APR13
obstructed or when in close quarters.
Do not rely on a camera to determine if personnel or
obstacles are behind the machine. The system can be
limited by many factors including maintenance practices,
environmental conditions, and operating range.
DX,AVOID,BACKOVER,ACCIDENTS -19-30AUG10-1/1
Use Steps and Handholds Correctly

Prevent falls by facing the machine when getting on and
T133468 —UN—15APR13
off. Maintain 3-point contact with steps, handholds, and
handrails.
Use extra care when mud, snow, or moisture present
slippery conditions. Keep steps clean and free of grease
or oil. Never jump when exiting machine. Never mount or
dismount a moving machine.
DX,WW,MOUNT -19-12OCT11-1/1
10-5 041717
PN=16
Safety
Handle Electronic Components and Brackets

Safely
Falling while installing or removing electronic components
mounted on equipment can cause serious injury. Use a
ladder or platform to easily reach each mounting location.
Use sturdy and secure footholds and handholds. Do not
install or remove components in wet or icy conditions.
If installing or servicing a RTK base station on a tower or
other tall structure, use a certified climber.
If installing or servicing a global positioning receiver mast
used on an implement, use proper lifting techniques and
wear proper protective equipment. The mast is heavy and
can be awkward to handle. Two people are required when
mounting locations are not accessible from the ground
or from a service platform.
DX,WW,RECEIVER -19-24AUG10-1/1
Prevent Machine Runaway

Avoid possible injury or death from machinery runaway.
Do not start engine by shorting across starter terminals.
Machine will start in gear if normal circuitry is bypassed.
NEVER start engine while standing on ground. Start
TS177 —UN—11JAN89
engine only from operator’s seat, with transmission in
neutral or park.
DX,BYPAS1 -19-29SEP98-1/1
10-6 041717
PN=17
Safety
Service Safety
When a service person or mechanic is not familiar with or removed. Always make sure that all raised
all systems on this harvester, extra caution should be components and implements are correctly blocked.
used when performing service work. A good working Be alert for possible pressure when disconnecting any
knowledge of the system and its components is important device from a system that utilizes pressure.
for removal or disassembly. The following is a list of basic
precautions that should always be observed: CAUTION: Liquid escaping from a small hole can
1. Read and understand all warning plates and decals be almost invisible. Use wood or cardboard,
before lubricating or performing other maintenance. instead of your hand, when searching for
suspected leaks. Escaping fluid under pressure
2. Always wear protective glasses and footwear when can have sufficient force to penetrate the skin.
working. In particular, wear safety glasses when
pounding on any part of the machine or attachments 6. Before disconnecting any lines verify that all pressure
with a hammer. Use protective clothing when welding. in the system is relieved. Before applying pressure,
DO NOT wear any loosely fitting or torn clothing. make sure that all lines, fittings, and connections are
Remove all jewelry before working on the equipment. tight and undamaged.
IMPORTANT: Before mounting machine, verify 7. If you are injured by escaping fluid under pressure,
that there are no people working under see a doctor immediately. A serious infection or
or on machine. reaction may result if proper medical attention is not
received immediately.
All operators must blow the horn several
times before starting the machine. NOTE: Any fluid injected into the skin must be surgically
removed within a few hours or gangrene may
Verify that all people near machine know that result. Further information is available from Deere
when the horn blows, the machine is about to be & Company Medical Department in Moline, Illinois.
started, and to move away as soon as possible. 1-800-822-8262 or 1-309-748-5636.
3. Use the following procedure when preparing to service 8. Lower all implements to the ground before working on
machine: the machine. If this cannot be done, make sure that
a. Parking Procedure: the implement is properly blocked or on service stops
to prevent it from dropping unexpectedly.
1. Lower topper onto safety stop.
2. Lower base cutter lift cylinders onto safety stops. 9. To avoid injuries, use a hoist when lifting components
3. Lower crop dividers. that weigh over 23 kg (50 lb.). When using a hoist,
4. Lower elevator. verify that all hooks are correctly positioned.
5. Lower side knives (if equipped). 10. To avoid burns, be alert for hot parts on the machine
b. Shut OFF engine and remove key. after it has stopped. Be careful of hot fluids in lines,
tubes, and components.
c. Shut OFF battery disconnect switch and install lock
out device. 11. Use caution when removing cover plates. Gradually
loosen the last two cap screws or nuts at the opposite
d. Before beginning any hydraulic repairs, you must ends of the cover or device. Carefully pry the cover
first relieve pressure from the hydraulic system. loose to relieve any spring or other tension before
removing it completely.
CAUTION: In the event repairs must be made 12. Use caution when removing filler caps, breathers, or
to the base cutter lift and/or topper lift, plugs on the machine. Hold a rag over the cap or plug
hydraulic pressure must be relieved by lowering to prevent being sprayed or splashed by pressurized
base cutter and/or topper. and probably hot fluids.
4. When possible, make all repairs with machine parked 13. Always use proper tools in good condition. Before
on level ground. Block machine so it cannot move. performing any service, verify that you know how to
use the proper tools.
CAUTION: DO NOT work on any machine that is 14. Replace all fasteners with same SAE or metric size
only supported by lift jacks or a hoist. and grade. Never substitute a softer part where a
hardened part is used, and never substitute a harder
5. Relieve all pressure in air, oil, or water systems before part where a softer part is used.
any lines, fittings, or related parts are disconnected
Continued on next page AS09261,00000AA -19-11AUG16-1/2
10-7 041717
PN=18
Safety
during operation. Any high-speed rotating component

15. Verify that all protective devices and guards are
that has been damaged or altered must be balance
properly installed and are functioning correctly before
checked before operation.
starting any repairs. If a guard or shield must be
removed to perform repair work, use extra caution 18. Avoid working on equipment with the engine running.
while working. If engine must be running to perform checks, always
use two persons: one to operate the controls and
16. Take precautions to prevent damage to wiring during
removal. When reinstalling wiring, verify that it was the other to work where the operator can see him.
not damaged during removal or installation. Verify that The hydrostatic transmission should be in neutral, the
wiring does not touch hot, sharp, or moving parts after braking system set, and all pertinent safety locks set.
it is installed.
17. DO NOT operate the harvester if any rotating part is
damaged or comes into contact with any other part
AS09261,00000AA -19-11AUG16-2/2
Service Machines Safely

Tie long hair behind your head. Do not wear a necktie,
scarf, loose clothing, or necklace when you work near
machine tools or moving parts. If these items were to get
caught, severe injury could result.
Remove rings and other jewelry to prevent electrical
shorts and entanglement in moving parts.
DX,LOOSE -19-04JUN90-1/1
Work In Ventilated Area

Engine exhaust fumes can cause sickness or death. If
it is necessary to run an engine in an enclosed area,
remove the exhaust fumes from the area with an exhaust
pipe extension.
If you do not have an exhaust pipe extension, open the
doors and get outside air into the area.
DX,AIR -19-17FEB99-1/1
10-8 041717
PN=19
Safety
Install All Shields and Guards

Rotating fans, belts, pulleys, and drives can cause serious
injury.
Keep all shields and guards in place at all times during
operation.
TS677 —UN—21SEP89
Wear close-fitting clothes. Stop the engine and be sure
fans, belts, pulleys, and drives are stopped before making
adjustments, connections, or cleaning near fans and their
drive components.
KR43067,0000BBA -19-25SEP12-1/1
Wear Protective Clothing

Wear close fitting clothing and safety equipment
appropriate to the job.
Operating equipment safely requires the full attention of
the operator. Do not wear radio or music headphones
while operating machine.
DX,WEAR2 -19-03MAR93-1/1
Handle Fuel Safely—Avoid Fires

Handle fuel with care: it is highly flammable. Do not refuel
the machine while smoking or when near open flame or
sparks.
Always stop engine before refueling machine. Fill fuel
tank outdoors.
Prevent fires by keeping machine clean of accumulated
trash, grease, and debris. Always clean up spilled fuel.
Use only an approved fuel container for transporting
flammable liquids.
Never fill fuel container in pickup truck with plastic bed
liner. Always place fuel container on ground before
refueling. Touch fuel container with fuel dispenser nozzle Do not store fuel container where there is an open flame,
before removing can lid. Keep fuel dispenser nozzle in spark, or pilot light such as within a water heater or other
contact with fuel container inlet when filling. appliance.
DX,FIRE1 -19-12OCT11-1/1
10-9 041717
PN=20
Safety
In Case of Fire
CAUTION: Avoid personal injury.
Stop machine immediately at the first sign of fire. Fire

may be identified by the smell of smoke or sight of flames.
Because fire grows and spreads rapidly, get off the
machine immediately and move safely away from the fire.
Do not return to the machine! The number one priority
is safety.
Call the fire department. A portable fire extinguisher can
put out a small fire or contain it until the fire department
arrives; but portable extinguishers have limitations.
Always put the safety of the operator and bystanders first.
If attempting to extinguish a fire, keep your back to the 1. Pull the pin. Hold the extinguisher with the nozzle
wind with an unobstructed escape path so you can move pointing away from you, and release the locking
away quickly if the fire cannot be extinguished. mechanism.
Read the fire extinguisher instructions and become familiar 2. Aim low. Point the extinguisher at the base of the fire.
with their location, parts, and operation before a fire starts.
Local fire departments or fire equipment distributors may 3. Squeeze the lever slowly and evenly.
offer fire extinguisher training and recommendations.
4. Sweep the nozzle from side-to-side.
If your extinguisher does not have instructions, follow
these general guidelines:
DX,FIRE4 -19-22AUG13-1/1
Avoid Static Electricity Risk When Refueling

The removal of sulfur and other compounds in Ultra-Low
Sulfur Diesel (ULSD) fuel decreases its conductivity and
increases its ability to store a static charge.
Refineries may have treated the fuel with a static
RG22142 —UN—17MAR14
dissipating additive. However, there are many factors that
can reduce the effectiveness of the additive over time.
Static charges can build up in ULSD fuel while it is flowing
through fuel delivery systems. Static electricity discharge
when combustible vapors are present could result in a
fire or explosion.
Therefore, it is important to ensure that the entire system
used to refuel your machine (fuel supply tank, transfer
pump, transfer hose, nozzle, and others) is properly
grounded and bonded. Consult with your fuel or fuel
system supplier to ensure that the delivery system is in
compliance with fueling standards for proper grounding
and bonding practices. RG21992 —UN—21AUG13
DX,FUEL,STATIC,ELEC -19-12JUL13-1/1
10-10 041717
PN=21
Safety
Prepare for Emergencies

Be prepared if a fire starts.
Keep a first aid kit and fire extinguisher handy.
Keep emergency numbers for doctors, ambulance service,
hospital, and fire department near your telephone.
DX,FIRE2 -19-03MAR93-1/1
Avoid Hot Exhaust

Servicing machine or attachments with engine running
can result in serious personal injury. Avoid exposure and
skin contact with hot exhaust gases and components.
Exhaust parts and streams become very hot during
RG17488 —UN—21AUG09
operation. Exhaust gases and components reach
temperatures hot enough to burn people, ignite, or melt
common materials.
DX,EXHAUST -19-20AUG09-1/1
Protect Against High Pressure Spray

Spray from high pressure nozzles can penetrate the skin
and cause serious injury. Keep spray from contacting
hands or body.
If an accident occurs, see a doctor immediately. Any high
TS1343 —UN—18MAR92
pressure spray injected into the skin must be surgically
removed within a few hours or gangrene may result.
Doctors unfamiliar with this type of injury should reference
a knowledgeable medical source. Such information is
available from Deere & Company Medical Department in
Moline, Illinois, U.S.A.
DX,SPRAY -19-16APR92-1/1
10-11 041717
PN=22
Safety
Do Not Open High-Pressure Fuel System

High-pressure fluid remaining in fuel lines can cause
serious injury. Do not disconnect or attempt repair of fuel
lines, sensors, or any other components between the
high-pressure fuel pump and nozzles on engines with
High Pressure Common Rail (HPCR) fuel system.
TS1343 —UN—18MAR92
Only technicians familiar with this type of system can
perform repairs. (See your John Deere dealer.)
DX,WW,HPCR1 -19-07JAN03-1/1
Service Drive Belts Safely

When servicing drive belts always observe these
precautions:
• Avoid serious injury from hand or arm entanglement.
Never attempt to clean, check or adjust belts while the
machine is running. Always set park brake, shut OFF
the engine, and remove the key.
• Do not attempt to clean belts with flammable cleaning
solvents.
WM05597,0000D43 -19-02DEC13-1/1
Service Accumulator Systems Safely

Escaping fluid or gas from systems with pressurized
accumulators that are used in air conditioning, hydraulic,
and air brake systems can cause serious injury. Extreme
heat can cause the accumulator to burst, and pressurized
lines can be accidentally cut. Do not weld or use a torch
near a pressurized accumulator or pressurized line.
Relieve pressure from the pressurized system before
removing accumulator.
Relieve pressure from the hydraulic system before
removing accumulator. Never attempt to relieve hydraulic
system or accumulator pressure by loosening a fitting.
Accumulators cannot be repaired.
DX,WW,ACCLA2 -19-22AUG03-1/1
10-12 041717
PN=23
Safety
Handling Batteries Safely

Battery gas can explode. Keep sparks and flames away
from batteries. Use a flashlight to check battery electrolyte
level.
Never check battery charge by placing a metal object
across the posts. Use a voltmeter or hydrometer.
Always remove grounded (-) battery clamp first and
replace grounded clamp last.
Sulfuric acid in battery electrolyte is poisonous and strong
enough to burn skin, eat holes in clothing, and cause
blindness if splashed into eyes.
Avoid hazards by:
• Filling batteries in a well-ventilated area
• Wearing eye protection and rubber gloves
• Avoiding use of air pressure to clean batteries
• Avoiding breathing fumes when electrolyte is added
• Avoiding spilling or dripping electrolyte
• Using correct battery booster or charger procedure.
If acid is spilled on skin or in eyes:
1. Flush skin with water.
2. Apply baking soda or lime to help neutralize the acid.
3. Flush eyes with water for 15—30 minutes. Get
medical attention immediately.
If acid is swallowed:
1. Do not induce vomiting.
2. Drink large amounts of water or milk, but do not
exceed 2 L (2 qt.).
3. Get medical attention immediately.
WARNING: Battery posts, terminals, and related
accessories contain lead and lead compounds, chemicals
known to the State of California to cause cancer and
reproductive harm. Wash hands after handling.
DX,WW,BATTERIES -19-02DEC10-1/1
Avoid Heating Near Pressurized Fluid Lines

Flammable spray can be generated by heating near
pressurized fluid lines, resulting in severe burns to yourself
and bystanders. Do not heat by welding, soldering,
or using a torch near pressurized fluid lines or other
flammable materials. Pressurized lines can accidentally
TS953 —UN—15MAY90
burst when heat goes beyond the immediate flame area.
DX,TORCH -19-10DEC04-1/1
10-13 041717
PN=24
Safety
Service Cooling System Safely

Explosive release of fluids from pressurized cooling
system can cause serious burns.
Shut off engine. Only remove filler cap when cool enough
to touch with bare hands. Slowly loosen cap to first stop
to relieve pressure before removing completely.
DX,WW,COOLING -19-19AUG09-1/1
Use Safety Lights and Devices

Prevent collisions between other road users, slow moving
tractors with attachments or towed equipment, and
self-propelled machines on public roads. Frequently
check for traffic from the rear, especially in turns, and use
turn signal lights.
Use headlights, flashing warning lights, and turn signals
day and night. Follow local regulations for equipment
lighting and marking. Keep lighting and marking visible,
clean, and in good working order. Replace or repair
lighting and marking that has been damaged or lost. An
implement safety lighting kit is available from your John
Deere dealer.
DX,FLASH -19-07JUL99-1/1
10-14 041717
PN=25
Safety
Use Cylinder Safety Stops

When working under the harvester, cylinder safety stops
should be engaged. Raise the machine and topper, lower
the safety stops on cylinders and slowly lower the topper
and harvester until both sides of machine is completely
locked. If a hose burst, the safety stops limit the course of
the cylinders and the harvester will remain raised.
CM989999016 —UN—06JAN00
WM05597,00010E2 -19-25SEP14-1/1
Safe Transport of Harvester

Before driving harvester on public roads, raise the topper.
It should not, however, obstruct the operator's view.
Unless other conditions require, normal configuration
of the harvester for road transport would be with frame
raised to level, crop dividers raised, and topper and
elevator lowered to not exceed height of the cab.
T8140000372 —UN—04MAY15
WM05597,0000EBD -19-12MAR14-1/1
10-15 041717
PN=26
Safety
Remove Paint Before Welding or Heating

Avoid potentially toxic fumes and dust.
Hazardous fumes can be generated when paint is heated
by welding, soldering, or using a torch.
Remove paint before heating:
• Remove paint a minimum of 100 mm (4 in.) from area
to be affected by heating. If paint cannot be removed,
wear an approved respirator before heating or welding.
• If you sand or grind paint, avoid breathing the dust.
Wear an approved respirator.
• If you use solvent or paint stripper, remove stripper with
soap and water before welding. Remove solvent or
paint stripper containers and other flammable material
from area. Allow fumes to disperse at least 15 minutes Do all work in an area that is well ventilated to carry toxic
before welding or heating. fumes and dust away.
Do not use a chlorinated solvent in areas where welding Dispose of paint and solvent properly.
will take place.
DX,PAINT -19-24JUL02-1/1
Avoid High-Pressure Fluids

Inspect hydraulic hoses periodically – at least once
per year – for leakage, kinking, cuts, cracks, abrasion,
blisters, corrosion, exposed wire braid or any other signs
of wear or damage.
X9811 —UN—23AUG88
Replace worn or damaged hose assemblies immediately
with John Deere approved replacement parts.
Escaping fluid under pressure can penetrate the skin
causing serious injury.
Avoid the hazard by relieving pressure before
disconnecting hydraulic or other lines. Tighten all
connections before applying pressure.
with this type of injury should reference a knowledgeable
Search for leaks with a piece of cardboard. Protect hands medical source. Such information is available in
and body from high-pressure fluids. English from Deere & Company Medical Department in
Moline, Illinois, U.S.A., by calling 1-800-822-8262 or +1
If an accident occurs, see a doctor immediately. Any fluid 309-748-5636.
injected into the skin must be surgically removed within
a few hours or gangrene may result. Doctors unfamiliar
DX,FLUID -19-12OCT11-1/1
10-16 041717
PN=27
Safety
Use Caution on Hillsides

Avoid holes, ditches, and obstructions that may cause the
harvester to tip over, especially on hillsides.
NEVER drive near the edge of a gully or steep
embankment because it may cave in.
The danger of an overturn increases greatly with narrow
tread, 2032 mm (80 in.) or less, and with high speed.
Keep hydraulic oil level at upper level when operating on
hillsides. Low oil level might result in loss of steering. If
this should happen, hold harvester with brakes, shift to
NEUTRAL, apply parking brake, stop engine, and add
CM989999019 —UN—06JAN00
hydraulic oil to proper level.
Before operating on extremely steep slopes, fill hydraulic
system overfull in sight glass, from 4 to 8 L (1 to 2 gal.).
This is particularly important when using large hydraulic
cylinders, due to the volume of oil used to extend them.
WM05597,00007FE -19-19FEB13-1/1
Use Caution On Slopes When Turning

Ballast of machine is greatly affected by position of
elevator.
When operating on slopes, elevator MUST be centered
T8130000097 —UN—10JAN13
behind machine before turning.
The danger of an overturn increases greatly when elevator
is swung to left or right during a turn.
JR07957,000023F -19-10JAN13-1/1
Harvester Elevator Safety

Do not use elevator to support harvester on hillsides.
The elevator is not designed to support the weight of the
harvester.
CQ284681 —UN—16MAY11
WM05597,000071F -19-28JAN13-1/1
10-17 041717
PN=28
Safety
Avoid Electrical Power Lines

Put the topper and elevator in transport position before
driving on public roads.
Secure radio aerial in its transport position before driving
T8140000101 —UN—11MAR14
on public roads, it may come into contact with low-hanging
electrical cables. This would result in the operator
suffering a severe electrical shock.
Maintain minimum distance of 3 m (10 ft.) plus twice the
length of power line insulators.
WM05597,0000EA7 -19-11MAR14-1/1
Park Machine Safely

Before working on the machine:
• Lower all equipment to the ground.
• Stop the engine and remove the key.
• Disconnect the battery ground strap.
• Hang a "DO NOT OPERATE" tag in operator station.
DX,PARK -19-04JUN90-1/1
Follow Tire Recommendations

Keep your machine in proper working order.
Use only prescribed tire sizes with correct ratings and
inflate to the pressure specified in this manual.
H111235 —UN—13MAY14
Use of other than prescribed tires may decrease stability,
affect steering, result in premature tire failure, or cause
other durability or safety issues.
DX,TIRE,INFO -19-19MAY14-1/1
10-18 041717
PN=29
Safety
Service Tires Safely

Explosive separation of a tire and rim parts can cause
serious injury or death.
Do not attempt to mount a tire unless you have the proper
RXA0103438 —UN—11JUN09
equipment and experience to perform the job.
Always maintain the correct tire pressure. Do not inflate
the tires above the recommended pressure. Never weld
or heat a wheel and tire assembly. The heat can cause
an increase in air pressure resulting in a tire explosion.
Welding can structurally weaken or deform the wheel.
When inflating tires, use a clip-on chuck and extension
hose long enough to allow you to stand to one side and
NOT in front of or over the tire assembly. Use a safety Wheels and tires are heavy. When handling wheels and
cage if available. tires use a safe lifting device or get an assistant to help
Check wheels for low pressure, cuts, bubbles, damaged lift, install, or remove.
rims, or missing lug bolts and nuts.
DX,WW,RIMS -19-28FEB17-1/1
Keep Hands Away from Knives

Never attempt to clear obstructions in cutting areas unless
engine is shut off and key removed. Everyone must be
clear of the harvester before starting the engine.
Cutting/Shearing areas: topper, side knives, vine knives,
base cutter blades, cooling fans, extractors, and elevator
slats.
CM989999025 —UN—06JAN00
WM05597,0000800 -19-19FEB13-1/1
10-19 041717
PN=30
Safety
Avoid Contact With Moving Parts

Keep hands, feet, and clothing away from power driven
parts. Never clean, lubricate, or adjust machine when it
is running.
CM989999026 —UN—06JAN00
AG,T803324,60 -19-14JUL99-1/1
Stay Clear of Harvesting Units

Topper, scrolls, side knives, knockdown rollers, base
cutter, and elevator cannot be completely shielded due to
their function. Stay clear of these moving elements during
operation. Always shut OFF engine, set park brake, and
ES118704 —UN—21MAR95
remove key before servicing or unclogging machine.
Stay clear of harvester during its harvesting operation to
avoid flying debris.
MB22538,0000081 -19-06SEP13-1/1
10-20 041717
PN=31
Safety
Decommissioning — Proper Recycling and

Disposal of Fluids and Components
Safety and environmental stewardship measures must
be taken into account when decommissioning a machine
and/or component. These measures include the following:
TS1133 —UN—15APR13
• Use appropriate tools and personal protective
equipment such as clothing, gloves, face shields or
glasses, during the removal or handling of objects and
materials.
• Follow instructions for specialized components.
• Release stored energy by lowering suspended machine
elements, relaxing springs, disconnecting the battery
or other electrical power, and releasing pressure in
hydraulic components, accumulators, and other similar filters; batteries; and, other substances or parts.
systems. Burning of flammable fluids or components in other than
• Minimize exposure to components which may have specially designed incinerators may be prohibited by law
residue from agricultural chemicals, such as fertilizers and could result in exposure to harmful fumes or ashes.
and pesticides. Handle and dispose of these • Service and dispose of air conditioning systems
components appropriately. appropriately. Government regulations may require
• Carefully drain engines, fuel tanks, radiators, hydraulic a certified service center to recover and recycle air
cylinders, reservoirs, and lines before recycling conditioning refrigerants which could damage the
components. Use leak-proof containers when draining atmosphere if allowed to escape.
fluids. Do not use food or beverage containers. • Evaluate recycling options for tires, metal, plastic,
• Do not pour waste fluids onto the ground, down a drain, glass, rubber, and electronic components which may be
or into any water source. recyclable, in part or completely.
• Observe all national, state, and local laws, regulations, • Contact your local environmental or recycling center, or
or ordinances governing the handling or disposal of your John Deere dealer for information on the proper
waste fluids (example: oil, fuel, coolant, brake fluid); way to recycle or dispose of waste.
DX,DRAIN -19-01JUN15-1/1
Remove Accumulated Crop Debris

The buildup of leaves and crop debris in the engine
compartment, on the engine, and near moving parts is
a fire hazard. Check and clean these areas frequently.
Before performing any inspection or service, set park
brake, shut OFF engine, remove key, and turn OFF
battery disconnect switch.
AS09261,00000AB -19-11AUG16-1/1
10-21 041717
PN=32
Safety Signs
Replace Safety Signs
Replace missing or damaged safety signs. Use this
operator’s manual for correct safety sign placement.
There can be additional safety information contained on
parts and components sourced from suppliers that is not
reproduced in this operator's manual.
DX,SIGNS -19-18AUG09-1/1
Operator’s Manual
This operator’s manual contains all important information
necessary for safe machine operation. Carefully observe
all safety rules to avoid accidents.
T8T2562 —UN—21MAY15
WM05597,00012FD -19-20MAY15-1/1
Repair and Maintenance

Before carrying out repair and maintenance work, set
park brake, shut off engine, and remove key. Refer to
operator’s manual for all maintenance work.
T8T2561 —UN—21MAY15
WM05597,00012FE -19-20MAY15-1/1
15-1 041717
PN=33
Safety Signs
Seat Belt
The instructional seat is for training operators or
diagnosing machine problems. Keep all other riders and
children off. Use the seat belt whenever operating the
machine or riding as an observer.
T8T2560 —UN—21MAY15
WM05597,00012FF -19-20MAY15-1/1
Emergency Exit
Right-hand window is an emergency exit door.
If necessary, remove hammer and hit window to break
glass to exit cab. See your John Deere dealer for window
replacement.
T8T2563 —UN—21MAY15
The emergency hammer is equipped with a cutting device
to cut the seat belt if its latch does not release.
CAUTION: Do not use hammer on rear

window. It will not shatter.
WM05597,0001300 -19-22MAY15-1/1
Avoid Burns or Smoke Inhalation

At first sign of flames or smoke:
1. Stop machine.
2. Get away.
3. Do not return to machine.
T8T1306 —UN—14OCT14
WM05597,0000F85 -19-16OCT14-1/1
15-2 041717
PN=34
Safety Signs
Service Machine Safely

Before working on or under topper and topper boom,
install topper boom lift cylinder safety lock.
T8T2456 —UN—11MAY15
WM05597,00012EE -19-22MAY15-1/1
Operate and Service Machine Safely

NOTE: Decal located on both sides of machine.
1. Stay clear of machine when it is operating.

2. Refer to manual for starting and stopping engine.
T8T1307 —UN—14OCT14
Remove ignition key and turn battery disconnect
switch when servicing.
3. Machine should be lowered prior to turning off engine
and when machine is not in use.
4. No Rider except in instructional seat.
5. Do not access machine while it is running.
6. Possible flying object or debris.
WM05597,0000F74 -19-16OCT14-1/1
Avoid Low Hanging Power Lines

Electrical shock/electrocution.
Keep a minimum safe distance from power lines of 3 m
(10 ft.) plus 2 times the length of the power line insulators.
T8T1308 —UN—14OCT14
WM05597,0000F75 -19-16OCT14-1/1
15-3 041717
PN=35
Safety Signs
Starter
Do not start engine by shorting across starter or solenoid
terminals.
Machine components may move if normal circuitry is
bypassed.
T8T1309 —UN—14OCT14
Keep protective cover over starter terminal.
WM05597,0000F76 -19-16OCT14-1/1
Avoid Topper Disks

Cutting or shearing of fingers or hand.
Keep hands and fingers clear of rotating blades and discs
until have completely stopped.
T8130000073 —UN—23JAN13
WM05597,0000EAD -19-12MAR14-1/1
Avoid Topper Assembly

Crushing force from above.
Stay clear of area below topper and boom
T8130000072 —UN—23JAN13
WM05597,0000EAE -19-12MAR14-1/1
15-4 041717
PN=36
Safety Signs
Avoid Hot Surface

Possible burns to hand or body.
T8T1310 —UN—14OCT14
WM05597,0000F77 -19-22MAY15-1/1
Avoid Cooling Fan
T8T1312 —UN—14OCT14
T8T1311 —UN—14OCT14
Avoid Cooling Fan—Cooling Package Avoid Cooling Fan—Engine Crankshaft Dampener
NOTE: Decal located on both sides of machine. Keep hands out of contact with fans and stay clear until
rotation has stopped.
WM05597,00010F4 -19-16OCT14-1/1
Avoid Cooling System

High heat sources in area—Possible thermal combustion

or explosion.
T8T1313 —UN—14OCT14
Keep area clean and clear of debris and flammable
materials. Refer to operator’s manual instructions.
WM05597,0000F79 -19-16OCT14-1/1
15-5 041717
PN=37
Safety Signs
Hydraulic Oil and Gas Under Pressure
T8T1314 —UN—14OCT14
T8T1315 —UN—14OCT14
Decal Located On Both Sides Of Machine
Possible high-pressure fluid injection into body.
Get immediate medical treatment if fluid injection occurs.
Refer to the Technical Manual’s instructions on servicing
and replacing accumulators.
T8T1316 —UN—14OCT14
WM05597,00010F5 -19-16OCT14-1/1
Raise Cab
Possible Crushing
IMPORTANT: Topper boom must be lowered to
lift cylinder safety lock or fully lowered
before tilting the cab.
T8T1317 —UN—14OCT14
Refer to manual on raising or lowering cab/platform.
Ensure jacking lock properly in place before and during
entering area below cab/platform.
WM05597,0000F7B -19-22MAY15-1/1
15-6 041717
PN=38
Safety Signs
Avoid Base Cutter

Cutting or shearing of fingers or hands.

Keep fingers and hands clear of rotating blades until
T8T1318 —UN—14OCT14
rotation has completely stopped.
WM05597,0000F7C -19-20OCT14-1/1
Avoid Chopper Drum and Extractor Fan


Keep fingers and hands clear of rotating blades until
T8T1319 —UN—14OCT14
rotation has completely stopped.
WM05597,0000F7D -19-17OCT14-1/1
Avoid Extractor Area

Crush Area.
Stay clear of rotating extractor components and housing
T8T1320 —UN—14OCT14
while engine is running.
WM05597,0000F7E -19-16OCT14-1/1
15-7 041717
PN=39
Safety Signs
Avoid Elevator Area

Crush area.
Stay clear of the rotating/swinging elevator area.
T8T1321 —UN—21MAY15
WM05597,0000F7F -19-16OCT14-1/1
Avoid Elevator Area


Stay clear of the elevator and its slats while engine is
T8T1322 —UN—21MAY15
running.
WM05597,0000F80 -19-16OCT14-1/1
Avoid Crop Dividers

Possible entanglement.
Stay clear of crop dividers.
T8T1323 —UN—14OCT14
WM05597,0000F81 -19-16OCT14-1/1
15-8 041717
PN=40
Safety Signs
Avoid Crop Dividers

Possible crushing.
Do not enter or get under any portion of the front end of
T8T1324 —UN—14OCT14
harvester without first installing and locking in place front
end lift cylinder locks.
WM05597,0000F82 -19-16OCT14-1/1
Avoid Side Knives (If Equipped)

Rotating knives below.

Keep hands and fingers clear of rotating blades until they
T8T1325 —UN—14OCT14
have completely stopped.
WM05597,0000EBC -19-16OCT14-1/1
15-9 041717
PN=41
Operator's Station
General View of Controls and Instruments
T8T1631 —UN—13NOV14
A—Digital Cornerpost Display C—Multi-Function Lever F— CommandTouch™ Armrest
B—GreenStar™ 3 (GS3) 2630 D—Steering Column Console
Display E—Turn Signal and Light
Selection Lever
GreenStar is a trademark of Deere & Company

CommandTouch is a trademark of Deere & Company
WM05597,000116C -19-16DEC14-1/1
Manual Storage Location

Keep machine operator’s manual and settings card in
compartment (A) located along rear cab wall.
A—Compartment
T8T1567 —UN—13NOV14
WM05597,0000DD7 -19-26NOV14-1/1
20-1 041717
PN=42
Operator's Station
Emergency Exit
1. Pull down on top to remove hammer (A).
2. If seat belt does not unbuckle, cut with knife (B) in
handle.
T8T1772 —UN—26FEB15
3. If doors do not open, use hammer to break left-hand
or right-hand door window glass and exit cab. See
your John Deere dealer for window replacement.
A—Hammer B—Blade
WM05597,0000DD8 -19-20MAY15-1/1
Brake Pedals (Wheel Machines Only)

IMPORTANT: Park brake MUST be used in an
emergency, to stop machine movement.
Left Brake Pedal (A)—Press and hold to slow or stop

left-hand rear wheel to aid in turning.
T8T562 —UN—13JUN14
Right Brake Pedal (B)—Press and hold to slow or stop
right-hand rear wheel to aid in turning.
NOTE: To operate both brakes together, operator must
engage transport switch on armrest console.
A—Left-Hand Brake Pedal B—Right-Hand Brake Pedal Right-Hand Side Of Steering Column
WM05597,000117B -19-02DEC14-1/1
Floor Pedals (Track Machines Only)

NOTE: Pedals will be installed regardless of
option availability.
Left-Hand Foot Pedal (A)— Controls the AutoTrac™

Resume option.
T8T562 —UN—13JUN14
Right-Hand Foot Pedal (B)— Controls the track high/low
option.
A—Left-Hand Foot Pedal B—Right-Hand Foot Pedal
Right-Hand Side of Steering Column
AutoTrac is a trademark of Deere & Company

AS09261,0000095 -19-11OCT16-1/1
20-2 041717
PN=43
Operator's Station
Elevator Swing Pedals (If Equipped)

Left-Hand Elevator Swing Pedal (A)—Press and hold to
swing elevator to left-hand side of machine.
Right-Hand Elevator Swing Pedal (B)—Press and hold to
swing elevator to right-hand side of machine.
T8T1665 —UN—02DEC14
A—Left-Hand Elevator Swing B—Right-Hand Elevator Swing
Pedal Pedal
Left-Hand Side Of Steering Column
WM05597,000117A -19-02DEC14-1/1
Adjust Floor Pedals (If Equipped)

Floor pedals may be adjusted for operator comfort.
Loosen hardware (A) and adjust pedal assembly (B) to
desired position. Tighten hardware.
T8140000087 —UN—03MAR14
A—Hardware (2 used) B—Pedal Assembly
WM05597,0000EA0 -19-02DEC14-1/1
20-3 041717
PN=44
Operator's Station
Seat Safety Switch
T8T2445 —UN—07MAY15
The operator must be seated and harvesting functions 2. Push down and pull back on harvesting functions
and auxiliary functions switches cycled to start harvesting switch to middle position.
functions. 3. Push down and pull back on auxiliary functions switch.
4. Push down and push forward on harvesting functions
If the operator leaves the seat for more than five sec., switch.
harvesting functions stop. To restart harvesting functions, 5. Push down and push forward on auxiliary functions
the operator must: switch.
1. Return to a seated position in operator’s seat.
WM05597,00012E1 -19-07MAY15-1/1
20-4 041717
PN=45
Operator's Station
Adjust ComfortCommand™ Operator's Seat (Style A)
T8T771 —UN—01DEC14
NOTE: Seat is equipped with an operator presence If the seat does not float or ”pump” up, see
system. If harvesting functions are engaged your John Deere dealer.
and the operator leaves the seat, the
harvesting functions stop. D—Weight/Height Indicator provides a visual indicator
to operator on current weight and height. Use weight
A—Fore/Aft Adjustment Handle slides seat forward or and height adjustment handle to adjust seat until green
rearward for the best working position. marking is visible in indicator.
B—Vertical Shock Dampener Control limits amount of NOTE: Adjust seat to operator weight and height.
”upward motion” the seat suspension provides. This allows the operator to get the most ride
NOTE: Push control forward for a soft ride or move zone protection. Seat has a built-in buffer at
handle back for a firm ride. Medium firmness the high and low end of vertical seat travel,
is between these two positions . resulting in a much smoother ride.
C—Weight/Height Adjustment Handle raises or lowers E—Fore/Aft Isolation Adjustment Handle locks-out or
the seat. Pull up on handle to raise seat or push down on releases forward or rearward movements. Pull up on
handle to lower seat. Adjust seat until green marking is handle to lock or push down on handle to release.
visible in weight and height indicator. NOTE: Fore/Aft isolator allows shock impacts
NOTE: Suspension can be adjusted to reach limits to be absorbed.
in minimum and maximum heights, which in
effect locks out the suspension system making it F—Swivel Handle locks-out or releases swivel motion
rigid. Suspension height control also hits limits if of seat.
adjusted too close to the extremes.
Do not operate the compressor for more than
one minute when adjusting seat.
AS09261,0000150 -19-09NOV16-1/1
20-5 041717
PN=46
Operator's Station
Adjust ComfortCommand™ Operator's Seat

(Style B)
T8T4973 —UN—08NOV16
NOTE: Seat is equipped with an operator presence D— Weight/Height Indicator provides a visual indicator
system. If harvesting functions are engaged to operator on current weight and height. Use weight
and the operator leaves the seat, the and height adjustment handle to adjust seat until green
harvesting functions stop. marking is visible in indicator.
A— Fore/Aft Adjustment Handle slides the seat forward NOTE: Adjust seat to operator weight and height.
or rearward for the best working position. This allows the operator to get the most ride
zone protection. Seat has a built-in buffer at
B— Vertical Shock Dampener Control limits amount of the high and low end of vertical seat travel,
“upward motion” the seat suspension provides. resulting in a much smoother ride.
NOTE: Push control forward for a soft ride or move
handle back for a firm ride. Medium firmness E— Seat Bottom Depth Adjustment Handle moves seat
is between these two positions. bottom forward or rearward for the best working position.
F— Seat Bottom Angle Adjustment Handle raises or
C— Weight/Height Adjustment Handle raises or lowers lowers seat cushion for the best working position.
the seat. Pull up on the handle to raise seat or push down
on handle to lower seat. Adjust seat until green marking is G— Fore/Aft isolation Adjustment Handle locks out
visible in weight and height indicator. or releases forward or rearward movements. Pull up on
handle to lock or push down on handle to release.
NOTE: Suspension can be adjusted to reach limits
in minimum and maximum heights, which in NOTE: Fore/Aft isolator allows shock impacts
effect locks out the suspension system making it to be absorbed.
rigid. Suspension height control also hits limits if
adjusted too close to the extremes. H— Swivel Handle locks-out or releases swivel motion
of seat.
Do not operate the compressor for more than
one minute when adjusting seat.
If the seat does not float or “pump” up, see
your John Deere dealer.
AS09261,0000152 -19-09NOV16-1/1
20-6 041717
PN=47
Operator's Station
Adjust Left-Hand Armrest and Seat Back

(Style A)
A— Armrest Height Adjustment remove round cap from
cover and loosen 13 mm (1/2 in) nut. Adjust armrest to
desired position and tighten the nut to specification and
replace cap.
Specification
Nut—Torque..................................................................................25 N·m
(221 lb·in)
B— Backrest Angle Adjustment Handle adjusts the

seat back angle. Pull up on handle and adjust backrest to
H97562 —UN—02JUN11
desired position and release handle.
AS09261,0000151 -19-09NOV16-1/1
Adjust Left-Hand Armrest and Seat Back

(Style B)
A—Armrest Angle Adjustment Knob adjusts the
armrest up or down. Rotate knob clockwise to lower and
counterclockwise to raise.
B—Armrest Height Adjustment remove round cap from
cover and loosen 13 mm (1/2 in) nut. Adjust armrest
to desired position, tighten the nut to specification and
reinstall cap.
Specification
Nut—Torque..................................................................................25 N·m
T8T4974 —UN—08NOV16
(221 lb·in)
C—Backrest Angle Adjustment Handle adjusts the seat

back angle. Pull up on handle and adjust backrest to
desired position and release handle.
AS09261,0000153 -19-09NOV16-1/1
20-7 041717
PN=48
Operator's Station
Adjust Instructional Seat

Seat back (A) and seat bottom (B) can be raised or
lowered to desired operating position.
A—Seat Back B—Seat Bottom
H96631 —UN—26MAY10
WM05597,0000EEC -19-25MAR14-1/1
Refrigerator (If Equipped)

NOTE: Refrigerator operates only when key switch is
ON and MUST remain plugged into the auxiliary
outlet to keep food or beverages cold.
Refrigerator provides a space to keep food or beverages

cool throughout the day.
Raise seat bottom (A) to open refrigerator top cover (B).
Refrigerator front cover (C) can also be opened without
raising seat bottom.
H96632 —UN—02NOV10
Turn temperature control dial (D) clockwise to decrease
temperature or counterclockwise to increase temperature.
A—Seat Bottom C—Front Cover

B—Top Cover D—Temperature Control Dial
WM05597,0000DDA -19-04FEB14-1/1
20-8 041717
PN=49
Operator's Station
Seat Belts
CAUTION: Inspect seat belts and mounting
hardware on your machine at least once a
year. If seat belt system, including mounting
hardware, buckle, belt, or retractor, shows any
H96657 —UN—01JUN10
sign of damage such as cuts, fraying, extreme
or unusual wear, discoloration or abrasion,
the entire seat belt system should be replaced
immediately. For your safety, replace the belt
system only with replacement parts approved for
your machine, see your John Deere dealer.
Seat belts are standard equipment on both operator and

instructional seats. Lap type seat belts have a push
button quick release and automatic belt retraction to allow
unrestricted exiting and entering.
WM05597,0000DDB -19-04FEB14-1/1
Adjust Armrest Control Console

Loosen knob (A) and slide armrest control console up and
forward or down and back in slots on outer plate. Tighten
knob to lock armrest into position.
Loosen knob (B) and slide CommandARM control console
H97713 —UN—20AUG10
forward or rearward. Tighten knob to lock control console
into place.
A—Knob B—Knob
WM05597,0000EED -19-23FEB15-1/1
Adjust Armrest Display

Rotate arm (A) left or right to desired operating position.
Rotate display (B) left or right and forward or rearward to
desired operating position.
T8140000066 —UN—06FEB14
A—Arm B—Display
WM05597,0000EEE -19-23FEB15-1/1
20-9 041717
PN=50
Operator's Station
Auxiliary Power Outlet Strip

NOTE: Maximum combined current draw for switch power
is 20 amps and unswitched power is 30 amps.
Auxiliary power outlet strip (A) is equipped with six

additional electrical outlets which are located at lower rear
H94452 —UN—14MAY10
of right-hand window. These outlets provide key-switched
or unswitched power.
Spade terminal (B) is direct positive power at all times.
Spade terminal (C) is ground.
Spade terminal (D) is auxiliary power (key switch ON).
A—Auxiliary Power Outlet Strip C—Spade Terminal Ground

B—Spade Terminal (Direct D—Spade Terminal (Positive,
Positive Power) Key Switched ON)
WM05597,0000DDE -19-04FEB14-1/1
Fire Extinguishers
A general-purpose fire extinguisher and a pressurized
water fire extinguisher with mounting brackets are
installed on your machine.
Read label on extinguishers and become familiar with
instructions on how to use and maintain them. Once
extinguisher is discharged, no matter for how long, it must
be recharged.
IMPORTANT: Pressurized water fire extinguisher must
not be exposed to freezing temperatures unless
protected with antifreeze. See instructions decal
on extinguisher for further information.
H92841 —UN—16SEP08
General-Purpose And Water Fire Extinguisher
WM05597,0000DDF -19-07APR14-1/1
20-10 041717
PN=51
Operator's Station
Fire Extinguisher Locations
CAUTION: General-purpose fire extinguisher must

be at least a 6 kg (13 lb.) dry chemical or similar
and meet local government laws and regulations.
T8T546 —UN—10JUN14
A pressurized water fire extinguisher (A) and
general-purpose fire extinguisher (B) are on the left-hand
side of the cooling package.
A—Water Fire Extinguisher B—General-Purpose Fire

Extinguisher
Left-Hand Side Of Machine Shown
WM05597,0000DE0 -19-09JAN15-1/1
Steering Column
A— Horn allows operator to warn bystanders to stay clear.
B— Turn Signal Switch allows operator to indicate left or
right-hand turns.
CAUTION: Adjust steering wheel only when

machine is stopped.
C— Steering Column Vertical Adjustment allows

operator to adjust steering column up or down.
T8140000079 —UN—20FEB14
Loosen hub and push or pull wheel to position. Slightly
tighten hub to hold steering wheel in position.
D— Starter Switch allows key switch to be turned to:
NOTE: Key must be pushed in to turn to
Accessories position.
First Position....................................................... Accessories
Second Position ............................................................. OFF
Third Position ................................................................ Run
CAUTION: Adjust steering wheel only when
Fourth Position .............................................................. Start
machine is stopped.
CAUTION: Adjust column only when machine F— Steering Wheel Tilt Adjustment allows operator to
is stopped. Do not step on pedal without move steering column with handle to desired position.
holding steering wheel.
Pull up on handle to release lock and move steering wheel
E— Steering Column Horizontal Adjustment allows to desired position. Release handle to lock into desired
operator to move steering column with pedal to desired position.
position.
Press pedal to release lock on steering column and move
column to desired position. Column locks when pedal is
released.
WM05597,0000DE1 -19-06OCT14-1/1
20-11 041717
PN=52
Operator's Station
Windshield Wiper and Windshield Washer

Switch
NOTE: Key switch must be ON or machine running for
windshield wiper and windshield washer to operate.
Windshield wiper and washer switch (A) on steering
H96489 —UN—22JUN11
column is used to control the following:
• OFF Position (B)
• Wiper Intermittent Operation (C)
• Wiper ON Position (D)
• Windshield Washer (E)
To add washer fluid to machine:
1. Open left-hand engine compartment door.
2. Add washer fluid to tank (F).
3. Close tank cap and compartment door.
T8120002650 —UN—09JAN13
A—Windshield Wiper and D—Wiper ON Position
Washer Switch E—Windshield Washer
B—OFF Position F— Tank
C—Wiper Intermittent Position
WM05597,0000ED0 -19-19MAR14-1/1
Side Wiper Switches (If Equipped)

NOTE: Key switch must be ON or machine running
for side wiper switches to operate.
Side wiper switches on the armrest control the following:
T8T1293 —UN—25SEP14
• Left-Hand Side Wiper Switch (A)
• Right-Hand Side Wiper Switch (B)
• Side Washer Switch (C)
A—Left-Hand Side Wiper C—Side Washer Switch
Switch
B—Right-Hand Side Wiper
Switch
WM05597,00010D3 -19-06OCT14-1/1
20-12 041717
PN=53
Operator's Station
Service ADVISOR™ Diagnostic Connector

The Service ADVISOR™ diagnostic connector (A) is on
right-hand side of operator seat, below cup holder.
Connector allows a computer to be attached for diagnostic
purposes.
T8T1568 —UN—13NOV14
A—Diagnostic Connector
Service ADVISOR is a trademark of Deere & Company

WM05597,0000DE4 -19-26NOV14-1/1
20-13 041717
PN=54
Overhead Control Panel
T8T1997 —UN—04MAY15
A—Radio
WM05597,0000F60 -19-10FEB15-1/1
After Market Radios

IMPORTANT: If installing or replacing an aftermarket
radio, see your John Deere dealer for
further information.
WM05597,0000DFC -19-10FEB14-1/1
Program Radio for Local Area Frequency

NOTE: If a different tuner frequency is needed for the radio,
see your John Deere dealer for further information.
Wave Bands (United States/Canada) Wave Bands (Europe)
FM 87.7—107.9 MHz UKW (FM) 87.5—108.0 MHz
AM 530—1710 kHz MW 522—1629 kHz
WX 162.4—162.55 MHz LW 153—279 kHz
WM05597,0000DFD -19-10FEB14-1/1
Radio Controls
C E
D
B
CQ298925 —UN—20MAR15
F
A
J I H G
A—Volume Control D—Radio Display G—Audio (AUD) Key J— Source Select (SRC) Key
B—Power/Mute Key E—Menu Key H—Key Block (1—6)
C—Band (BND) Key F— Multi-Function Rocker Switch I— Traffic Announcements (TA)
Key
OU90500,00003B6 -19-20MAR15-1/1
25-1 041717
PN=55
Antenna
If radio is not used or machine is being transported, pull
radio antenna (A) down and retain with clip (B).
A—Radio Antenna B—Clip
H94462 —UN—01NOV10
WM05597,0000DFF -19-10FEB14-1/1
Communications/CB Radio Mounting
H94464 —UN—14MAY10
H96333 —UN—14MAY10
IMPORTANT: Do not install a radio requiring more than
3 amps or electrical system may malfunction.
To install additional communications radio, see your John

Deere dealer.
CQ298926 —UN—20MAR15
Antenna mount (A) is located in center of cab roof.
1. Remove dust cap from antenna base.
2. Remove brass nut from antenna base.
3. Discard rubber washer.
4. Reinstall antenna base with O-ring facing downward.
5. Install antenna.
NOTE: Remove cup holder to locate antenna cable Right-Hand Side Location / Rear Cornerpost Location (Right-Hand Rear)
and route though opening.
A—Antenna Mount B—Antenna Cable
Antenna cable (B) is located on right-hand side of cab
under armrest console.
IMPORTANT: Cornerpost cover must be removed shown. Use self-tapping screws or cap screws with nuts
before drilling. Be careful not to damage wiring to mount bracket.
harnesses and coolant hoses in locations shown NOTE: Certain broadcast bands may cause interference
when drilling holes or installing hardware. with the position receiver. Select a different
broadcast band or see your John Deere dealer if
Use bracket supplied by manufacturer as a template to signal losses are noticed with the position receiver.
locate and drill holes as required in various locations
OU90500,00003B7 -19-20MAR15-1/1
25-2 041717
PN=56
CommandTouch™ Armrest Console
Armrest Console Controls
T8T543 —UN—04NOV14
1— Harvesting Functions (Crop 5— Low Engine Speed Switch 12— Contour Base Cutter Height 18— Side Windows Wiper
Divider, Base Cutter, Feed 6— Medium Engine Speed Switch Control Enable Switch Switches (If Equipped)
Rollers, and Chopper) Switch 7— High Engine Speed Switch 13— Configurable Encoder 19— Diagnostic Switch
2— Auxiliary Function Switch 8— Low Travel Speed Switch 14— Propulsion Encoder 20— Park Brake Switch
3— Positive Traction Engage 9— Medium Travel Speed Switch 15— Alarm and Operator Controls 21— Road Transport Disconnect
Switch (If Equipped) 10— High Travel Speed Switch (If Switch Switch
4— Automatic FieldCruise™ Equipped 16— Cooling Fan Reversing
Engage Switch 11— Floating Crop Dividers Switch
Enable Switch 17— Side Windows Washer
Switch (If Equipped)
NOTE: Not every switch is available for every

machine model. Before operating machine, become familiar with switches
and controls.
FieldCruise is a trademark of Deere & Company
WM05597,00013F7 -19-11DEC15-1/1
30-1 041717
PN=57
Harvesting Functions Switch

NOTE: Harvesting functions can be engaged in forward
or reverse. Switch has a forward position, an
off position, and a reverse position.
Harvesting functions switch (A) engages crop divider
T8T1558 —UN—06NOV14
scrolls, knockdown rollers, base cutter, feed rollers, and
chopper in forward or reverse rotation.
NOTE: Auxiliary functions switch (B) must be cycled
before harvesting functions engage.
To engage harvesting functions:

1. Push down and push forward on harvesting functions
switch (A). A—Harvesting Functions B—Auxiliary Functions Switch
Switch
2. Push down and push forward on auxiliary functions
switch (B).
To disengage harvesting functions push down and pull 2. Push down and pull back on auxiliary functions switch
back on harvesting to middle position. (B).
If operator leaves seat for five seconds with harvesting 3. Push down and push forward on harvesting functions
functions engaged, presses harvesting functions quick switch.
stop switch, or turns off machine, harvesting functions and 4. Push down and push forward on auxiliary functions
auxiliary functions switches must be cycled. switch.
1. Push down and pull back on harvesting functions
switch (A) to middle position.
WM05597,0001145 -19-24NOV14-1/1
Auxiliary Functions Switch

NOTE: Auxiliary functions switch (A) must be turned on
for harvesting functions to engage. See Harvesting
Functions Switch in this section.
Auxiliary functions switch (A) must be turned on to enable
T8T1559 —UN—06NOV14
the following functions:
• Side Knives
• Primary Extractor
• Elevator
• Secondary Extractor
Push down and push forward on switch to enable auxiliary
functions.
A—Auxiliary Functions Switch
Push down and pull back on switch to disable auxiliary
functions.
WM05597,0001148 -19-24NOV14-1/1
30-2 041717
PN=58
Engine Speed Switches

NOTE: Engine speed varies if Automatic FieldCruise™
or high idle set point is engaged. See Engine
Setup Screen in GreenStar™ 3 2630 Display
Screens section for more information.
Engine speed switches are used to increase or decrease

engine speed.
• Low Engine Speed Switch (A) is for low speed—850
rpm.
• Medium Engine Speed Switch (B) is for medium
T8T1658 —UN—25NOV14
speed—1500 rpm.
• High Engine Speed Switch (C) is for high speed—2210
rpm.
• Automatic FieldCruise™
1
Switch (D) is for high
speed—2000 rpm .
Indicator lights (E) indicate which switch is selected.
A—Low Engine Speed Switch D—Automatic FieldCruise™

B—Medium Engine Speed Switch
Switch E—Indicator Lights
C—High Engine Speed Switch

1
When harvester needs more power, engine speed automatically
increases to 2210 rpm. When more power is not needed,
engine speed returns to 2000 rpm.
WM05597,0000E73 -19-12JAN15-1/1
Travel Speed Switches (Wheel Machines)

IMPORTANT: Machine must be stopped and
multi-function lever moved to neutral position
before selecting travel speed switch.
Travel switches are used to select desired machine speed
T8T538 —UN—25NOV14
range. Press desired switch to increase or decrease
machines ground speed.
• Low Travel Speed Switch (A) is for low machine travel
speed range.
• Medium
1
Travel Speed Switch (B) is for variable speed
range .
• High Travel Speed Switch (C) is for high machine speed
range. A—Low Travel Speed Switch C—High Travel Speed Switch
B—Medium Travel Speed
Selected travel speed is displayed on digital cornerpost Switch
display.
1
See Varitorque (Wheel Machines Only) in Greenstar 2630 Display
Screens section for more information.
WM05597,000119F -19-12JAN15-1/1
30-3 041717
PN=59
Travel Speed Switches (Track Machines)

IMPORTANT: Machine must be stopped and
multi-function lever moved to neutral position
before selecting travel speed switch.
Travel switches are used to select desired machine speed
T8T538 —UN—25NOV14
range. Press desired switch to change machine travel
speed.
• Low Travel Speed Switch (A) is for loading harvester
on a truck for transport. Steering aggressiveness is
lowered in this speed.
• Medium Travel Speed Switch (B) is for low machine
speed range.
• High Travel Speed Switch (C) is for high machine speed A—Low Travel Speed Switch C—High Travel Speed Switch
range (if equipped). B—Medium Travel Speed (If Equipped)
Switch
Selected travel speed is displayed on corner post display.
WM05597,00013CD -19-28OCT15-1/1
Park Brake Switch

NOTE: System is in manual mode when machine is
first started. Park brake indicator on cornerpost
illuminates indicating park brake is engaged. Press
park brake switch once to enter automatic mode.
T8T536 —UN—03JUN14
Park brake switch (A) manually or automatically engages
or disengages park brake preventing machine movement.
Automatic Mode:
• Press park brake switch once to set park brake to
automatic mode.
- If multi-function lever is in neutral gate and speed is
less than 1.5 km/h (1 mph), park brake is applied. If
multi-function lever is moved out of neutral gate, park A—Park Brake Switch
brake is released.
NOTE: Park brake engages each time multi-function lever - If multi-function lever is in neutral gate and speed is
is set to neutral position or if engine is shut OFF. less than 3.0 km/h (1.9 mph), park brake is applied.
If multi-function lever is moved out of neutral gate
Manual Engagement (Default Mode): or speed is greater than 1.5 km/h (1 mph) an alarm
sounds.
• Press park brake switch twice to set park brake to
manual mode.
WM05597,0000F89 -19-03JUN14-1/1
30-4 041717
PN=60
Positive Traction Switch (If Equipped)

Press positive traction switch (A) to lock ground drive
motors.
IMPORTANT: Only engage positive traction when
necessary. Improper use can damage
T8T1657 —UN—25NOV14
drive components.
A—Positive Traction Switch
WM05597,00013CB -19-28OCT15-1/1
Road Transport Disconnect Switch

Road transport disconnect switch (A) must be in transport
mode when transporting machine on roadway.
When road transport disconnect switch is pressed,
indicator light illuminates and transport mode is turned
T8T1554 —UN—25NOV14
ON. Road transport disconnect switch prevents the
following functions:
• Harvesting functions (base cutter, chopper, feed rollers,
crop divider scrolls)
• Auxiliary harvest functions (side knives, topper, elevator,
primary extractor fan, secondary extractor fan)
• Timed elevator swing
Brakes are applied together (wheel machines only). A—Road Transport Disconnect
Switch
When field operation is desired, press road transport
disconnect switch for two seconds to turn OFF transport
mode. Indicator light turns OFF.
WM05597,0001142 -19-20NOV14-1/1
Propulsion Encoder
Propulsion encoder (A) adjusts track steer bias (track
machines) or varitorque (wheel machines).
Turn encoder toward plus (+) to increase varitorque or
adjust track steer bias to right-hand side. Turn encoder
T8T1639 —UN—25NOV14
toward minus (-) to decrease varitorque or adjust track
steer bias to left-hand side.
A—Propulsion Encoder
WM05597,0001170 -19-24NOV14-1/1
30-5 041717
PN=61
Multi-Function Lever Controls

Propulsion
• Move multi-function lever forward (A) to move harvester

forward.
• Pull multi-function lever back (B) to move harvester in
T8T1566 —UN—12NOV14
reverse.
• Move multi-function lever to the center (C) to put
machine in neutral.
A—Forward C—Center
B—Back
WM05597,000117C -19-23JAN15-1/2
Switch Identification
T8T1900 —UN—23JAN15
T8T1901 —UN—23JAN15
Front View Rear View
A—Harvesting Functions Quick G—Elevator Swing Right Switch M—Base Cutter Raise Switch T— Left-Hand Crop Divider Lower
Stop Switch H—Elevator ON and OFF Switch N—Base Cutter Lower Switch Switch
B—AutoTrac™ Resume Switch I— Elevator Discharge Flap Out O—Topper Raise Switch U—Horn Switch
C—Configurable Switch 1 Switch P—Topper Lower Switch V—Configurable Switch A
D—Configurable Switch 2 J— Elevator Discharge Flap In Q—Right-Hand Crop Divider W—Configurable Switch B
E—Configurable Switch 3 Switch Raise Switch
F— Elevator Swing Left Switch K—Secondary Extractor Hood R—Right-Hand Crop Divider
Rotate Left Switch Lower Switch
L— Secondary Extractor Hood S—Left-Hand Crop Divider Raise
Rotate Right Switch Switch

WM05597,000117C -19-23JAN15-2/2
30-6 041717
PN=62
Multi-Function Lever and Palm Adjustment

Palm rest is adjustable to three positions. To raise or
lower palm rest, pull lever (A) under palm rest and adjust
palm rest to desired position.
T8T1723 —UN—02DEC14
A—Lever
WM05597,000117E -19-02DEC14-1/1
Harvesting Functions Quick Stop Switch

Harvesting functions quick stop switch (A) allows operator
to shut OFF all harvesting functions at the same time in
case of an emergency.
To re-engage functions, See Harvesting Functions Switch
T8T1904 —UN—27JAN15
in this section.
A—Harvesting Functions
Quick Stop Switch
WM05597,000117D -19-27JAN15-1/1
30-7 041717
PN=63
CommandARM™ Controls
T8T3374 —UN—27OCT15
1— Left-Hand Topper Engage 9— Primary Extractor Engage 22— Left-Hand Side Knife Lower 32— Hazard Warning Lights
Switch Switch Switch Switch
2— Right-Hand Topper Engage 10— Secondary Extractor Engage 23— Right-Hand Side Knife Raise 33— Fan Speed Control Dial
Switch Switch (If Equipped) Switch 34— Defrost Switch
3— Left-Hand Side Knife Engage 11— Primary Extractor Hood 24— Right-Hand Side Knife 35— Air Conditioner Switch
Switch (If Equipped) Rotate Left Switch Lower Switch 36— Temperature Control Dial
4— Right-Hand Side Knife 12— Primary Extractor Hood 25— Elevator Reverse Switch 37— Push-To-Talk Switch (If
Engage Switch (If Equipped) Rotate Right Switch 26— Elevator Raise Switch Equipped)
5— Left-Hand Crop Divider Tilt 13— Confirm Switch 27— Elevator Lower Switch 38— Seek Forward Switch (If
Up Switch (If Equipped) 14— Cancel Switch 28— Topper Boom Light (If Equipped)
6— Right-Hand Crop Divider Tilt 15— Main Menu Switch European Conformity [CE] 39— Seek Reverse Switch (If
Up Switch (If Equipped) 16— Home Switch Lighting Is Not Equipped) Equipped)
7— Left-Hand Crop Divider Tilt 17— Selection Dial 29— Engine Compartment Lights 40— Volume Increase Switch (If
Down Switch (If Equipped) 18— A—J Shortcut Switches Switch/Topper Boom Light Equipped)
8— Right-Hand Crop Divider Tilt 19— Knockdown Roller Raise (If CE Lighting Is Equipped) 41— Volume Decrease Switch (If
Down Switch (If Equipped) Switch 30— Auxiliary Field Lights Switch Equipped)
20— Knockdown Roller Lower 31— Beacon Lights Switch 42— Mute Switch (If Equipped)
Switch
21— Left-Hand Side Knife Raise
Switch
NOTE: Not every CommandARM™ switch is

available for every model.
Continued on next page AS09261,00000AF -19-11OCT16-1/2
30-8 041717
PN=64
Before operating machine, become familiar with switches

and controls.
CommandARM is a trademark of Deere & Company
AS09261,00000AF -19-11OCT16-2/2
Operator Interface Controls

• Selection Dial (A): allows operator to move the ”focus”
from item to item on the CommandCenter display. As
item is highlighted, a ”tool tip” appears describing what
the highlighted object is. Selection dial is also used for
data entry to increase or decrease numeric values.
- Rotating selection dial forward raises input box values.
- Rotating selection dial wheel rearward lowers input
box values.
• Confirm Switch (B): allows operator to select desired
”focus” area on CommandCenter display or to confirm
a highlighted action.
• Cancel Switch (C): allows operator to cancel or
deselect an action on the display at anytime.
• Main Menu Switch (D): is used to change the active
T8T539 —UN—03JUN14
”application” that the CommandCenter display is
running. Items or applications, in the menu included:
- Sugarcane
- Message Center
- GreenStar
- Display
- Layout Manager
- Access Manager
- Video A—Selection Dial D—Main Menu Switch
B—Confirm Switch E—Home Switch
• Home Switch (E): allows operator to return to home C—Cancel Switch
page.
• Shortcut Switches (F): allows operator to select
corresponding softkey on GreenStar™ display.
WM05597,0000FA1 -19-12JAN15-1/1
Topper Switches
Press left-hand topper engage switch (A) to discharge
to left-hand side.
Press right-hand topper engage switch (B) to discharge to
right-hand side.
T8T1641 —UN—24NOV14
NOTE: Indicator light illuminates indicating which
direction topper is discharging.
Press switch with illuminated indicator light to turn OFF

topper.
A—Left-Hand Topper Engage B—Right-Hand Topper Engage

Switch Switch
WM05597,0001173 -19-24NOV14-1/1
30-9 041717
PN=65
Crop Divider Tilt Switches (If Equipped)

Press crop divider tilt up or down switch (A—D) to adjust
crop divider tilt to desired position.
A—Left-Hand Crop Divider Tilt C—Right-Hand Crop Divider

Up Switch Tilt Up Switch
T8T1642 —UN—24NOV14
B—Left-Hand Crop Divider Tilt D—Right-Hand Crop Divider
Down Switch Tilt Down Switch
WM05597,0001177 -19-24NOV14-1/1
Side Knife Switches (If Equipped)
T8T1646 —UN—24NOV14
T8T3375 —UN—27OCT15
A—Left-Hand Side Knife Engage C—Left-Hand Side Knife Raise E—Right-Hand Side Knife Lower
Switch Switch Switch
B—Right-Hand Side Knife D—Left-Hand Side Knife Lower F— Right-Hand Side Knife Raise
Engage Switch Switch Switch
NOTE: Auxiliary functions switch must be turned Press side knife raise or lower switch (C—F) to adjust
on to engage side knives. side knife to desired position.
Press left-hand or right-hand side knife engage switch (A
and B) to turn ON desired side knife.
WM05597,00013C8 -19-29OCT15-1/1
Primary Extractor Switches

NOTE: Auxiliary functions switch must be turned on
to engage primary extractor fan.
Press primary extractor engage switch (A) to turn ON

primary extractor fan.
T8T1654 —UN—25NOV14
Press primary extractor hood rotate left or right switch (B

and C) to rotate primary extractor to desired position.
A—Primary Extractor Engage C—Primary Extractor Hood

Switch Rotate Right Switch
B—Primary Extractor Hood
Rotate Left Switch
WM05597,0001175 -19-25NOV14-1/1
30-10 041717
PN=66
Secondary Extractor Switches (If Equipped)
T8T1645 —UN—24NOV14
T8T1905 —UN—27JAN15
A—Secondary Extractor Engage B—Secondary Extractor Hood C—Secondary Extractor Hood
Switch Rotate Left Switch Rotate Right Switch
NOTE: Auxiliary functions switch must be turned on Press secondary extractor hood rotate left or right switch
to engage secondary extractor fan. (B and C) to rotate secondary extractor to desired position.
Press secondary extractor engage switch (A) to turn ON
secondary extractor fan.
WM05597,0001176 -19-27JAN15-1/1
Knockdown Rollers Tilt Switches (If

Equipped)
Press knockdown roller raise or lower switches (A and B)
to adjust knockdown rollers to desired position.
T8T3376 —UN—27OCT15
A—Knockdown Roller Raise B—Knockdown Roller Lower
Switch Switch
WM05597,0001412 -19-18DEC15-1/1
30-11 041717
PN=67
Elevator Switches
T8T1653 —UN—25NOV14
T8T1906 —UN—27JAN15
A—Elevator Engage Switch C—Elevator Raise Switch E—Elevator Swing Left Switch
B—Elevator Reverse Switch D—Elevator Lower Switch F— Elevator Swing Right Switch
NOTE: Auxiliary functions switch must be turned on to IMPORTANT: Avoid machine damage. Do NOT rotate
operate elevator in forward or reverse. elevator unless elevator is completely raised.
Press elevator engage switch (A) to turn elevator ON Press elevator swing left or right switch (E and F) to move
or OFF. Press and hold elevator reverse switch (B) to elevator to desired position.
operate elevator in reverse.
Press elevator raise or lower switch (C and D) to change
elevator to desired position.
WM05597,0001171 -19-27JAN15-1/1
30-12 041717
PN=68
ClimaTrak™ Automatic Temperature Control

Fan Speed
NOTE: When operating in cold environments it is best
to point air vents towards cab floor and turn fan
speed to automatic position. This helps circulate
H96249 —UN—30APR10
air flow throughout the cab.
Fan Speed Control Dial (A): adjusts fan speed and

amount of air coming out of louvers.
• Off Position - all power to system is OFF.
• Automatic Position - fan speed is determined by ClimaTrak™ Controls
difference between selected temperature and actual
cab temperature.
NOTE: As temperature approaches setpoint,
fan speed decreases.
Fan Speed Indicator (B): indicator arrow moves in
H96250 —UN—30APR10
relation to desired fan speed adjusted setting.
Defrost
Defrost Switch (C): manually opens defrost vents.
NOTE: Indicator light illuminates when defrost is ON.
Air conditioner turns ON when defrost switch is
first pressed. This allows moisture to be removed
from the air and allows dry air to be blown on the Air Conditioner Icon (F): toggles icon on-off when air
windows. Press air conditioner switch to turn OFF. conditioner switch is pressed.
• Defrost helps remove moisture from air even in heat Temperature Control
mode.
Temperature Control Dial (G): adjusts temperature of
Defrost Indicator (D): toggles icon on-off when defrost cab. Turn dial to red zone to increase temperature and
switch is pressed. blue zone to decrease temperature.
Air Conditioner NOTE: Outside ambient temperature (H) shows

current air temperature.
Air Conditioner Switch (E): activates air conditioner to
cool cab. Temperature Control Indicator (I): indicator arrow
moves in relation to desired temperature adjusted setting.
NOTE: Indicator light illuminates when air
conditioning is ON.
ClimaTrak is a trademark of Deere & Company
WM05597,0001302 -19-22MAY15-1/1
30-13 041717
PN=69
Light Switches
NOTE: For more detailed information about lighting
locations on the machine, see Lights and
Signals section.
Topper Boom Light (If European Conformity [CE]

Lighting Package Is Not Equipped) (A):
Press switch to turn topper boom light ON or OFF.
Engine Compartment Lights Switch and Topper
Boom Light (If CE Lighting Is Equipped) (B):
Press switch to turn engine compartment lights and topper
boom light ON or OFF.
T8T540 —UN—03JUN14
Auxiliary Field Lights Switch (C):
Press switch to turn auxiliary field lights ON or OFF.
Beacon Lights Switch (D):
Press switch to turn beacon lights ON or OFF.
Hazard Warning Lights Switch (E):
Press switch to turn hazard warning lights and beacon
lights ON or OFF.
AS09261,00000B3 -19-11OCT16-1/1
Radio Function Switches (If Equipped)

Push-To-Talk Switch (A)1:
Press switch to navigate to phone call page quickly or
to answer incoming phone calls or end calls already in
process.
H105408 —UN—11MAY12
Seek Forward Switch (B):
• AM/FM/WX/MW/LW: Press switch (short press) to

change to next preset.
• AM/FM/WX/MW/LW: Press switch (long press) to SEEK
UP.
Seek Reverse Switch (C):
• AM/FM/WX/MW/LW: Press switch (short press) to Mute Switch (F):

change to previous preset.
• AM/FM/WX/MW/LW: Press switch (long press) to SEEK NOTE: Press switch to mute microphone during
DOWN. a phone call.
Volume Increase Switch (D): Press switch to mute audio. Press switch to resume play
of audio music.
Press switch to increase audio volume.
Volume Decrease Switch (E):
Press switch to decrease audio volume.
1
Switch is only available for Premium radios.
WM05597,0001390 -19-13AUG15-1/1
30-14 041717
PN=70
Lights and Signals
Light Switches
NOTE: Exit lights remain ON for 3 minutes after key
switch is turned OFF (if road or field lights were
used within the previous 5 minutes).
When all lights are first turned to the ON
H99531 —UN—22JUN11
position with key switch OFF, there will be a
slight delay before lights turn ON.
Light selection switch (A) on the steering column is used

to control the following:
• OFF position (B)
• Park light switch (C) controls: Steering Column Light Selection Switch
- Marker lights
• Road light switch (D) controls:
- Hazard (flashing marker) lights
- Two low beam cab-mounted headlights
• Field light switch (E) controls:
- Eight cab-mounted headlights
Light selection lever on the steering column is used to
control the high and low beam headlights:
NOTE: High beam indicator illuminates on corner
post when lever is in the momentary high beam
and high beam positions.
• Momentary high beam (F):

- Pulling lever to upper position momentarily activates
T8T541 —UN—03JUN14
high beams.
• Low beam position (G):
- Pull lever to middle position to operate low beams.
• High beam position (H):
- Push lever to lower position to activate high beam
headlights.
Armrest Light Switches
Armrest light switches are used to control the following:

A—Light Selection Switch H—High Beam Position
• Topper boom light (If European Conformity [CE] lighting B—OFF Position I— Topper Boom Light (If
package is not equipped) (I): C—Park Light Switch European Conformity [CE]
D—Road Light Switch Lighting Package Is Not
- Topper boom light E—Field Light Switch Equipped)
• Engine compartment lights switch and Topper Boom F— Momentary High Beam J— Engine Compartment
Light (If CE lighting is equipped) (J) controls: G—Low Beam Position Lights Switch and Topper
- Two lights in engine compartment Boom Light (If CE Lighting
- Topper boom light Package Is Equipped)
K—Auxiliary Field Lights
• Auxiliary field lights switch (K) controls: Switch
- Two cooling package auxiliary field lights L— Beacon Lights Switch
- Two elevator auxiliary field lights M—Hazard Warning Lights
• Beacon lights switch (L) controls: Switch
- Beacon lights
• Hazard warning lights switch (M) controls:
- Hazard (flashing marker) lights - Beacon lights
AS09261,00000B2 -19-17OCT16-1/1
35-1 041717
PN=71
Lights and Signals
Front and Rear Lighting Locations
T8T1983 —UN—29JAN15
Park light switch (E) controls front turn signal and tail
lights (C and D).
Road light switch (F) controls two low beam cab head
lights (B).
Field light switch (G) controls eight cab headlights (A and
B). T8T1664 —UN—01DEC14
A—Halogen Cab Headlights or E—Park Light Switch

High Intensity Discharge F— Road Light Switch
(HID) (If Equipped) Cab G—Field Light Switch
Headlights
B—Cab Headlights (High and
Low Beam)
C—Front Turn Signal Lights
D—Tail Lights
Continued on next page AS09261,00000B7 -19-11OCT16-1/2
35-2 041717
PN=72
Lights and Signals
Topper Boom Light
T8T4786 —UN—07SEP16
If the European conformity (CE) lighting package is not
equipped, the topper boom light (A) is controlled by lower
road light switch (B).
If the CE lighting package is equipped, the topper boom
light is controlled by engine compartment lights switch (C).
T8T4679 —UN—19AUG16
A—Topper Boom Light C—Engine Compartment
B—Lower Road Light Switch Lights Switch
AS09261,00000B7 -19-11OCT16-2/2
35-3 041717
PN=73
Lights and Signals
Side Lighting Locations
T8T1919 —UN—07MAY15
Cooling package and elevator auxiliary field lights (A and
B) are controlled by auxiliary field lights switch (E).
Engine compartment lights (C) are controlled by engine
compartment lights switch (D).
A—Cooling Package Auxiliary D—Engine Compartment
T8T1634 —UN—20NOV14
Field Lights Lights Switch
B—Elevator Auxiliary Field E—Auxiliary Field Lights
Lights Switch
C—Engine Compartment
Lights
WM05597,0000F5E -19-29JAN15-1/1
35-4 041717
PN=74
Lights and Signals
Turn Signals
NOTE: Turn signals operate anytime key switch is
ON. Turn signals are not self-cancelling, so lever
must be moved to neutral position.
When operating machine on road or highway, use turn
H95266 —UN—22JUN11
signal lever (A) to indicate turns.
NOTE: Indicator lights (left or right) on cornerpost
illuminate and indicate a turn.
A—Turn Signal Lever
WM05597,0000DD4 -19-13JUN14-1/1
Cab Interior Light

Dome light provides overhead lighting for use at night or
in low light conditions.
Light switch (A) controls dome light (B).
Light switch is a three position switch:
H94501 —UN—06AUG09
• ON (left)
• OFF (center)
• Automatic (right) (open cab door)
A—Light Switch B—Dome Light
WM05597,0000DD5 -19-28JAN14-1/1
Map Light
Map light provides overhead lighting for use at night or in
low light conditions.
Light switch (A) controls map light (B).
NOTE: Adjust map light as needed.
H96823 —UN—10JUN10
Light switch is a two-position switch:
• ON
• OFF
A—Light Switch B—Map Light
WM05597,0000DD6 -19-28JAN14-1/1
35-5 041717
PN=75
Digital Cornerpost Display
Upper Cornerpost Display
(A)—Left Turn Signal Indicator: shows operator that
a left turn is planned.
(B)—Stop Engine Warning Indicator (Red): illuminates
and requires machine be stopped at once and problem
corrected. Diagnostic trouble code is shown on armrest
display until the problem is resolved.
(C)—Service Warning Indicator (Yellow): illuminates
and flashes when a problem exists with machine.
Requires machine be stopped at the earliest convenience.
Diagnostic trouble code is shown on armrest display.
(D)—Information Warning Indicator (Blue): illuminates
and flashes when diagnostic trouble code is active. Alerts
operator to be aware of a condition. When warning is
acknowledged, screen message disappears and warning
indicator turns OFF.
(E)—Right Turn Signal Indicator: shows operator that a
T8140000065 —UN—06FEB14
right turn is planned.
(F)—Not Used
(G)—High Beam Indicator: shows operator that high
beam lights are currently selected.
(H)—Not Used
(I)—Engine Power Meter Indicator: shows operator
percentage of power that engine is using at any given time.
Indicator shows zero bars when fuel tank is empty.
IMPORTANT: If indicator moves into the red region,
engine power is maximized and machine If alarm sounds and engine temperature message
could potentially stall. Reduce load on the appears, stop engine and check problem immediately.
machine until indicator moves back into
green and yellow regions. (L)—Not Used
(M)—Transmission Gear or Range Indicator: “1” icon
• Green Region (35 to 100%) illuminates in forward.
• Yellow Region (101 to 110%)
• Red Region (111 to 114%) (N)—Park Brake Indicator: illuminates when park brake
is active.
(J)—Engine Temperature Indicator: 7—9 bars are
displayed for normal operating temperature. (O)—Neutral Indicator: shows that machine is in neutral
position.
• Green Region (64° to 99°C)
• Red Region (100° to 109°C) (P)—Engine Speed Indicator: shows engine rpm speed.
(K)—Fuel Gauge Indicator: shows how much fuel is left (Q)—Ground Speed Indicator: shows machine ground
in the tank. When level reaches 10% (approximately one speed (km/h or mph).
hour of operation) of remaining fuel, fuel indicator flashes,
alarm sounds and low fuel message appears.
AS09261,0000096 -19-08SEP16-1/1
40-1 041717
PN=76
Digital Cornerpost Display
Lower Cornerpost Display

(A)—Base Cutter Cutting Pressure: shows base cutter
pressure from 0 kPa—25 000 kPa (0 psi—4000 psi).
(B)—Hydraulic Oil Temperature: shows hydraulic oil
temperature.
• Green Region (-18° to 93°C)
• Red Region (94° to 117°C)
(C)—Base Cutter Actual Height: shows actual base
cutter height.
(D)—Base Cutter Target Height: shows target base
cutter height.
(E)—Extractor Fan rpm: shows extractor fan revolutions
per minute.
T8120001764 —UN—03OCT12
AS09261,0000097 -19-12SEP16-1/1
40-2 041717
PN=77
GreenStar™ 3 2630 Display Screens
Armrest Display Navigation (GreenStar™ 3 2630 Display)
NOTE: Not every GreenStar™ 3 2630 softkey is
available for every model.
There are three methods of navigating around display

screens.
Selection Dial and Confirm Switch Method:
Use selection dial (K) to highlight desired softkeys (A—J).
Once desired softkey is highlighted, use the following dial
and switches:
• Selection Dial (K): Rotate dial to:
- Scroll through available items on selected page
- Increase or decrease values in a selected item
• Confirm Switch (L): Once available item is selected,
T8T557 —UN—12JUN14
use selection dial and press switch to:
- Select item
- Toggle between available selections within item
- Enter/Save values
• Cancel Switch (M): Press switch to cancel current
selection.
Shortcut Switch Method:
Shortcut switches (A—J) allow a one-touch selection of
desired input field or corresponding item on display.
• Shortcut Switches (A—J): Press to select
corresponding softkey on armrest display.
Touchscreen Method:
IMPORTANT: Under no circumstance should
touchscreen be contacted with an object harder
or sharper than a fingertip (pen, pencil point, or
any metal objects) that could cause damage to
T8T780 —UN—20JAN15
screen. Heavy pressure damages underlying
components and voids warranty. Light amounts
of pressure, if exerted continuously, can
degrade touchscreen reliability.
• Select and touch desired softkey on display.

Navigational Switches:
• Main Menu Switch (N): Press switch to change active - Display

application that display is running. Applications include: - Layout Manager
- Sugarcane - Access Manager
- Starfire 3000 - Video
- Engine - Calculator
- Message Center • Home Switch (O): Displays user-defined home screen.
- Performance Monitor If multiple screens are defined, pressing home switch
- GreenStar™ multiple times toggles through each defined home
- Original GreenStar™ Monitor screen.

WM05597,0001121 -19-16DEC14-1/1
45-1 041717
PN=78
Display Navigation
Sugar Main (A)
Floating Crop Dividers and Contour Base Cutter Height
Control Setup (B)
Alarm and Operator Controls Setup (C)
Extractor Fan Setup (D)
Engine Setup (E)
Drivetrain Control Setup (F)
Elevator Setup (G)
T8T783 —UN—10JUL14
Harvester Activity Monitor (H)
Select desired softkey to advance to next display screen.

See following information in this section for further screen
navigation.
WM05597,0001122 -19-17NOV14-1/1
45-2 041717
PN=79
Display Icon Identification

Sugar Main (A): returns to Sugarcane Main screen and
cycles through Sugarcane Main pages.
Home (B): displays and cycles between user-defined
home screens. A B
Main Menu (C): displays available applications.
Enter/Accept (D): allows operator to enter/accept desired
information or settings.
Cancel (E): allows operator to cancel desired information
or settings.
C D
Return/Back (F): allows operator to view previous page.
Settings (G): enters settings menu for current screen.
Next Step (H): allows operator to view next page of
information.
Diagnostics and Calibration (I): displays machine E F
calibrations, diagnostic readings templates, and special
tests (templates).
Calibrate (J): allows operator to calibrate certain features.
Clear (K): allows operator to clear desired information or
settings.
G H
Engine and Elevator Hours (L): displays accumulated
engine and elevator hours.
Extractor Fan (M): allows operator to customize extractor
fan settings.
Alarms (N): allows operator to customize alarm settings.
I J
K L
T8120001773 —UN—26OCT12
M N
Continued on next page WM05597,0000FC7 -19-10JUL14-1/2
45-3 041717
PN=80
Elevator (O): allows operator to customize elevator

settings. Shows operator if elevator is on or off.
Engine (P): allows operator to customize engine settings.
Base Cutter (Q): shows operator if base cutter is in
forward, reverse, or off. Displayed with base cutter O P
information. If equipped with Contour Base Cutter Height
Control, icon will be green when system is active and gray
when off.
Cooling Fan (R): shows operator if cooling fan is in
forward, reverse, or off.
Chopper (S): displayed with chopper information. Q R
Set Point (T): allows operator to set a desired variable.
Information Alert (U): alerts operator to be aware of a
condition.
and/or
Harvester Activity Monitor (U): displays the Harvester S T
Activity Monitor page.
Service Alert (V): requires machine be stopped at earliest
convenience.
Stop Alarm (W): requires machine be stopped at once
and problem corrected.
U V
T8130000047 —UN—21JAN13
Floating Crop Dividers and Contour Base Cutter
Height Control (X): allows operator to customize Floating
Crop Dividers and Contour Base Cutter Height Control
settings, if equipped. Icon will be green if Floating Crop
Dividers system is active and gray when off. If one side
is active and other is not, the corresponding part of the
icon will be green. W X
WM05597,0000FC7 -19-10JUL14-2/2
Sugarcane—Main Screen
Base cutter height (A), base cutter pressure (B), and
chopper pressure (C) are displayed in graphs.
A—Base Cutter Height C—Chopper Pressure

B—Base Cutter Pressure
T8T1880 —UN—04MAY15
WM05597,0001208 -19-21JAN15-1/1
45-4 041717
PN=81
Lower Region Information
T8T1557 —UN—05NOV14
T8T2432 —UN—28APR15
Lower Region With Key On Lower Region With Engine On
A—Engine Hours E—Elevator Hours H—Contour Base Cutter Height M—Cooling Fan
B—Contour Base Cutter Height F— Automatic FieldCruise™ Control
Control Hours Hours I— Right-Hand Floating Crop
C—Harvesting Hours G—Left-Hand Floating Crop Divider
D—FieldCruise™ Hours Divider J— Primary Extractor
K—Elevator
L— Automatic FieldCruise™
NOTE: With engine running, operator can touch lower

region to toggle between information bars.
• Left-Hand Floating Crop Divider (G)
- Green—ON
- Yellow (Blinking)—Pause State
With key turned on and engine off, lower region displays:
• Contour Base Cutter Height Control (H)
• Engine Hours (A) - Green—ON
• Contour Base Cutter Height Control Hours (B) - Yellow—Return to Cut or End of Row function active
• Harvesting Hours (C) - Yellow (Blinking)—Pause State
• FieldCruise™ Hours (D) • Right-Hand Floating Crop Divider (I)
• Elevator Hours (E) - Green—ON
• Automatic FieldCruise™ Hours (F) - Yellow (Blinking)—Pause State
• Primary Extractor (J)
NOTE: Lower row of lower region can be - Green—ON
configured to display: • Elevator (K)
- Green—ON
• Contour Base Cutter Height Control Hours
- Yellow—Reverse
Automatic FieldCruise™ Hours
- Red (Blinking)—Swing in progress
FieldCruise™ Hours
Waiting Hours NOTE: An arrow indicates which direction the
Maneuvering Hours elevator is swinging.
Transporting Hours
See Configure Lower Region Information in this • Automatic FieldCruise™ (L)
- Green—ON
section for more information.
• Cooling Fan (M)
- Green—ON
With engine turned on, lower region displays if functions
- Yellow—Reverse
are engaged. If engaged, icon has a green background.
Some functions have a yellow background when engaged
in reverse or moving to set points.
WM05597,0001209 -19-18MAY15-1/1
45-5 041717
PN=82
Configure Lower Region Information
T8T3388 —UN—15DEC15
T8T644 —UN—03OCT14
Sugarcane Main Page 2 of 3
A—Sugar Main Softkey C—Lower Region Settings

B—Harvester Activity Monitor Softkey
Softkey
1. Select sugar main softkey (A) until sugarcane main 3. Select lower region settings softkey (C).
page 2 of 3 is displayed as shown.
2. Select harvester activity monitor softkey (B).
WM05597,00013FC -19-15DEC15-1/2
T8T2434 —UN—28APR15
T8T2942 —UN—01SEP15
A—Hour Meter Softkeys (3 used) D—AutoTrac™ Hours (Track F— FieldCruise™ Hours I— Transporting Hours
B—Contour Base Cutter Height Machines) G—Waiting Hours
Control Hours (If Equipped) E—Automatic FieldCruise™ H—Maneuvering Hours
C—Floating Crop Divider Hours Hours
(If Equipped)
4. Select hour meter softkey (A) you wish to replace. • Automatic FieldCruise™ Hours (C)
5. Select desired hour meter (B—G) to replace original.
• FieldCruise™ Hours (D)
Hour meters available:
• Waiting Hours (E)
• Maneuvering Hours (F)
• Contour Base Cutter Height Control Softkey (B) • Transporting Hours (G)
WM05597,00013FC -19-15DEC15-2/2
45-6 041717
PN=83
Configure Detail Machine Information

NOTE: Shows detailed machine information. Allows
operator to configure screen and the ability
to monitor three items at once.
1. Select machine setting softkey (A) you wish to replace.
T8T777 —UN—03OCT14
2. Select scroll up softkey (B) or scroll down softkey (C)
to locate desired machine setting softkey.
3. Select desired machine setting softkey to replace
original.
4. Detailed machine information may show any of the
following:
• Fuel consumed per hour Sugarcane Main Page 2 Of 3
• Engine intercooler temperature
• Optimal operating speed (rpm)
• Engine torque less accessory torque (%)
• Engine load at RPM (%)
• Accelerator pedal position (%)
• Calculated engine torque (%)
• Driver demanded engine torque
• Throttle position (%)
T8T779 —UN—03OCT14
• Engine derate request (seconds)
• Right rear wheel speed
• Left rear wheel speed
• Duty cycle of propulsion pump (%)
• Handle based drive position (%)
• Steering wheel angle (degree)
• Primary propulsion handle position (%) Sugarcane Main Page 3 Of 3
• Secondary propulsion handle position (%)
• Track machine steering bias position
• Elevator speed set point
• Extractor hydraulic pressure
• Extractor speed set point (rpm)
• Extractor smart mode set speed (rpm)
• Requested engine speed (rpm)
• Right base cutter position (%)
• Left base cutter position (%)
• Elevator drive motor speed (rpm)
T8T778 —UN—03OCT14
• Battery power input 1 (volts)
• Wheel based vehicle speed
• Rear feed speed (rpm)
• Rear feed pressure
• Engine intake air temperature
• Engine oil filter pressure
• Fuel delivery pressure
• Fuel temperature
• Engine coolant temperature A—Machine Setting Softkeys C—Scroll Down Softkey
• Left crop divider hydraulic pressure B—Scroll Up Softkey
• Right crop divider hydraulic pressure
• Left floating crop divider hydraulic pressure set point
• Right floating crop divider hydraulic pressure set point • Chopper speed (rpm)
• Left crop divider position (%) • Chopper hydraulic pressure
• Right crop divider position (%) • Base cutter hydraulic pressure
• Extractor fan speed (rpm) • Base cutter speed (rpm)
• Hydraulic oil temperature • Base cutter height set point (%)
• Fuel Level (%) • Base cutter position (%)
WM05597,0001123 -19-27APR15-1/1
45-7 041717
PN=84
T8T1881 —UN—21JAN15
Floating Crop Dividers and Contour Base
Cutter Height Control (If Equipped)
Set Point and Enable Settings (If Equipped)
Height Control Setup Softkey (A)
Allows operator to access Floating Crop Dividers and
Contour Base Cutter Height Control settings.
Left-Hand Floating Crop Divider Settings (B)
Allows operator to change and view set point and enable
float for the left-hand crop divider.
Left-Hand Floating Crop Divider Increase and
T8T2943 —UN—01SEP15
Decrease Softkeys (C)
Allows operator to increase or decrease left-hand floating
crop divider set point. The softkey is backlit green and
allows the set point to be modified when conditions to
enable floating crop divider for the left-hand crop divider
have been satisfied and gray when conditions have not
been met.
NOTE: A single touch is slow advance. A touch cutter values are off, push and hold softkey for two sec.
and hold is quick advance. on consistent ground to calibrate and sync the target to
current position. If calibration is successful, a confirmation
Left-Hand Floating Crop Divider Set Point (D) alarm sounds. To calibrate, Floating Crop Dividers must
Displays set point for the left-hand floating crop divider. be active and machine must be moving forward. For more
information, see Calibrate System in Floating Crop Divider
NOTE: Each crop divider may be set to different set points. and Contour Base Cutter Height Control (If Equipped)
section.
Left-Hand Floating Crop Divider On-Off (E)
Right-Hand Floating Crop Divider Settings (J)
Allows operator to enable floating option on the left-hand
crop divider. Allows operator to change and view set point and enable
float for the right-hand crop divider.
Contour Base Cutter Height Control Settings (F)
Right-Hand Floating Crop Divider Increase and
Allows operator to change, view, and capture target height Decrease Softkeys (K)
set point for contour base cutter height control.
Allows operator to increase or decrease right-hand
Contour Base Cutter Height Control Increase and floating crop divider set point. The softkey is backlit green
Decrease Softkeys (G) and allows the set point to be modified when conditions to
enable floating crop divider for the right-hand crop divider
Allows operator to increase or decrease base cutter have been satisfied and gray when conditions have not
position set point. The softkey is backlit green and allows been met.
the set point to be modified when conditions to enable
the contour base cutter height control system have been NOTE: A single touch is slow advance. A touch
satisfied and gray when conditions have not been met. and hold is quick advance.
NOTE: A single touch is slow advance. A touch Right-Hand Floating Crop Divider Set Point (L)
and hold is quick advance.
Displays set point for the right-hand floating crop divider.
Contour Base Cutter Height Control Set Point (H)
NOTE: Each crop divider may be set to different set points.
Displays set point for contour base cutter height control
position. Right-Hand Floating Crop Divider On-Off (M)
Contour Base Cutter Height Control Target Capture (I) Allows operator to enable floating option on the right-hand
crop divider.
Allows the operator to capture and store the current base
cutter height as the new set point for the contour base Activate All Softkey (N)
cutter height control system. If desired and actual base
Continued on next page AS09261,0000168 -19-18NOV16-1/4
45-8 041717
PN=85
Allows the operator to activate the floating crop divider End of Row Setup Softkey (P)
and contour base cutter control height control systems
with the touch of a button when all enabling conditions Allows operator to access end of the row settings for
have been met. Floating Crop Dividers and Contour Base Cutter Height
Control.
Floating Crop Divider Reset Softkey (O)
Resets floating crop divider pressure percentage to 50%.
AS09261,0000168 -19-18NOV16-2/4
T8T2945 —UN—01SEP15
End of Row Setup (If Equipped)
End of Row Setup Softkey (A)
Allows operator to access end of the row settings for
Floating Crop Dividers and Contour Base Cutter Height
Control.
Left-Hand Crop Divider End of Row Enable (B)
Allows operator to enable left-hand crop divider end of
the row option.
Left-Hand Crop Divider End of Row Set Point Capture
T8T2944 —UN—01SEP15
Softkey (C)
Allows operator to touch and hold softkey to change
left-hand crop divider end of the row set point to current
position.
Contour Base Cutter End of Row Enable (D)
Allows operator to enable base cutter end of the row
option.
Allows operator to enable base cutter return to cut option.
Contour Base Cutter End of Row Set Point Capture
Softkey (E) This target is identical to base cutter set point displayed
on cornerpost display.
Allows operator to touch and hold softkey to change base
cutter end of the row set point to current position. End of Row Set Point Capture All Softkey (I)
Right-Hand Crop Divider End of Row Enable (F) Allows operator to touch and hold softkey to change base
cutter and left-hand and right-hand crop dividers end of
Allows operator to enable right-hand crop divider end of
the row set point to current position.
the row option.
Right-Hand Crop Divider End of Row Set Point
Height Control Setup Softkey (J)
Capture Softkey (G)
Allows operator to return to Floating Crop Dividers and
Allows operator to touch and hold softkey to change
Contour Base Cutter Height Control settings.
right-hand crop divider end of the row set point to current
position. Advanced Setup (K)
Contour Base Cutter Return to Cut Enable (H) Allows operator to access sensitivity settings for Floating
Crop Dividers and Contour Base Cutter Height Control.
NOTE: This must be checked for Contour Base
Cutter Height Control to work.
45-9 041717
PN=86
Advanced Setup (If Equipped)

IMPORTANT: These settings are configured for
optimal machine performance. Adjustments to
these settings may be necessary, depending
on field conditions. Improper adjustment may
negatively affect system performance.
Floating Crop Divider Resume Enable Box (A)
T8T5042 —UN—18NOV16
Allow operator to enable (checkmark) or disable (no
checkmark) resume function of floating crop dividers after
they have been manually raised. Crop divider will resume
float function after five sec. when enabled.
Floating Crop Dividers Sensitivity Meter (B)
Displays sensitivity for right-hand and left-hand floating
crop dividers.
Floating Crop Dividers Sensitivity Decrease Softkey NOTE: Default time is 5 sec.
(C)
Base Cutter Position Resume Timer Decrease Softkey
Allows operator to decrease floating crop dividers (J)
sensitivity.
Allows operator to decrease time before system
Floating Crop Dividers Sensitivity Increase Softkey (D) reacquires target position.
Allows operator to increase floating crop dividers Base Cutter Position Resume Timer Increase Softkey
sensitivity. (K)
Base Cutter Pressure Target Range Enable Box (E) Allows operator to increase time before system reacquires
Allows operator to enable (checkmark) or disable (no target position.
checkmark) base cutter pressure target range. Contour Contour Base Cutter Height Sensitivity Meter (L)
base cutter height control system operates off position
only when disabled. Displays base cutter height sensitivity to changes in the
position of floating crop dividers.
Base Cutter Pressure Resume Timer Meter (F)
Contour Base Cutter Height Sensitivity Decrease
Displays time in seconds before system attempts to Softkey (M)
reacquire target position when enabled. Adjustable 5—15
sec. Allows operator to decrease base cutter height sensitivity.
NOTE: Default time is 10 sec. Contour Base Cutter Height Sensitivity Increase
Softkey (N)
Base Cutter Pressure Resume Timer Decrease
Softkey (G) Allows operator to increase base cutter height sensitivity.
Allows operator to decrease time before system attempts Floating Crop Dividers and Contour Base Cutter
to reacquire target position. Height Control Setup Softkey (O)
Base Cutter Pressure Resume Timer Increase Softkey Allows operator to return to Floating Crop Dividers and
(H) Contour Base Cutter Height Control settings.
Allows operator to increase time before system attempts Information Softkey (P)
to reacquire target position. Allows operator to access additional information for
Base Cutter Position Resume Timer Meter (I) desired setting.
Displays time in seconds before base cutter will reacquire Advanced Setup Reset Softkey (Q)
target position after being manually raised or lowered. Resets advanced settings to defaults.
Adjustable 2—8 sec.
AS09261,0000168 -19-18NOV16-4/4
45-10 041717
PN=87
Alarm and Operator Controls Setup

Select sugar main softkey (A) until sugarcane main page
2 of 3 is displayed as shown.
Select alarm and operator controls setup softkey (B).
A—Sugar Main Softkey B—Alarm and Operator
T8T784 —UN—03OCT14
Controls Setup Softkey
Sugarcane Main Page 2 Of 3
WM05597,000139D -19-31AUG15-1/4
Configurable Controls Enable (A)

Allows operator to enable configurable controls on
multi-function lever and armrest console.
1, 2, 3, A, and B Switches (B—F)
Configurable switches are assignable to control:
• All On
• Base Cutter Return to Cut
T8T1885 —UN—21JAN15
• Floating Crop Divider Float
• Left-hand Crop Divider Float
• Right-hand Crop Divider Float
• Base Cutter End of Row
• Crop Divider End of Row
• Base Cutter Target Height Up Indicator
• Base Cutter Target Height Down Indicator
• Topper Discharge Direction Toggle
• Manual Fan Reversal • Base Cutter Height Set Point
• App Toggle • Base Cutter Pressure Set Point
• Primary Hood Rotate Counterclockwise • Elevator Speed Set Point
• Primary Hood Rotate Clockwise
• Track Steer Bias Toggle Alarm Setup Softkey (H)
• All End of row Allows operator to access alarm setup page.
• Base Cutter Set Point Capture
P1 Dial (G) Page Timeout Settings Softkey (I)
P1 dial is assignable to control: Allows operator to access page timeout settings page.
• Primary Extractor Speed Set Point

Continued on next page WM05597,000139D -19-31AUG15-2/4
45-11 041717
PN=88
Chopper High-Pressure Alarm Enable (A)

Allows operator to enable chopper high-pressure alarm.
Chopper High-Pressure Set Point (B)
Allows operator to set chopper high-pressure alarm set
point.
T8T1886 —UN—21JAN15
Chopper High-Pressure Alarm Frequency (C)
Allows operator to set frequency before alarm sounds
when chopper high-pressure set point is exceeded.
Base Cutter High-Pressure Alarm Enable (D)
Allows operator to enable base cutter high-pressure alarm.
Base Cutter High-Pressure Set Point (E)
Operator Controls Setup Softkey (G)
Allows operator to set base cutter high-pressure alarm
Allows operator to access operator controls setup page.
set point.
Base Cutter High-Pressure Alarm Frequency (F)
Allows operator to set frequency before alarm sounds
when base cutter high-pressure set point is exceeded.
WM05597,000139D -19-31AUG15-3/4
The operator can enable a page timeout for selected

settings pages.
Pages (A) that can be selected:
• Primary Extractor
T8T787 —UN—11JUL14
• Drivetrain Control
• Elevator
• Engine
• Floating Crop Dividers and Contour Base Cutter Height
Control
• End of Row
• Floating Crop Dividers and Contour Base Cutter Height
Control Sensitivity
• Maximum Harvester Speed
• Operator Controls
• Harvester Activity Monitor
• Alarms
Select enable box (B) for desired page (A) to enable
desired page timeout set point (C).
Select enable all box (D) to enable or disable all page T8T788 —UN—28APR15
timeouts.
A—Page C—Page Timeout Set point

B—Enable Box D—Enable All Box
WM05597,000139D -19-31AUG15-4/4
45-12 041717
PN=89
Primary Extractor Screen
T8T2939 —UN—01SEP15
T8T672 —UN—03OCT14
Primary extractor fan speed is maintained regardless of
engine rpm or hydraulic oil temperature when set within
normal operating range (600—900 rpm).
T8T2940 —UN—01SEP15
Select primary extractor softkey (B).
Select fan speed graph (C) and touch corresponding
plus (+) or minus (-) softkeys to increase or decrease fan
speed rpm set point (D). Fan speed may also be adjusted
by selecting increase fan speed softkey (I) or decrease
fan speed softkey (J).
NOTE: A single select is slow advance. A select
and hold is quick advance. A—Sugar Main Softkey H—Low End Fan Speed Limit
B—Primary Extractor Softkey I— Increase Fan Speed Softkey
Select high end fan speed limit softkey (E) and touch C—Graph J— Decrease Fan Speed
corresponding plus (+) or minus (-) softkey to increase or D—Fan Speed rpm Set Point Softkey
E—High End Fan Speed Limit K—Checkbox
decrease high end fan speed limit (F). Softkey L— Smart Power Mode Set
F— High End Fan Speed Limit Point
Select low end fan speed limit softkey (G) and touch G—Low End Fan Speed Limit M—Checkbox
corresponding plus (+) or minus (-) softkey to increase or Softkey
decrease low end fan speed limit (H).
Select smart mode enable checkbox (K) to allow primary
speed to lower to set point when elevator is turned off. Select checkbox (M) to enable elevator swing/hood
Select smart mode set point (L) to adjust smart power synchronization.
mode rpm.
AS09261,00000AD -19-12SEP16-1/1
45-13 041717
PN=90
Engine Setup Screen
T8T671 —UN—03OCT14
T8T4785 —UN—07SEP16
Engine Configuration Screen

Automatic FieldCruise™ keeps engine speed at 2000
rpm until the harvester needs more power. When power
is needed, the engine speed is increased to 2210 rpm.
Engine speed is automatically increased and decreased
as needed.
1. Select sugar main softkey (A) until sugarcane main
T8T2806 —UN—16JUN15
2. Select engine information softkey (B).
3. Select checkbox (C) to enable Automatic
FieldCruise™.
4. Select checkbox (D) to enable Manual FieldCruise™.
NOTE: Set point is modified by selecting (+) or
A—Sugar Main Softkey E—Manual FieldCruise™ Set
(-) softkey on screen. B—Engine Information Softkey Point
C—Checkbox F— Mid Idle Set Point
5. Select Manual FieldCruise™ set point (E) to modify. D—Checkbox G—Engine Speed Switches (3
used)
6. Select mid idle set point (F) to modify. H—Not Used
7. Press corresponding engine speed switch (G) to

engage desired engine speed. FieldCruise™ and Manual FieldCruise™ using
NOTE: If checkboxes (C and D) are both checked, engine speed switches (G).
operator can toggle between Automatic
Continued on next page AS09261,00000C8 -19-17OCT16-1/2
45-14 041717
PN=91
Auto Idle
T8T671 —UN—03OCT14
T8T4784 —UN—07SEP16
NOTE: Auto idle reduces engine rpm when the

multi-function lever is placed in the neutral position.
Auto idle must be turned on and the timer set.
1. Select the sugar main softkey (A) until the sugar cane
main page 2/3 is displayed as shown.
2. Select the engine information softkey (B).
3. Select the enable auto idle softkey (C). Checkmark
T8T4626 —UN—10AUG16
appears when activated.
4. Select the auto idle timer softkey (D).
5. The numerical keypad is displayed. Select the auto
idle activation time in seconds from the numeric
softkeys (E).
NOTE: Selectable range is 0--200 s.
6. If an incorrect number is entered, use the delete A—Sugar Main Softkey E—Numeric Softkey
softkey (F) to delete the selection. B—Engine Information Softkey F— Delete Softkey
C—Enable Auto Idle Softkey G—Accept Softkey
7. When the correct value is entered, press the accept D—Auto Idle Timer Softkey
softkey (G).
NOTE: When machine is in neutral or the parking 8. The screen returns to the engine configuration screen,
brake is engaged, the engine will enter a low and the auto idle selected value is displayed.
idle after the specified dwell time.
NOTE: Settings can be locked to avoid any
When the parking brake is disengaged and the alterations by the operator.
multi-function lever moved to the forward or
reverse position, the engine rpm is automatically
increased to previous speed.
AS09261,00000C8 -19-17OCT16-2/2
45-15 041717
PN=92
Maximum Harvester Speed and Steering Aggressiveness (Track Machines Only)
T8T674 —UN—03OCT14
T8T675 —UN—04MAY15
Select drivetrain control softkey (B).
Select maximum harvester speed setup softkey (C).
Select checkbox (D) to activate or deactivate maximum
harvester speed. Checkmark appears when activated.
Select maximum harvesting speed (E) to set maximum
T8T4677 —UN—18AUG16
ground speed when base cutter is active.
NOTE: The truck loading mode discards the
aggressiveness settings and uses its own value
for less aggressive steering.
Selecting (F) increases the aggressiveness values for

normal steering operation.
Selecting (G) decreases the aggressiveness values for A—Sugar Main Softkey F— Increase Normal Steering
normal steering operation. B—Drivetrain Control Softkey Operation Softkey
C—Maximum Harvester Speed G—Decrease Normal Steering
Selecting (H) increases the aggressiveness values for Setup Softkey Operation Softkey
counterrotation steering operation. D—Checkbox H—Increase Counterrotation
E—Maximum Harvesting Steering Operation Softkey
Selecting (I) decreases the aggressiveness values for Speed I— Decrease Counterrotation
counterrotation steering operation. Steering Operation Softkey
NOTE: The aggressiveness settings can be locked

from the access manager application to protect
settings from being altered.
AS09261,00000B6 -19-12OCT16-1/1
45-16 041717
PN=93
Track Steer Bias (Track Machines Only)
T8T674 —UN—03OCT14
T8T677 —UN—04MAY15

Select drivetrain control softkey (B).
Select left steer bias softkey (C) or right steer bias
softkey (D) to adjust steer bias as desired. Steer bias is
T8T1569 —UN—25NOV14
represented as a graph (E) and a number.
NOTE: Negative numbers indicate left steer bias. Positive
numbers indicate right steer bias.
A single select is slow advance. A select
Select checkbox (F) to enable track steer bias. Steer bias

set point 1 (G) is displayed. A—Sugar Main Softkey F— Checkbox
B—Drivetrain Control Softkey G—Steer Bias Set Point 1
Select checkbox (H) to enable track steer bias set point 2. C—Left Steer Bias Softkey H—Checkbox
Steer bias set point 1 (I) is displayed. D—Right Steer Bias Softkey I— Steer Bias Set Point 2
E—Steer Bias Graph J— Propulsion Encoder
NOTE: Operator cycles between set point 1 and set point
2 with configurable switch on multi-function lever.
Track steer bias may also be adjusted by
propulsion encoder (J) on armrest.
AS09261,00000B5 -19-18AUG16-1/1
45-17 041717
PN=94
Varitorque (Wheel Machines Only)
T8T1534 —UN—27OCT14
T8T1535 —UN—04MAY15
NOTE: Machine must be in medium travel speed
to use varitorque adjustment.
1. Select sugar main softkey (A) until sugarcane main

2. Select drivetrain control softkey (B).
T8T1561 —UN—25NOV14
3. Select varitorque graph (C) and touch corresponding
plus (+) or minus (-) softkey to increase or decrease
varitorque percentage.
NOTE: Varitorque may also be adjusted by propulsion
encoder (D) on armrest or selecting decrease or
increase varitorque percentage softkey (E or F).
A single select is slow advance. A select A—Sugar Main Softkey D—Propulsion Encoder
and hold is quick advance. B—Drivetrain Control Softkey E—Decrease Varitorque
C—Varitorque Graph Percentage Softkey
F— Increase Varitorque
Percentage Softkey
WM05597,00010E8 -19-04MAY15-1/1
45-18 041717
PN=95
Elevator Screen
T8T1301 —UN—03OCT14
T8T2941 —UN—01SEP15
A—Sugar Main Softkey D—Elevator Swing Control Offset G—Reduced Elevator Speed I— Increase Elevator Speed
B—Elevator Setup Softkey E—Checkbox Graph Softkey
C—Checkbox F— Checkbox H—Decrease Elevator Speed
Softkey
Select sugar main softkey (A) until sugarcane main page To perform an elevator swing:
Select elevator setup softkey (B) to access setup page.
• Base cutter must be engaged in forward direction.
• Checkbox (C) must be marked.
• Press desired elevator swing switch on multi-function
lever twice (double-click) to perform an elevator swing.
Elevator Swing Control
Select check box (C) to enable elevator swing control.
Reduced Elevator Speed Mode (If Equipped)
Select elevator swing control offset (D) to adjust the
default elevator swing control. Select checkbox (F) to activate reduced elevator speed
mode.
• The default elevator swing control is approximately 1/4
of a turn. Select reduced elevator speed graph (G) to adjust
• The elevator swing control offset may be adjusted (+) or elevator speed.
(-) by selecting the corresponding softkey. NOTE: Elevator speed is modified by selecting plus (+) or
Adjusting the offset with the (+) softkey increases minus (-) softkey on screen or selecting decrease
distance the elevator swings. Adjusting the offset with or increase elevator speed softkey (H or I).
the (-) softkey decreases distance the elevator swings.
A single select is slow advance. A select
NOTE: Elevator swing control has a range of -3.0—3.0. and hold is quick advance.
Select checkbox (E) to enable an audible alert when
elevator swing control is occurring.
WM05597,000139F -19-01SEP15-1/1
45-19 041717
PN=96
Harvester Activity Monitor

Select harvester activity monitor softkey (B).
A—Sugar Main Softkey B—Harvester Activity Monitor
T8T644 —UN—03OCT14
Softkey
WM05597,00013F4 -19-15DEC15-1/2
Harvester Activity Monitor records accumulated hours (A),

accumulated distance (B), hours since last reset (C), and
distance since last reset (D) for:
• Harvester Engine Hours (E)
• Harvesting (F)
• Headland Maneuver (G)
T8T3389 —UN—15DEC15
• Road Travel (H)
• Waiting (I)
Elevator hours (J) are also displayed on this page.
Hours since last reset (C) and distance since last reset
(D) is cleared by selecting and holding reset softkey (K)
for two sec.
NOTE: Harvester activity monitor logs data to a
universal serial bus (USB) drive as long as A—Accumulated Hours G—Headland Maneuver
B—Accumulated Distance H—Road Travel
it is connected to USB port. C—Hours since last reset I— Waiting
D—Distance since last reset J— Elevator Hours
E—Harvester Engine Hours K—Reset Softkey
F— Harvesting
Type Conditions
E Harvester Engine Hours • Engine On
• Base Cutter On
F Harvesting • Base Cutter Pressure greater than low-pressure limit
• Vehicle speed greater than 0.2 km/h (0.124 mph)
• Base Cutter On
G Headland Maneuvera • Base Cutter Pressure less than low-pressure limit
• Base Cutter OFF
H Road Travel
I Waiting Harvester - (Harvesting + Headland Maneuver + Road Travel)
a
If harvesting functions switch is disengaged or harvesting functions quick stop switch is pressed, this time is counted toward road travel.
WM05597,00013F4 -19-15DEC15-2/2
45-20 041717
PN=97
Shift Configuration
T8T3390 —UN—15DEC15
T8T644 —UN—03OCT14
Sugarcane Main Page 2 of 3
A—Sugar Main Softkey B—Harvester Activity Monitor

Softkey
Harvester activity monitor data is split by start of day and Select harvester activity monitor softkey (B).
shift times.
AS09261,000016E -19-21NOV16-1/2
T8T3521 —UN—15DEC15
A—Start of Day Time C—Shift Times (3 used) E—Shift Graph

B—Checkboxes (3 used) D—Current Time F— Harvester Activity Monitor
Softkey
Set start of day time (A) to desired setting. Logged data Current time (D) is indicated on shift graph (E). Shift graph
is split at start of day time. represents selected shift times.
Select checkbox (B) to enable shift logging for desired shift Select harvester activity monitor softkey (F) to return to
or shifts. Set appropriate shift times (C) for desired shifts. harvester activity monitor page.
AS09261,000016E -19-21NOV16-2/2
45-21 041717
PN=98
Adjust Row Width
T8T5046 —UN—21NOV16
T8T5047 —UN—21NOV16
A—Row Width Adjustment B—Numeric Softkey D—Accept Softkey
Softkey C—Delete Softkey
1. Select the row width adjustment softkey (A). 4. When the correct value is entered, press the accept
2. The numerical keypad is displayed. Select the row softkey (D).
width in meters from the numeric softkeys (B).
3. If an incorrect number is entered, use the delete
softkey (C) to delete the selection.
AS09261,0000171 -19-30NOV16-1/1
45-22 041717
PN=99
Download Harvester Activity Monitor Data

Harvester activity monitor logs data to a universal serial
bus (USB) drive as long as it is connected to USB port (A).
NOTE:
• Harvester activity monitor data is saved in a
T8T1879 —UN—16JAN15
.csv file that opens in a spreadsheet.
• When key is cycled, it makes a new line
of data in the .csv file.
• If USB drive is not connected when the machine
is started, then the data log is one set of data
when USB drive is connected.
Harvester Activity Monitor data included in .csv file:

A—USB Port
• Index
• Date
• Time • AutoTrac™ Hours
• Shift number • Floating Crop Divider Hours
• User ID • Contour Base Cutter Height Control Hours
• GPS Latitude • Automatic FieldCruise™ Hours
• GPS Longitude • FieldCruise™ Hours
• Area Harvested (hectares) • Stop Diagnostic Trouble Code Counts
• Fuel Level % • Derate Diagnostic Trouble Code Counts
• Harvesting Distance (km) IMPORTANT: The two USB connections in the
• Maneuvering Distance (km) display are meant for data transfer and
• Transport Distance (km) reprogramming only. Do not use them for
• Fuel consumed Harvesting (L) charging or any other purpose.
• Fuel consumed Maneuvering (L)
• Fuel consumed Transporting (L) NOTE: Universal serial bus (USB) drive must be
• Fuel consumed Waiting (L) formatted in FAT32 filesystem.
• Harvesting Time Hours
• Headland Maneuver Time Hours 1. Connect a universal serial bus (USB) drive to USB
• Transport Time Hours port (A).
• Waiting Time Hours
• Off Time Hours
Continued on next page WM05597,00013F5 -19-09DEC15-1/2
45-23 041717
PN=100
T8T2555 —UN—18MAY15
T8T2556 —UN—18MAY15
T8T2557 —UN—18MAY15
T8T2558 —UN—18MAY15
2. Select export data softkey (A).
3. Select a current profile (B) or create a new profile (C).
4. If applicable, use on-screen keyboard to type a profile
name and select accept softkey (D).
5. Select begin transfer softkey (E). Select accept softkey
(F).
A—Export Data Softkey D—Accept Softkey
T8T2559 —UN—18MAY15
B—Current Profile E—Begin Transfer Softkey
C—New Profile F— Accept Softkey
WM05597,00013F5 -19-09DEC15-2/2
45-24 041717
PN=101
Diagnostics
T8T641 —UN—19JUN14
T8T678 —UN—08JUL14
Diagnostic Readings Page
1. Select diagnostics switch (A) to reach diagnostic
readings page.
2. Select calibration softkey (B) to reach calibrations
page.
3. Select diagnostics softkey (C) to return to diagnostic
readings page.
A—Diagnostic Switch C—Diagnostic Softkey

B—Calibration Softkey
T8T679 —UN—08JUL14
Calibrations Page
WM05597,000112B -19-14NOV14-1/1
Diagnostics—Readings
1. Select diagnostic category selection (A) to choose
what readings to view.
2. Select accept softkey (B) to display readings.
A—Diagnostic Category B—Accept Softkey

Selection
T8T680 —UN—08JUL14
WM05597,000112C -19-14NOV14-1/1
45-25 041717
PN=102
Diagnostics—Calibrations
NOTE: Calibrations are done using instructions
shown on screen. Operator selects which
calibration and highlights calibrate softkey, and
is guided through procedure.
1. Select calibration category selection (A) to choose

what to calibrate.
2. Select accept softkey (B) to begin calibration.
T8T751 —UN—08JUL14
A—Calibration Category B—Accept Softkey
Selection
WM05597,000112D -19-14NOV14-1/1
Brightness Level and Boundary Box Color

T8120001781 —UN—09OCT12 H95849 —UN—31MAR10
Display
Settings Softkey
Select main menu softkey. Select display settings softkey.
Continued on next page WM05597,00013FB -19-14DEC15-1/4
45-26 041717
PN=103
Brightness Level:
T8T752 —UN—08JUL14
T8T753 —UN—08JUL14
A—Bar Graph D—Day/Night Softkey F— Checkbox J— Enter/Accept Softkey
B—Decrease Softkey E—Advanced Backlighting G—Decrease Softkey
C—Increase Softkey Settings Softkey H—Increase Softkey
I— Cancel Softkey
Allows operator to control brightness level of screen. Select advanced backlighting settings softkey (E) to
Brightness is displayed on bar graph (A). advance to next screen.
Select decrease softkey (B) or increase softkey (C) to Select checkbox (F) to toggle synchronization with cab
select brightness level of screen. backlighting.
• Increase brightness bar graph to brighten screen. • Checked—synchronizes screen and cab backlighting
• Decrease brightness bar graph to darken screen. together.
• Unchecked—screen and cab backlighting work
Day/Night Settings: independently from each other.
NOTE: Day/Night softkey only appears in Select decrease softkey (G) or increase softkey (H) to
standalone mode. select balance level of screen.
Allows operator to toggle between day or night settings. • Increase bar graph to brighten backlighting.
• Decrease bar graph to darken backlighting.
Select day/night softkey (D) to toggle between day or
night settings. NOTE: Select cancel softkey (I) to clear balance levels.
Sync With Cab/Standalone Modes: Select enter/accept softkey (J) to return to previous screen.
Allows operator to synchronize screen with cab lighting or

allows screen to work independently from cab lighting.
Continued on next page WM05597,00013FB -19-14DEC15-2/4
45-27 041717
PN=104
Alarm Volume Setting:

Allows operator to set a desired alarm volume.
Select decrease softkey (A) or increase softkey (B) to
adjust alarm volume.
• Increase bar graph to increase alarm volume.
• Decrease bar graph to decrease alarm volume.
A—Decrease Softkey B—Increase Softkey
T8T754 —UN—08JUL14
WM05597,00013FB -19-14DEC15-3/4
Boundary Box Color Settings:

Allows operator to choose color of boundary box.
NOTE: Color defaults to red at initial power-up of screen.
Select desired color box.

• Green (A)
• Blue (B)
• Red (C)
T8T755 —UN—08JUL14
Box displays a checkmark indicating which color was
selected.
A—Green Highlight C—Red Highlight

B—Blue Highlight
WM05597,00013FB -19-14DEC15-4/4
Regional Settings, Languages, Time/Date Settings, Units of Measurement

T8120001781 —UN—09OCT12 H95849 —UN—31MAR10
Display
Settings Softkey
Continued on next page WM05597,000112F -19-06JAN15-1/4
45-28 041717
PN=105
Regional Menu Settings:

Select settings softkey (A) and regional settings tab (B)
Select desired menu:
• Country Menu (C)
• Language Menu (D)
• Numeric Format Menu (E)
• Units Menu (F)
Select desired choice from menu.
T8T756 —UN—08JUL14
A—Settings Softkey D—Language Menu
B—Regional Settings Tab E—Numeric Format Menu
C—Country Menu F— Units Menu
WM05597,000112F -19-06JAN15-2/4
Time/ Date Settings:

Select settings softkey (A) and time/date tab (B).
NOTE: If a Global Position Satellite (GPS) position receiver
is detected, checkbox appears and GPS date and
time is available automatically from receiver.
If no position receiver is detected, date and
time must be entered manually.
T8T757 —UN—08JUL14
• Date Menu (C)
• Date Format Menu (D)
• Time Menu (E)
• 24 Hour Box (F)
• Daylight Savings Time Box (G)
• Greenwich Mean Time Offset (H)
• Local Offset (I) A—Settings Softkey F— 24 Hour Box
• GPS Time Sync Box(J) B—Time/Date Tab G—Daylight Savings Time Box
C—Date Menu (Month, Day, H—GMT (Greenwich Mean
NOTE: Year) Time) Offset
D—Date Format Menu I— Local Offset
• Checked—time is displayed as military E—Time Menu (Hours, Minutes, J— GPS Time Sync Box
time (24 hour clock). and a.m or p.m.)
• Unchecked—time is displayed in standard
time (12 hour clock).
Continued on next page WM05597,000112F -19-06JAN15-3/4
45-29 041717
PN=106
Units of Measure Settings:

Select settings softkey (A) and units of measure tab (B).
• Distance Menu (C)
• Area Menu (D)
• Volume Menu (E)
• Mass Menu (F)
• Temperature Menu (G)
T8T758 —UN—08JUL14
• Pressure Menu (H)
• Force Menu (I)
Select desired choice from menu.
A—Settings Softkey F— Mass Menu

B—Units of Measure Tab G—Temperature Menu
C—Distance Menu H—Pressure Menu
D—Area Menu I— Force Menu
E—Volume Menu
WM05597,000112F -19-06JAN15-4/4
Diagnostic Readings, About, Display Tests

T8120001781 —UN—09OCT12 H95849 —UN—31MAR10
Display
Settings Softkey
WM05597,0001130 -19-14NOV14-1/4
Diagnostic Readings:
Select diagnostics softkey (A) and readings tab (B).
Screen displays the following:
• Unswitched Voltage
• Switched Voltage
• CAN High Voltage (Vehicle Bus)
• CAN High Voltage (Implement Bus)
• CAN Low Voltage (Vehicle Bus)
• CAN Low Voltage (Implement Bus) T8T759 —UN—09JUL14
• Display Operation Hours

• USB Present
NOTE: Universal Serial Bus (USB) connector is
located under armrest. Connector is used
for basic diagnostic readings and to transfer
data. Do not plug phone or audio devices
into this connector. This connector is NOT A—Diagnostics Softkey B—Readings Tab
for charging consumer devices.
Continued on next page WM05597,0001130 -19-14NOV14-2/4
45-30 041717
PN=107
About Menu:
Select diagnostics softkey (A) and about tab (B).
• Copyright Information
• Software and Hardware Information
- Hardware Part Number
- Hardware Serial Number
- Software Part Number
T8T760 —UN—09JUL14
- Software Version Number
- Application Build Number
A—Diagnostics Softkey B—About Tab
WM05597,0001130 -19-14NOV14-3/4
Display Tests:
Select diagnostics softkey (A) and tests tab (B).
Display Color Test:
Select color test softkey (C).
• Display tests color of screen (diagram appears with red,
blue, and green).
• If you do not see test colors, see your John Deere dealer.
T8T761 —UN—09JUL14
Touchscreen Test:
Select touchscreen test softkey (D).
• Test allows operator to identify pixel problems on screen.
a. When screen is touched a sighting target appears on
area touched.
b. Continue to touch screen around area of suspected
pixel malfunction and see if sighting target appears.
A—Diagnostics Softkey D—Touchscreen Test Softkey
c. If sighting target does not appear, see your John B—Tests Tab E—Touchscreen Calibration
Deere dealer. C—Color Test Softkey Softkey
Touchscreen Calibration:
Select touchscreen calibration softkey (E). NOTE: Touchscreen calibration cancels any saved
1. Another screen appears with an X in upper right corner. calibrations and allows operator to start over
2. Press screen at X and continue to follow Xs around and perform a new calibration.
screen. Always press screen directly at center of X.
WM05597,0001130 -19-14NOV14-4/4
45-31 041717
PN=108
Message Center Application

T8120001781 —UN—09OCT12 H95846 —UN—31MAR10
Message Center Application Softkey
Select main menu softkey. Select message center softkey.

Continued on next page AS09261,00000AE -19-11OCT16-1/2
45-32 041717
PN=109
Message Center Softkey (A):

Select message center softkey.
Displays messages or active trouble codes to operator
if any are available.
Diagnostic Address Softkey (B):
NOTE: If equipped with optional GreenStar™ 3 2630
Display, do not attempt to access diagnostic address
T8T762 —UN—09JUL14
information on both displays at the same time.
Select diagnostic address softkey.

Allows operator to select desired control units and make
address modifications/changes or view addresses (see
your John Deere Dealer).
Diagnostic Trouble Codes Softkey (C):
NOTE: If equipped with optional GreenStar™ 3 2630
Display, do not attempt to access diagnostic trouble
codes on both displays at the same time.
Select diagnostic trouble codes softkey.

Allows operator to view control units, trouble code
addresses, code (active or not), and counts how many
times codes are displayed (see Accessing Diagnostic
T8T4651 —UN—12AUG16
Trouble Code Menu in Diagnostic Trouble Codes Section
for further information).
Electronic Control Unit Information (ECU) Softkey (D):
Select electronic control unit information softkey.
Allows operator to view control units, addresses, message
counts, control unit part numbers and serial numbers,
software part numbers and versions (see your John Deere
Dealer). Notification Pop-Ups (F):
CAN Bus Information Softkey (E): Notifications are information Diagnostic Trouble Codes
(DTC) that will popup at the bottom of the screen without
Select CAN bus information softkey. covering the entire page.
Allows operator to view if network status is active or Notifications can be manually acknowledged by pressing
not active, total message counts, and CAN high or low accept softkey (G) on the notification popup.
voltages (see your John Deere Dealer).
AS09261,00000AE -19-11OCT16-2/2
45-33 041717
PN=110
Layout Manager Application

T8120001781 —UN—09OCT12 H95850 —UN—31MAR10
Layout Manager
Application Softkey
Select main menu softkey. Select layout manager softkey.
WM05597,0001132 -19-17NOV14-1/2
Home Page Region Setup:

Allows operator to show different home pages.
Select region menu (A).
• Page 1
• Page 2
• Page 3
• Page 4
T8T763 —UN—09JUL14
• Page 5
Select desired home page.
Select desired home page layout (B).
Select desired area from home page region (C).
Choose desired home page area from available options.
A—Region Menu D—Include in Home Page
Select include in home page collection box (D). B—Home Page Layouts Collection Box
C—Home Page Region E—Cancel Softkey
• Checked - selected home page is included in home F— Accept Softkey
page cycle.
• Unchecked - selected home page is not included in
home page cycle. Select cancel softkey (E) to cancel layout manager setup.
NOTE: Select home softkey on any screen to cycle Select accept softkey (F) to accept layout manager setup.
through selected home pages.
WM05597,0001132 -19-17NOV14-2/2
Access Manager Application

T8120001781 —UN—09OCT12 H95852 —UN—31MAR10
Access Manager
Application Softkey
Select main menu softkey. Select layout manager softkey.
Continued on next page WM05597,0001133 -19-23FEB15-1/4
45-34 041717
PN=111
Access Level Settings:

Allows owner of machine to lock/unlock certain
features. If feature is locked, only the owner is able
to make changes/adjustments. If feature is unlocked,
both the owner and operator are able to make
changes/adjustments.
Select access level menu (A).
NOTE: Must be in owner mode to lock/unlock application
(B). Password is required when changing from
operator mode back to owner mode.
• Operator Mode - certain changes/adjustments are

made available when set by owner.
T8T766 —UN—09JUL14
• Owner Mode - determines which changes/adjustments
are made available to operators.
Select desired access level.
Change Password:
Allows owner of machine to set password preventing
operator from making changes/adjustments previously
set by owner.
NOTE: If password is lost or forgotten, see your John
Deere dealer for further information.
Select change password softkey (C).

Select digits from calculator to enter into password menu
(D).
T8T767 —UN—09JUL14
NOTE: Select back arrow softkey (E) to delete
digits if a mistake is made.
Select cancel softkey (F) to cancel and return
to previous screen.
Select enter/accept softkey (G).

A—Access Level Menu E—Back Arrow Softkey
B—Application F— Cancel Softkey
C—Change Password Softkey G—Enter/Accept Softkey
D—Password Menu
Continued on next page WM05597,0001133 -19-23FEB15-2/4
45-35 041717
PN=112
Lock/Unlock Applications:
Allows owner the ability to lock or unlock certain features.
When locked only certain features are made visible to
operator.
Select up or down arrow softkey (A) to scroll through
different applications:
• GreenStar
• Performance Monitor
• Sugarcane
• Display
• Layout Manager
Select desired application (B).
A—Up and Down Arrow B—Application
T8T768 —UN—09JUL14
Softkeys
T8T769 —UN—09JUL14 WM05597,0001133 -19-23FEB15-3/4
T8T770 —UN—09JUL14
A—Up and Down Arrow Softkeys C—Minus Softkey E—Cancel Softkey
B—Plus Softkey D—Lock and Unlock Softkey F— Accept Softkey
Select up or down arrow softkeys (A) to scroll through

application subfunctions. • Lock Softkey—operator is not able to make
changes or adjustments. Owner is only able
Select plus softkey (B) (expands subfunction) or minus to make changes or adjustments.
softkey (C) (collapses subfunction). • Unlock Softkey—both owner and operator are
able to make changes or adjustments.
Select desired subfunction.
NOTE: Subfunction toggles between lock and Repeat as needed for remaining applications.
unlock softkey (D). NOTE: Select cancel softkey (E) to cancel changes
Gray lock means that only some subfunctions and return to previous screen.
are locked.
Select accept softkey (F).
WM05597,0001133 -19-23FEB15-4/4
45-36 041717
PN=113
Operating the Engine
Avoid Hot Exhaust
Servicing machine or attachments with engine running
can result in serious personal injury. Avoid exposure and
skin contact with hot exhaust gases and components.
Exhaust parts and streams become very hot during
RG17488 —UN—21AUG09
operation. Exhaust gases and components reach
temperatures hot enough to burn people, ignite, or melt
common materials.
DX,EXHAUST -19-20AUG09-1/1
Access the Engine Compartment

IMPORTANT: Engine cannot be started when left-hand
engine compartment door is open.
If engine is running, opening left-hand
door shuts OFF engine.
T8T2430 —UN—24APR15
1. Open latch (A) to release engine compartment door
(B).
2. Open door, pull door lock (C) upwards, and swing lock
into hole in door.
A—Latch C—Door Lock Right-Hand Side Of Machine Shown

B—Door
WM05597,0001399 -19-27AUG15-1/1
Battery Disconnect Switch

Battery Disconnect Switch (A)—Disconnects harvester
batteries from electrical system. Turn switch OFF before
performing any service, maintenance, or cleaning.
NOTE: Turn battery disconnect switch OFF if machine
T8T1990 —UN—03FEB15
is stored longer than 25 days. If storage period
is longer than 90 days, remove negative lead to
batteries to minimize load to batteries.
A—Battery Disconnect Switch
WM05597,00013AF -19-10SEP15-1/1
50-1 041717
PN=114
Engine Idling incomplete fuel combustion, and permits formation of

gummy deposits on valves, pistons, and piston rings. It
IMPORTANT: Avoid excessive engine idling. If also promotes rapid accumulation of engine sludge and
an engine will be idling for more than 5 unburned fuel in the exhaust system.
minutes, stop and restart later.
Once an engine is warmed to normal operating
Prolonged idling may cause the engine coolant temperatures it should be idled at slow idle speed. Factory
temperature to fall below its normal range. Low coolant standard for slow idle speed is 850 rpm.
temperature can cause crankcase oil dilution, due to
MB22538,000008A -19-06SEP13-1/1
Start the Engine

When the engine starts, release the key so that it
CAUTION: Avoid possible injury or death from returns to the ON position.
a runaway machine. DO NOT start engine by 6. After the engine starts, check all gauges and warning
shorting across starter terminals. lights for normal operation. If operation is not normal,
stop the engine and determine the cause.
Machine starts in gear if normal starting circuitry is 7. Let engine idle for 3—5 minutes before increasing
bypassed. Start engine only from the operator's seat. engine speed. After increasing engine speed to
1. Turn ON battery disconnect switch. approximately 1500 rpm, turn on all harvesting
2. Verify that park brake is on and that all functions are functions. Run harvester at this speed until engine is
in the OFF or NEUTRAL position. at normal operating temperature, between 77—90°C
3. Verify that engine speed control lever is in the idle (170—195°F).
position. NOTE: NEVER rev up the engine and then shut it
4. Sound horn. off. When this occurs, the turbocharger spins
NOTE: Ensure that engine compartment doors freely before it stops and it will not get any
are closed. lubrication from the engine. This can quickly
damage the turbocharger.
5. Turn key switch clockwise to the START position to
crank the engine. Do not crank the engine for more NOTE: Engine should be operated at full throttle
than 20 seconds. Wait 10 seconds before trying again. or with Automatic FieldCruise™ active while
If the engine fails to start after two or three tries, return harvesting cane.
key to OFF and wait two minutes before trying again.

AS09261,00000A3 -19-12SEP16-1/1
50-2 041717
PN=115
Use a Booster Battery / Battery Charger
CAUTION: Battery posts, terminals, and related

components contain lead and lead compounds.
ALWAYS wash hands after handling.
A compatible 12V battery or battery charger (A) can be
connected in parallel with existing battery (B) on machine
to assist in weak battery or cold weather starting.
ALWAYS use heavy duty jumper cables.
CAUTION: Gases given off by battery can explode.

Keep sparks and flame away from batteries.
Before making/removing connections to a
battery charger, turn charger OFF.
ALWAYS connect NEGATIVE (-) cable last,
T8120000495 —UN—20FEB12
and connect away from battery. ALWAYS
disconnect NEGATIVE (-) cable first, and
disconnect from weak battery first.
IMPORTANT: Verify polarity is correct before making

jumper connections. Reversing polarity will
cause damage to electrical system.
ALWAYS connect positive to positive and
negative to ground.
A—Booster Battery/Battery C—POSITIVE (+) Connections
Only use a compatible booster battery that has Charger D—NEGATIVE (-) Connections
same voltage rating. (12V — 12V) B—Weak Battery
1. Connect one end of jumper cable to POSITIVE (+)

post of booster battery. 4. Connect other end of same cable to good ground
2. Connect other end of same cable to POSITIVE (+) connection on frame (D), away from existing battery.
post of existing battery. (C) 5. Start engine and disconnect cables immediately after
3. Connect one end of jumper cable to NEGATIVE (-) engine is running. Disconnect ground connection on
post of booster battery. frame first.
WM05597,0000869 -19-01MAR13-1/1
Cold Weather Warm-Up 2. Engage all harvesting functions and increase engine
Do not attempt harvester operations until hydraulic speed to half throttle (1500 rpm). Run engine at
functions move at close-to-normal cycle times. half throttle until engine is at operating temperature
(between 77° C [170° F] and 95° C [203° F]).
In extremely cold conditions, an extended warm-up period
will be necessary. 3. Depress switch to full engine speed. Begin operation
when harvesting functions are running at normal
Avoid sudden operation of hydraulic functions until engine speeds.
is thoroughly warm.
1. After starting engine, run at idle for 5 minutes.
JR07957,0000283 -19-18FEB13-1/1
50-3 041717
PN=116
Stop the Engine 5. Set park brake.

1. Park harvester on level surface. 6. Put all harvesting functions in NEUTRAL or OFF
2. Raise or lower base cutter to level machine. position.
3. Lower front mounted equipment. 7. To avoid damage to turbocharger, run engine at idle
without load for 3—5 minutes before stopping. Shut
4. Lower elevator if machine is parked for repairs, OFF engine and remove key.
servicing, or end of harvest day.
WM05597,000108E -19-23JAN15-1/1
50-4 041717
PN=117
Driving the Harvester
Driving or Transporting the Harvester on passengers are allowed on the platform
Public Roads areas of the machine.
Before driving on public roads, check local laws and Observe all safe driving rules:
regulations that apply to agricultural equipment. Additional
lights, mirrors, slow moving vehicle emblems, or reflectors 1. Keep crop dividers in raised position.
may be required. 2. Keep topper out of operator’s line of sight.
3. Be aware of elevator and topper heights around
ALWAYS use headlights and hazard warning lights, even overhead structures.
during the day. 4. Only use driving lights when on public roads.
5. Slow down before turning.
CAUTION: Be cautious of any low power lines 6. Avoid rapid steering and braking.
while driving the harvester. Always be aware 7. Slowly stop vehicle with a flat tire.
of the harvester and elevator height. 8. Watch out for bystanders and obstacles.
9. Look behind the harvester before backing up.
Never allow passengers other than the operator 10. Be cautious when driving up or down steep inclines.
and trainee to be in the harvester and no
WM05597,000119D -19-12JAN15-1/1
Travel Speeds
TYPE Km/h mph
Tracka 9 5.6
Wheela 24.6 15.3
a
Maximum speed is dependent on tire and/or hydraulic system option.
WM05597,0000E34 -19-12FEB14-1/1
Move the Harvester

CAUTION: The life of topper booms and
connecting pins may be extended if topper is not
in the full up or full down position while moving.
T8T1566 —UN—12NOV14
1. Raise harvester to level, raise crop dividers, and lower
topper and elevator below height of cab.
2. Switch the park brake switch to OFF position.
3. Move multi-function lever forward (A) to move
harvester forward.
4. Pull multi-function lever back (B) to move harvester in
reverse.
5. Move multi-function lever to the center (C) to put
machine in neutral.
A—Forward C—Center
B—Back
WM05597,0000EA8 -19-26NOV14-1/1
55-1 041717
PN=118
Park Brake Switch

NOTE: System is in manual mode when machine is
first started. Park brake indicator on cornerpost
illuminates indicating park brake is engaged. Press
park brake switch once to enter automatic mode.
T8T536 —UN—03JUN14
Park brake switch (A) manually or automatically engages
or disengages park brake preventing machine movement.
Automatic Mode:
• Press park brake switch once to set park brake to
automatic mode.
- If multi-function lever is in neutral gate and speed is
less than 1.5 km/h (1 mph), park brake is applied. If
multi-function lever is moved out of neutral gate, park A—Park Brake Switch
brake is released.
NOTE: Park brake engages each time multi-function lever - If multi-function lever is in neutral gate and speed is
is set to neutral position or if engine is shut OFF. less than 3.0 km/h (1.9 mph), park brake is applied.
If multi-function lever is moved out of neutral gate
Manual Engagement (Default Mode): or speed is greater than 1.5 km/h (1 mph) an alarm
sounds.
• Press park brake switch twice to set park brake to
manual mode.
WM05597,0000F89 -19-03JUN14-1/1
55-2 041717
PN=119
Park the Harvester
T8T1119 —UN—15SEP14
1. Stop harvester on level surface. 6. Run engine at idle speed without load for 3 to 5 minutes
2. Completely lower topper and crop dividers. Lower before stopping to avoid damage to turbocharger.
base cutter. Lower side knives and hydraulically 7. Shut OFF engine and remove key.
adjustable knockdown rollers (if equipped).
8. Lock cab doors.
3. Rotate elevator directly behind harvester. Lower
elevator. 9. Turn battery disconnect switch OFF.
4. Set park brake. 10. Inspect machine for any potential problems.
5. Shut OFF lights. 11. Clean harvester.
WM05597,000119E -19-12JAN15-1/1
Backup Alarm
If multi-function lever is moved rearward while engine is
running, backup alarm (A) sends an acoustical signal
to warn others around the machine that the operator is
backing up.
T8T1909 —UN—27JAN15
A—Backup Alarm
WM05597,0000F1D -19-23FEB15-1/1
55-3 041717
PN=120
Sugar Cane Flow the elevator basket. From there, the billets are delivered
to the elevator. Meanwhile, the primary extractor fan
The gathering disks, on each side of the topper, gather extracts debris, leaves, and dirt from the cane and directs
cane tops and feed them to the topper severing disk, in it onto the ground behind the harvester. The elevator
center of the topper. The crop dividers then separate the system delivers the cane to a container system either
rows of down or tangled cane. The power knockdown to the rear, left-hand or right-hand side of the harvester.
rollers push the cane forward and down to the optimum As cane falls from end of elevator into the transport, the
angle for feeding into the harvester. The base cutters cut secondary extractor fan (if equipped) removes remaining
the bottom of the stalk. The butt-lifter roller then sends up loose material in the final stage of the process. This debris
cane into feed rollers that regulate the speed of the cane, is directed away from the field transport and harvester by
which determines length of the billet cut by the chopper. the rotating hood of the secondary extractor.
The chopper cleanly cuts even billets by slicing the cane
between two opposing blades and dropping them into
WM05597,0000EBF -19-04MAY15-1/1
Topper System
T8120002603 —UN—03JAN13
A—Gathering Disks C—Rotational Direction D—Whole Topper
B—Severing Disks
The gathering disks (A) on each side of the topper, gather The whole topper (D) operates in the same manner.
the cane tops and feed them to the severing disks (B),
located in the center. The rotational direction (C) of the IMPORTANT: ALWAYS allow topper to completely stop
severing disks determine if the cane tops are thrown left or rotating before changing rotational direction.
right. The direction is selected by the operator in the cab.
Once the cane is topped, the severed tops are discharged
by the rotary motion of the gathering disks.
KR43067,0000CAA -19-25JAN13-1/1
60-1 041717
PN=121
Operate Topper System
CM992500027 —UN—10JAN00
CM992500041 —UN—10JAN00
• Always use topper, even on downed cane. The topper

can still remove a certain percentage of tops to aid in
the cleaning process.
• Always cut tops at point where the lowest leaf ends.
Cutting here gives severed top enough weight to be
thrown away from harvester.
• Crop height varies so the operator must raise or lower
topper as necessary. Pay attention to row ends, where
cane is shorter.
• Topper discharges tops to either left-hand or right-hand
side, as selected by operator.
• Always throw tops clear of harvester and away from
uncut sugar cane rows. If not, they enter machine and
negatively affect the cleaning process.
CM992500042 —UN—10JAN00
If tops are not being thrown away from machine, check
for: loose blade bolts, missing blades, or topper height
set too high.
Topper Options:
1. Whole Topper: Whole tops are cut from stalk and
discharged to left-hand or right-hand side.
Specification
Whole Topper—Width..................................................................... 1.8 m
(71.5 in.) 3. Shredder Topper:Shredded tops are spread out
2. Extended Width Whole Topper: for gathering thick better in the field, are easier to incorporate in the soil
or wide crops. when cultivating, and decompose faster.
Specification
Extended Width Whole
Topper—Width................................................................................. 2.4 m
(93.1 in.)
WM05597,000119B -19-12JAN15-1/1
60-2 041717
PN=122
Crop Divider
The crop dividers are designed to help separating rows of
downed or tangled cane. The scrolls turn with a screwing
motion, which picks up the cane and separates the rows.
• The crop divider scrolls can untangle and pick up the
downed cane. When operating too fast, the cane can
break and bend, causing it to hang up on the crop
divider. This causes damage to billets and stubble.
• Operating too fast pulls whole stalks out from row being
harvested or from the next row. Pulling whole stalks
from the row brings roots and dirt into the harvester,
detracting from the cleaning process.
• Always raise to the transport position when backing
T8140000078 —UN—17FEB14
up the harvester. This prevents the crop divider shoes
from digging into the ground.
• The tilt of the crop divider can be changed manually or
hydraulically. The hydraulic option allows the operator
to adjust the tilt from the cab to adapt to different cane
conditions in the field.
• Crop dividers are equipped with both inner and outer
scrolls. Outer Scrolls rotate in opposite direction of
inner scrolls to push cane of adjacent row away from
the machine.
• Hydraulically adjustable height side knives (if equipped)
are recommended for lodged cane. Side knives cut
lodged cane when it is being raised and separated to
prevent pulling stalks from the ground.
•
T8T314 —UN—29APR14
Crop divider vine cutter knives (A), if equipped, prevent
vines from wrapping around the crop dividers.
A—Vine Cutter Knives (2 used)
WM05597,0000E4E -19-06JAN15-1/1
Crop Divider Floating Side Walls (If Equipped)

IMPORTANT: Avoid damage to the crop divider
floating side walls. Always raise the harvester
to transport position when backing up.
The crop divider floating side walls (A) are designed
T8T413 —UN—14MAY14
to prevent cane from getting outside the mouth of the
harvester after being gathered and cut. The side walls
drag on ground behind crop dividers to gather cane.
When the harvester is in cut position, the side walls
extend harvester walls to the ground.
A—Crop Divider Floating Side Inside Of Crop Divider Shown

Walls
Continued on next page AS09261,000016F -19-22NOV16-1/2
60-3 041717
PN=123
Adjust Rear Height Position of Crop Divider

Floating Side Walls
NOTE: Keep area for adjusting the floating side wall clean
of debris to allow the floating shoe to work properly.
1. The upper position (A) is used for crop rows 0—4
T8T5066 —UN—22NOV16
inches high.
2. The lower position (B) is used for crop rows 5 inches
or higher.
3. Retain floating side wall in desired position using cap
screw, washers, bushing, and lock nut (C).
A—Upper Position C—Cap Screw, Washer (2

B—Lower Position used), Bushing, Lock Nut
AS09261,000016F -19-22NOV16-2/2
Adjust Outer Crop Divider Side Skirts (If

Equipped)
NOTE: Outer crop divider side skirt is only adjustable
on the CH570.
T8140000375 —UN—18MAR14
1. Loosen cap screw (A).
2. Remove and retain round head cap screws (B),
washers, and nuts.
3. Raise or lower crop divider side skirt (C) to desired
position.
4. Retain with previously removed round head cap
screws, washers, and nuts.
A—Cap Screw C—Crop Divider Side Skirt
5. Tighten cap screw (A). B—Round Head Cap Screw (3
used)
6. Repeat on the other crop divider.
AS09261,00000C7 -19-11OCT16-1/1
60-4 041717
PN=124
Adjust Inner Crop Divider Side Skirts (If Equipped)
T8T533 —UN—02JUN14
T8T534 —UN—02JUN14
Top Position Shown Bottom Position Shown
A—Forward Hole C—Hardware (2 used) D—Side Skirt

B—Rearward Hole
NOTE: Inner crop divider side skirts have five positions. 2. Adjust side skirt (D) to desired position.
The forward hole (A) is used for the top four positions.
The rearward hole (B) is for the bottom position. 3. Install previously removed hardware.
1. Remove and retain hardware (C). 4. Repeat on remaining crop divider.

WM05597,0000F9E -19-02JUN14-1/1
60-5 041717
PN=125
Adjust Crop Divider Height
T8T424 —UN—16MAY14
T8T425 —UN—16MAY14
A—Crop Divider Scrolls (2 used) B—Mounting Hole (Upper Lift C—Mounting Hole (Lower Lift
Arm) Arm)
CAUTION: Crop divider is heavy. Approximate The middle set of holes is for in the middle cultivation
weight of crop divider is 499 kg (1100 lb.). practices. This position covers most conditions.
Use appropriate lifting device to support
The lower set of holes is for flat or low row.
and position divider. Verify that weight is
balanced before lifting fully. Mount crop dividers on matching holes for
right-hand and left-hand sides.
IMPORTANT: If machine is equipped with floating crop
dividers and crop divider height is changed, 4. Install previously removed cap screw, washer, and nut
sensor linkage must be adjusted. See Calibrate to upper mounting hole (B) crop divider.
System in Floating Crop Divider and Contour
Base Cutter Height Control (If Equipped) section. 5. Install previously removed cap screw, washer, and nut
to lower mounting hole (C) crop divider.
1. Attach sling to crop divider scrolls (A). 6. Repeat on remaining crop divider.
2. Remove and retain cap screw, washer, and nut from 7. Calibrate “Left Crop Divider Position” and “Right Crop
crop divider and upper lift arms. Repeat for lower lift Divider Position”. See Calibration Procedures section.
arms.
If machine is equipped with floating crop dividers, see
3. Use appropriate lifting device to raise or lower crop Calibrate System in Floating Crop Divider and Contour
divider to desired position. Base Cutter Height Control (If Equipped) section.
NOTE: Upper mounting holes are for high row
profiles, if applicable.
WM05597,0000EA4 -19-21MAY15-1/1
Adjust Crop Divider Hydraulic Tilt (If

Equipped)
Press crop divider tilt up or down switch (A—D) to adjust
crop divider tilt to desired position.
T8T1633 —UN—20NOV14
A—Left-Hand Crop Divider Tilt C—Right-Hand Crop Divider

Up Switch Tilt Up Switch
B—Left-Hand Crop Divider Tilt D—Right-Hand Crop Divider
Down Switch Tilt Down Switch
WM05597,000116F -19-19NOV14-1/1
60-6 041717
PN=126
Adjust Crop Divider Manual Tilt (If Equipped)
T8T1239 —UN—24SEP14
Some Parts Removed For Clarity
A—Hardware (3 used) B—Hardware
C—Mounting Position (5 used)
CAUTION: Avoid serious injury or death 2. Loosen hardware (A) and remove hardware (B) from
from falling equipment. Support weight of linkage.
crop divider assembly before removing or
3. Raise or lower front of crop divider until tilt is at desired
loosening any hardware.
setting.
Crop divider is heavy. Approximate weight of
4. Install previously removed hardware (B) in desired
crop divider is 386 kg (850 lb.). Use appropriate
mounting position (C).
lifting device to support and position divider.
5. Tighten hardware (A).
1. Support crop divider with appropriate lifting device.
6. Repeat on remaining crop divider.
WM05597,000116D -19-19NOV14-1/1
Operate Crop Dividers

• The front of the shoe adjusts automatically with the crop
divider. Set the shoe as high as possible to reduce dirt
fed into the harvester.
• Crop divider shoe points should barely penetrate the soil
to lift the cane and feed it into the harvester. If the shoe
T8T315 —UN—29APR14
points are adjusted too low, it feeds soil into the base
cutter. In field conditions with stones or heavy weeds, it
may be necessary to lift the shoe slightly off the ground.
WM05597,0000F66 -19-10DEC14-1/1
60-7 041717
PN=127
Knockdown Rollers
The knockdown roller system consists of manually or
hydraulically (if equipped) adjustable upper roller and
lower roller. Together, these rollers push cane forward,
before it is cut by the base cutter, allowing it to fall in
optimal position for feeding into the harvester. The
T8T563 —UN—29SEP14
knockdown rollers also comb cane in order for it to line up
with the harvester and enter the throat in a uniform manner.
• Positioning the roller too low will cause the cane to split
when cut by the base cutter.
• Positioning the roller too high may allow shorter cane to
enter the harvester still standing. The standing cane will
not feed properly into the feed rollers and there may be
some crop damage or loss. A—Upper Knockdown Roller B—Lower Knockdown Roller
• Proper positioning should allow the cane to enter
correctly. There should be little or no crop damage.
NOTE: To make the adjustable knockdown roller system
more aggressive, more teeth may be added.
WM05597,00010E1 -19-09DEC14-1/1
Adjust Hydraulically Adjustable Knockdown

Rollers Tilt (If Equipped)
Press knockdown roller raise or lower switches (A and B)
to adjust knockdown rollers to desired position.
T8T3376 —UN—27OCT15
A—Knockdown Roller Raise B—Knockdown Roller Lower
Switch Switch
WM05597,00013CA -19-27OCT15-1/1
60-8 041717
PN=128
Adjust Manually Adjustable Knockdown

Rollers Tilt (If Equipped)
Adjust upper knockdown roller tilt.
CAUTION: Avoid serious injury or death
T8T1240 —UN—24SEP14
from falling equipment. Support weight of
knockdown roller assembly before removing
or loosening any hardware.
Use appropriate lifting device to support and
position knockdown roller.
1. Support upper knockdown roller with appropriate lifting Some Parts Removed For Clarity
device.
2. Loosen hardware (A) and remove hardware (B) from A—Hardware C—Mounting Positions
B—Hardware (2 used)
linkage.
3. Adjust upper knockdown roller until tilt is at desired
setting. 5. Tighten hardware (A).
4. Install previously removed hardware (B) in desired
WM05597,00013EF -19-08DEC15-1/3
Adjust lower knockdown roller tilt.—Style A

T8T1291 —UN—24SEP14
T8T1292 —UN—24SEP14
Right-Hand Side Of Machine Shown Viewed From Below Machine
A—Hardware (4 used) B—Mounting Position
CAUTION: Avoid serious injury or death 2. Remove hardware (A) from both sides of machine.
from falling equipment. Support weight of
knockdown roller assembly before removing 3. Adjust lower knockdown roller until tilt is at desired
or loosening any hardware. setting.
Use appropriate lifting device to support and 4. Install previously removed hardware in desired
position knockdown roller. mounting position (C).
1. Support lower knockdown roller with appropriate lifting

device.
Continued on next page WM05597,00013EF -19-08DEC15-2/3
60-9 041717
PN=129
Adjust lower knockdown roller.—Style B
T8T3385 —UN—08DEC15
T8T3386 —UN—08DEC15
Raised Position Lowered Position
A—Hardware C—Mounting Position

B—Hardware (2 used)
CAUTION: Avoid serious injury or death 2. Loosen hardware (A) and remove and retain hardware
from falling equipment. Support weight of (B) from both sides of machine.
knockdown roller assembly before removing
or loosening any hardware. 3. Adjust lower knockdown roller until tilt is at desired
setting.
Use appropriate lifting device to support and
position knockdown roller. 4. Install previously removed hardware in desired
1. Support lower knockdown roller with appropriate lifting 5. Tighten previously loosened hardware.
device.
WM05597,00013EF -19-08DEC15-3/3
Base Cutter
The base cutter is a pair of counter-rotating disks with
replaceable blades designed to cleanly cut cane at ground
level without splitting it. Base cutter rotation directs
cane flow upward into the feed rollers with help from the
butt-lifter. Base cutter has grease packed leg bearings.
T8T1298 —UN—29SEP14
Kickers on base cutter legs are replaceable.
Numbers of blades—5 per disk.
The base cutter is available with 4 types of
blades—using quality blades on the base cutter, the cane
flows into the feed rollers more smoothly, preventing
stubble and dirt from entering the harvester. This also
provides a cleaner cut and healthier stubble.
• 22” Scalloped Disk—Used in muddy areas to prevent
• 6 mm—two cutting edges—short rock blade mud from building up on the base cutter disks.
• 6 mm—four cutting edges
• 4 mm—two cutting edges Other options are:
• 4 mm—four cutting edges • Breakaway Legs—A fuse is incorporated to allow the
The base cutter is available with 3 types of disk: leg to break instead of the base cutter gearing.
• Leg Wraps—Used on the legs to prevent eye damage
• 24”—Standard use in areas while little on no rocks. when cutting seed cane.
• 22”—Used in areas with lots of rock, allows for a wider • Leg Kickers—Assists in feeding cane through the base
gap between the disk for rocks to fall to the ground. cutter and protects the legs from cane wear.
WM05597,00010E3 -19-29SEP14-1/1
60-10 041717
PN=130
Base Cutter Angles (CH570)

• A—Least Aggressive (approximately 11°) Angle, used A B C
in most situations.
• B—Mid-level (approximately 14°) Angle, used in
situations where other angles do not apply. This default
angle is set at the factory.
T8T4726 —UN—25AUG16
• C—Most Aggressive (approximately 17°) Angle, used
in high, and narrow crops to minimize the loss of cane
on the sides.
A—Least Aggressive Angle C—Most Aggressive Angle

B—Mid-level Angle
AS09261,00000A5 -19-12SEP16-1/1
Adjust Base Cutter Angle (CH570)
T8130003021 —UN—26NOV13
T8130003022 —UN—26NOV13
Left-Hand Side Of Machine Shown Right-Hand Side Of Machine Shown
A—Front Nuts (1 used per side) B—Middle Nuts (1 used per side) C—Rear Nuts (1 used per side)
CAUTION: Avoid crushing injury. Use IMPORTANT: Apply Araldite to threads of nuts
appropriate jack of adequate capacity when before installing
adjusting base cutter angle.
4. Raise or lower the gear case to the desired angle and
1. Install a jack under the base cutter gear case. install previously removed front nuts.
2. Remove and retain the nut (A) from each side of the 5. Tighten all nuts to specification.
gear case. Specification
IMPORTANT: Support the weight of the gear case Base Cutter Mounting
before loosening nuts. Nuts—Torque..............................................................................427 N·m
(315 lb·ft)
3. Loosen the middle and rear nuts (B and C) on each
side of the gear case.
AS09261,00000A6 -19-13SEP16-1/1
60-11 PN=131
041717
Base Cutter Angles (CH670)

• Position A—Least Aggressive (approximately 9°) A B C D
Angle, used in most situations with high Flat Ridges
rows. This default angle is set at the factory.
• Position B—Slightly Aggressive (approximately 11°)
Angle, used in most situations with low Flat Ridges rows.
T8T4727 —UN—25AUG16
• Position C—Mid-level (approximately 13°) Angle, used
•
in most situations with flat rows.
Position D—Most Aggressive (approximately 15°)
Angle, used when rows are below flat and narrow crops
9
to minimize the loss of cane on the sides.
A—Angle Position C—Angle Position

B—Angle Position D—Angle Position
AS09261,00000BF -19-11OCT16-1/1
Adjust Base Cutter Angle (CH670)

T8T4781 —UN—01SEP16
T8T4782 —UN—01SEP16
Left-Hand Side of the Machine Right-Hand Side of the Machine
A—Front Nuts (1 used per side) B—Middle Nuts (1 used per side) C—Rear Nuts (1 used per side)
CAUTION: Avoid crushing injury. Use IMPORTANT: Apply Araldite to threads of nuts
appropriate jack of adequate capacity when before installing.
adjusting base cutter angle.
4. Raise or lower the gear case to the desired angle and
1. Install jack under the base cutter gear case. install previously removed front nuts.
2. Remove and retain the nut (A) from each side of the 5. Tighten all nuts to specification.
gear case. Specification
IMPORTANT: Support the weight of the gear case Base Cutter Mounting
before loosening nuts. Nuts—Torque..............................................................................427 N·m
(315 lb·ft)
3. Loosen the middle and rear nuts (B and C) on each
side of the gear case.
AS09261,00000BC -19-23SEP16-1/1
60-12 PN=132
041717
Adjust Front Plate on Base Cutter Disks

(CH670)
1. Loosen cap screws (A).
2. Adjust plate (B) according to the angle of the base
cutter, and lower plate to specification above the base
cutter disk kicker (C).
Specification
Base Cutter
Plate—Clearance....................................................................... 6-19 mm
(1/4-3/4 in)
T8T4847 —UN—20SEP16
3. Tighten cap screws to specification.
Specification
Cap Screws—Torque....................................................................62 N·m
(46 lb·ft)
4. Repeat steps on opposite disk.
A—Cap Screw (3 used) C—Base Cutter Disk Kicker

B—Plate
AS09261,00000F8 -19-11OCT16-1/1
Adjust Rear Plate on Base Cutter Disks

(CH670)
1. Loosen cap screws (A).
2. Adjust plate (B) according to the angle of the base
cutter, and lower plate to specification above the base
cutter disk kicker (C).
Specification
Base Cutter
Plate—Clearance....................................................................... 6-19 mm
(1/4-3/4 in)
T8T4848 —UN—20SEP16
Specification
Cap Screws—Torque....................................................................64 N·m
46 lb·ft
4. Repeat steps on opposite disk.
A—Cap Screw (6 used) C—Base Cutter Disk Kicker

B—Plate
AS09261,00000FD -19-11OCT16-1/1
60-13 041717
PN=133
Operate Base Cutter

• The base cutter diagnostics are set up as follows:
a. Press the Sugarcane Harvester softkey in
CommandTouch display. A
b. Selecting the Harvesting Home Page produces the
T8T1231 —UN—22SEP14
following and a sub-menu that enable operator to
select other optional screens.
c. Sub-Menu:
— Chopper Pressure
— Base Cutter Height
— Base Cutter Pressure B
• When operating, keep the harvester directly over the
center of the row being cut. This prevents the base
cutter from missing any cane and causing torn or
broken stalks. A—Base Cutter Blade (New) B—Measurement
• Always consider the base cutter blade life and the
ground conditions when determining the ground speed
and height to harvest your crop. • Base Cutter Blade Care:
• Adjust the base cutter height so it just trims the top a. After the edge is worn, rotate the blades to opposite
of the row, allowing the least amount of dirt into the disk.
harvester. Cutting too high causes the splitting of cane b. When the edge rounds on both sides, remove all
and less tonnage. Cutting too low causes dirt and blades from the base cutter disks.
stubble to enter harvester. c. Cut approximately 76 mm (3 in.) off the worn end of the
• Straight sided blades (A) without rounded corners blade (B). This gives you a straight sided blade with a
perform the best. Rounded edges indicate worn and new cutting edge. Mount blades back onto disks using
dull blades. different mounting holes, and rotate when necessary.
WM05597,0000E30 -19-10DEC14-1/1
Feed Rollers
The feed rollers carry the cane from base cutter to
chopper. The speed that the cane passes through the
harvester in comparison with the constant speed of the
chopper drums determines billet length. See Billet Length
Manual Adjustment (If Equipped) in this section for more
information.
Cleaning also occurs through gaps, between feed rollers
and choppers, as the cane passes through the rollers.
These gaps allow dirt and rocks to fall from the cane
before chopping.
T8T409 —UN—08MAY14
WM05597,0000F86 -19-08MAY14-1/1
60-14 041717
PN=134
Operate Feed Rollers

1. Maintain teeth (A) on feed rollers, since sharp or rough
edges damage cane.
2. Make sure that floating rollers are moving up and
down freely. Stuck rollers can damage cane or cause
choking.
T8T410 —UN—08MAY14
3. Properly operating rollers ensure well-regulated billet
size.
4. Keep the rollers free of mud and debris to prevent
slippage.
A—Teeth
WM05597,0000F87 -19-10DEC14-1/1
Butt-Lifter Feed Roller

The butt-lifter feed roller is powered by two hydraulic
motors, one on each end of the roller. This roller is
designed to lift the cane from the cut end and help direct it
up the feed roller system.
T8T1299 —UN—29SEP14
The butt-lifter is available in 3 configurations:
• 3 Paddle Closed—Used in areas that are normally dry
during harvest.
• 3 Paddle Open—Used in areas where conditions are
rainy and muddy during harvest.
• 4 Bar Open—Minimizes soil intake and mud buildup in
rainy and muddy conditions.
WM05597,00010E4 -19-13JAN15-1/1
Billet Length Manual Adjustment (If Equipped)

IMPORTANT: Running harvester at a fast ground
speed and billet length selector valve set at a
slow speed causes the harvester to choke.
Do NOT set the billet length selector valve
all the way down.
T8T404 —UN—29SEP14
The billet length selector valve controls the speed of feed
rollers by reducing oil flow to feed roller motors to slow
them or increase flow to speed them up. The selector
valve is on the right-hand side of the harvester, under the
hydraulic tank. It is reached from the engine compartment
or by opening the panel for side access. Adjust the
length of the billets through handle (A). The lower number Right-Hand Side Of Machine Shown
selected, the smaller the billet produced and vice versa.
This adjustment is important to determine size of the billet A—Handle
the machine produces, according to operator’s needs.
The size of the billets involves loss of sucrose and weight.
• The larger the billet the smaller the cut area and
• The smaller the billet the more dense the weight in the therefore less sucrose is lost. The transport load is
transport, because the load is more evenly distributed lighter, increasing transport costs.
in the truck.
Negatively, smaller billets have more cut area on the
cane so there is an increased loss of sucrose.
WM05597,0000F49 -19-06MAY14-1/1
60-15 041717
PN=135
Chopper System
T8T5065 —UN—22NOV16
T8T2442 —UN—06MAY15
Chopper Gear Case (Style A) Chopper Gear Case (Style B)

The chopper system cuts billets by using two opposing
blades to slice the cane and then delivers the billets to
the elevator basket. This system is the most important
in controlling quality cane samples. Wash chopper
mechanism periodically to avoid bacteria growth.
Lubrication is important since the chopper system is both
high speed and high impact.
AS09261,0000169 -19-22NOV16-1/1 T8130003023 —UN—26NOV13
60-16 041717
PN=136
Operate Chopper System
NW271000 —UN—15MAY06
T8130003023 —UN—26NOV13
Incomplete cut
The differential chopper system was designed not only to has, the smaller the billets are. Billet length can be
extend blade life, but to improve and maintain billet quality. adjusted further using the optional billet length manual
The cutting action of the blades resembles scissors. adjustment. For more information, see Billet Length
Manual Adjustment (If Equipped) in this section.
1. Maintain chopper system in good condition always.
2. The extractors separate leaf debris properly when Billet Deflector Shield is a three position metal shield
blades are timed correctly. The leaves, as well as used to deflect cane billets at the desired angle as they
the cane, are cleanly cut by sharp blades when exit the choppers. The higher the angle, the closer to the
synchronized correctly. Blades need to have full blade primary extractor billets are thrown. The lower position
contact, but not gouge or hit hard. Make daily checks prevents light cane from going through the primary
and adjust if necessary. extractor. For adjustment, see Adjust Billet Deflector
3. Blunt edges and badly synchronized choppers cause Shield in Maintenance—As Required section
incomplete cuts and may result in reduced container
weights. Some of these incomplete cuts turn with the Chopper Deflector Plate is an adjustable plate installed
elevator slats and dangle from the cart guard. The underneath the chopper sill roller to help prevent sugar
operator knows that blades need to be changed when cane return. For adjustment, see Adjust Chopper
they see this happen. Deflector Shield in Maintenance—As Required section
4. Chopper system is available in 6-, 8-, and 10-blade
configurations. The more blades a chopper system
AS09261,00000FC -19-11OCT16-1/1
Elevator Basket
The elevator basket is designed to collect cane billets
from the chopper and direct them to the elevator.
IMPORTANT: Overloading the basket can cause
T8140000407 —UN—22SEP14
elevator chokes or damage the slats and chain.
WM05597,0000ED2 -19-07APR14-1/1
60-17 041717
PN=137
Primary Extractor
Using a fan, the extractor removes trash, leaves, and dirt
from the cane before dropping into the elevator basket.
The separated debris and leaves are directed onto the
ground behind the harvester by the primary extractor
hood. This is a major part of the cleaning process.
T8T2931 —UN—13AUG15
Primary Extractor Options:
Duraliner (Vidaplate) Steel Wear Ring—Highly abrasive
resistant material replaces the standard wear ring and
prolongs the life of the wear ring.
WM05597,000138E -19-13AUG15-1/1
Operate Primary Extractor

1. Primary extractor hood should be rotated so that
trash is not blown into the field transport system or
uncut, standing cane rows. The primary extractor A
hood rotation may be synchronized to rotate when the
T8T1562 —UN—04MAY15
elevator is rotated. See Primary Extractor Screen in
GreenStar™ 3 2630 Display Screens section for more
information.
2. Performance decreases as fan blades wear. Blades
should always be replaced before they are badly
worn. When replacing blades, change them as a set.
They are sold in a kit of four; do not mix individual
blades from one set to another. The four blades have
B
been weighed and should not be separated. See
Remove and Install Primary Extractor Fan Blades in
Maintenance—As Required section for procedure.
3. Vibrations in the extractor area of the harvester
should be monitored continuously. As blades wear,
the fan becomes unbalanced and vibrates. Running
T8T2911 —UN—07AUG15
an unbalanced fan can cause severe damage to the
harvester. Change all four blades if the set becomes
unbalanced.
4. When using variable speed primary extractor, set rpm
of the fan when entering a new block of cane. The
proper setting allows debris to be extracted without
billets. Pay attention to the sound billets make as they
hit the extractor hood. This indicates if fan speed is
too high. A—Wear B—Dirt
5. Smart power mode allows the operator to reduce the
speed of the primary extractor automatically when
elevator is turned off. See Primary Extractor Screen
in GreenStar™ 3 2630 Display Screens section for CAUTION: Do not set the extractor fan speed
more information. greater than 930 rpm or premature blade wear
6. Debris should always be removed from fan blades and extractor hood damage may occur.
immediately to get maximum cleaning ability.
7. Built-up dirt and cane debris should be cleaned NOTE: Software logic has been improved for a more
regularly from hood and wear ring. consistent primary extractor fan performance
8. Inspect blades every 25 hours. See Remove under varying crop loads.
and Install Primary Extractor Fan Blades in
Maintenance—As Required section.
AS09261,0000099 -19-12OCT16-1/1
60-18 041717
PN=138
Elevator System
T8140000094 —UN—04MAR14
The elevator system delivers cane to a field transport IMPORTANT: The elevator must be in the UP
system either to the rear, left-hand, or right-hand side of position before swinging and positioned
the harvester. The perforated floor allows loose material directly behind the machine before lowering.
to fall through, which is an additional feature of the Swinging elevator with cylinder not fully
cleaning process. retracted may break cylinder rod and damage
The elevator has a high clearance to minimize damage air louvers, basket, elevator support cable,
caused by various cane containers that may come into and primary extractor housing.
contact with the underside. The height of the elevator
is adjustable from the cab by two hydraulic cylinders Additional lowering is gained by raising the base cutter
supporting the elevator. The elevator swing table swings lift cylinders.
left and right a total of 170°. Elevator Options:
The elevator is made up of twin lengths of roller type
chain, connected by slats, which are bolted to the chain
• Elevator Speed Control—See Elevator Screen in
GreenStar™ 3 2630 Display Screens section for more
links. The conveyor is driven by orbital motors, mounted information.
on both sides that are fully reversible to clear blockages.
Elevator Extension Options:
To maintain correct chain tension, drive motors are
mounted in an adjuster box that allows chain adjustment. • Standard elevator is recommended for row spacing
The chain on each side is driven by a sprocket, which is between 1.4—1.6 m (4.59—5.24 ft.).
mounted directly to the drive motor shaft. • 30 cm (12 in.) extended elevator is recommended for
row spacing between 1.6—1.7 m (5.24—5.57 ft.).
The idler chain alignment sprockets are adjustable to
allow correct clearance between elevator chain and floor.
• 61 cm (24 in.) extended elevator is recommended for
The correct alignment is when the elevator chain just
touches the wear strips as it leaves the sprocket, yet does
• 86 cm (34 in.) extended elevator is recommended for
not allow cane to get under the slats.
WM05597,0001391 -19-14AUG15-1/1
60-19 041717
PN=139
Operate Elevator System

1. If the elevator basket gets too full, damage can occur
to the cane, elevator slats, and to the deflector plates.
The elevator chain can prematurely wear and/or be
CM063510015 —UN—20OCT05
damaged. Over filling can overload the hydraulic
motors. If the primary extractor fan protection cap
comes into contact with the accumulated cane,
premature wearing and deformation can occur due
to friction with the cane.
2. Elevator floor should always be free of dirt and debris
to aid in cleaning ability.
3. Chain to wearstrip clearance should be adjusted
regularly using the grease cylinder. (See Check and Over Filling Can Cause Damage
Adjust Elevator Chain Tension in Maintenance—Every
50 Hours section for detailed adjustment procedure.)
4. Too much slat-to-floor clearance or worn chains can
cause cane to become lodged under slats causing
cane damage. Chain and slat damage can also
contribute to loose chains or worn wearstrips.
5. Check chains daily for damage or loose links. This
T8T412 —UN—12MAY14
can cause the chain to break during operation.
IMPORTANT: Adding extra slats to the chains
reduces space between slats and
decreases chain life.
Never install slats between two links. This
causes abnormal wear to chain and sprocket
and possibly damage to the elevator floor.
A—Distance
6. To maximize chain life, move elevator slats to alternate
links every 500 hours of operation.
7. Elevator slats are reversible and can be rotated to 8. Change elevator chain when distance (A) between 5
extend life of slats. links stretches to 47 cm (18-1/2 in.).
AS09261,00001DA -19-20MAR17-1/1
Secondary Extractor (If Equipped)

This is the final stage in the cleaning process. As the
cane falls from the end of the elevator into the transport,
the secondary extractor (also using a fan) removes the
remaining loose material. Separated debris is directed
away from the field transport system and harvester by
using the 360° rotating secondary extractor hood.
Secondary Extractor Options:
• Secondary Extractor with Motor Driven Directional
Discharge
• High Performance Secondary Extractor with Motor
Driven Directional Discharge
T8120002594 —UN—17JAN13
• Less Secondary Extractor—A metal hood replaces the

secondary extractor hood and fan.
- This option is usually used in areas where sugar cane
is burnt prior to cutting.
WM05597,0001198 -19-09JAN15-1/1
60-20 041717
PN=140
Operate Secondary Extractor (If Equipped)

Performance decreases as fan blades wear. Balancing
may be necessary during the lifetime of the blades. Blades
should always be replaced before they are badly worn (A).
NW270950 —UN—15MAY06
Always run harvester at full throttle to achieve maximum
cleaning from the extractor.
Debris should be removed immediately to achieve
maximum cleaning capability.
Remove any cane debris or weeds that lodge between the
fan hub and support structure.
Keep extractor bearings lubricated.
Built-up dirt (B) should be cleaned regularly from shields.
Vibrations in extractor area of harvester should be
monitored continuously. As blades wear, the fan can
become unbalanced and may vibrate. Running an
NW270940 —UN—15MAY06
unbalanced fan can cause severe damage to the
secondary extractor. Always balance new blades after
they are installed to the hub.
Visually inspect hub for cracks and damage.
A—Worn Blades B—Dirt
WM05597,0001195 -19-09FEB15-1/1
Elevator Discharge Flap

Elevator discharge flap (A) controls discharge angle of
billets as they exit the elevator. Changing angle of flap
allows an operator to fill field transports more efficiently.
Elevator discharge flap is moved by a hydraulic cylinder
that is electrically controlled from the cab.
• Elevator discharge flap out—allows billets to discharge
away from elevator.
• Elevator discharge flap in—allows billets to discharge
directly below elevator.
A—Elevator Discharge Flap
T8130003044 —UN—11DEC13
WM05597,00012D9 -19-28APR15-1/1
60-21 041717
PN=141
Floating Crop Divider and Contour Base Cutter Height Control (If Equipped)
Floating Crop Divider and Contour Base Cutter Height Control

Floating Crop Dividers This section guides the operator through:
When equipped, the floating crop dividers option keeps
both crop dividers in consistent contact with the ground.
• Calibrating the system
• Setting crop divider pressures
Contour Base Cutter Height Control • Setting base cutter target height
• Setting end of row heights
When equipped, the contour base cutter height control • Operating floating crop divider system
option maintains a consistent, operator selected cut height. • Operating contour base cutter height control system
NOTE: In order for floating crop divider and contour base • Setting base cutter pressure target range
cutter height control to perform as intended, field • Using floating crop divider and contour base cutter
height control system left-hand region
must be correctly and consistently prepared.
WM05597,0001163 -19-13NOV14-1/1
65-1 041717
PN=142
Calibrate System • If options have been added or removed from crop

dividers.
Calibrate system when:
• If crop divider pin position has been changed.
• First using the system. • Crop divider or base cutter sensors have been serviced.
• If batteries have been disconnected (beginning of the
season).
T8130002609 —UN—29OCT13
T8T641 —UN—19JUN14
CAUTION: Alert others around machine to stay

clear while calibrations are being performed.
Sound horn to alert others around machine
before performing calibration.
T8130002610 —UN—29OCT13
Machine components raise and lower
automatically during calibration.
Machine MUST be parked on a hard, level surface.
Operator MUST remain in operator seat through
entire calibration procedure.
NOTE: Verify that crop dividers are in field configuration

Diagnostic Calibrations Page
with desired options installed before continuing
with calibration.
A—Diagnostic Switch C—Calibrations Menu
1. Run engine at fast idle. B—Calibration Softkey D—Enter/Accept Softkey
2. Fully lower crop dividers to ground.

3. Raise crop dividers. NOTE: See Digital Cornerpost Display section
for more information.
4. Engage harvesting function switch.
5. Verify that hydraulic oil is warmed to normal operating 10. Fully raise base cutter and verify Base Cutter Actual
temperature before continuing with calibration. Height on cornerpost display shows “99”.
6. Disengage harvesting function switch. 11. Fully lower base cutter and verify Base Cutter Actual
Height on cornerpost display shows “0”.
7. Touch diagnostic switch (A), calibration softkey (B),
then calibrations menu (C). NOTE: If Base Cutter Actual Height does not display
correct reading, run calibration again.
8. Touch “Basecutter Height” calibration.
9. Touch enter/accept softkey (D) and follow instructions
shown on display to calibrate base cutter height.
65-2 041717
PN=143
T8120001379 —UN—20SEP12
12. Fully raise base cutter.
13. Fully raise crop dividers then fully lower crop dividers
to ground.
14. Adjust crop divider tilt to desired harvest position.
15. Touch diagnostic switch (A) then readings menu (B).
16. Touch “Floating Crop Divider” calibration.
17. Touch enter/accept softkey (C).
T8130002611 —UN—31OCT13
18. Verify that “LH Crop Divider Position Voltage” and “RH
Crop Divider Position volts” fall between 0.7—4.6 V.
NOTE: If voltage readings do not fall between 0.7—4.6
V, then sensor linkage must be adjusted
before continuing calibration.
a. If voltage reading is above 4.6 V, sensor rod

dimension must be shortened. Diagnostic Readings Page
b. If voltage reading is below 0.7 V, sensor rod
dimension must be lengthened. A—Diagnostic Switch C—Enter/Accept Softkey
B—Readings Menu
65-3 041717
PN=144
T8130002609 —UN—29OCT13
T8T641 —UN—19JUN14
then calibrations menu (C).
20. Touch “Left Crop Divider Position” calibration.
T8130002610 —UN—29OCT13
shown on display to calibrate left-hand crop divider
position.
22. Repeat procedure for “Right Crop Divider Position”
calibration.
24. Touch “Left Crop Divider Pressure” calibration. Diagnostic Calibrations Page

shown on display to calibrate left-hand crop divider B—Calibration Softkey D—Enter/Accept Softkey
pressure.
26. Repeat procedure for “Right Crop Divider Pressure”
calibration. 28. Touch “Basecutter Target Height” calibration.
NOTE: “Basecutter Height, Left Crop Divider Position, 29. Touch enter/accept softkey (D) and follow instructions
and Right Crop Divider Position” calibrations must shown on display to calibrate base cutter target height.
be ran before calibrating “Basecutter Target Height”.

WM05597,0001164 -19-19NOV14-3/3
65-4 041717
PN=145
Set Crop Divider Pressures and Base Cutter Target Height

1. Press switch (A) to enable Floating Crop Dividers.
2. Verify corresponding enable boxes (B and C) display
checkmarks to enable floating crop dividers for desired
side or sides.
3. Press floating crop divider reset softkey (D).
T8T560 —UN—13JUN14
4. Turn OFF park brake switch and position harvester at
beginning of a previously cut row.
5. Engage harvesting functions in forward motion.
6. Verify that multi-function lever is in neutral or forward
position.
7. Press left-hand crop divider down switch (E) once
(single-click) to activate both floating crop dividers.
NOTE: If only one crop divider is enabled with box (B
or C), only that crop divider floats.
8. Slowly run harvester down previously cut row. If crop
T8T2946 —UN—01SEP15
dividers are dragging, increase pressure percentage
on crop divider by pressing corresponding floating
crop divider pressure increase softkeys (F).
9. Set crop divider pressures:
NOTE: When harvester is not moving, system
goes into pause mode.
a. Slowly run harvester down previously cut row.

b. Lower base cutter so crop dividers contact ground.
c. Raise base cutter slightly.
T8T1915 —UN—28JAN15
d. Crop dividers should fall to ground as base cutter
is raised.
e. If crop dividers do not fall when raising base cutter,
decrease pressure percentage on crop divider
by pressing corresponding floating crop divider
pressure decrease softkeys (G).
f. Repeat steps A—E as needed until crop dividers
lower sufficiently when base cutter is raised. A—Switch E—Left-Hand and Right-Hand
B—Left-Hand Floating Crop Crop Divider Down Switch
10. Decrease crop divider pressure percentages slightly Divider Enable Box F— Floating Crop Divider
to account for pressure from cane stalks. C—Right-Hand Floating Crop Pressure Increase Softkeys
Divider Enable Box G—Floating Crop Divider
NOTE: If soil is hard, crop divider pressures may D—Floating Crop Divider Reset Pressure Decrease
be increased slightly. Softkey Softkeys
If harvester raises a lot while cutting cane,

lower crop divider pressures.
Continued on next page WM05597,00013A0 -19-01SEP15-1/2
65-5 041717
PN=146
T8T561 —UN—13JUN14
T8T2947 —UN—01SEP15
11. Position harvester at beginning of row.
12. Verify that floating crop dividers are activated.
13. Press switch (A) to enable Contour Base Cutter Height
Control.
14. Return to cut enable box (B) must display checkmark
T8T2948 —UN—01SEP15
within armrest display.
15. Cut cane manually and find the desired base cutter
height.
NOTE: Base cutter target capture and adjustment can be
done from base cutter screen or home page.
16. Press base cutter target capture softkey (C).

17. Press base cutter down switch (D) once (single-click)
to activate contour base cutter height control.
18. Press contour base cutter height control increase or
decrease softkeys (E) to modify base cutter target
height.
T8T1893 —UN—22JAN15
NOTE: A single select is slow advance. A select
19. If target and actual base cutter values are far apart,
select and hold base cutter target capture softkey (C)
for five seconds on consistent ground to calibrate
and sync target and actual base cutter position. If
calibration is successful, a confirmation alarm sounds.
A—Switch D—Base Cutter Down Switch

B—Return To Cut Enable Box E—Contour Base Cutter Height
C—Base Cutter Target Capture Control Increase and
Softkey Decrease Softkeys
T8T1907 —UN—27JAN15
WM05597,00013A0 -19-01SEP15-2/2
65-6 041717
PN=147
Set End of Row Heights

1. Press switch (A) to disable floating crop dividers.
NOTE: Operator may enable end of row for left-hand crop
divider, right-hand crop divider, base cutter, or all.
T8T560 —UN—13JUN14
2. Corresponding end of row enable boxes (B—D) must
display checkmarks within armrest display.
3. Raise or lower base cutter, left-hand crop divider, and
right-hand crop divider to desired height for headland
travel.
4. Select end of row set point capture all softkey (E) or
corresponding end of row set point capture icon (F) to
capture current position as end of row set point.
5. Current end of row set point (G) is displayed.
NOTE: Crop divider positions do not have to match exactly.
T8T2949 —UN—01SEP15
A—Switch E—End Of Row Set Point
B—Left-Hand Crop Divider End Capture All Softkey
Of Row Enable Box F— End Of Row Set Point
C—Right-Hand Crop Divider Capture Softkeys (3 used)
End Of Row Enable Box G—End Of Row Set Points (3
D—Base Cutter End Of Row used)
Enable Box
WM05597,00013A1 -19-01SEP15-1/1
Advanced Setup
1. Set floating crop divider sensitivity (A) and
contour base cutter height sensitivity (B) meters at
recommended starting sensitivity based on field type.
Recommended Starting
Field Surface Type
Sensitivity
Mostly Flat 1/2
Uneven 3/4
T8T1895 —UN—29APR15
2. Press corresponding sensitivity increase or decrease
softkeys (C—F) to adjust sensitivities as needed.
• If downed cane or excessive stubble is being left at
dips in field, raise sensitivities.
• Ideal sensitivity setting reacts as fast as possible
while not being uncomfortable for operator.
For more information, see Floating Crop Dividers and
Contour Base Cutter Height Control (If Equipped) in A—Floating Crop Divider D—Increase Softkey
GreenStar™ 3 2630 Display Screens section. Sensitivity Meter E—Decrease Softkey
B—Contour Base Cutter Height F— Increase Softkey
Sensitivity Meter
C—Decrease Softkey

WM05597,0001165 -19-28JAN15-1/1
65-7 041717
PN=148
Operate Floating Crop Dividers System
T8T560 —UN—13JUN14
T8T4671 —UN—15AUG16
To Turn ON Floating Crop Dividers:
NOTE: Any time key switch has been turned off, reset
floating crop dividers switch.
1. Press switch (A) to enable or disable Floating Crop

Dividers.
NOTE: The floating crop divider toggle allows the operator
to switch from one divider to another. This can
T8T4672 —UN—15AUG16
be done with a single click of the multi-function
lever before returning to the cut.
2. The floating crop divider toggle softkey (B) will be one

of the configurable controls on the multi-function lever
(1, 2, 3, a, b).
NOTE: When ready, the “Ready to Float” status (C)
will be highlighted in yellow.
NOTE: Operator may enable left-hand, right-hand,

or both floating crop dividers.
3. Corresponding enable boxes (D and E) must display
T8T4673 —UN—15AUG16
a checkmark within armrest display to enable floating
crop dividers for the desired side or sides.
4. Turn OFF park brake switch and position harvester
at beginning of row.
position.
A—Switch F— Left-Hand and Right-Hand
7. Press left-hand or right-hand crop divider down switch B—Crop Divider Float Toggle Crop Divider Down
Softkey Switches
(F) once (single-click) to activate both floating crop C—Float Status Indicator G—Floating Crop Divider
dividers. D—Left-Hand Floating Crop Pressure Increase and
Divider Enable Box Decrease Softkeys
NOTE: If machine is turned off with the floating crop E—Right-Hand Floating Crop H—Floating Crop Divider Reset
dividers system active, cycle reset switch and Divider Enable Box Softkey
then cycle floating crop dividers switch. I— Left-Hand and Right-Hand
Crop Divider Up Switches
65-8 041717
PN=149
8. To adjust the target, press floating crop divider increase to activate end of row function and disengage floating
or decrease softkeys (G) for the corresponding crop crop dividers.
divider. A single click and hold of the crop divider up switch
9. To return setting back to 50% pressure percentage, manually raises that side only. After five seconds, the
press floating crop divider reset softkey (H). crop divider resumes float.
To Turn OFF Floating Crop Dividers: Press left-hand or To turn OFF floating crop dividers, turn off floating crop
right-hand crop divider up switch (I) twice (double-click) dividers switch (A).
AS09261,00000B1 -19-12OCT16-2/2
65-9 041717
PN=150
Operate Contour Base Cutter Height Control System
T8T561 —UN—13JUN14
T8T2947 —UN—01SEP15
To Turn ON Contour Base Cutter Height Control
System:
NOTE: Double Detent Function (Optional): See your
John Deere dealer for further information to enable
or disable the double detent function. When the
double detent function is disabled, the return to cut
T8T4676 —UN—17AUG16
and end of row functions are reconfigurable. When
enabled, the double detent is operated with switch
(C). Double detent is enabled by default.
1. Press switch (A) to enable or disable contour base

cutter height control.
2. Return to cut enable box (B) must display the
checkmark within armrest display.
3. Turn OFF park brake switch and position harvester
at beginning of row.
T8T2951 —UN—01SEP15
position.
NOTE: Floating Crop Dividers system must be
active in order to activate contour base cutter
height control system.
6. Press base cutter down switch (C) once (single-click)

to activate contour base cutter height control.
7. To adjust height target, press contour base cutter
height control increase or decrease softkeys (D).
A—Switch C—Base Cutter Down Switch

B—Return To Cut Enable Box D—Contour Base Cutter Height
T8T1898 —UN—22JAN15
Control Increase and

Decrease Softkeys
65-10 041717
PN=151
To Turn OFF Contour Base Cutter Height

Control System:
NOTE: Double Detent can be operated with switch (A).
Press base cutter up switch (A) twice (double-click) to

deactivate system and activate end of row function.
T8T4674 —UN—17AUG16
A single click and hold of the base cutter up switch
manually raises the base cutter. After five seconds, the
base cutter resumes float.
To turn OFF contour base cutter height control system,
turn off contour base cutter up switch (B) or floating crop
dividers switch.
A—Base Cutter Up Switch B—Switch
T8T4675 —UN—17AUG16
AS09261,00000B4 -19-12OCT16-2/2
Set Base Cutter Pressure Target Range

Base cutter pressure target range automatically adjusts
base cutter height if pressure goes too high. The system
automatically returns base cutter height to the target when
the base cutter pressure lowers.
Select base cutter target pressure capture softkey (A)
T8T1899 —UN—22JAN15
while cutting manually at desired base cutter pressure (B).
Select base cutter pressure graph (C) to open range
setup popup screen.
Select the increase or decrease softkeys (D) to adjust the
base cutter pressure target manually.
Select plus (+) or minus (-) softkeys to set range at
pressure above the set point the operator feels the A—Capture Softkey C—Graph
machine is digging and needs to raise. B—Base Cutter Pressure D—Increase and Decrease
Softkeys
Setting the range to a higher number makes it less
reactive to base cutter pressure increases. Setting the
range to a lower number makes it more reactive to base
cutter pressure increases.
WM05597,0001169 -19-28JAN15-1/1
65-11 041717
PN=152
Monitor Crop Divider Position

If floating crop divider and contour base cutter height
control system is acting erratically, monitor the crop
divider positions.
T8T1902 —UN—23JAN15
1. Set detail machine information region to display
left-hand and right-hand crop divider positions (A and
B).
2. Run machine with floating crop divider and contour
base cutter height control systems engaged.
3. If crop divider positions go down to zero, the crop
dividers are all the way lowered and not touching A—Left-Hand Crop Divider B—Right-Hand Crop Divider
the ground. Change the pin position of the crop Position Position
dividers and recalibrate the crop divider positions
and pressures. See Adjust Crop Divider Height in
Operating the Harvester section and Calibrate System
in this section.
WM05597,000116A -19-28JAN15-1/1
65-12 041717
PN=153
Harvesting Hints
Harvesting Tips • Maintains engine speed (fixed rpm)
Different field conditions require different settings and
• Optimize fuel savings
approaches to harvesting sugar cane.
• More complex to set up
Automatic FieldCruise™:
In areas with low or light engine load:
• Variable field conditions (mixed cane, standing and
• Low or light engine load is where the engine is less than down)
90% continuous load. Change the display to show the • Variable engine speed
Engine load at rpm%. See Configure Detail Machine
Information in GreenStar™ 3 2630 Display Screens
• Optimize fuel savings
section for more information.
• Less complex to set up
• FieldCruise™ may be used to limit the high idle of the Always remember:
engine. See Engine Setup Screen in GreenStar™ 3
2630 Display Screens section for more information. • Always raise crop dividers and base cutter before
backing up.
• Crop dividers should be tilted up to lower the amount of
• Elevator must be in the UP position before rotating and
soil brought into the harvester.
positioned directly behind the machine before lowering.
• Elevator speed control (if equipped) may be used
• Field trash from the extractors should not be blown into
to reduce the elevator speed and wear on elevator
components. See Elevator Screen in GreenStar™ 3 field transport systems or into uncut, standing cane
2630 Display Screens section for more information. rows. Elevator swing/hood synchronization may be
enabled to rotate the primary extractor automatically
In areas with heavy engine load: when the elevator is rotated. See Primary Extractor
Screen in GreenStar™ 3 2630 Display Screens section
• Heavy engine load is where the engine has continuous for more information.
load due to the amount of cane the harvester is • When filling field transport systems, elevator discharge
processing. flap needs adjustment to more efficiently distribute the
• Tilt crop dividers downward. Crop divider toe lifts the cane billets.
cane into the throat of the harvester.
• Primary extractor speed should be changed as
• Automatic FieldCruise™ should be selected under this harvesting conditions change. If fan speed is too high,
condition as it will automatically adjust engine rpm billets will be heard hitting the extractor hood and
according to load changes. ejected out the extractor.
• Do NOT operate with FieldCruise™ on if engine is • Check primary extractor rpm when entering a new block
above 90% continuous load. of cane.
• Do NOT harvest at too high of speed. This may cause • Adjust base cutter height constantly so it trims just the
choking in the feed rollers and chopper system. top of the row, allowing the least amount of dirt into the
To lower fuel consumption and wear on the harvester: harvester. Cutting too high causes splitting of cane and
less tonnage. Cutting too low causes dirt and stubble to
• FieldCruise™ should be used to limit the high idle of the enter the harvester.
engine. See Engine Setup Screen in GreenStar™ 3 • When harvesting, keep harvester directly over the center
2630 Display Screens section for more information. of crop being cut. This prevents the base cutter from
• Smart power mode may be used to reduce the rpm of missing any cane and causing torn or broken stalks.
the primary extractor when the elevator is turned off. • Always use the topper, even on downed cane. The
See Primary Extractor Screen in GreenStar™ 3 2630 topper can still remove a certain percentage of tops to
Display Screens section for more information. aid in the cleaning process.
• Elevator speed control (if equipped) may be used • Be cautious when entering into a row. Possible
to reduce the elevator speed and wear on elevator recirculation of the chopped cane can occur near
components. See Elevator Screen in GreenStar™ 3 chopper when elevator basket is filled above capacity.
2630 Display Screens section for more information. Cane spillage out of the basket can also occur at this
time.
Manual FieldCruise™:
• Constant (uniform) field conditions
AS09261,000009C -19-12OCT16-1/1
70-1 041717
PN=154
Harvesting Sugar Cane
Harvesting Safety Tips 7. Always check gauges periodically during the
harvesting operation.
1. Always keep elevator swung to the rear of the 8. Always shut OFF engine, remove key, and turn OFF
harvester while waiting for the transport unit in the field. battery disconnect switch before cutting out vines and
This eliminates field transports hitting the elevator. other chokes.
2. Do not let engine idle for more than 5 minutes. After 5
minutes of idling, shut OFF engine and restart when
CAUTION: Do NOT manually remove chokes
ready.
while engine is running.
3. Always use caution when harvesting near trees, utility
lines, and utility poles. Verify that both topper and
9. When clearing chokes from harvester, ALWAYS
elevator are clear.
allow components to come to a complete stop before
4. Always raise crop dividers when nearing the end of a
engaging harvesting functions in forward or reverse
row to avoid damaging harvester.
mode.
5. Use caution when cutting in unfamiliar fields.
10. ALWAYS keep fire extinguisher filled and charged.
6. Always harvest with engine at full throttle or with
Automatic FieldCruise™ active.
WM05597,00010D9 -19-09JAN15-1/1
Harvesting Conditions • Cane that is down with the row should be cut so base of
There are many conditions that will dictate how a crop the stalk will enter harvester first. This eliminates risk of
must be harvested: uprooting cane.
• Some self-tipping transport units can only be loaded • Twisted and matted cane may require optional side
from one side. This may force downed cane to be cut knives to reduce uprooting from adjoining rows.
first. Under these conditions, ground speed is critical to
prevent uprooting cane before cutting.
• In all cases of cane harvesting, ground speed is
important in cutting cane to assure a good feed into the
• Cane that is down and cross-row should be cut in the harvester with minimal damage. Cutting too fast may
direction that allows crop dividers to lift cane up off the cause a bulldozer effect. It is essential that you monitor
adjoining row. the quality of cane going into field transport.
MB22538,0000097 -19-09SEP13-1/1
Planting for Mechanical Harvesting width will also help reduce the amount of cane that is
crushed or lost by off center cutting.
To minimize crop loss with mechanical harvesting, planting
should be done with the harvester in mind. • Row length is important to reduce turnarounds.
• Row spacing should conform to wheel width of • Headlands (field roads) should be wide enough to allow
harvester. This will minimize damage to cane and row, harvester to enter and exit without rolling over cane
while keeping harvester over center of row. Proper row rows. Roads should be 6 m (19 ft.) in width.
MB22538,00000A7 -19-09SEP13-1/1
75-1 041717
PN=155
Harvesting a Field
It is best to harvest a field next to a road or a previously
cut field. This allows the harvester to open a field without
field transport rolling over more cane than necessary.
When a field must be harvested, field transport will have
to run over the third row of cane from the harvester. This
method will inevitably damage some cane. Rows should
be cut in same direction in which they were knocked
down. Narrow fields may require one opening in the
center. Width of a field is important, since in wide fields
more than one harvesting is required to reduce dead
travel between row cutting. To maximize harvesting time
the ideal number of rows, with the minimum of dead travel
CM002500253 —UN—10MAY01
between row cutting, is approximately 40. Cutting can be
from outside in, or if harvesting practices indicate, perform
field harvesting and row cutting from center out.
For example, a field that is 120 rows wide may require two
openings, 18—22 rows inward from both sides. These will
be cut from inside working outward.
The 40 rows in the center will be cut from outside working
inward, as the figure shows.
WM05597,0000E86 -19-24FEB14-1/1
75-2 041717
PN=156
Standard Harvesting
CM982500044 —UN—04JAN00
AG,T803584,87 -19-05JUN00-1/1
75-3 041717
PN=157
Harvesting Over a Ditch
CM982500101 —UN—05JAN00
AG,T803584,88 -19-05JUN00-1/1
75-4 041717
PN=158
Harvesting on a Headland
CM982500045 —UN—04JAN00
AG,T803584,89 -19-05JUN00-1/1
75-5 041717
PN=159
Pulling a Wagon On the First Row
T8120001827 —UN—05OCT12
KR43067,0000CD0 -19-17JAN13-1/1
75-6 041717
PN=160
Harvesting a Large Field
CM982500100 —UN—05JAN00
AG,T803584,91 -19-05JUN00-1/1
75-7 041717
PN=161
Transporting the Harvester
Loading Procedure
T8T5231 —UN—29MAR17
T8T5232 —UN—30MAR17
1. Remove and retain cap screws (A) and exhaust cover
(B).
2. Remove clamp (C) and exhaust pipe (D).
3. If still available, install the rain cap (E) to avoid water
intrusion.
4. Place clamp, exhaust cover, cap screws, and exhaust
pipe in a safe place during transport of harvester.
A—Cap Screws (4 used) D—Exhaust Pipe

B—Exhaust Cover E—Rain Cap
C—Clamp
T8T5234 —UN—30MAR17
Continued on next page AS09261,00001F3 -19-11APR17-1/4
80-1 041717
PN=162
T8T5236 —UN—30MAR17
T8T5235 —UN—30MAR17
5. Remove rain cap (A).
6. Install clamp (B) and exhaust pipe (C).
7. Turn the exhaust pipe (C) so the outlet is at a 45
degree angle (D) away from the edge (E).
NOTE: Lubricate threads on the clamp with clean oil.
8. Tighten clamp (C) to specification.

Specification
Clamp—Torque
(Lubricated)...................................................................................47 N·m
T8T5237 —UN—30MAR17
(35 lb·ft)
9. Install previously removed exhaust cover (F) and

retain with cap screws (G).
A—Rain Cap E—Edge

B—Clamp F— Exhaust Cover
C—Exhaust Pipe G—Cap Screws
D—45 Degree Angle
T8T5241 —UN—30MAR17
Continued on next page AS09261,00001F3 -19-11APR17-2/4
80-2 041717
PN=163
AS09261,00001F3 -19-11APR17-3/4
T8120002577 —UN—18DEC12
T8T1910 —UN—27JAN15
CAUTION: KNOW THE MAXIMUM HEIGHT AND

REACH OF YOUR MACHINE.
Serious possible injury or death by electrocution
may occur if the machine or its attachments are
not kept at a safe distance from electrical power
T8T2454 —UN—08MAY15
lines. Keep distance of at least 3.05 m (10 ft)
plus an extra 100 mm (3.9 in) for every 1000 V
over 50 000 V. Local and state regulations or
job site opening devices may require greater
distance for safety reasons.
Be aware of local laws regarding height
regulations during transport. Remember to add Right-Hand Side Of Machine Shown
height of the trailer to height of harvester.
• Keep trailer bed clean.

• Use a strong, low angle ramp, or loading dock when
loading harvester onto trailer.
• Be sure to load and unload the harvester on a level,
firm surface.
T8T559 —UN—13JUN14
• Use as many signal persons on the ground as needed
when loading and unloading. Coordinate hand signals
before starting the harvester.
• Drive harvester onto the trailer at a slow speed.
• The centerline of the harvester must be over the
centerline of the trailer.
• When the harvester is in place on the trailer, turn park
brake switch ON to engage the park brake.
• Lower the topper and elevator. Level the harvester. A—Rear Tie Down Point (2 C—Front Tie Down Point (2
• Apply safety stops to base cutter cylinders to prevent used) used)
the harvester from lowering. B—Upper Tie Down Point (2
• Turn OFF engine and turn battery disconnect switch used)
to OFF position.
• Fasten chains or cables to the proper tie-down points
transportation. This protects the turbocharger
(A—C). Do NOT put chains or cables over or against
hydraulic lines or hoses. from being damaged.
IMPORTANT: Cover the exhaust outlet when

the harvester is facing rearward during
AS09261,00001F3 -19-11APR17-4/4
80-3 041717
PN=164
Towing Procedure
CAUTION: Use hazard warning lights and turn

signals when towing equipment on public roads,
unless prohibited by state or local laws.
IMPORTANT:
• Engine cannot be started while towing.
• Never tow faster than 2 km/h (1 mph).
• Always tow harvester using rear or
front tow points.
• A hydraulic loop (free-flowing circuit) in
the ground drive system must be created
T8120002583 —UN—18DEC12
to allow oil to flow without restriction
through the final drives.
• Rear final drives must have brakes
released manually.
Towing a machine with a hydrostatic drive system requires

looping the hydraulic circuit. To loop both ground drive
pumps, perform the following:
Right-Hand Engine Compartment
Loop the Hydraulic Ground Drive Circuit
A—High-Pressure Port A C—High-Pressure Port A
NOTE: Two connector fittings (not supplied) are required B—High-Pressure Port B D—High-Pressure Port B
to join the hoses from the high-pressure ports of
the two ground drive pumps together.
The manual hydraulic pump is used to pressurize the
1. Disconnect hoses from ports (A and B) of first ground
disk brakes so they can perform the hydraulic release.
drive pump.
A pressure of 20 bar (300 psi) must be maintained
2. Connect hoses together using a connector fitting.
during the tow in order for brakes to remain free.
3. Disconnect hoses from ports (C and D) of second
3. Tie down and secure all loose hoses.
ground drive pump.
NOTE: In cases of urgency where the adequate resources
4. Connect hoses together using a connector fitting.
for preceding procedures do not exist, the front part
5. Cap or plug open ports on hydraulic pumps. of the final drive can be opened (Cover - releasing
allen screws with a 6 mm screwdriver) and remove
Release Brakes on Rear Final Drives the first gearing assembly. This frees the machine to
be towed a few meters. This first gearing assembly
1. The disk brakes located in each final drive must be comes out by hand and with it all the drive oil,
pressurized in order for them to be hydraulically allowing the machine to be moved a few meters.
released.
2. Connect the two brake lines, on the back of each final
drive, to a manual hydraulic pump using a T-fitting.
Continued on next page WM05597,0000FC8 -19-10DEC14-1/2
80-4 041717
PN=165
Tow Points
T8120002581 —UN—18DEC12
T8T1300 —UN—29SEP14
Rear Tow Points (Viewed From Below Swing Table) Front Tow Points
A—Rear Tow Points B—Front Tow Points
Always tow harvester from rear tow points (A) at elevator

swing table, or front tow points (B) at frame above NOTE: Upper knockdown roller may need extended or
knockdown roller. retracted to access front tow points.
WM05597,0000FC8 -19-10DEC14-2/2
80-5 041717
PN=166
Fuel, Lubricants, and Coolant
Engines with Tier 3-Stage IIIA/MAR-I
Emission Control
The emission control programs set maximum emission
limits for engines, reducing the environmental impact of
vehicles and machinery on air quality.
BM010705 —UN—22JAN16
Tier 3-Stage IIIA certified engines meet the requirements
of US EPA Tier 3, EU Stage IIIA, and PROCONVE MAR-I
regarding the maximum emission limits for agricultural
machinery.
The programs consider both machinery and fuel as an
integrated system. Therefore, it is essential the correct
use and maintenance of the machine.
Fuel quality and sulfur content must comply to the Deere dealer for proper maintenance to ensure
specifications described in this Manual. the correct emission control.
IMPORTANT: If the engine or the engine auxiliaries
fail during the lifespan, contact your John
LS87647,000018B -19-27APR16-1/1

sparks.
tank outdoors.
flammable liquids.
DX,FIRE1 -19-12OCT11-1/1
85-1 041717
PN=167
Avoid Static Electricity Risk When Refueling

The removal of sulfur and other compounds in Ultra-Low
Sulfur Diesel (ULSD) fuel decreases its conductivity and
increases its ability to store a static charge.
Refineries may have treated the fuel with a static
RG22142 —UN—17MAR14
dissipating additive. However, there are many factors that
can reduce the effectiveness of the additive over time.
Static charges can build up in ULSD fuel while it is flowing
through fuel delivery systems. Static electricity discharge
when combustible vapors are present could result in a
fire or explosion.
Therefore, it is important to ensure that the entire system
used to refuel your machine (fuel supply tank, transfer
pump, transfer hose, nozzle, and others) is properly
grounded and bonded. Consult with your fuel or fuel
system supplier to ensure that the delivery system is in
compliance with fueling standards for proper grounding
RG21992 —UN—21AUG13
and bonding practices.
DX,FUEL,STATIC,ELEC -19-12JUL13-1/1
85-2 041717
PN=168
Diesel Fuel
Consult your local fuel distributor for properties of the
Sulfur content for Interim Tier 4, Final Tier 4,
diesel fuel available in your area.
Stage III B, and Stage IV Engines
In general, diesel fuels are blended to satisfy the low
temperature requirements of the geographical area in • Use ONLY ultra low sulfur diesel (ULSD) fuel with a
which they are marketed. maximum of 15 mg/kg (15 ppm) sulfur content.
Diesel fuels specified to EN 590 or ASTM D975 are Sulfur Content for Tier 3 and Stage III A Engines
recommended. Renewable diesel fuel produced by
hydrotreating animal fats and vegetable oils is basically
• Use of diesel fuel with sulfur content less than 1000
mg/kg (1000 ppm) is RECOMMENDED.
identical to petroleum diesel fuel. Renewable diesel that
meets EN 590, ASTM D975, or EN 15940 is acceptable
• Use of diesel fuel with sulfur content 1000—2000 mg/kg
(1000—2000 ppm) REDUCES the oil and filter change
for use at all percentage mixture levels. interval.
Required Fuel Properties • BEFORE using diesel fuel with sulfur content greater
In all cases, the fuel shall meet the following properties: than 2000 mg/kg (2000 ppm), contact your John Deere
dealer.
Cetane number of 40 minimum. Cetane number greater
than 47 is preferred, especially for temperatures below Sulfur Content for Tier 2 and Stage II Engines
–20 °C (–4 °F) or elevations above 1675 m (5500 ft.).
• Use of diesel fuel with sulfur content less than 2000
Cold Filter Plugging Point (CFPP) should be at least 5 mg/kg (2000 ppm) is RECOMMENDED.
°C (9 °F) below the expected lowest temperature or Cloud • Use of diesel fuel with sulfur content 2000—5000 mg/kg
Point below the expected lowest ambient temperature. (2000—5000 ppm) REDUCES the oil and filter change
interval.
Fuel lubricity should pass a maximum scar diameter of • BEFORE using diesel fuel with sulfur content greater
0.52 mm as measured by ASTM D6079 or ISO 12156-1. than 5000 mg/kg (5000 ppm), contact your John Deere
A maximum scar diameter of 0.45 mm is preferred. dealer.
Diesel fuel quality and sulfur content must comply with Sulfur Content for Other Engines
all existing emissions regulations for the area in which
the engine operates. DO NOT use diesel fuel with sulfur • Use of diesel fuel with sulfur content less than 5000
content greater than 10 000 mg/kg (10 000 ppm). mg/kg (5000 ppm) is RECOMMENDED.
• Use of diesel fuel with sulfur content greater than 5000
E-Diesel fuel mg/kg (5000 ppm) REDUCES the oil and filter change
interval.
DO NOT use E-Diesel (Diesel fuel and ethanol blend).
Use of E-Diesel fuel in any John Deere machine may void IMPORTANT: Do not mix used diesel engine oil or any
the machine warranty. other type of lubricating oil with diesel fuel.
Improper fuel additive usage may cause damage
CAUTION: Avoid severe injury or death due to the
on fuel injection equipment of diesel engines.
fire and explosion risk from using E-Diesel fuel.
DX,FUEL1 -19-13JAN16-1/1
85-3 041717
PN=169
Handling and Storing Diesel Fuel
CAUTION: Reduce the risk of fire. Handle fuel When using biodiesel fuel, the fuel filter may require more
carefully. DO NOT fill the fuel tank when engine frequent replacement due to premature plugging.
is running. DO NOT smoke while you fill the
Check engine oil level daily prior to starting engine. A
fuel tank or service the fuel system.
rising oil level may indicate fuel dilution of the engine oil.
Fill the fuel tank at the end of each day's operation to IMPORTANT: The fuel tank is vented through the
prevent water condensation and freezing during cold filler cap. If a new filler cap is required, always
weather. replace it with an original vented cap.
Keep all storage tanks as full as practical to minimize
When fuel is stored for an extended period or if there is a
condensation.
slow turnover of fuel, add a fuel conditioner to stabilize the
Ensure that all fuel tank caps and covers are installed fuel and prevent water condensation. Contact your fuel
properly to prevent moisture from entering. Monitor water supplier or John Deere dealer for recommendations.
content of the fuel regularly.
DX,FUEL4 -19-15FEB13-1/1
Lubricity of Diesel Fuel
Most diesel fuels manufactured in the United States, If fuel of low or unknown lubricity is used, add John Deere
Canada, and the European Union have adequate lubricity Fuel-Protect Diesel Fuel Conditioner (or equivalent) at
to ensure proper operation and durability of fuel injection the specified concentration.
system components. However, diesel fuels manufactured
in some areas of the world may lack the necessary lubricity. Lubricity of BioDiesel Fuel
IMPORTANT: Make sure the diesel fuel used Fuel lubricity can improve significantly with BioDiesel
in your machine demonstrates good blends up to B20 (20% BioDiesel). Further increase in
lubricity characteristics. lubricity is limited for BioDiesel blends greater than B20.
Fuel lubricity should pass a maximum scar diameter of

0.52 mm as measured by ASTM D6079 or ISO 12156-1.
A maximum scar diameter of 0.45 mm is preferred.
DX,FUEL5 -19-07FEB14-1/1
Testing Diesel Fuel operations, bacteria, cloud point, acid number, particulate
contamination, and whether the fuel meets specification.
A fuel analysis program can help to monitor the quality
of diesel fuel. The fuel analysis can provide critical Contact your John Deere dealer for more information on
data such as cetane number, fuel type, sulfur content, diesel fuel analysis.
water content, appearance, suitability for cold weather
DX,FUEL6 -19-14APR11-1/1
85-4 041717
PN=170
BioDiesel Fuel
BioDiesel fuel is comprised of mono-alkyl esters of long
BioDiesel Use Requirements and Recommendations
chain fatty acids derived from vegetable oils or animal
fats. BioDiesel blends are BioDiesel mixed with petroleum The petroleum diesel portion of all BioDiesel blends must
diesel fuel on a volume basis. meet the requirements of ASTM D975 (US) or EN 590
Before using fuel containing BioDiesel, review the (EU) commercial standard.
BioDiesel Use Requirements and Recommendations in BioDiesel users in the U.S. are strongly encouraged to
this Operator’s Manual. purchase BioDiesel blends from a BQ-9000 Certified
Environmental laws and regulations can encourage or Marketer and sourced from a BQ-9000 Accredited
prohibit the use of biofuels. Operators should consult Producer (as certified by the National BioDiesel Board).
with appropriate governmental authorities prior to using Certified Marketers and Accredited Producers can be
biofuels. found at the following website: http://www.bq9000.org.
BioDiesel contains residual ash. Ash levels exceeding the
All John Deere Engines with Exhaust Filter
maximums allowed in either ASTM D6751 or EN14214
(Released 2011 and After)
can result in more rapid ash loading and require more
While 5% blends (B5) are preferred, BioDiesel frequent cleaning of the Exhaust Filter (if present).
concentrations up to a 20% blend (B20) in petroleum The fuel filter can require more frequent replacement,
diesel fuel can be used. BioDiesel blends up to B20 when using BioDiesel fuel, particularly if switching from
can be used ONLY if the BioDiesel (100% BioDiesel or diesel. Check engine oil level daily prior to starting engine.
B100) meets ASTM D6751, EN 14214, or equivalent A rising oil level can indicate fuel dilution of the engine oil.
specification. Expect a 2% reduction in power and a 3% BioDiesel blends up to B20 must be used within 90 days
reduction in fuel economy when using B20. of the date of BioDiesel manufacture. BioDiesel blends
BioDiesel concentrations above B20 can harm the above B20 must be used within 45 days from the date
engine’s emission control systems and should not be of BioDiesel manufacture.
used. Risks include, but are not limited to, more frequent When using BioDiesel blends up to B20, the following
stationary regeneration, soot accumulation, and increased must be considered:
intervals for ash removal.
John Deere approved fuel conditioners, which contain
• Cold-weather flow degradation
detergent and dispersant additives, are required when
• Stability and storage issues (moisture absorption,
microbial growth)
using BioDiesel blends from B10—B20, and are
recommended when using lower BioDiesel blends.
• Possible filter restriction and plugging (usually a problem
when first switching to BioDiesel on used engines)
All John Deere Engines Excluding Exhaust Filter • Possible fuel leakage through seals and hoses
(Primarily Released Prior to 2012) (primarily an issue with older engines)
• Possible reduction of service life of engine components
While 5% blends (B5) are preferred, BioDiesel
concentrations up to a 20% blend (B20) in petroleum Request a certificate of analysis from your fuel distributor
diesel fuel can be used. BioDiesel blends up to B20 to ensure that the fuel is compliant with the specifications
can be used ONLY if the BioDiesel (100% BioDiesel or provided in this Operator’s Manual.
B100) meets ASTM D6751, EN 14214, or equivalent Consult your John Deere dealer for approved fuel
specification. Expect a 2% reduction in power and a 3% conditioners to improve storage and performance with
reduction in fuel economy when using B20. BioDiesel fuels.
These John Deere engines can operate on BioDiesel The following must also be considered if using BioDiesel
blends above B20 (up to 100% BioDiesel). Operate at blends above B20:
levels above B20 ONLY if the BioDiesel is permitted
by law and meets the EN 14214 specification (primarily • Possible coking or blocked injector nozzles, resulting in
available in Europe). Engines operating on BioDiesel power loss and engine misfire if John Deere approved
blends above B20 might not fully comply with or be fuel conditioners are not used
permitted by all applicable emissions regulations. Expect • Possible crankcase oil dilution (requiring more frequent
up to a 12% reduction in power and an 18% reduction in oil changes)
fuel economy when using 100% BioDiesel. • Possible lacquering or seizure of internal components
• Possible formation of sludge and sediments
John Deere approved fuel conditioners, which contain • Possible thermal oxidation of fuel at elevated
detergent and dispersant additives, are required when temperatures
using BioDiesel blends from B10—B20, and are • Possible compatibility issues with other materials
recommended when using lower BioDiesel blends. (including copper, lead, zinc, tin, brass, and bronze)
used in fuel handling equipment
Continued on next page DX,FUEL7 -19-15MAY13-1/2
85-5 041717
PN=171
• Possible reduction in water separator efficiency ash loading and require more frequent cleaning of the
• Possible damage to paint if exposed to BioDiesel Exhaust Filter (if present)
• Possible corrosion of fuel injection equipment IMPORTANT: Raw pressed vegetable oils are
• Possible elastomeric seal and gasket material NOT acceptable for use as fuel in any
degradation (primarily an issue with older engines)
• Possible high acid levels within fuel system concentration in John Deere engines. Their
use could cause engine failure.
• Because BioDiesel blends above B20 contain more
ash, using blends above B20 can result in more rapid
DX,FUEL7 -19-15MAY13-2/2
85-6 041717
PN=172
Minimizing the Effect of Cold Weather on Diesel Engines

John Deere diesel engines are designed to operate
Diesel Fuel Flow Additive
effectively in cold weather.
However, for effective starting and cold-weather Use John Deere Fuel-Protect Diesel Fuel Conditioner
operation, a little extra care is necessary. The following (winter formula), which contains anti-gel chemistry, or
information outlines steps that can minimize the effect equivalent fuel conditioner to treat non-winter grade fuel
that cold weather may have on starting and operation of (No. 2-D in North America) during the cold-weather
your engine. See your John Deere dealer for additional season. This generally extends operability to about 10 °C
information and local availability of cold-weather aids. (18 °F) below the fuel cloud point. For operability at even
lower temperatures, use winter grade fuel.
Use Winter Grade Fuel
IMPORTANT: Treat fuel when outside temperature
When temperatures fall below 0 °C (32 °F), winter drops below 0 °C (32 °F). For best results, use
grade fuel (No. 1-D in North America) is best suited for with untreated fuel. Follow all recommended
cold-weather operation. Winter grade fuel has a lower instructions on label.
cloud point and a lower pour point.
BioDiesel
Cloud point is the temperature at which wax begins to
form in the fuel. This wax causes fuel filters to plug. Pour When operating with BioDiesel blends, wax formation can
point is the lowest temperature at which movement of occur at warmer temperatures. Begin using John Deere
the fuel is observed. Fuel-Protect Diesel Fuel Conditioner (winter formula) at 5
°C (41 °F) to treat BioDiesel fuels during the cold-weather
NOTE: On average, winter grade diesel fuel has a lower season. Use B5 or lower blends at temperatures below
Btu (heat content) rating. Using winter grade fuel 0 °C (32 °F). Use only winter grade petroleum diesel fuel
may reduce power and fuel efficiency, but should not at temperatures below -10 °C (14 °F).
cause any other engine performance effects. Check
the grade of fuel being used before troubleshooting Winterfronts
for low-power complaints in cold-weather operation.
Use of fabric, cardboard, or solid winterfronts is not
Air Intake Heater recommended with any John Deere engine. Their use
can result in excessive engine coolant, oil, and charge
An air intake heater is an available option for some air temperatures. This can lead to reduced engine life,
engines to aid cold weather starting. loss of power and poor fuel economy. Winterfronts may
also put abnormal stress on fan and fan drive components
Ether potentially causing premature failures.
An ether port on the intake is available to aid cold weather If winterfronts are used, they should never totally close
starting. off the grill frontal area. Approximately 25% area in the
center of the grill should remain open at all times. At no
CAUTION: Ether is highly flammable. Do not time should the air blockage device be applied directly
use ether when starting an engine equipped to the radiator core.
with glow plugs or an air intake heater.
Radiator Shutters
Coolant Heater If equipped with a thermostatically controlled radiator
An engine block heater (coolant heater) is an available shutter system, this system should be regulated in such
option to aid cold weather starting. a way that the shutters are completely open by the time
the coolant reaches 93 °C (200 °F) to prevent excessive
Seasonal Viscosity Oil and Proper Coolant intake manifold temperatures. Manually controlled
Concentration systems are not recommended.
Use seasonal grade viscosity engine oil based on the If air-to-air aftercooling is used, the shutters must be
expected air temperature range between oil changes completely open by the time the intake manifold air
and a proper concentration of low silicate antifreeze as temperature reaches the maximum allowable temperature
recommended. (See DIESEL ENGINE OIL and ENGINE out of the charge air cooler.
COOLANT requirements in this section.) For more information, see your John Deere dealer.
DX,FUEL10 -19-15MAY13-1/1
85-7 041717
PN=173
Supplemental Diesel Fuel Additives

Diesel fuel can be the source of performance or other
operational problems for many reasons. Some causes To further aid in maintaining performance and reliability of
include poor lubricity, contaminants, low cetane number, the engine's fuel system, John Deere has developed a
and a variety of properties that cause fuel system family of fuel additive products for most global markets.
deposits. These and others are referenced in other The primary products include Fuel-Protect Diesel Fuel
sections of this Operator's Manual. Conditioner (full feature conditioner in winter and summer
formulas) and Fuel-Protect Keep Clean (fuel injector
To optimize engine performance and reliability, closely deposit removal and prevention). Availability of these and
follow recommendations on fuel quality, storage, and other products varies by market. See your local John
handling, which are found elsewhere in this Operator's Deere dealer for availability and additional information
Manual. about fuel additives that might be right for your needs.
DX,FUEL13 -19-07FEB14-1/1
85-8 041717
PN=174
Diesel Engine Coolant (engine with wet sleeve cylinder liners) (Tier 2/Stage II and Tier
3/Stage III)
Preferred Coolants • Coolant concentrate meeting ASTM D6210

requirements in a 40—60% mixture of concentrate with
The following pre-mix engine coolants are preferred: quality water
• John Deere COOL-GARD™II If coolant meeting one of these specifications is
• John Deere COOL-GARD II PG unavailable, use a coolant concentrate or pre-mix coolant
COOL-GARD II pre-mix coolant is available in several that has a minimum of the following chemical and physical
concentrations with different freeze protection limits as properties:
shown in the following table. • Provides cylinder liner cavitation protection according to
COOL-GARD II pre-mix Freeze Protection Limit either the John Deere Cavitation Test Method or a fleet
COOL-GARD II 20/80 -9 °C (16 °F) study run at or above 60% load capacity
COOL-GARD II 30/70 -16 °C (3 °F)
• Is formulated with a nitrite-free additive package
COOL-GARD II 50/50 -37 °C (-34 °F)
• Protects the cooling system metals (cast iron, aluminum
alloys, and copper alloys such as brass) from corrosion
COOL-GARD II 55/45 -45 °C (-49 °F)
COOL-GARD II PG 60/40 -49 °C (-56 °F) Water Quality
COOL-GARD II 60/40 -52 °C (-62 °F) Water quality is important to the performance of the
cooling system. Distilled, deionized, or demineralized
Not all COOL-GARD II pre-mix products are available in water is recommended for mixing with ethylene glycol and
all countries. propylene glycol base engine coolant concentrate.
Use COOL-GARD II PG when a non-toxic coolant Coolant Drain Intervals
formulation is required.
Drain and flush the cooling system and refill with fresh
Additional Recommended Coolants coolant at the indicated interval, which varies with the
The following engine coolant is also recommended: coolant used.
• John Deere COOL-GARD II Concentrate in a 40—60% When COOL-GARD II or COOL-GARD II PG is used, the
mixture of concentrate with quality water. drain interval is 3 years or 3000 hours of operation.
IMPORTANT: When mixing coolant concentrate with If a coolant other than COOL-GARD II or COOL-GARD II
water, do not use less than 40% or greater PG is used, reduce the drain interval to 2 years or 2000
than 60% concentration of coolant. Less than hours of operation.
40% gives inadequate additives for corrosion IMPORTANT: Do not use cooling system sealing
protection. Greater than 60% can result in additives or antifreeze that contains
coolant gelation and cooling system problems. sealing additives.
Other Coolants Do not mix ethylene glycol and propylene
glycol base coolants.
Other ethylene glycol or propylene glycol base coolants
may be used if they meet the following specification: Do not use coolants that contain nitrites.
• Pre-mix coolant meeting ASTM D6210 requirements

COOL-GARD is a trademark of Deere & Company
WM05597,0001386 -19-12AUG15-1/1
85-9 041717
PN=175
Operating in Warm Temperature Climates

John Deere engines are designed to operate using Foaming, hot surface aluminum and iron
recommended engine coolants. corrosion, scaling, and cavitation occur when
Always use a recommended engine coolant, even when water is used as the coolant, even when
operating in geographical areas where freeze protection coolant conditioners are added.
is not required. Drain cooling system and refill with
IMPORTANT: Water may be used as coolant in recommended engine coolant as soon
emergency situations only. as possible.
DX,COOL6 -19-15MAY13-1/1
Testing Coolant Freeze Point

The use of a handheld coolant refractometer is the
quickest, easiest, and most accurate method to determine
coolant freeze point. This method is more accurate than
a test strip or a float-type hydrometer which can produce
poor results.
TS1732 —UN—04SEP13
A coolant refractometer is available through your
John Deere dealer under the SERVICEGARD™ tool
program. Part number 75240 provides an economical
solution to accurate freeze point determination in the field.
To use this tool:
SERVICEGARD™ Part Number 75240
1. Allow cooling system to cool to ambient temperatures.
2. Open radiator cap to expose coolant.
3. With the included dropper, collect a small coolant
sample.
4. Open the lid of the refractometer, place one drop of
coolant on the window and close the lid.
5. Look through the eyepiece and focus as necessary.
6. Record the listed freeze point for the type of coolant
(ethylene glycol coolant or propylene glycol) being
tested.
TS1733 —UN—04SEP13
Image with a Drop of 50/50 Coolant Placed on the Refractometer Window
SERVICEGARD is a trademark of Deere & Company

DX,COOL,TEST -19-13JUN13-1/1
85-10 041717
PN=176
Water Quality for Mixing with Coolant Concentrate

Engine coolants are a combination of three chemical
components: ethylene glycol (EG) or propylene glycol Freeze Protection
(PG) antifreeze, inhibiting coolant additives, and quality The relative concentrations of glycol and water in the
water. engine coolant determine its freeze protection limit.
Water quality is important to the performance of the Ethylene Glycol Freeze Protection Limit
cooling system. Distilled, deionized, or demineralized 40% -24 °C (-12 °F)
water is recommended for mixing with ethylene glycol and
50% -37 °C (-34 °F)
propylene glycol base engine coolant concentrate.
60% -52 °C (-62 °F)
All water used in the cooling system should meet the Propylene Glycol Freeze Protection Limit
following minimum specifications for quality: 40% -21 °C (-6 °F)
Chlorides <40 mg/L 50% -33 °C (-27 °F)
Sulfates <100 mg/L 60% -49 °C (-56 °F)
Total solids <340 mg/L
Total dissolved I hardness <170 mg/L DO NOT use a coolant-water mixture greater than 60%
pH 5.5—9.0 ethylene glycol or 60% propylene glycol.
IMPORTANT: Do not use bottled drinking water

because it often contains higher concentrations
of total dissolved solids.
DX,COOL19 -19-15MAY13-1/1
John Deere COOL-GARD™ II Coolant Extender
Some coolant additives gradually deplete during COOL-GARD II Coolant Extender is not intended for use
engine operation. For COOL-GARD™ II pre-mix and with nitrite-containing coolants.
COOL-GARD II Concentrate, replenish coolant additives
between drain intervals by adding COOL-GARD II Coolant IMPORTANT: Do not add a supplemental coolant
Extender. additive when the cooling system is drained
and refilled with any of the following:
COOL-GARD II Coolant Extender should not be added
unless indicated by COOL-GARD II Test Strips. These • John Deere COOL-GARD II
test strips provide a simple, effective method to check the • John Deere COOL-GARD II PG
freeze point, additive levels, and pH of your engine coolant.
The use of non-recommended supplemental coolant
Test the coolant solution at intervals of 12 months and additives can result in additive drop-out, gelation of the
whenever excessive coolant is lost through leaks or coolant, or corrosion of cooling system components.
overheating.
Add the recommended concentration of COOL-GARD
IMPORTANT: Do not use COOL-GARD II Test II Coolant Extender. DO NOT add more than the
Strips with COOL-GARD II PG. recommended amount.
COOL-GARD II Coolant Extender is a chemically matched

additive system for use with all COOL-GARD II coolants.
COOL-GARD is a trademark of Deere & Company
DX,COOL16 -19-15MAY13-1/1
85-11 041717
PN=177
Diesel Engine Break-In Oil — Non-Emissions Certified and Certified Tier 1, Tier 2, Tier
3, Stage I, Stage II, and Stage III
New engines are filled at the factory with either John • ACEA Oil Sequence E2
Deere Break-In™ or John Deere Break-In Plus™ • ACEA Oil Sequence E1
Engine Oil. During the break-in period, add John Deere
Break-In™ or Break-In Plus™ Engine Oil, respectively, as IMPORTANT: Do not use Plus-50™ II, Plus-50™, or
needed to maintain the specified oil level. engine oils meeting any of the following for the
initial break-in of a new or rebuilt engine:
Operate the engine under various conditions, particularly API CK-4 ACEA E9
heavy loads with minimal idling, to help seat engine
API CJ-4 ACEA E7
components properly.
API CI-4 PLUS ACEA E6
If John Deere Break-In™ Engine Oil is used during the API CI-4 ACEA E5
initial operation of a new or rebuilt engine, change the oil
API CH-4 ACEA E4
and filter at a maximum of 100 hours.
API CG-4 ACEA E3
If John Deere Break-In Plus™ Engine Oil is used, change API CF-4
the oil and filter at a minimum of 100 hours and a API CF-2
maximum equal to the interval specified for John Deere
API CF
Plus-50™ II or Plus-50™ oil.
After engine overhaul, fill the engine with either John These oils do not allow the engine to
Deere Break-In™ or Break-In Plus™ Engine Oil. break in properly.
If John Deere Break-In™ or Break-In Plus™ Engine Oil is John Deere Break-In Plus™ Engine Oil can be used for
not available, use an SAE 10W-30 viscosity grade diesel all John Deere diesel engines at all emission certification
engine oil meeting one of the following and change the oil levels.
and filter at a maximum of 100 hours of operation:
After the break-in period, use John Deere Plus-50™
• API Service Classification CE II, John Deere Plus-50™, or other diesel engine oil as
• API Service Classification CD recommended in this manual.
• API Service Classification CC
Break-In is a trademark of Deere & Company.
Break-In Plus is a trademark of Deere & Company
Plus-50 is a trademark of Deere & Company.
DX,ENOIL4 -19-02NOV16-1/1
85-12 041717
PN=178
Diesel Engine Oil — Tier 2 and Stage II

Use oil viscosity based on the expected air temperature
range during the period between oil changes. 50 o C 122o F
John Deere Plus-50™ II oil is preferred. 40 o C 104o F
John Deere Plus-50™ is also recommended. 30 o C 86 o F
SAE 15W-40
Other oils may be used if they meet one or more of the
SAE 10W-40
following: 20 o C 68 o F
SAE 10W-30
SAE 0W-40
SAE 5W-30
• John Deere Torq-Gard™ 10 o C 50 o F
• API Service Category CK-4
• API Service Category CJ-4 0o C 32 o F
• API Service Category CI-4 PLUS
• API Service Category CI-4 -10 o C 14 o F
• API Service Category CH-4
• ACEA Oil Sequence E9 -20 o C -4 o F
TS1689 —UN—18JUL07
• ACEA Oil Sequence E7
Multi-viscosity diesel engine oils are preferred.
Diesel fuel quality and fuel sulfur content must comply Oil Viscosities for Air Temperature Ranges
with all existing emissions regulations for the area in
which the engine operates.
DO NOT use diesel fuel with sulfur content greater than
10000 mg/kg (10000 ppm).
Plus-50 is a trademark of Deere & Company
Torq-Gard is a trademark of Deere & Company
DX,ENOIL7 -19-02NOV16-1/1
85-13 041717
PN=179
Diesel Engine Oil — Tier 3 and Stage III

Use oil viscosity based on the expected air temperature
range during the period between oil changes. 50 o C 122o F
John Deere Plus-50™ II oil is preferred. 40 o C 104o F
John Deere Plus-50™ is also recommended. 30 o C 86 o F
SAE 15W-40
Other oils may be used if they meet one or more of the
SAE 10W-40
following: 20 o C 68 o F
SAE 10W-30
SAE 0W-40
SAE 5W-30
• John Deere Torq-Gard™ 10 o C 50 o F
• API Service Category CK-4
• API Service Category CJ-4 0o C 32 o F
• API Service Category CI-4 PLUS
• API Service Category CI-4 -10 o C 14 o F
TS1691 —UN—18JUL07
Multi-viscosity diesel engine oils are preferred. -40 o C -40 o F
Diesel fuel quality and fuel sulfur content must comply

with all existing emissions regulations for the area in Oil Viscosities for Air Temperature Ranges
which the engine operates.
DO NOT use diesel fuel with sulfur content greater than
10000 mg/kg (10000 ppm).
DX,ENOIL11 -19-02NOV16-1/1
Diesel Engine Oil Service Interval for Operation at High Altitude

To avoid excessive oil degradation and potential engine Example of Original Hours Corresponding High Altitude
Hours
damage, reduce oil and filter service intervals to 50% of
the original recommended values when operating engines 125 60
at altitudes above 1675 m (5500 ft). 150 75
175 85
Oil analysis may allow longer service intervals.
200 100
Use only approved oil types. 250 125
275 135
300 150
350 175
375 185
400 200
500 250
DX,ENOIL,SERV,HIALT -19-11NOV14-1/1
85-14 041717
PN=180
Engine Oil and Filter Service Intervals — Tier 2 and Stage II Engines
Recommended oil and filter service intervals are based • Use only approved oil types.
on a combination of oil pan capacity, type of engine oil
and filter used, and sulfur content of the diesel fuel. Approved Oil Types:
Actual service intervals also depend on operation and
maintenance practices. • “Plus-50 Oils” include John Deere Plus-50™ II and
John Deere Plus-50™.
Use oil analysis to evaluate the condition of the oil and to • “Other Oils” include John Deere Torq-Gard™, API CK-4,
aid in selection of the proper oil and filter service interval. API CJ-4, API CI-4 PLUS, API CI-4, API CH-4, ACEA
Contact your John Deere dealer for more information on E9, ACEA E7, ACEA E6, ACEA E5, and ACEA E4.
engine oil analysis. Engine Oil and Filter Service Intervals
Change the oil and oil filter at least once every 12 months Fuel Sulfur Less than 2000 mg/kg (2000 ppm)
even if the hours of operation are fewer than the otherwise Plus-50 Oils 375 hours
recommended service interval. Other Oils 250 hours
Diesel fuel sulfur content affects engine oil and filter Fuel Sulfur 2000—5000 mg/kg (2000—5000 ppm)
service intervals. Plus-50 Oils 275 hours
Other Oils 150 hours
• Use of diesel fuel with sulfur content less than 2000 Fuel Sulfur 5000—10000 mg/kg (5000—10000 ppm)
mg/kg (2000 ppm) is RECOMMENDED.
• Use of diesel fuel with sulfur content 2000—5000 mg/kg Plus-50 Oils 187 hours (See John Deere dealer)
(2000—5000 ppm) REDUCES the oil and filter change Other Oils 125 hours (See John Deere dealer)
interval. Oil analysis may extend the service interval of “Other Oils”, to a
• BEFORE using diesel fuel with sulfur content greater maximum not to exceed the interval for Plus-50 Oils. Oil analysis means
than 5000 mg/kg (5000 ppm), contact your John Deere taking a series of oil samples at 50-hour increments beyond the normal
dealer. service interval until either the data indicates the end of useful oil life or
the maximum service interval of John Deere Plus-50 oils is reached.
IMPORTANT: To avoid engine damage:
• Reduce oil and filter service intervals by 50%
when using BioDiesel blends greater than B20.
Oil analysis may allow longer service intervals.
DX,ENOIL12,T2,STD -19-02NOV16-1/1
85-15 PN=181
041717
Engine Oil and Filter Service Intervals — Tier 3 and Stage IIIA — PowerTech™ Plus Engines
Recommended oil and filter service intervals are based
on a combination of oil pan capacity, type of engine oil
• “Plus-50 Oils” include John Deere Plus-50™ II and
John Deere Plus-50™.
and filter used, and sulfur content of the diesel fuel.
Actual service intervals also depend on operation and
• “Other Oils” include John Deere Torq-Gard™, API
CK-4, API CJ-4, API CI-4 PLUS, API CI-4, ACEA E9,
maintenance practices. ACEA E7, ACEA E6, ACEA E5, and ACEA E4.
Use oil analysis to evaluate the condition of the oil and to NOTE: The 500 hour extended oil and filter change
aid in selection of the proper oil and filter service interval. interval is only allowed if all of the following
Contact your John Deere dealer for more information on conditions are met:
engine oil analysis.
Change the oil and oil filter at least once every 12 months
• Use of diesel fuel with sulfur content less
than 1000 mg/kg (1000 ppm).
even if the hours of operation are fewer than the otherwise
recommended service interval.
• Use of John Deere Plus-50™ II or John
Deere Plus-50™ oil.
Diesel fuel sulfur content affects engine oil and filter • Use of an approved John Deere oil filter.
service intervals.
Engine Oil and Filter Service Intervals
• Use of diesel fuel with sulfur content less than 1000 Fuel Sulfur Less than 1000 mg/kg (1000 ppm)
mg/kg (1000 ppm) is RECOMMENDED. Plus-50 Oils 500 hours
• Use of diesel fuel with sulfur content 1000—2000 mg/kg
Other Oils 250 hours
(1000—2000 ppm) REDUCES the oil and filter change
interval. Fuel Sulfur 1000—2000 mg/kg (1000—2000 ppm)
• BEFORE using diesel fuel with sulfur content greater Plus-50 Oils 300 hours
than 2000 mg/kg (2000 ppm), contact your John Deere Other Oils 200 hours
dealer. Fuel Sulfur 2000—10000 mg/kg (2000—10000 ppm)
• DO NOT use diesel fuel with sulfur content greater than Plus-50 Oils Contact John Deere dealer
10000 mg/kg (10000 ppm).
Other Oils Contact John Deere dealer
IMPORTANT: To avoid engine damage: Oil analysis may extend the service interval of “Other Oils”, to a
maximum not to exceed the interval of Plus-50 Oils. Oil analysis means
• Reduce oil and filter service intervals by 50% taking a series of oil samples at 50-hour increments beyond the normal
when using BioDiesel blends greater than B20. service interval until either the data indicates the end of useful oil life or
Oil analysis may allow longer service intervals. the maximum service interval of John Deere Plus-50 oils is reached.
• Use only approved oil types.
Approved Oil Types:

DX,ENOIL13,T3,PTP,120to139 -19-02NOV16-1/1
85-16 PN=182
041717
Oilscan™ and CoolScan™

Oilscan™ and CoolScan™ are John Deere sampling
programs to help you monitor machine performance and
identify potential problems before they cause serious
damage.
T6828AB —UN—15JUN89
Oil and coolant samples should be taken from each
system before its recommended change interval.
Check with your John Deere dealer for the availability of
Oilscan™ and CoolScan™ kits.
T6829AB —UN—26AUG11
Oilscan is a trademark of Deere & Company
CoolScan is a trademark of Deere & Company
DX,OILSCAN -19-13SEP11-1/1
Oil Filters of the bond between the filter media and the element end
cap, fatigue life of the canister (if applicable), and pressure
Filtration of oils is critically important for proper operation capability of the filter seal. Non-John Deere branded oil
and lubrication. John Deere brand oil filters have been filters might not meet these key John Deere specifications.
designed and produced specifically for John Deere
applications. Always change oil filters regularly as specified in this
manual.
John Deere filters adhere to engineering specifications for
quality of the filter media, filter efficiency rating, strength
DX,FILT1 -19-11APR11-1/1
Fuel Filters manufacturing tolerances have significantly reduced

capacities for debris and water.
The importance of fuel filtration cannot be overemphasized
with modern fuel systems. The combination of increasingly John Deere brand fuel filters have been designed and
restrictive emission regulations and more efficient engines produced specifically for John Deere engines.
requires fuel system to operate at much higher pressures.
Higher pressures can only be achieved using fuel injection To protect the engine from debris and water, always
components with very close tolerances. These close change engine fuel filters as specified in this manual.
DX,FILT2 -19-14APR11-1/1
85-17 041717
PN=183
Alternative and Synthetic Lubricants

Conditions in certain geographical areas may require
lubricant recommendations different from those printed in Synthetic lubricants may be used if they meet the
this manual. performance requirements as shown in this manual.
Some John Deere brand coolants and lubricants may not The temperature limits and service intervals shown in
be available in your location. this manual apply to both conventional and synthetic
lubricants.
Consult your John Deere dealer to obtain information and
recommendations. Re-refined base stock products may be used if the
finished lubricant meets the performance requirements.
DX,ALTER -19-11APR11-1/1
Lubricant Storage
Your equipment can operate at top efficiency only when
clean lubricants are used. Make certain that all containers are properly marked to
identify their contents.
Use clean containers to handle all lubricants.
Properly dispose of all old containers and any residual
Store lubricants and containers in an area protected from lubricant they may contain.
dust, moisture, and other contamination. Store containers
on their side to avoid water and dirt accumulation.
DX,LUBST -19-11APR11-1/1
Mixing of Lubricants
In general, avoid mixing different brands or types of oil. Consult your John Deere dealer to obtain specific
Oil manufacturers blend additives in their oils to meet information and recommendations.
certain specifications and performance requirements.
Mixing different oils can interfere with the proper
functioning of these additives and degrade lubricant
performance.
DX,LUBMIX -19-18MAR96-1/1
85-18 041717
PN=184
Hydraulic Fluid
50 o C 122o F
NOTE: Before filling, make sure of fluid specification
present in the hydraulic system to not to
mix different fluids. 40 o C 104o F
John Deere Plus-4™ or SAE 10W-30 API SL/CF 30 o C 86 o F

or higher fluids are recommended.
SAE 15W-40
SAE 10W-40
20 o C 68 o F
Other fluids may be used if they are in accordance with at
SAE 10W-30
least one of the following specifications:
SAE 5W-30
10 o C 50 o F
• ISO VG 68, for wide temperature range as:
- ASTM 6158-05 (Fluid HV)
0o C 32 o F
- ISO 11158 (Fluid HV)
- DIN 51524 Part 3 type HVLP
-10 o C 14 o F
-20 o C -4 o F
CQ298938 —UN—06APR15
-30 o C -22 o F
-40 o C -40 o F

OU90500,00003DA -19-16APR15-1/1
Pump Drive, Base Cutter, and Chopper Gear

50 o C 122o F
Case Oil
Depending upon the expected air temperature range 40 o C 104o F
during the drain interval, use oil viscosity shown on the
adjoining temperature chart. 30 o C
SAE 140
86 o F
SAE 85W-140
John Deere 85W-140 API GL-5 gear oil is recommended.

SAE 80W-140
If other oils are used, they must meet performance 20 o C 68 o F
SAE 90
SAE 80W-90
requirements of:
10 o C 50 o F
• API Service Classification GL-5
0o C 32 o F
SAE 75W-90
-10 o C 14 o F
SAE 75W
-20 o C -4 o F
CQ298934 —UN—31MAR15
-30 o C -22 o F
-40 o C -40 o F
OU90500,00003CB -19-25MAR15-1/1
85-19 041717
PN=185
Final Drive Gear Oil

If other oils are used, they must be EP (Extreme Pressure)
NOTE: For wheel machine or two-speed track machine according to SAE J2360 specification.
use John Deere Synthetic 80W/140 API GL5 EP oil.
John Deere Synthetic 80W/140 API GL5 EP

oil is preferred.
John Deere 85W/140 API GL5 EP oil is also
recommended.
WM05597,00012D3 -19-23APR15-1/1
Grease
Use grease based on NLGI consistency numbers and the
expected air temperature range during the service interval.
John Deere SD Polyurea Grease is preferred.
The following greases are also recommended:
• John Deere HD Lithium Complex Grease
• John Deere HD Water Resistant Grease
• John Deere GREASE-GARD™
Other greases may be used if they meet the following:
• NLGI Performance Classification GC-LB
IMPORTANT: Some types of grease thickeners are not
TS1673 —UN—31OCT03
compatible with others. Consult your grease
supplier before mixing different types of grease.
Greases for Air Temperature Ranges
GREASE-GARD is a trademark of Deere & Company

DX,GREA1 -19-14APR11-1/1
85-20 041717
PN=186
Lubrication, Maintenance, and Intervals
Required Emission-Related Information
Service Provider
A qualified repair shop or person of the owner's choosing may maintain, replace, or repair emission control devices and systems with original or
equivalent replacement parts. However, warranty, recall, and all other services paid for by John Deere must be performed at an authorized John
Deere service center.
DX,EMISSIONS,REQINFO -19-12JUN15-1/1
Important Considerations Lubrication and maintenance intervals are listed in this

IMPORTANT: Clean fittings before and after section.
applying grease. Replace any damaged or Locations and procedures are listed in the section for
missing fittings immediately. that interval.
WM05597,00011A3 -19-05FEB15-1/1
Service Your Harvester at Specified Intervals Perform service on items at multiples of the original
Perform lubrication, checks, and adjustments at intervals requirement. For example, at 1000 hours also service
specified in the following tables. those items listed under every 500 hours, every 250
hours, every 100 hours, and every 25 hours or daily.
OU90500,00003DE -19-30MAR15-1/1
Check Hour Meter Regularly

Maintenance intervals are for normal operating conditions.
Use the digital display to view engine hours and If the harvester is operating in difficult conditions, the
to determine when your harvester needs periodic harvester should be serviced at shorter intervals.
maintenance.
T803324,0000560 -19-10FEB05-1/1
Parts Catalog enter your model number. From there, you are able to
view the entire catalog or generate a parts list as required
To access the web-based parts catalog, go to in some markets.
https://jdparts.deere.com, select your language, and then
WM05597,000114D -19-10NOV14-1/1
Service Records Good maintenance practices will result in lower overall

Maintain an accurate, complete log of all maintenance and cost of ownership and operation along with increased
repair activities along with the hours and date performed. harvester life. Serial numbers should be recorded for
identification when servicing more than one harvester.
WM05597,0000BEC -19-09SEP13-1/1
90-1 041717
PN=187
Harvester Component Locations
T8T1981 —UN—08MAY15
1— Secondary Extractor 7— Engine Compartment 13— Base Cutter 20— Cart Guard
2— Elevator 8— Cab 14— Butt-Lifter Roller 21— Elevator Discharge Flap
3— Primary Extractor 9— Topper 15— Feed Rollers 22— Base Cutter Lift and Floating
4— Tie Down Points (3 areas) 10— Crop Dividers/Scrolls 16— Chopper Box Crop Divider Accumulators
5— Lights (4 areas) 11— Upper Knockdown Roller 17— Tow Loops
6— Air Intake Screens 12— Lower Knockdown Roller 18— Basket
19— Chopper Flywheel
WM05597,00010D4 -19-05FEB15-1/1
Service Interval Chart—First 100 Hours

Service First 100 Hours
Change engine oil and filter ♦
Replace fuel filters ♦
Change pump drive gear case oil ♦
Change chopper gear case oil ♦
Change base cutter gear case oil ♦
Change final drive oil (all machines) ♦
Lubricate base cutter ♦
Service rear axle (track machines only) ♦
AS09261,000009D -19-24AUG16-1/1
90-2 041717
PN=188
Service Interval Chart—Every 25 Hours or

Daily
Service Every 25 Hours or Daily
Clean machine using compressed air: Cooling package, muffler area, platform, hydraulic section, air
conditioning recirculation filter, air conditioning condenser, engine compartment, radiator, oil cooler, ♦
hydraulic oil cooler
Check fluid levels: Engine oil, hydraulic oil, engine coolant, and diesel fuel ♦
Inspect blades on: Side knives (if equipped), base cutter, chopper, topper, primary extractor, and ♦
secondary extractor (if equipped)
Check lights for damage or broken wires ♦
Check hydraulic system for leaks, missing/loose clamps, or damage ♦
Check air intake system ♦
Check and clean engine air pre-cleaner ♦
Lubricate upper suspension cylinders for track machines (2 fittings) ♦
Lubricate lower suspension cylinder for track machines (4 or 2 fittings) ♦
Lubricate lower suspension cylinder for wheel machines (10 fittings) ♦
Lubricate upper knockdown roller (3 fittings) ♦
Lubricate lower knockdown roller (2 fittings) ♦
Lubricate topper assembly (6 fittings) ♦
Lubricate manual tilt crop dividers (14 fittings) ♦
Lubricate hydraulic tilt crop dividers (if equipped) (14 fittings) ♦
Lubricate steering cylinders for wheel machines (2 fittings) ♦
Lubricate primary extractor (5 fittings) ♦
Lubricate secondary extractor (if equipped) (3 fittings) ♦
Lubricate elevator swing table (9 fittings) ♦
Lubricate feed roller pivots (10 fittings) ♦
Lubricate side knives (4 fittings) ♦
Check fluid levels: Pump drive, base cutter, and chopper gear case ♦
Clean harvester of excess mud and trash (especially feed rollers) ♦
Check track for bent, broken, loose, or missing parts ♦
Check fire extinguisher ♦
WM05597,00013F3 -19-08DEC15-1/1
Service Interval Chart—Every 50 Hours

Service Every 50 Hours
Inspect the elevator support cable for signs of wear, frays, or breaks ♦
Check wear on crop divider stops ♦
Check wear on feed roller cradle stops ♦
Check wear on elevator bumper stops ♦
Drain water from fuel filters ♦
Check fluid level: Final drives ♦
Adjust chopper timing ♦
Tighten chopper flywheel clutch nut ♦
Check and adjust tension of elevator chain ♦
Check suspension cylinder, topper boom, and cab tilt safety stops ♦
WM05597,00013A7 -19-03SEP15-1/1
90-3 041717
PN=189

Change final drives oil (wheel and two-speed track machines) ♦
Inspect base cutter gear case mounting hardware ♦
Inspect elevator slat mounting hardware and alignment ♦
Inspect primary extractor fan assembly ♦
Check wheel cap screw torquesa ♦
a
Wheel cap screw torques must be checked 10 hours after a wheel change and every 100 hours after.
AS09261,00000BD -19-13SEP16-1/1

Change final drives oil (one-speed track machines) ♦
Rear axle service ♦
Lubricate crop divider scrolls and outer scrolls (4 fittings) ♦
Lubricate elevator chain sprocket bearing (2 fittings) ♦
Lubricate base cutter (2 fittings) ♦
Lubricate chopper bearings (2 fittings) ♦
Lubricate chopper curtain agitator (if equipped) (1 fitting) ♦
Lubricate sill roller bearing (if equipped) (1 fitting) ♦
Lubricate feed roller bearings (9 fittings) ♦
Change engine oil and filtera ♦
Check engine belt and tensioner ♦
Check tires for damage and proper inflation ♦
Check fuel tank breather ♦
a
Fuel sulfur levels effect engine oil change frequency, when using standard oil. See Engine Oil and Filter Service Intervals—Tier 2 and
Stage II Engines or Engine Oil, Filter Service Intervals—Tier 3 and Stage IIIA—PowerTech™ Plus Engines, or Diesel Engine Oil Service
Interval for Operation at High Altitude in Fuels, Lubricants, and Coolant section for further information.
AS09261,00000BE -19-24AUG16-1/1

Change engine oil and filter (Tier 3/Stage III machines using Plus-50™
or Plus-50™ II requires a John Deere™ oil filter and a sulfur content ♦
less than 1000 ppm)
Replace engine primary air filter ♦
Check engine vibration isolators ♦
Check engine crankshaft dampener ♦
Check cooling package vibration isolators ♦
Check chopper vibration isolators ♦
Visually inspect coolant pump weep hole ♦
Check elevator wear strips ♦
Move elevator chain slats to next link ♦
Check Open Crankcase Vent (OCV) ♦

John Deere is a trademark of Deere & Company
AS09261,00000FF -19-12OCT16-1/1
90-4 041717
PN=190

Change pump drive, chopper, and base cutter gear case oil ♦
Check torsional dampener rubber blocks between engine and pump drive gear case ♦
Check seat belts ♦
Check accumulators pre-charge pressure ♦
Replace fuel filtersa,b ♦
a
Also replace fuel filter elements anytime audible alarm sounds and trouble codes indicate plugged fuel filters (low fuel pressure). If no alarm
sounds during the 12 month service interval, replace elements at that time, or after 1000 hours of operation, whichever comes first.
b
Do not change fuel prefilter and change primary and secondary fuel filters at the same time.
WM05597,00013F8 -19-11DEC15-1/1

Replace engine safety filter ♦
Change hydraulic oil filters ♦
Check chopper drum hardware ♦
WM05597,00013F9 -19-11DEC15-1/1

Check engine intake and exhaust valves clearance ♦
OU90500,00003D4 -19-25MAR15-1/1

Flush coolant system (Tier 2 and Tier 3 Only) ♦
Replace thermostats and gaskets (Tier 2 and Tier 3 Only) ♦
Replace torsional dampener rubber blocks between engine and pump drive gear case ♦
WM05597,000138A -19-13AUG15-1/1

Grease front wheel hub bearings ♦
Change engine vibration dampener, engine isolators, cooling package isolators and chopper vibration ♦
isolators
WM05597,00013B0 -19-10SEP15-1/1
90-5 041717
PN=191
Fluids Analysis
Fluids Sample Collecting Schedule (If
Applicable)
IMPORTANT: Use the fluids sample collecting
schedule only if applicable in your region.
Fluids Collecting Intervals

Collecting Intervals (hr.)
Compartment Monitored
350 600 850 1100 1350 1500 1600 1850 2100 2350 2600 2850 3000 3100
Liquid Coolant X X X
Engine Oil X X X X X X X X X X X X
Hydraulic Fluid X X X X
Final Drive Oil of Right-Hand
X X X X X X X X X X X X
Side
Final Drive Oil of Left-Hand
X X X X X X X X X X X X
Side
Total Collectings 3 3 4 4 3 1 3 3 4 4 3 3 1 4
Fluids Change Intervals

Compartment Monitored Changing (hr.)
Liquid Coolant 3000
Engine Oil 250
Engine Oil (Tier 3/Stage 3 Engine Using Plus-50™ and Plus-50™ II Oils) 500
Hydraulic Oila 1500
Final Drive Oil of Right-Hand Side
250
Final Drive Oil of Left-Hand Side
a
Perform oil analysis and change if necessary.
AS09261,0000100 -19-12OCT16-1/1
Important Considerations
The accessories for the sample collection of fluids vary
from one region to another. Before performing the sample
collection, verify the accessories available.
T81389 —UN—28JUN13
OU90500,000031E -19-04NOV14-1/1
95-1 PN=192
041717
Fluids Analysis
Engine Oil Sample Collection

IMPORTANT: Take care not to contaminate the engine
oil. Clean the area around the components
before performing any service.
1. Cut the hose (A) so that it is 250 mm (9.84 in.) longer
CQ294506 —UN—30APR13
CQ294507 —UN—30APR13
than the dipstick.
2. Attach one end of the hose (A) to the pump body (B)
and then tighten the nut (C).
3. Install the bottle (D) by turning it clockwise.
NOTE: The end of the hose (A) must have a minimum
length "X" inside the bottle (D) so that it
does not stay entirely in.
IMPORTANT: Keep the bottle cap (D) inside the bag

supplied with it, thus avoiding its contamination.
OU90500,0000016 -19-11JUN13-1/5
4. Insert the hose (A) on the tube (B) of the dipstick.

IMPORTANT: Handle the hose (A) carefully avoiding
its contact with any part of the harvester,
and thus contaminating the oil.
CQ294501 —UN—30APR13
5. Operate the pump (C) manually for the oil to be
sucked. If the oil is not sucked in, push the hose (A) a
little more into the tube (B).
IMPORTANT: Never turn the pump (C) upside down,
keep it in an upright position. Failure to observe
this procedure may cause its contamination.
OU90500,0000016 -19-11JUN13-2/5
6. When the bottle (A) is full, loosen the nut (B) for air to
enter and the oil stops from being sucked.
7. Remove the hose from the dipstick tube.
NOTE: Be very careful when removing the hose so
you do not spill any oil on the ground.
CQ294508 —UN—30APR13
CQ294509 —UN—30APR13
8. Remove the bottle (A) from the pump body by turning
it counterclockwise.
NOTE: After removing the bottle (A), store the pump
properly, ensuring its no contamination.
9. Cap the bottle (A).
Continued on next page OU90500,0000016 -19-11JUN13-3/5
95-2 041717
PN=193
Fluids Analysis
10. With the pump (A) in the vertical position, push the
hose (B) down and wipe all traces of oil.
11. Turn the pump (A) 180°, and wipe all traces of oil again.
12. Pull out the hose (B) to outside the pump (A).
CQ294510 —UN—30APR13
CQ294511 —UN—30APR13
OU90500,0000016 -19-11JUN13-4/5
13. Discard in a proper container the hose (A) and any

other material that is contaminated with oil during the
collection procedure.
14. Fill out the form (B) with the requested data and place
it inside the bag (C).
CQ294513 —UN—30APR13
CQ294512 —UN—30APR13
15. Place the bottle (D) into the bag (C) so that it is facing
up (standing).
16. Deliver the sample collected to your John Deere
dealer's service department, and the dealer will send
the sample to the laboratory for analysis.
OU90500,0000016 -19-11JUN13-5/5
Final Drives Oil Sample Collection

IMPORTANT: Take care not to contaminate the
final drives oil. Clean the area around the
components before performing any service.
CQ294507 —UN—30APR13
CQ294503 —UN—30APR13

4. Operate the pump manually for the oil to be sucked. If
3. Insert the hose (A) in the filler nozzle (E) of the final the oil is not sucked in, push the hose (A) a little more
drive, so that the hose penetrates 50 mm (1.9 in.) the into the filler nozzle (E).
oil level.
IMPORTANT: Never turn the pump (B) upside down,
IMPORTANT: Handle the hose (A) carefully avoiding keep it in an upright position. Failure to observe
its contact with any part of the harvester, this procedure may cause its contamination.
and thus contaminating the oil.
95-3 041717
PN=194
Fluids Analysis
enter and the oil stops from being sucked.
6. Remove the hose from the filler nozzle.
NOTE: Be very careful when removing the hose so
you do not spill any oil on the ground.
CQ294508 —UN—30APR13
CQ294509 —UN—30APR13

OU90500,0000017 -19-11JUN13-2/4

hose (B) down and wipe all traces of oil.
10. Turn the pump (A) 180°, and wipe all traces of oil again.
CQ294510 —UN—30APR13
CQ294511 —UN—30APR13
OU90500,0000017 -19-11JUN13-3/4

other material that is contaminated with oil during the
collection procedure.
CQ294513 —UN—30APR13
CQ294512 —UN—30APR13
up (standing).
OU90500,0000017 -19-11JUN13-4/4
95-4 041717
PN=195
Fluids Analysis
Hydraulic Fluid Sample Collection

hydraulic fluid. Clean the area around the
CQ294507 —UN—30APR13
CQ294504 —UN—30APR13

4. Operate the pump manually for the fluid to be sucked.
3. Insert the hose (A) in the relief fitting (E) on the side If the fluid is not sucked in, push the hose (A) a little
of the fluid reservoir, so that the hose penetrates 50 more into the relief fitting (E).
mm (1.9 in.) the fluid level.
IMPORTANT: Handle the hose (A) carefully avoiding keep it in an upright position. Failure to observe
its contact with any part of the harvester, this procedure may cause its contamination.
and thus contaminating the fluid.
OU90500,0000018 -19-11JUN13-1/4
enter and the fluid stops from being sucked.
6. Remove the hose from the relief fitting.
NOTE: Be very careful when removing the hose so you
do not spill any fluid on the ground. CQ294508 —UN—30APR13
CQ294509 —UN—30APR13
OU90500,0000018 -19-11JUN13-2/4

hose (B) down and wipe all traces of fluid.
10. Turn the pump (A) 180°, and wipe all traces of fluid
again.
CQ294510 —UN—30APR13
CQ294511 —UN—30APR13
95-5 041717
PN=196
Fluids Analysis

other material that is contaminated with coolant during
the collection procedure.
CQ294513 —UN—30APR13
CQ294512 —UN—30APR13
up (standing).
OU90500,0000018 -19-11JUN13-4/4
Coolant Sample Collection

coolant. Clean the area around the components
before performing any service.
CQ294502 —UN—21MAY13

OU90500,0000019 -19-11JUN13-1/5
3. Insert the hose (A) into the filler nozzle (E) of the
coolant recovery tank so that the hose penetrates 50
mm (1.9 in.) the coolant level.
IMPORTANT: Handle the hose (A) carefully avoiding
its contact with any part of the harvester, and
CQ294505 —UN—30APR13
thus contaminating the coolant.
4. Operate the pump manually for the coolant to be

sucked. If the coolant is not sucked in, push the hose
(A) a little more into the filler nozzle (E) of the coolant
recovery tank.
keep it in an upright position. Failure to observe
this procedure may cause its contamination.
95-6 041717
PN=197
Fluids Analysis
enter and the coolant stops from being sucked.
6. Remove the hose from the coolant recovery tank.
NOTE: Be very careful when removing the hose so you
do not spill any coolant on the ground.
CQ294508 —UN—30APR13
CQ294509 —UN—30APR13
properly, ensuring it's no contamination.

OU90500,0000019 -19-11JUN13-3/5

hose (B) down and wipe all traces of coolant.
10. Turn the pump (A) 180°, and wipe all traces of coolant
again.
CQ294510 —UN—30APR13
CQ294511 —UN—30APR13
OU90500,0000019 -19-11JUN13-4/5

other material that is contaminated with coolant during
the collection procedure.
CQ294513 —UN—30APR13
CQ294512 —UN—30APR13
up (standing).
OU90500,0000019 -19-11JUN13-5/5
95-7 041717
PN=198
Maintenance—First 100 Hours
Change Engine Oil and Replace Filter
NOTE: Reference the Fuel, Lubricants, and Coolant
section for the changing oil and filter service intervals.
1. Warm up oil. Run engine approximately 5 min. Set

park brake, shut OFF engine, and remove key.
T8T5004 —UN—16NOV16
IMPORTANT: Machine must be slightly tilted forward
when draining oil. If machine is on base
cutter safety stops, it is tilted up causing
old oil to remain in pan.
2. Remove and retain cap screw (A) and drain plates

Right-Hand Side Of Machine Shown
(B and C).
IMPORTANT: Not pulling hose all the way
out traps dirty oil.
NOTE: Machine has extra hose length to drain oil into

the approved container. Verify hose routing when
draining oil so that all oil is removed from the oil
pan. Care must be taken when replacing excess
hose back into engine compartment.
3. Pull hose out of engine compartment completely.

Secure hose inside an appropriate container.
T8T5044 —UN—18NOV16
4. Remove engine oil drain hose (D) from the hose cap
assembly (E).
A—Cap Screw D—Engine Oil Drain Hose

B—Drain Plate E—Hose Cap Assembly
C—Drain Plate
100-1 041717
PN=199
5. Behind knock down roller (A), remove cap screws (B)

and oil access panel (C).
NOTE: After the first 100-hour oil change, leave
the oil valve open and use only the hose
cap for future oil changes.
Dispose of used oil according to employer
and government guidelines.
6. Open valve (D) on the oil pan (E) and allow oil to drain
into a container. Venting by removing filler cap lowers
drain time.
T8T5062 —UN—21NOV16
A—Knockdown Roller D—Oil Valve
B—Cap Screw (8 used) E—Oill Pan
C—Access Panel
T8T5061 —UN—21NOV16
100-2 041717
PN=200
T8T1998 —UN—23APR15
T8T1999 —UN—23APR15
Right-Hand Side Of Engine Machine Shown Right-Hand Side Of Engine Machine Shown
A—Oil Filter B—O-Ring

C—Filter Housing
NOTE: Dispose of the used oil filter according to within the crosshatch on dipstick, whichever
employer and government guidelines. is present. Do NOT overfill.
7. Open right-hand engine compartment door. 13. Fill engine crankcase with correct John Deere
engine oil through the oil filler tube on the left-hand
8. Remove oil filter (A) and O-ring (B) from the filter side of machine. See Check Engine Oil Level in
housing (C) with a filter wrench or strap. Maintenance—Every 25 Hours or Daily.
Drain oil filter housing for 30 s. Discard oil filter and Specification
O-ring. Engine Crankcase—Ca-
pacity.............................................................................................. 33.3 L
IMPORTANT: Filtration of oils is critical to proper
(8.8 gal)
operation and lubrication. Always change
filter regularly. Only use filter meeting John IMPORTANT: Immediately after completing any
Deere performance specifications. oil change, crank engine for 30 s without
permitting engine to start. This helps
9. Retain engine oil drain hose to hose cap assembly. insure adequate lubrication to the engine
10. Clean inside of the filter housing. components before engine starts.
11. Apply clean oil to O-ring on the new oil filter and install 14. After start-up, check low oil pressure indicator light
on the filter housing. and check filter for possible leaks.
12. Tighten filter by hand until seal contacts housing, then 15. Stop engine and check oil level after 10 min. Oil level
tighten 1/4—1/2 turn more. reading must be within crosshatch or at the upper
mark of the dipstick.
NOTE: Crankcase oil capacity varies slightly.
ALWAYS fill the crankcase to the full mark or
AS09261,0000162 -19-21NOV16-3/3
100-3 PN=201
041717
Change Hydraulic Filters

1. Release pressure in hydraulic reservoir by removing
vent cap (A) on side of tank.
2. Clean filter cover (B) and area around it.
IMPORTANT: Be careful not to damage or lose
T8T317 —UN—01MAY14
O-ring when removing filter cover.
3. Remove and retain cap screws (C) and slowly lift filter
cover. Make sure no trash blows into tank while cover
is removed.
4. Remove filter assemblies.
5. Replace cover on tank to keep out trash.
6. Remove and retain nut, retainer, and spring (D) on
lower end of insert assembly. Slide filter (E) from rod
assembly (F).
T8130003034 —UN—02DEC13
7. Clean magnet (G) and inspect filter seals.
IMPORTANT: If hydraulic filters that do not meet
factory specifications are used, the warranty
of hydraulic components will be voided.
8. Install new filter on rod assembly. Replace spring,

retainer, and nut. Tighten nut only until it stops, no
further.
9. Remove filter cover and install filter assemblies into
hydraulic reservoir.
10. Install previously removed O-ring and filter cover on
T8130003035 —UN—02DEC13
reservoir and tighten cap screws to specification.
Specification
Filter Cover Cap
Screws—Torque............................................................................49 N·m
(36 lb.-ft.)
11. Install previously removed vent cap.
A—Vent Cap E—Filter

B—Filter Cover F— Rod Assembly
C—Cap Screws (8 used) G—Magnet
D—Nut, Retainer, and Spring
WM05597,0000F6A -19-05FEB15-1/1
100-4 041717
PN=202
Replace Prefilter Element (Tier 2/Stage II and

Tier 3/Stage III)
1. Close fuel shutoff valve. See Fuel Shutoff Valve in
2. Thoroughly clean fuel prefilter assembly and
surrounding area to keep from getting dirt and debris
into fuel system.
CAUTION: Fuel in filter is under high pressure.

Open drain valve on bottom of fuel prefilter to
relieve pressure before removing filter.
CQ298943 —UN—08APR15
NOTE: Catch fluids with an approved container
and dispose of according to employer and
government guidelines.
3. Connect a fuel drain line to filter drain valve (A) on

bottom of prefilter and drain all fuel. Close drain valve.
4. Remove and retain water separator bowl (B) from filter
element. Remove and discard prefilter element (C). A—Drain Valve D—Seal
B—Water Separator Bowl E—Seal
5. Clean water separator bowl with compressed air. C—Prefilter Element F— Filter Housing
6. Inspect filter housing and filter canister sealing

surfaces. Clean as required.
11. Open fuel shutoff valve.
7. Place new seal (D) on water separator bowl. Lubricate
seal with clean diesel fuel. NOTE: The hand pump on fuel prefilter is not required
to be used. The electric priming system is
8. Install water separator bowl onto new prefilter element. sufficient to prime the fuel system.
Tighten water separator bowl 1/2 of a turn after seal
contacts prefilter element. 12. Turn key to ON for 60 s to prime the fuel system before
starting engine.
9. Lubricate new prefilter element seal (E) with clean
diesel fuel and install prefilter assembly to filter NOTE: If necessary, turn key switch off and on again to
housing (F). prime the system again before starting.
10. Tighten prefilter element 1/2—3/4 of a turn after seal
contacts filter housing.
WM05597,00013AC -19-08SEP15-1/1
100-5 041717
PN=203
Change Pump Drive Gear Case Oil
T8T3539 —UN—15JAN16
T8T402 —UN—24APR15
NOTE: Warm oil before draining.
1. Clean and remove the fill plug (B).

2. Remove and retain cap screws (C) and drain plates
(D and E).
T8T5022 —UN—16NOV16
3. Remove drain hose (F) from the hose cap assembly
(G).
an approved container. Verify hose routing when
hose back into engine compartment. Right-Hand Side Of Machine Shown

Secure hose inside an appropriate container and
completely drain oil.
5. Retain engine oil drain hose with the previously
removed drain plates. Install drain plates and retain
with previously removed cap screw.
NOTE: Dispose of oil according to employer and
6. Fill gear case to proper level in sight gauge (A). Allow

time for oil to settle.
T8T5045 —UN—18NOV16
7. Replace fill the plug.
A—Sight Gauge E—Drain Plate

B—Fill Plug F— Drain Hose
C—Cap Screw G—Hose Cap Assembly
D—Drain Plate
AS09261,0000163 -19-21NOV16-1/1
100-6 041717
PN=204
Change Chopper Gear Case Oil

IMPORTANT: Avoid gear case oil contamination.
Clean area around components before
performing any service.
1. Park harvester on a level service area.
T8T2443 —UN—06MAY15
2. Run engine, with chopper engaged, approximately 5
min to warm gear case oil.
3. Set park brake, shut OFF engine, and remove key.
Wait for harvesting functions to stop.
IMPORTANT: Be careful not to damage or lose Chopper Gear Case (Style A)
O-ring when removing drain plug.
4. Open door of the chopper system and remove and

retain drain plug (A). Allow oil to drain completely.
NOTE: Dispose of waste oil according to all employer
and government environmental guidelines.
T8T4955 —UN—10NOV16
IMPORTANT: Verify that O-ring stays seated
when installing drain plug.
5. Reinstall drain plug.

O-ring when removing fill plug. Chopper Gear Case (Style B)
6. Remove and retain the fill plug (B).

A—Drain Plug B—Fill Plug
7. Fill gear case with 85W140 oil. Allow time for oil to
settle.
8. Check oil level at sight gauge. Level must be at top 9. Reinstall the fill plug and close the door of the chopper
of sight gauge. system.
Specification 10. Start engine, engage chopper, and allow to run for
Chopper Gear Case several minutes.
(Style A)—Capacity.......................................................................... 6.6 L
11. Shut OFF engine and remove key. Wait 10 min and
(1.75 gal)
check oil level at sight gauge. Add oil as necessary.
Chopper Gear Case
(Style B)—Capacity........................................................................... 13 L
(3.4 gal)

when installing fill plug.
AS09261,0000140 -19-22NOV16-1/1
100-7 041717
PN=205
Change Base Cutter Gear Case Oil

1. Park harvester on a level surface.
NW271330 —UN—15MAY06
2. Run engine, with the base cutter engaged,
approximately 5 minutes to warm gear case oil.
3. Shut OFF engine and remove key. Wait for harvesting
functions to stop completely.
4. Remove cap screws (A) and rubber side shield (B).
5. Remove gear case drain plug (C) and leg drain plugs
(D). Allow oil to drain completely.
6. Reinstall all three drain plugs.
T8130000130 —UN—17JAN13
A—Cap Screws (3 used per C—Gear Case Drain Plug
side) D—Leg Drain Plugs
B—Rubber Shield
AS09261,00001DB -19-22MAR17-1/2
7. Remove the fill plug (A) from the top of gear case.
settle.
9. Check oil level at sight gauge. Level must be 3/4 of
T8130000196 —UN—18JAN13
sight gauge.
Specification
CH570 Base Cutter
Gear Case (Style
A)—Capacity.................................................................................... 9.5 L
(2.5 gal)
Specification
CH670 Base Cutter
Gear Case (Style
A—Fill Plug
A)—Capacity.................................................................................. 13.5 L
(3.5 gal)
Specification
11. Start engine, engage base cutter, and allow to run for
Base Cutter Gear Case
several minutes.
(Style B)—Capacity............................................................................. 7 L
(1.87 gal) 12. Shut OFF engine and remove key. Wait 10 minutes and
10. Reinstall fill plug, rubber shield, and cap screws.
AS09261,00001DB -19-22MAR17-2/2
100-8 041717
PN=206
Change Final Drive Oil

IMPORTANT: Verify that only recommended oil is
used. See Fuel, Lubricants, and Coolant section.
NOTE: Oil analyses are the most effective method to

determining the oil change interval. When changing
T8T789 —UN—14JUL14
final drive oil at specified intervals, take a fluid
sample. See Oilscan™ and CoolScan™ in Fuel,
Lubricants, and Coolant section.
For cane harvesters that frequently self-transport
between fields, traveling at high speeds for
longer than average periods, or operating for
time periods longer than 10 hours per day, it
is necessary to change the final drive oil more A—Drain Plug C—Fill Plug
frequently to avoid breakdown and damage to B—Level Check Plug
the final drive components.
Make sure that oil is warm before changing.
IMPORTANT: Overfilling a final drive is as harmful as
1. Rotate final drive until drain plug (A) is at six o'clock low oil. Too much oil can cause overheating
position and check plug (B) is at four o’clock position. and damage the final drive.
2. Remove fill plug (C), check plug, and drain plug 6. Wait until the oil stops flowing from opening and
and allow oil to drain into an appropriate container. reinstall check and fill plug.
Dispose of oil according to employer and government
guidelines. 7. Repeat process on opposite side of machine.
IMPORTANT: Be careful not to lose O-rings on plugs. 8. Tighten plugs to specification.
Specification
3. Install drain plug.
Final Drive Fill
4. Add oil through fill plug opening. Plug—Torque.................................................................................30 N·m
(22 lb.-ft.)
NOTE: Gear oil is thick, allow time for oil to Final Drive Check
settle when filling. Plug—Torque.................................................................................12 N·m
(106 lb.-in.)
5. Continue filling final drive until oil flows out of check Final Drive Drain
plug. Plug—Torque.................................................................................30 N·m
Specification (22 lb.-ft.)
Final Drive
Oil—Capacity................................................................................... 3.0 L
(0.8 gal.)
WM05597,00012CB -19-21APR15-1/1
Lubricate Base Cutter

Grease fittings (A) until grease appears at valves (B).
A—Fittings (2 used) B—Valves (2 used)

T8120002659 —UN—22JAN13
WM05597,00011C1 -19-14JAN15-1/1
100-9 PN=207
041717
Rear Axle Service

CAUTION: Before tightening inner nut, turn
elevator (A) 45° to opposite side of track
that will be adjusted.
T8130000149 —UN—22JAN13
1. Completely lower harvester. Put a stand under the
elevator swing table.
2. Slowly raise harvester until track slightly lifts off the
ground.
CAUTION: Avoid falling hazard. Verify that the

harvester is properly supported.
A—Elevator
3. Place a stands front jack locations. See Jack
Locations section.
4. Slowly lower harvester until front portion of the track
lifts off the ground.
WM05597,0000FAC -19-12JUN14-1/7
5. Remove cap screws (A) and cover (B).
A—Cap Screws (6 used) B—Cover
T8130000230 —UN—22JAN13
WM05597,0000FAC -19-12JUN14-2/7
NOTE: Remove and discard all grease.
6. Loosen cap screws (A) and remove outer nut (B).
A—Cap Screws (3 used) B—Outer Nut T8130000231 —UN—22JAN13
Continued on next page WM05597,0000FAC -19-12JUN14-3/7
100-10 041717
PN=208
NOTE: Tool 0290289270 (A) must be used. See

7. Tighten inner nut to specification.

Specification
T8130000232 —UN—22JAN13
Rear Axle Inner
Nut—Torque............................................................. 814 N·m (600 lb.-ft.)
A—Tool
WM05597,0000FAC -19-12JUN14-4/7
8. Install outer nut (A) and tighten until it contacts inner

nut.
9. Loosen outer nut slightly until its holes are aligned with
holes on inner nut.
10. Turn outer nut back 360° (1 turn).
CQ282552 —UN—01DEC08
11. Tighten cap screws (B) to specification.
Specification
Outer Nut Cap
Screws—Torque........................................................... 50 N·m (37 lb.-ft.)
A—Outer Nut B—Cap Screws (3 used)
WM05597,0000FAC -19-12JUN14-5/7
12. Fill compartment with grease.
T8130000233 —UN—22JAN13
100-11 041717
PN=209
T8130000234 —UN—22JAN13
T8130000235 —UN—22JAN13
A—Silicon B—Cover
C—Cap Screws (6 used)
13. Apply silicon (A) to the inside of cover (B).

Specification
14. Install cover (B) and cap screws (C). Tighten cap Cap Screws—Torque....................................................................47 N·m
screws to specification in a star pattern. (35 lb.-ft.)
WM05597,0000FAC -19-12JUN14-7/7
100-12 PN=210
041717
Maintenance—Every 25 Hours or Daily
Clean Machine Using Compressed Air Clean machine using compressed air: cooling package,
IMPORTANT: In dusty conditions, check daily. muffler area, platform, hydraulic area, air conditioning
recirculation filter, air conditioning condenser, engine
NOTE: When using compressed air to clean out compartment, radiator, oil cooler, and hydraulic oil cooler.
components, blow air opposite the normal direction
See Machine Cleanout section.
of airflow. Blowing air in same direction of normal
airflow can force debris further into a component.
WM05597,00011C0 -19-06FEB15-1/1
Check Engine Oil Level

IMPORTANT:
• Always check the engine oil level before
start the engine.
• Do not add makeup oil until the oil level
T8T182 —UN—16APR14
is BELOW the add mark.

IMPORTANT: Clean debris and dirt from dipstick
and dipstick tube before removing. Clean
any dirt or residue from dipstick before
replacing in dipstick tube. Tier 2/Stage II And Tier 3/Stage III
T8120001914 —UN—18OCT12
2. Remove dipstick (A) from engine, wipe clean, and

reinsert completely.
3. Remove dipstick and check level of oil on end. Level
must fall in the range of crosshatch pattern (B).
IMPORTANT: Clean debris and dirt from engine oil
fill cap and tube before removing cap.
DO NOT fill above the top mark on the
dipstick. Oil levels anywhere within the
crosshatch are considered to be in the
acceptable operating range.
T8T1776 —UN—07JAN15
4. If necessary, add oil at the fill tube (C).
A—Dipstick C—Oil Fill Tube

B—Crosshatch Pattern on
Dipstick
WM05597,00013B1 -19-10SEP15-1/1
105-1 041717
PN=211
Check Hydraulic Oil Level

IMPORTANT: Starting engine without oil in hydraulic
reservoir results in pump damage.
T8T179 —UN—16APR14
NOTE: Platform must be level, elevator in the raised
position and the topper all the way down. Allow 30
minutes for oil to level after shutting down the engine.
2. Remove and retain vent cap.

3. Check oil level.
4. When oil is cold, level must be at the center of the
sight gauge (A). If not, add oil until level is above the A—Sight Gauge
center of the sight gauge.
5. To add hydraulic oil, see Add Hydraulic Oil in
AS09261,00001DE -19-22MAR17-1/1
Check Engine Coolant Level

1. The expansion tank is on the upper left-hand side of
the harvester, within the cooling tower.
2. If coolant level does not appear within marked area of
sight gauge, remove expansion tank cap and add fluid.
T8T181 —UN—16APR14
NOTE: Verify engine coolant level at expansion
tank (A) through shield.
3. If necessary, add coolant to expansion tank.
A—Expansion Tank
Tier 2/Stage II And Tier 3/Stage III
WM05597,00013B2 -19-10SEP15-1/1
Check Fuel Level

NOTE: Key must be ON to read fuel level gauge.
T8140000081 —UN—24FEB14
2. View fuel level gauge (A) on cab cornerpost display.
A—Fuel Level Gauge
WM05597,0000E96 -19-05FEB15-1/1
105-2 041717
PN=212
Inspect Blades
Inspect Blades on: Base Cutter, Chopper, Topper,
Primary Extractor, Secondary Extractor (If Equipped),
and Side Knives (If Equipped).
T8T2925 —UN—12AUG15
A—Base Cutter Blade (10 used) C—Topper Blade (8 used) E—Secondary Extractor Blade (3
B—Chopper Blade (8 used) D—Primary Extractor Blade (4 used)
used)
CAUTION: Avoid possible serious injury or 5. Inspect topper blades (C) for damage and wear.
death. Shut OFF engine and wait for harvesting Replace as necessary (see Remove and Install
functions to stop completely. Remove key Topper Blades in Maintenance—As Required section).
and turn OFF battery disconnect switch If equipped, inspect shredder topper shear plate
before inspecting blades. clearance. Adjust as necessary (see Adjust Shredder
Topper Shear Plates (If Equipped) in Maintenance—As
Avoid possible serious injury from sharp edges. Required section).
Wear gloves when handling blades.
6. Inspect primary extractor blades (D) for damage and
1. Completely raise base cutter and lower topper boom. wear. Replace as necessary (see Inspect Primary
Extractor Fan Assembly).
2. Engage base cutter safety stops.
7. If equipped, inspect secondary extractor blades (E) for
3. Inspect base cutter blades (A) for damage and wear. damage and wear. Replace as necessary (see your
Replace as necessary (see Remove and Install Base authorized John Deere dealer).
Cutter Blades in Maintenance—As Required section).
8. If equipped, inspect side knife blades for damage and
4. Inspect chopper blades (B) for damage and wear. wear. Replace if necessary (see Remove and Install
Replace as necessary (see Remove and Install Side Knife Blades (If Equipped) in Maintenance—As
Chopper Blades in Maintenance—As Required Required section).
section).
AS09261,000009F -19-04AUG16-1/1
Check Lights
Inspect all lights and light harnesses for damage and
tightness. Clean area around connectors and verify all
lights function properly.
WM05597,00011C4 -19-06FEB15-1/1
105-3 041717
PN=213
Check Hydraulic System If hoses must be fabricated, ensure that hoses are the
Check hydraulic system for leaks, missing/loose same rating as one being replaced. See your John Deere
clamps, or damage. dealer for correct hose rating replacements.
Clean area around connections and cylinders. Incorrect hose length or routing increases chance of hose
wear or damage. Use old hose as guide for length and
Hydraulic hoses must be inspected frequently for leakage, hose routing.
kinking, cuts, cracks, abrasion, corrosion, exposed wire
braid, or any other signs of wear or damage. Worn or Incorrect fittings can damage mating parts or cause leaks
damaged hose assemblies can fail during use and must make sure to use steel fittings approved for use with
be replaced immediately. See your John Deere dealer for hose manufacture. Use correct size and thread type as
replacement hoses. replaced hose.
CAUTION: If incorrectly rated hose is used,

machine damage, injury, or death could occur.
WM05597,00011C5 -19-06FEB15-1/1
Check Air Intake System

T8T302 —UN—28APR14
T8T548 —UN—10JUN14
A—Clamps B—Engine Air Pre-Cleaner
IMPORTANT: The air intake system must not leak. 2. Verify all clamps (A) are in place and tight. Tighten
Any leak, no matter how small, may result in clamps to specification.
internal engine damage due to abrasive dirt
and dust entering the intake system. Specification
Clamps—Torque..............................................................................9 N·m
The engine air intake system is on the left-hand side of (80 lb·in)
cooling tower.
3. Verify engine air pre-cleaner (B) has proper air
1. Inspect all piping for leaks or damage. movement, clean screens, and no damage.
WM05597,00013B3 -19-10SEP15-1/1
105-4 PN=214
041717
Check Engine Air Pre-filter

With the engine at full throttle, verify air pre-cleaner rotor
is spinning. The air flow must be felt through the housing
opening (A).
T8130000348 —UN—24JAN13
If rotor is not spinning it must be replaced.
A—Rotor Housing Opening
KR43067,0000CE5 -19-25JAN13-1/1
Clean Engine Air Pre-filter Outer Screen

1. Unhook fastener strip, and remove outer screen (A)
from air pre-cleaner.
2. Clean outer screen with compressed air.
T8130000347 —UN—24JAN13
3. Wipe inner screen (B) clean.
4. Reattach outer screen around pre-cleaner.
A—Outer Screen B—Inner Screen
KR43067,0000CE4 -19-25JAN13-1/1
Lubricate Suspension Cylinders

Lubricate upper suspension cylinders for
track machines.
T8140000405 —UN—24APR14
CQ298948 —UN—15APR15
Left-Hand Side Of Engine Compartment Shown Right-Hand Side Of Engine Compartment Shown
A—Fitting B—Fitting
IMPORTANT: Wipe grease fittings clean before and 1. Grease fitting (A) at top of cylinder on right-hand side
after lubricating. If grease fitting is damaged of machine.
or missing, replace immediately.
2. Grease fitting (B) at top of cylinder on left-hand side
of machine.
105-5 041717
PN=215
Lubricate lower suspension cylinder for

track machines.
T8130000110 —UN—15JAN13
T8T3384 —UN—08DEC15
Style A Style B
A—Fittings (4 or 2 used)
Grease fittings (A) on suspension cylinder end. Repeat

on opposite side.
WM05597,00013F0 -19-08DEC15-2/3
Lubricate lower suspension cylinder for

wheel machines.
T8130000140 —UN—24JAN13
T8T1565 —UN—11NOV14
A—Fittings (10 used)
Grease fittings (A) on lower suspension assembly. Repeat

on opposite side of machine.
WM05597,00013F0 -19-08DEC15-3/3
105-6 041717
PN=216
Lubricate Upper Knockdown Roller

Grease fittings (A) on upper knockdown roller.
NOTE: Manual and hydraulically adjustable knockdown
roller fittings are similar.
T8T3377 —UN—29OCT15
WM05597,00013CF -19-29OCT15-1/1
Lubricate Lower Knockdown Roller

Grease fittings (A) on hydraulically adjustable lower
knockdown roller cylinder.
T8T1236 —UN—23SEP14
WM05597,00011CA -19-06FEB15-1/1
105-7 041717
PN=217
Lubricate Topper Assembly
T8140000373 —UN—17MAR14
T8T665 —UN—27JUN14
A—Fittings (4 used) B—Fittings (2 used)
1. Grease fittings (A) at machine end of boom. 2. Grease fittings (B) at topper end of boom.
WM05597,00011CB -19-06FEB15-1/1
Lubricate Manual Tilt Crop Dividers
T8T2436 —UN—28APR15

A—Fittings (6 used) C—Fittings (2 used)
B—Fittings (4 used) D—Fittings (2 used)
1. Grease fittings (A) on crop divider mounting pins. 3. Grease fitting (C) on upper crop divider linkage.
Repeat on other crop divider. Repeat on other crop divider.
2. Grease fittings (B) on cylinder ends. Repeat on other 4. Grease fitting (D) on lower crop divider linkage.
crop divider.
Repeat on other crop divider.
WM05597,00011CD -19-28APR15-1/1
105-8 041717
PN=218
Lubricate Hydraulic Tilt Crop Dividers (If

Equipped)
T8T2437 —UN—28APR15
A—Fittings (6 used) B—Fittings (6 used) C—Fittings (2 used)
1. Grease fittings (A) on crop divider mounting pins. 3. Grease fitting (C) on lower crop divider linkage.
Repeat on other crop divider. Repeat on other crop divider.
2. Grease fittings (B) on cylinder ends. Repeat on other
crop divider.
WM05597,00011CE -19-28APR15-1/1
Lubricate Steering Cylinders (Wheel

Machines)
1. Grease fitting (A) on rod end of steering cylinder.
Repeat on opposite side of machine.
2. Grease fitting (B) on barrel end of steering cylinder.
T8T670 —UN—07JUL14
Repeat on opposite side of machine.
A—Fitting (2 used) B—Fitting (2 used)
WM05597,00011CF -19-06FEB15-1/1
105-9 041717
PN=219
Lubricate Primary Extractor

Grease remote fittings (A) on front left-hand side of
primary extractor.
T8T2955 —UN—08SEP15
WM05597,00013AB -19-08SEP15-1/1
Lubricate Secondary Extractor (If Equipped)
T8130000359 —UN—24JAN13
T8130000116 —UN—15JAN13
A—Fitting B—Fittings (2 used)
1. Grease fitting (A) on secondary extractor motor. 2. Grease fitting (B) located below secondary extractor
NOTE: Turn secondary extractor by hand while greasing. hood. Repeat on opposite side.
WM05597,00011D1 -19-06FEB15-1/1
105-10 041717
PN=220
Lubricate Elevator Swing Table
T8T2956 —UN—08SEP15
T8130000114 —UN—25JAN13
A—Fittings (3 used) C—Fitting F— Fitting (2 used)

B—Fittings (3 used) D—Fitting
E—Fitting
NOTE: In dusty or when harvesting burnt cane, these 4. Grease fitting (D) on top of upper swing table pin.
fittings must be lubricated every 10 h. Extra grease
may be required to flush out contaminants. 5. Grease fitting (E) on bottom of lower swing table pin.
6. Grease fittings (F) on cable mounting pin. Repeat on
1. Grease fittings (A) on right-hand elevator swing opposite side of machine.
cylinder.
NOTE: Rotate swing table side to side to verify that
2. Grease fittings (B) on left-hand elevator swing cylinder. the pins are being greased.
3. Grease fitting (C) on bottom of upper swing table pin.
NOTE: Lower elevator to access fitting (D).
WM05597,000137D -19-08SEP15-1/1
Lubricate Feed Roller Pivots

Grease feed roller pivot fittings (A). Five fittings located
on each side of machine.
A—Feed Roller Pivot Fittings

(10 used) T8T663 —UN—07JUL14
WM05597,00011D3 -19-14JAN15-1/1
105-11 041717
PN=221
Lubricate Side Knives (If Equipped)
T8T662 —UN—26JUN14
A—Fittings (2 used) B—Fittings (2 used) C—Fittings (2 used)
Grease fittings (A—C). Repeat on opposite side of

machine.
WM05597,00011D4 -19-06FEB15-1/1
Check Pump Drive Gear Case Oil Level

T8T3539 —UN—15JAN16
T8T402 —UN—24APR15
A—Sight Gauge B—Fill Plug
NOTE: Always check the pump drive gear case oil 1. Check oil level at sight gauge (A). Oil level must be
level before starting the engine. within the rectangle.
2. Remove fill plug (B) and add oil, as necessary.
WM05597,000141E -19-15JAN16-1/1
105-12 041717
PN=222
Check Base Cutter Gear Case Oil Level
T8130000830 —UN—21FEB13
T8T1742 —UN—03DEC14
Right-Hand Side Of Machine Shown Left-Hand Side Of Machine Shown
A—Sight Gauge C—Rubber Shield

B—Cap Screw (3 used) D—Filler Plug
IMPORTANT: Always check fluid level when oil is cold. 3. If necessary, remove and retain cap screws (B) and
rubber shield (C) to access filler plug (D).
4. Add oil as necessary.
2. Check sight gauge (A) to verify that oil level is 3/4 of
gauge.
AS09261,000010B -19-28SEP16-1/1
Check Chopper Gear Case Oil Level
T8T5034 —UN—18NOV16
T8T2444 —UN—06MAY15
Chopper Gear Case (Style A) Oil Level Chopper Gear Case (Style B) Oil Level
A—Sight Gauge
NOTE: Always check fluid level when oil is cold.

2. Oil level must be at top of sight gauge (A).
1. Park harvester on a level surface. 3. To add oil, see Change Chopper Gear Case Oil in
Maintenance—Every 1000 Hours section.
AS09261,000016A -19-22NOV16-1/1
Clean Harvester of Mud and Debris

Clean harvester of excess mud, debris, and trash
(especially feed rollers). See Machine Cleanout section.
WM05597,00011D6 -19-06FEB15-1/1
105-13 041717
PN=223
Check Track for Broken Parts (If Equipped)

Check track for bent, broken, loose, or missing parts. See
Tracks section.
WM05597,00011D7 -19-14JAN15-1/1
Check Fire Extinguisher

Verify that fire extinguishers (A) are properly mounted on
the left-hand side of the cooling package.
Check gauges to verify that extinguishers are fully charged.
IMPORTANT: See Fire Prevention section for detailed
T8T790 —UN—14JUL14
fire prevention information.
A—Fire Extinguishers (2 used)
WM05597,00012D0 -19-22APR15-1/1
105-14 041717
PN=224
Inspect Elevator Support Cable
Inspect elevator support cable for signs of wear, frays, or
breaks. Replace elevator support cable if signs of wear
are present.
WM05597,00011D8 -19-06FEB15-1/1
Check Wear on Crop Divider Stops

Check crop divider stop (A) for wear and replace if
necessary. Repeat on other side of machine.
T8140000403 —UN—28APR14
A—Crop Divider Stop (2 used)
WM05597,00011D9 -19-06FEB15-1/1
Check Wear on Feed Roller Cradle Stops

Check feed roller cradle stop (A) for wear and replace if
necessary. Repeat on remaining stops.
T8130000826 —UN—21FEB13
A—Feed Roller Cradle Stop (5
used per side)
WM05597,00011DA -19-06FEB15-1/1
Check Wear on Elevator Bumper Stops

Check elevator bumper stop (A) for wear and replace if
necessary. Repeat on other side of elevator.
T8140000408 —UN—22SEP14
A—Elevator Bumper Stop (2
used)
WM05597,00011DB -19-06FEB15-1/1
110-1 041717
PN=225
Drain Water From Fuel Filters

NOTE: Replace fuel filter elements when audible alarm
sounds and trouble codes indicate plugged fuel
filters (low fuel pressure). If no alarm sounds
during the 12-month service interval, replace
CQ298947 —UN—15APR15
elements then, or after the normal service
interval, whichever comes first.
Drain water from fuel filters as often as necessary.
Capture water and any fuel in an approved
container and dispose of properly.
If water is sensed in the fuel system, a diagnostic trouble Tier 2/Stage II and Tier 3/Stage III
code is generated.
If a diagnostic trouble code appears, drain fuel filters A—Drain Valves C—Secondary Fuel Filter
B—Primary Fuel Filter D—Prefilter
using drain valves (A) and reset code.
1. Open left-hand engine compartment door. Fuel filters
are on inside of left-hand engine compartment door. 3. Close engine compartment door.
NOTE: Catch fluids with an approved container NOTE: To replace fuel filter elements, see Replace
and dispose of according to employer and Fuel Filters (Tier 2/Stage II and Tier 3/Stage
government guidelines. III) and Replace Prefilter Element (Tier 2/Stage
II and Tier 3/Stage III) in Maintenance—Every
2. Open drain valves (A) at base of primary fuel filter (B), 1500 Hours section.
secondary fuel filter (C), and prefilter (D) (if equipped)
until water has drained. Tighten valves.
WM05597,00013B4 -19-10SEP15-1/1
Check Final Drive Oil Level

IMPORTANT: Clean final drive cover before
removing plugs.
Be careful not to lose O-rings on plugs.
T8T789 —UN—14JUL14
NOTE: It is recommended that the final drive oil level
be checked every 50 hours.
Check oil level when oil is cold.
1. Rotate final drive until drain plug (A) is at six o'clock

position and level check plug (B) is at four o’clock
position.
2. Remove check plug to see if the oil is even with base A—Drain Plug C—Fill Plug
of opening. B—Level Check Plug
3. Remove fill plug (C), if necessary, and add oil until oil
begins to flow from check plug opening.
Specification
IMPORTANT: Overfilling a final drive is as harmful as Final Drive Fill
low oil. Too much oil can cause overheating Plug—Torque.................................................................................30 N·m
and damage the final drive. (22 lb.-ft.)
Final Drive Check
4. Wait until the oil stops flowing from opening and Plug—Torque.................................................................................12 N·m
reinstall check and fill plug. (106 lb.-in.)
Final Drive Drain
5. Repeat process on opposite side of machine.
Plug—Torque.................................................................................30 N·m
6. If removed, tighten plugs to specification. (22 lb.-ft.)
WM05597,0000FF9 -19-06JAN15-1/1
110-2 PN=226
041717
Check and Adjust Chopper Timing

Blade condition and timing can affect chopper system
performance. The following observations while harvesting
indicate poor system function:
• Trash (leaf) material is not cut cleanly making removal
NW271000 —UN—15MAY06
by extractors difficult.
• Stalks are not cut completely into billets.
Check Timing
CAUTION: Avoid serious injury or death. Shut

OFF engine, remove key, and hang a “DO Incomplete Cut Billets
NOT OPERATE” tag in operator station. Wait
for harvesting functions to stop completely
before servicing chopper assembly.
1. Park on a level surface, shut off engine, and remove

key.
2. Open chopper gear case door.
3. Clean chopper drums, gear case, and surrounding
area.
4. If necessary, install new blades. See Remove and
Install Chopper Blades in Maintenance—As Required
section.
5. Ensure that blades (B) are installed correctly as
T8T1485 —UN—16OCT14
shown. Upper drum assembly (A) blades leads the
lower blades as the cane is cut into billets.
A—Upper Drum Assembly B—Blades
Continued on next page AS09261,000016B -19-22NOV16-1/4
110-3 041717
PN=227
T8T5040 —UN—18NOV16
T8T2448 —UN—07MAY15
Chopper Flywheel (Style A) Chopper Flywheel (Style B)
6. Rotate flywheel (A) clockwise and observe
blade-to-blade contact. Drums must rotate smoothly.
7. Apply a light coat of quick-dry spray paint to the
blade-to-blade contact surfaces (B) of each blade.
8. Rotate flywheel clockwise and allow upper and lower
blades (C and D) to contact one another. Paint
scratched or removed from blades shows blade
contact pattern. Optimal blade-to-blade contact is
when blades touch along entire length of the blade
without the excessive impact.
T8T2277 —UN—23MAR15
A—Flywheel C—Upper Blade (as required)
B—Blade-to-Blade Contact D—Lower Blade (as required)
Surfaces
110-4 041717
PN=228
Adjust Timing
T8T2449 —UN—07MAY15
T8T2453 —UN—07MAY15
Chopper Gear Case (Style A) Chopper Drive Gear (Style A)
T8T5036 —UN—18NOV16
T8T5037 —UN—18NOV16
Chopper Gear Case Cover (Style B) Chopper Drive Gear (Style B)
A—Flywheel D—Cap Screw (6 used) F— Position

B—Cap Screw (5 used) E—Cap Screws (2 used) G—Adjustment Lever
C—Upper Drive Gear Cover
1. Remove cap screws (B) and upper drive gear cover 5. When blade contact is correct, tighten cap screws (D
(C). and E).
IMPORTANT: Cover opening when possible to avoid 6. Manually rotate the flywheel (A) clockwise and check
gear case oil contamination. chopper blade timing. Repeat adjustment steps if
necessary.
2. Loosen cap screws (D and E).
7. After correct timing is achieved, tighten cap screws
3. From the rear of machine, manually turn upper to specification.
chopper barrel until upper and lower blades make
proper contact. Specification
Chopper Gear Case
NOTE: Slotted holes in upper drive gear are used (Style A) Cap Screws (D
to adjust chopper timing. and E)—Torque...........................................................................520 N·m
(383 lb·ft)
4. Adjust upper drive gear to obtain smooth Chopper Gear Case
blade-to-blade contact along the length of each blade. (Style B) Cap Screws (D
and E)—Torque...........................................................................427 N·m
a. Using a rubber mallet, tap adjustment lever
(315 lb·ft)
counterclockwise until cap screws contact end of
slots in gear, or as close as possible. 8. Check gear case oil level and fill with recommended
b. Tighten two opposing cap screws in gear. oil as necessary. See Check Chopper Gear Case
Oil Level in Maintenance—Every 25 Hours or Daily
NOTE: If further adjustment is needed, remove cap section.
screw in slotted end of the adjustment lever
and install into position (F). NOTE: If necessary, use a new upper drive
gear cover gasket.
c. Repeat steps necessary to check blade contact.
110-5 PN=229
041717
9. Install gasket, upper drive gear cover, and cap screws.

10. Close and latch gear case door.
Tighten cap screws to specification.
Specification
Upper Drive Gear Cover
Cap Screws (Style A and
B)—Torque....................................................................................70 N·m
(51 lb·ft)
AS09261,000016B -19-22NOV16-4/4
Tighten Chopper Flywheel Clutch Nut
T8T2451 —UN—07MAY15
T8T2452 —UN—07MAY15
Chopper Flywheel (Style A) Chopper Flywheel (Style A)
T8T5038 —UN—18NOV16
T8T5039 —UN—18NOV16
Chopper Flywheel (Style B) Chopper Flywheel (Style B)
A—Hardware (6 used) B—Clutch Cover C—Flywheel Clutch Nut
NOTE: Some parts have been removed for clarity. 2. Remove and retain hardware (A) and clutch cover (B).
3. Remove and retain the flywheel clutch nut (C).
CAUTION: Avoid serious injury or death. Shut
OFF engine, remove key and place warning tag IMPORTANT: Apply Thread Lock and Sealer
on steering wheel not to start machine. Wait (Medium Strength) to threads of the flywheel
for harvesting functions to stop completely clutch nut before installing.
before servicing chopper assembly.
4. Tighten flywheel clutch nut until it contacts washers.
IMPORTANT: Overtightening of the slip clutch Tighten nut an additional 2-1/2 turns.
causes premature failure of chopper, gears,
shaft, bearings, and seals. IMPORTANT: Apply Thread Lock and Sealer
(Medium Strength) to threads of hardware
Allowing too much slip causes chopper to before installing.
choke and slip clutch to wear out.
5. Install clutch cover and hardware. Close chopper gear
1. Open chopper gear case door. case door.
AS09261,000016C -19-22NOV16-1/1
110-6 041717
PN=230
Check and Adjust Elevator Chain Tension
X9811 —UN—23AUG88
T8T510 —UN—29MAY14
CAUTION: Use care when relieving grease from
chain tension adjusting cylinders. Grease
under pressure can penetrate the skin. Wear
appropriate safety apparel and eye protection.
If an accident occurs, see a doctor immediately.
Any fluid injected into the skin must be surgically
T8T509 —UN—29MAY14
removed within a few hours or gangrene
may result. Doctors unfamiliar with this type
of injury should reference a knowledgeable
medical source. Such information is available
from Deere & Company Medical Department
in Moline, Illinois, U.S.A.
Chain Tension Adjustment Location (right-hand side shown)
IMPORTANT: Cylinders on both sides must
be adjusted equally so that slats remain
perpendicular to elevator side wall.
NOTE: Grasping and pulling slat to check gap should be

performed with relative ease. Difficulty checking
gap indicates that chain tension is too tight.
T8T3387 —UN—08DEC15
It is not necessary to loosen cap screws (I) to
adjust chain tension. Plate assemblies (D) slide
on elevator frame to allow chain adjustment.
1. Select a slat (A) in lower chain area near the center

of elevator assembly as shown. Grasp selected
slat by hand and pull upward away from wear strip.
Gap between chain (B) and wear strip (C) should be A—Slat G—Grease Fitting
approximately 25 mm (1 in). B—Chain H—Decrease Tension
C—Wear Strip I— Cap Screw (4 used each
Increase or decrease chain tension as necessary. D—Plate Assembly (2 used) side)
E—Increase Tension J— Tension Guide
IMPORTANT: If equipped with tension guide (J), setting F— Grease Relief Valve K—Setting
(K) must be the same on each side of elevator.
• To increase chain tension (E): pump an equal increased equally to maintain proper movement of
amount of grease into fitting (G) on each side chain slats along elevator side walls.
of elevator. Cylinders must have chain tension
110-7 041717
PN=231
• To decrease chain tension (H): slowly open valve 2. Start engine and operate elevator at a slow speed.
(F) and allow grease to escape from tension cylinder. Check for smooth operation.
Cylinders must have tension released equally on
each side of the elevator. 3. Shut off engine. If necessary, repeat procedure until
elevator chain assembly operates smoothly and
without binding.
CAUTION: Avoid personal injury and equipment
damage. Ensure that all personnel and
tools are removed from elevator area before
testing elevator operation.
WM05597,00013F2 -19-08DEC15-2/2
Check Suspension Cylinder Safety Stops

Inspect safety stops for cracking, damage, or missing
hardware. Replace as necessary.
A—Safety Stop
T8T1636 —UN—21NOV14
WM05597,00011DC -19-06FEB15-1/1
Check Topper Boom Safety Stop

Inspect safety stop for cracking, damage, or missing
A—Safety Stop
T8T1635 —UN—21NOV14
WM05597,00011DD -19-06FEB15-1/1
Check Cab Tilt Safety Stop

Inspect safety stop for cracking, damage, or missing
A—Safety Stop
T8T2953 —UN—03SEP15
WM05597,00013A6 -19-03SEP15-1/1
110-8 041717
PN=232
IMPORTANT:
• Verify that only recommended oil is used.
See Final Drive Gear Oil in Fuel, Lubricants,
and Coolant section.
•
T8T789 —UN—14JUL14
For wheel machine or two-speed track
machine, change oil every 100 hours.
For one-speed track machine, change
oil every 250 hours.

sample. See Oilscan™ and CoolScan™ in Fuel, A—Drain Plug C—Fill Plug
Lubricants, and Coolant section. B—Level Check Plug

longer than average periods, or operating for Specification
time periods longer than 10 hours per day, it Final Drive
is necessary to change the final drive oil more Oil—Capacity................................................................................... 3.0 L
frequently to avoid breakdown and damage to (0.8 gal.)
Make sure that oil is warm before changing. low oil. Too much oil can cause overheating
and damage the final drive.
position and check plug (B) is at four o’clock position. 6. Wait until the oil stops flowing from opening and
reinstall check and fill plug.
2. Remove fill plug (C), check plug, and drain plug
and allow oil to drain into an appropriate container. 7. Repeat process on opposite side of machine.
guidelines. 8. Tighten plugs to specification.
Specification
IMPORTANT: Be careful not to lose O-rings on plugs.
Final Drive Fill
Plug—Torque.................................................................................30 N·m
(22 lb.-ft.)
4. Add oil through fill plug opening. Final Drive Check
Plug—Torque.................................................................................12 N·m
NOTE: Gear oil is thick, allow time for oil to (106 lb.-in.)
settle when filling. Final Drive Drain
Plug—Torque.................................................................................30 N·m
5. Continue filling final drive until oil flows out of check (22 lb.-ft.)
plug.
WM05597,00012CC -19-21MAY15-1/1
115-1 PN=233
041717
Inspect Base Cutter Gear Case Mounting

Hardware
Check base cutter mounting hardware (A) for proper
torque. Repeat on other side of machine.
T8130000311 —UN—29JAN13
IMPORTANT: If mounting hardware is loose, clean,
apply Thread Lock and Sealer (High Strength)
and tighten to specification.
Specification
Mounting
Hardware—Torque......................................................................427 N·m
(315 lb.-ft.)
Tracks Removed For Clarity
A—Mounting Hardware (18
used)
WM05597,00011DE -19-06FEB15-1/1
Inspect Elevator Slat Mounting Hardware

and Alignment
1. Check hardware (A) on elevator slat (B) for tightness.
2. Check elevator slat alignment. Repeat for other slats.
T8130000312 —UN—29JAN13
A—Hardware (4 used per slat) B—Elevator Slat
WM05597,00011DF -19-06FEB15-1/1
115-2 041717
PN=234
Inspect Primary Extractor Fan Assembly
T8130000314 —UN—30JAN13
T8130000315 —UN—30JAN13
T8130000316 —UN—31JAN13
T8T2928 —UN—12AUG15
A—Chain C—Isolator Mounts (4 used) E—Blades and Hardware (4 sets
B—Mounting Hardware (6 used) D—Hydraulic and Electrical used)
Connections
Extractor Chain Tension in Maintenance—As Required

CAUTION: Avoid serious injury or death. section).
Shut OFF engine and wait for harvesting
functions to stop completely before inspecting 4. Verify mounting hardware (B) on motor is tight.
primary extractor assembly.
5. Inspect isolator mounts (C) for cracking or damage.
1. Completely rotate hood opening to the left-hand side 6. Verify all hydraulic and electrical connections (D) are
of machine. tight.
2. Shut OFF engine, remove key, and wait for all 7. Inspect extractor blades and hardware (E) for damage
harvesting functions to stop completely. and verify tightness.
3. Inspect chain (A) for damage or excessive wear.
Tighten chain tension if necessary (see Adjust Primary
Continued on next page AS09261,00000A0 -19-04AUG16-1/2
115-3 041717
PN=235
IMPORTANT: When replacing extractor blades,

always use John Deere blades.
Always replace blades as a complete set. Do
not install new blades with used blades.
8. Replace primary extractor blades when one blade has

worn below minimum thickness.
NOTE: Arrow on gauge must point up.
T8T2929 —UN—12AUG15
9. Place opening (B) of supplied gauge (C) over blade at
location (A) on all four blades.
10. Blade life is determined by how far gauge goes over
blade.
Green Area (D) Blades are in good condition.
No replacement needed.
Yellow Area (E) Blades are in acceptable condition.
Replacement needed soon.
Red Area (F) Blades are fully worn. Replace
blades now.
NOTE: If blades need to be replaced, see Remove and
T8T2898 —UN—22JUL15
Install Primary Extractor Fan Blades.
A—Location D—Green Area

B—Opening E—Yellow Area
C—Gauge F— Red Area
AS09261,00000A0 -19-04AUG16-2/2
Check Wheel Cap Screws Torque Specification

IMPORTANT: Apply anti-seize to threads of wheel Wheel Cap Screws
bolts before installing. Torque—Front—Torque...............................................................230 N·m
(170 lb.-ft.)
Tighten front and rear wheel cap screws to specification. —Rear—Torque..........................................................................529 N·m
(390 lb.-ft.)
WM05597,00011F1 -19-06FEB15-1/1
115-4 PN=236
041717
IMPORTANT:
• Verify that only recommended oil is used.
See Final Drive Gear Oil in Fuel, Lubricants,
and Coolant section.
•
T8T789 —UN—14JUL14
For wheel machine or two-speed track
machine, change oil every 100 hours.
For one-speed track machine, change
oil every 250 hours.

sample. See Oilscan™ and CoolScan™ in Fuel, A—Drain Plug C—Fill Plug
Lubricants, and Coolant section. B—Level Check Plug

longer than average periods, or operating for Specification
time periods longer than 10 hours per day, it Final Drive
is necessary to change the final drive oil more Oil—Capacity................................................................................... 3.0 L
frequently to avoid breakdown and damage to (0.8 gal.)
Make sure that oil is warm before changing. low oil. Too much oil can cause overheating
and damage the final drive.
position and check plug (B) is at four o’clock position. 6. Wait until the oil stops flowing from opening and
reinstall check and fill plug.
2. Remove fill plug (C), check plug, and drain plug
and allow oil to drain into an appropriate container. 7. Repeat process on opposite side of machine.
guidelines. 8. Tighten plugs to specification.
Specification
IMPORTANT: Be careful not to lose O-rings on plugs.
Final Drive Fill
Plug—Torque.................................................................................30 N·m
(22 lb.-ft.)
4. Add oil through fill plug opening. Final Drive Check
Plug—Torque.................................................................................12 N·m
NOTE: Gear oil is thick, allow time for oil to (106 lb.-in.)
settle when filling. Final Drive Drain
Plug—Torque.................................................................................30 N·m
5. Continue filling final drive until oil flows out of check (22 lb.-ft.)
plug.
WM05597,00012CC -19-21MAY15-1/1
120-1 PN=237
041717
Rear Axle Service

CAUTION: Before tightening inner nut, turn
elevator (A) 45° to opposite side of track
that will be adjusted.
T8130000149 —UN—22JAN13
1. Completely lower harvester. Put a stand under the
elevator swing table.
2. Slowly raise harvester until track slightly lifts off the
ground.
CAUTION: Avoid falling hazard. Verify that the

harvester is properly supported.
A—Elevator
3. Place a stands front jack locations. See Jack
Locations section.
4. Slowly lower harvester until front portion of the track
lifts off the ground.
WM05597,0000FAC -19-12JUN14-1/7
5. Remove cap screws (A) and cover (B).
A—Cap Screws (6 used) B—Cover
T8130000230 —UN—22JAN13
WM05597,0000FAC -19-12JUN14-2/7
NOTE: Remove and discard all grease.
6. Loosen cap screws (A) and remove outer nut (B).
A—Cap Screws (3 used) B—Outer Nut T8130000231 —UN—22JAN13
120-2 041717
PN=238
NOTE: Tool 0290289270 (A) must be used. See

7. Tighten inner nut to specification.

Specification
T8130000232 —UN—22JAN13
Rear Axle Inner
Nut—Torque............................................................. 814 N·m (600 lb.-ft.)
A—Tool
WM05597,0000FAC -19-12JUN14-4/7
8. Install outer nut (A) and tighten until it contacts inner

nut.
9. Loosen outer nut slightly until its holes are aligned with
holes on inner nut.
10. Turn outer nut back 360° (1 turn).
CQ282552 —UN—01DEC08
11. Tighten cap screws (B) to specification.
Specification
Outer Nut Cap
Screws—Torque........................................................... 50 N·m (37 lb.-ft.)
A—Outer Nut B—Cap Screws (3 used)
WM05597,0000FAC -19-12JUN14-5/7
12. Fill compartment with grease.
T8130000233 —UN—22JAN13
120-3 041717
PN=239
T8130000234 —UN—22JAN13
T8130000235 —UN—22JAN13
A—Silicon B—Cover
C—Cap Screws (6 used)
13. Apply silicon (A) to the inside of cover (B).

Specification
14. Install cover (B) and cap screws (C). Tighten cap Cap Screws—Torque....................................................................47 N·m
screws to specification in a star pattern. (35 lb.-ft.)
WM05597,0000FAC -19-12JUN14-7/7
Lubricate Crop Divider Scrolls and Outer

Scrolls
IMPORTANT: Wipe grease fittings clean before and
after lubricating. If grease fitting is damaged
or missing, replace immediately.
T8T311 —UN—28APR14
Apply ONLY three pumps from a hand grease
applicator to avoid damaging bearing seal.
NOTE: Rotate scrolls to align fitting with hole.
1. Remove plugs on scrolls and rotate to locate fittings

(A).
2. Grease fittings and replace plugs. Repeat on opposite
side of machine.
WM05597,00011F2 -19-06FEB15-1/1
120-4 PN=240
041717
Lubricate Elevator Chain Sprocket

IMPORTANT: Apply ONLY three pumps from
a hand grease applicator to avoid
damaging bearing seal.
Grease fitting (A) at base of elevator. Repeat on opposite

side of elevator.
A—Fitting (2 used)
T8140000409 —UN—22SEP14
WM05597,00011F3 -19-06FEB15-1/1
Lubricate Base Cutter

Grease fittings (A) until grease appears at valves (B).
A—Fittings (2 used) B—Valves (2 used)
T8120002659 —UN—22JAN13
WM05597,00011C1 -19-14JAN15-1/1
120-5 041717
PN=241
Lubricate Chopper Bearings
T8T5064 —UN—22NOV16
T8T1564 —UN—11NOV14
Left-Hand Side Of Machine Shown Upper Drum
IMPORTANT: Apply grease from a hand grease

applicator until it is visible on the drum side
to avoid damaging bearing seal.
Grease fittings (A) on chopper bearings.
T8T5063 —UN—22NOV16
A—Fittings (2 used) C—Grease
B—Grease
Lower Drum
AS09261,0000172 -19-22NOV16-1/1
Lubricate Chopper Curtain Agitator (If

Equipped)
Grease fitting (A) on chopper curtain agitator.
A—Fitting
T8T1984 —UN—07MAY15
WM05597,00011F5 -19-06FEB15-1/1
120-6 041717
PN=242
Lubricate Sill Roller Bearing (If Equipped)

Grease fitting (A) on sill roller bearing.
A—Fitting
T8T2446 —UN—07MAY15
WM05597,00012E5 -19-07MAY15-1/1
Lubricate Feed Roller Bearings

IMPORTANT: Avoid damaging bearing seal.
Apply ONLY three pumps from a hand
grease applicator.
1. Grease floating feed roller bearing fittings (A). Three

fittings are on left-hand side of machine. Two fittings
are on opposite side.
2. Grease fixed feed roller bearing fittings (B). Two
T8T664 —UN—07JUL14
fittings are on each side of machine.
A—Floating Feed Roller B—Fixed Feed Roller Bearing

Bearing Fittings (5 used) Fittings (4 used)
WM05597,00011F7 -19-06FEB15-1/1
120-7 041717
PN=243


T8T5004 —UN—16NOV16

(B and C).


T8T5044 —UN—18NOV16
NOTE: Dispose of used oil according to employer
assembly (E) and drain oil.
5. Venting by removing filler cap lowers drain time.

C—Drain Plate
120-8 041717
PN=244
T8T1998 —UN—23APR15
T8T1999 —UN—23APR15

C—Filter Housing
pacity.............................................................................................. 33.3 L
(8.8 gal)
8. Replace engine oil drain hose to hose cap assembly. insure adequate lubrication to the engine
AS09261,0000166 -19-21NOV16-2/2
120-9 PN=245
041717
Check Belt Wear (Tier 2/Stage II and Tier

3/Stage III)
The belt tensioner is designed to operate within the limit of
arm movement provided by the cast stops (A and B) when
correct belt length and geometry is used.
CQ280291 —UN—09APR08
Visually inspect tensioner stop (A) and fixed stop (B) on
belt tensioner assembly.
If tensioner stop on swing arm is hitting fixed stop, check
mounting brackets (alternator, belt tensioner, and idler
pulley) and the belt length. Replace belt as needed.
A—Tensioner Stop B—Fixed Stop
WM05597,0000E92 -19-05FEB15-1/1
Check Tensioner Spring Tension (Tier

2/Stage II and Tier 3/Stage III)
NOTE: A belt tension gauge does not give an
accurate measure of belt tension when using
an automatic spring tensioner.
CQ280292 —UN—09APR08
Measure tensioner spring tension using a torque wrench
and the following steps:
1. Release tension on belt using a long-handle 1/2 inch
breaker bar in tension arm. Remove belt from pulleys.
2. Release tension on tension arm and remove breaker
bar.
3. Put a mark (A) on swing arm of tensioner as shown. A—Mark C—Bore
B—Mark
4. Measure 21 mm (0.83 in.) from mark (A) and put a
mark (B) on tensioner mounting base.
5. Couple a torque wrench to hole (C) and turn rocker Specification
arm until marks (A) and (B) are aligned. Spring—Tension...................................................................... 24-28 N·m
(17-21 lb.-ft.)
6. Record torque wrench measurement and compare with
specification. Replace tensioner assembly as required.
WM05597,0000E94 -19-06FEB15-1/1
Check Tires for Damage and Proper Inflation

See Wheels and Tires section.
WM05597,00011F8 -19-06FEB15-1/1
120-10 PN=246
041717
Check Fuel Tank Breather

The fuel tank breather assembly (A) is on the left-hand
side of the cooling tower, behind the pre-cleaner pipe.
1. Verify that breather is clean and unobstructed.
2. Inspect hose for cracking, cuts, or damage.
T8T549 —UN—10JUN14
A—Fuel Tank Breather
Assembly
OU90500,00003BC -19-23MAR15-1/1
120-11 041717
PN=247

T8T5004 —UN—16NOV16

(B and C).


T8T5044 —UN—18NOV16
NOTE: Dispose of used oil according to employer
assembly (E) and drain oil.
5. Venting by removing filler cap lowers drain time.

C—Drain Plate
125-1 041717
PN=248
T8T1998 —UN—23APR15
T8T1999 —UN—23APR15

C—Filter Housing
pacity.............................................................................................. 33.3 L
(8.8 gal)
8. Replace engine oil drain hose to hose cap assembly. insure adequate lubrication to the engine
AS09261,0000166 -19-21NOV16-2/2
125-2 PN=249
041717
Replace Engine Primary Filter

IMPORTANT: If restriction air filter code 107.00
is activated before 500 hours of operation,
see Engine Air Filters Maintenance in
CQ298927 —UN—24MAR15
1. Set park brake, shut OFF engine and remove key so
dirt cannot be pulled into engine.
2. Inspect and clean filter housing before removing filters.
3. Open the snap latches (A) and remove dust cover (B).
4. Carefully remove the primary filter (C), by slightly
moving it from side to side while pulling outward.
5. Completely clean the inside of the housing using a
damp cloth.
IMPORTANT:
CQ298928 —UN—24MAR15
• Do not remove the safety filter (D).
• Only remove the safety filter to change it, i.e.
not remove and reinstall the same filter without.
• The safety filter admits no cleaning.
• Always change the safety filter:
- Every 1500 hours.
- If the filter is dirty.
- Every three primary filter changes.
A—Snap Latches (6 used) C—Primary Filter
6. Clean gasket sealing surface on new filter before B—Dust Cover D—Safety Filter
installation. Filters must be fully seated to avoid
contamination of the intake system.
NOTE: Use only John Deere recommended 8. Install previously removed dust cover and snap latches.
engine air filters.
7. Install a new primary filter.

OU90500,00003C2 -19-08APR15-1/1
125-3 041717
PN=250
Check Engine Vibration Isolators
T8130000318 —UN—30JAN13
T8T187 —UN—17APR14
CAUTION: Avoid possible serious injury from
spinning fan blades. Shut OFF engine and
wait for fan to stop completely. Remove
key and turn OFF battery disconnect switch
before inspecting isolators.
T8T190 —UN—21APR14
Inspect engine vibration isolators (A—C). If cracked,
damaged, or missing; contact your authorized John Deere
dealer.
A—Left-Hand Vibration Isolator C—Right-Hand Rear Vibration

B—Right-Hand Front Vibration Isolator
Isolator
Viewed From Above Engine Compartment
WM05597,00011E2 -19-06FEB15-1/1
Check Engine Crankshaft Dampener

spinning fan blades. Shut OFF engine and
wait for fan to stop completely. Remove
CQ298951 —UN—15APR15
key and turn OFF battery disconnect switch
before inspecting dampener.
Inspect engine crankshaft dampener (A). If cracked,

damaged, or missing; contact your authorized John Deere
dealer.
A—Engine Crankshaft
Dampener
WM05597,00013B5 -19-10SEP15-1/1
125-4 041717
PN=251
Check Cooling Package Vibration Isolators
T8T305 —UN—28APR14
T8T306 —UN—28APR14
Tier 2/Stage II And Tier 3/Stage III Tier 2/Stage II And Tier 3/Stage III
A—Hardware (8 used) B—Shield

C—Vibration Isolator
1. Remove and retain hardware (A) and shield (B).

spinning fan blades. Shut OFF engine and wait 2. Inspect front cooling tower vibration isolators (C).
for cooling fan to stop completely. Remove If cracked, damaged, or missing; contact your
key and turn OFF battery disconnect switch authorized John Deere dealer.
before inspecting isolators.
WM05597,00013B6 -19-10SEP15-1/2
T8T2447 —UN—07MAY15
T8T1911 —UN—27JAN15
Left-Hand Side Of Machine Shown Right-Hand Side Of Machine Shown
A—Vibration Isolators (2 used)
3. Inspect rear cooling tower vibration isolators (A).

If cracked, damaged, or missing; contact your
authorized John Deere dealer.
WM05597,00013B6 -19-10SEP15-2/2
125-5 041717
PN=252
Check Chopper Vibration Isolators
CQ298931 —UN—25MAR15
CQ298932 —UN—25MAR15
Front Chopper Vibration Isolators Rear Chopper Vibration Isolators
A—Screws (14 used) B—Cover

C—Vibration Isolators (4 used)
1. Remove screws (A) and cover (B) to access front

chopper vibration isolators (C). 3. Reinstall cover and screws in reverse order of removal.
2. Inspect chopper vibration isolators (C). If cracked,

damaged, or missing; contact your authorized John
Deere dealer.
OU90500,00003C9 -19-25MAR15-1/1
Visually Inspect Coolant Pump Weep Hole

1. Inspect weep hole (A) for oil or coolant leakage. There
should be a sponge filter inside weep hole to prevent
insects and rodents from entering.
• Oil leakage indicates a damaged rear seal.
RG17151 —UN—26MAY09
• Coolant leakage indicates a damaged front seal.
2. Replace complete coolant pump assembly if leakage
is detected: individual repair parts are not available.
A—Weep Hole
Coolant Pump Weep Hole
WM05597,0000E9D -19-06FEB15-1/1
125-6 041717
PN=253
Check Elevator Wear Strips
T8T1228 —UN—22SEP14
T8T1229 —UN—22SEP14
New Wear Strip And Socket Head Cap Screw
Elevator chain can wear a groove in the wear strips (A)
and socket head cap screws (B).
Replace elevator wear strips when the groove wears
through half the width of the wear strip. See your
authorized John Deere dealer.
T8T1230 —UN—22SEP14
A—Wear Strip (22 used) B—Socket Head Cap Screw
Worn Wear Strip And Socket Head Cap Screw
WM05597,00011BA -19-06FEB15-1/1
125-7 041717
PN=254
Remove and Install Elevator Chain Slats

1. Park machine on level surface.
2. Lower elevator completely.
T8140000288 —UN—28FEB14
3. Shut off engine and remove key.
4. Clean elevator thoroughly.
NOTE: Replace or reposition only one slat at a time
to maintain correct slat spacing.
5. Remove cap screws (C) and lock nuts from each end
of slat (A). Remove slat from chain.
6. Install slat in reverse order of removal using the
following special instructions:
IMPORTANT: Apply Thread Lock and Sealer (High
Strength) to threads of slat cap screws.
T8120002411 —UN—03DEC12
• Tighten slat cap screws to specification.
Specification
Elevator Slat Cap
Screws—Torque............................................................................49 N·m
(36 lb.-ft.)
• Slats must be oriented correctly for proper operation.

Raised edges (D) must be face direction of chain
travel.
• Repeat procedure for remaining slats as necessary. A—Slat
B—Chain Link
C—Cap Screws (4 used each
slat)
• Start engine and operate elevator as necessary to D—Raised Edges
access all slats.
• Every 500 hours of Operation: Move every slat to
the next link (B) and reinstall.
• For slat and elevator configurations, refer to the
IMPORTANT: Adding more slats than suggested to following table:
elevator chain decreases chain life.
Elevator Configuration Slat Quantity Slat Spacing
Standard Elevator 23 slats Install a slat every fifth link.
Elevator with 30.5 cm (12 in.) Extension 24 slats Install a slat every fifth link, except tenth
slat install on sixth link.
Elevator with 61 cm (24 in.) Extension 25 slats Install a slat every fifth link, except tenth and
24th slat install on sixth link.
Elevator with 86 cm (34 in.) Extension 26 slats Install a slat every fifth link, except tenth and
25th slat install on sixth link.
WM05597,0000F68 -19-06FEB15-1/1
125-8 041717
PN=255
Check Open Crankcase Vent (OCV) (Tier

2/Stage II and Tier 3/Stage III)
1. Loosen clamp on crankcase vent hose (A).
2. Remove crankcase vent valve (not shown) from rocker
T8120002635 —UN—07JAN13
arm cover.
3. Remove valve from crankcase vent hose and clean
hose. Verify that hose is not plugged.
4. Shake crankcase valve. If free movement of valve is
heard while shaking, valve can be reused. Replace
valve if rattle is not heard.
5. Install the valve and vent hose. Attach valve to
bracket with two screws provided. Tighten hose clamp A—Vent Hose
securely.
WM05597,0000E99 -19-06FEB15-1/1
125-9 041717
PN=256
Change Pump Drive Gear Case Oil
T8T3539 —UN—15JAN16
T8T402 —UN—24APR15
NOTE: Warm oil before draining.
1. Clean and remove the fill plug (B).

2. Remove and retain cap screws (C) and drain plates
(D and E).
T8T5022 —UN—16NOV16
3. Remove drain hose (F) from the hose cap assembly
(G).
an approved container. Verify hose routing when
hose back into engine compartment. Right-Hand Side Of Machine Shown

Secure hose inside an appropriate container and
completely drain oil.
5. Retain engine oil drain hose with the previously
removed drain plates. Install drain plates and retain
with previously removed cap screw.
6. Fill gear case to proper level in sight gauge (A). Allow

time for oil to settle.
T8T5045 —UN—18NOV16
7. Replace fill the plug.
A—Sight Gauge E—Drain Plate

B—Fill Plug F— Drain Hose
C—Cap Screw G—Hose Cap Assembly
D—Drain Plate
AS09261,0000163 -19-21NOV16-1/1
130-1 041717
PN=257
Change Chopper Gear Case Oil

1. Park harvester on a level service area.
T8T2443 —UN—06MAY15
2. Run engine, with chopper engaged, approximately 5
min to warm gear case oil.
Wait for harvesting functions to stop.
IMPORTANT: Be careful not to damage or lose Chopper Gear Case (Style A)
O-ring when removing drain plug.
4. Open door of the chopper system and remove and

retain drain plug (A). Allow oil to drain completely.
T8T4955 —UN—10NOV16
when installing drain plug.
5. Reinstall drain plug.

O-ring when removing fill plug. Chopper Gear Case (Style B)
6. Remove and retain the fill plug (B).

A—Drain Plug B—Fill Plug
settle.
8. Check oil level at sight gauge. Level must be at top 9. Reinstall the fill plug and close the door of the chopper
of sight gauge. system.
Specification 10. Start engine, engage chopper, and allow to run for
Chopper Gear Case several minutes.
(Style A)—Capacity.......................................................................... 6.6 L
11. Shut OFF engine and remove key. Wait 10 min and
(1.75 gal)
Chopper Gear Case
(Style B)—Capacity........................................................................... 13 L
(3.4 gal)

when installing fill plug.
AS09261,0000141 -19-22NOV16-1/1
130-2 041717
PN=258
Change Base Cutter Gear Case Oil

NW271330 —UN—15MAY06
2. Run engine, with the base cutter engaged,
approximately 5 minutes to warm gear case oil.
3. Shut OFF engine and remove key. Wait for harvesting
functions to stop completely.
4. Remove cap screws (A) and rubber side shield (B).
5. Remove gear case drain plug (C) and leg drain plugs
(D). Allow oil to drain completely.
6. Reinstall all three drain plugs.
T8130000130 —UN—17JAN13
A—Cap Screws (3 used per C—Gear Case Drain Plug
side) D—Leg Drain Plugs
B—Rubber Shield
AS09261,00001DB -19-22MAR17-1/2
7. Remove the fill plug (A) from the top of gear case.
settle.
9. Check oil level at sight gauge. Level must be 3/4 of
T8130000196 —UN—18JAN13
sight gauge.
Specification
CH570 Base Cutter
Gear Case (Style
A)—Capacity.................................................................................... 9.5 L
(2.5 gal)
Specification
CH670 Base Cutter
Gear Case (Style
A—Fill Plug
A)—Capacity.................................................................................. 13.5 L
(3.5 gal)
Specification
11. Start engine, engage base cutter, and allow to run for
several minutes.
(Style B)—Capacity............................................................................. 7 L
(1.87 gal) 12. Shut OFF engine and remove key. Wait 10 minutes and
10. Reinstall fill plug, rubber shield, and cap screws.
AS09261,00001DB -19-22MAR17-2/2
130-3 041717
PN=259
Check Torsional Dampener Blocks

Check torsional dampener rubber blocks between
engine and pump drive gear case.
T8T656 —UN—29SEP14
T8T657 —UN—25JUN14
CAUTION: Avoid serious injury or death. Set
park brake, shut OFF engine, remove key,
and wait for all harvesting functions to stop
completely before servicing machine.
T8130003051 —UN—13DEC13
1. Park machine on a flat, level surface.
2. Fully extend upper knockdown roller forward toward
topper.
NOTE: If the knockdown roller is manually adjusted,
then move roller after removing key.
3. Raise topper boom, engage boom cylinder safety Viewed From Below Flywheel Housing
stop, and lower boom onto stop.
4. Raise base cutter, engage base cutter safety stops, A—Self-Locking Screws, 5/16 x C—Inspection Plate
and lower base cutter onto stops. 1 in. (8 used) D—Cap Screws (2 used)
B—Access Panel
6. Remove and retain self-locking screws (A) and access and must be replaced. See your authorized John
panel (B), to gain access to engine compartment. Deere dealer.
7. Locate inspection plate (C) under flywheel housing. 10. Install previously removed inspection plate and cap
screws.
IMPORTANT: When removing inspection plate,
be sure to hold plate level not to lose IMPORTANT: Replace self-locking screws as needed.
possible rubber samples.
11. Install previously removed access cover and
8. Remove and retain inspection plate and cap screws self-locking screws.
(D).
9. If significant rubber pieces are present, this indicates
that torsional dampener rubber blocks are damaged
WM05597,00011E8 -19-06FEB15-1/1
130-4 041717
PN=260
Check Seat Belts

CAUTION: Inspect seat belts and mounting
hardware on your machine at least once a
year. If seat belt system, including mounting
hardware, buckle, belt, or retractor, shows any
CQ298933 —UN—25MAR15
sign of damage such as cuts, fraying, extreme
or unusual wear, discoloration or abrasion,
the entire seat belt system should be replaced
immediately. For your safety, replace the belt
system only with replacement parts approved for
your machine, see your John Deere dealer.
Seat belts (A) are standard equipment on both operator

and instructional seats. Lap type seat belts have a
A—Seat Belts (2 used)
push-button quick release and automatic belt retraction to
allow unrestricted exiting and entering.
WM05597,00012CF -19-21APR15-1/1
Check Accumulators Pre-Charge Pressure

Check pre-charge pressure in base cutter lift and
floating crop divider accumulators.
See your authorized John Deere dealer.
WM05597,0001203 -19-06FEB15-1/1
Replace Fuel Filters (Tier 2/Stage II and Tier

3/Stage III)
CAUTION: High-pressure fluid remaining in

fuel lines can cause serious injury. Only
technicians familiar with this type of system
TS1343 —UN—18MAR92
should perform repairs. Before disconnecting
fuel lines, sensors, or any other components
between the high-pressure fuel pump and
nozzles on engines with High-Pressure Common
Rail (HPCR) fuel system, wait a minimum of
15 min. after engine is stopped.
Due to High-Pressure Common Rail system
design, fuel in filter is likely to be under high
a diagnostic trouble code appears. Reset
pressure. To avoid possible personal harm, open
code after replacing filters.
valves (B) and (J) on bottom of filters to relieve
pressure before removing each filter.
IMPORTANT: Change primary and secondary fuel

filters if performance decline is noticed or
Continued on next page WM05597,00012C9 -19-21MAY15-1/3
130-5 041717
PN=261
Replacing Primary Fuel Filter A

IMPORTANT:
B
• Take care not to contaminate the fuel
filtration system. Clean the area around the
C
T8T2427 —UN—04MAY15
• Do NOT pre-fill filter with fuel. This may
introduce debris into the fuel system. D
• Change primary and secondary fuel filters
F
if performance decline is noticed or a
diagnostic trouble code appears. Reset E

2. Thoroughly clean primary filter header (A) and
into fuel system.
CQ298940 —UN—08APR15
3. Connect a fuel drain hose on the drain plug (F) at the
bottom of the primary filter, then fully drain the fuel in
a suitable container.
NOTE: Use a suitable container to collect the
drained fuel and other sediments during
removal of the primary filter.
4. Disconnect the water in fuel sensor (E).

A—Filter Header D—Filter Housing
5. Rotate the housing of the primary filter (D) B—Filter Gasket E—Water in Fuel (WIF) Sensor
C—Filter Element F— Drain Plug
counterclockwise and remove it from the head (A).
6. Remove the gasket (B) and the filter element (C) from
the housing (D) and discard them properly. 10. Install the housing (D) with the filter (C) on the head
7. Clean internally the housing (D) using clean fuel. (A), rotate it clockwise until the housing tab snaps into
the housing tab. Tighten an extra 3/4 turn.
8. Apply a thin film of clean oil on the new gasket (B) and
install it on the slot of the head (A). 11. Connect the water in fuel sensor (E).
9. Install the new filter element (C) in the housing (D) NOTE: Be sure to replace secondary fuel filter also and
with the tabs on the bottom towards the housing. then prime system (see following).
Continued on next page WM05597,00012C9 -19-21MAY15-2/3
130-6 041717
PN=262
Replacing Final Fuel Filter

A
IMPORTANT:
• Take care not to contaminate the fuel B
filtration system. Clean the area around the
T8T2426 —UN—04MAY15
• Do NOT pre-fill filter with fuel. This may
C
introduce debris into the fuel system.
• Change primary and secondary fuel filters
if performance decline is noticed or a
diagnostic trouble code appears. Reset D

2. Thoroughly clean secondary filter header (A) and
into fuel system.
CQ298942 —UN—08APR15
3. Connect a fuel drain hose on the drain plug (D) at
the bottom of the final filter, then fully drain the fuel in
a suitable container.
NOTE: Use a suitable container to collect the drained fuel
and other sediments during removal of the final filter.
4. Rotate the final filter (C) counterclockwise and remove

it from the head (A).
A—Filter Header C—Final Filter
5. Remove the gasket (B) and discard it with the final B—Filter Gasket D—Drain Plug
filter (C).
6. Apply a thin film of clean oil on the new gasket (B) and 8. Before starting the engine, place the starter key in
install it on the slot of the head (A). the “Run” position for 60 sec. in order to bleed the
7. Install the final filter (C) on the head (A), rotate it fuel system.
clockwise until it snaps into the head tab. Tighten an
extra 3/4 turn.
NOTE: Make sure that the drain plug (D) of the new
final filter is firmly in place.
WM05597,00012C9 -19-21MAY15-3/3
130-7 041717
PN=263
Replace Prefilter Element (Tier 2/Stage II and

Tier 3/Stage III)
2. Thoroughly clean fuel prefilter assembly and
into fuel system.
CAUTION: Fuel in filter is under high pressure.

Open drain valve on bottom of fuel prefilter to
relieve pressure before removing filter.
CQ298943 —UN—08APR15
NOTE: Catch fluids with an approved container
and dispose of according to employer and
3. Connect a fuel drain line to filter drain valve (A) on

bottom of prefilter and drain all fuel. Close drain valve.
4. Remove and retain water separator bowl (B) from filter
element. Remove and discard prefilter element (C). A—Drain Valve D—Seal
B—Water Separator Bowl E—Seal
5. Clean water separator bowl with compressed air. C—Prefilter Element F— Filter Housing
6. Inspect filter housing and filter canister sealing

surfaces. Clean as required.
11. Open fuel shutoff valve.
7. Place new seal (D) on water separator bowl. Lubricate
seal with clean diesel fuel. NOTE: The hand pump on fuel prefilter is not required
to be used. The electric priming system is
8. Install water separator bowl onto new prefilter element. sufficient to prime the fuel system.
Tighten water separator bowl 1/2 of a turn after seal
contacts prefilter element. 12. Turn key to ON for 60 s to prime the fuel system before
starting engine.
9. Lubricate new prefilter element seal (E) with clean
diesel fuel and install prefilter assembly to filter NOTE: If necessary, turn key switch off and on again to
housing (F). prime the system again before starting.
10. Tighten prefilter element 1/2—3/4 of a turn after seal
contacts filter housing.
WM05597,00013AC -19-08SEP15-1/1
130-8 041717
PN=264
Replace Engine Safety Filter
CQ298927 —UN—24MAR15
5. Completely clean the inside of the housing using
a damp cloth. Do not remove safety filter (D) until
housing is clean.
IMPORTANT:
not remove and reinstall the same filter without.
• The safety filter admits no cleaning.
CQ298928 —UN—24MAR15
6. Unscrew safety filter (D) in a counterclockwise
direction to remove.
7. Clean gasket sealing surface on new filter before
NOTE: Use only John Deere recommended
engine air filters.
8. Install a new safety filter and primary filter. B—Dust Cover D—Safety Filter
9. Install previously removed dust cover and snap latches.

OU90500,00003C3 -19-24MAR15-1/1
135-1 041717
PN=265
Change Hydraulic Filters

1. Release pressure in hydraulic reservoir by removing
vent cap (A) on side of tank.
2. Clean filter cover (B) and area around it.
T8T317 —UN—01MAY14
O-ring when removing filter cover.
3. Remove and retain cap screws (C) and slowly lift filter
cover. Make sure no trash blows into tank while cover
is removed.
4. Remove filter assemblies.
5. Replace cover on tank to keep out trash.
6. Remove and retain nut, retainer, and spring (D) on
lower end of insert assembly. Slide filter (E) from rod
assembly (F).
T8130003034 —UN—02DEC13
7. Clean magnet (G) and inspect filter seals.
IMPORTANT: If hydraulic filters that do not meet
factory specifications are used, the warranty
of hydraulic components will be voided.
8. Install new filter on rod assembly. Replace spring,

retainer, and nut. Tighten nut only until it stops, no
further.
9. Remove filter cover and install filter assemblies into
10. Install previously removed O-ring and filter cover on
T8130003035 —UN—02DEC13
reservoir and tighten cap screws to specification.
Specification
Filter Cover Cap
Screws—Torque............................................................................49 N·m
(36 lb.-ft.)
A—Vent Cap E—Filter

B—Filter Cover F— Rod Assembly
C—Cap Screws (8 used) G—Magnet
D—Nut, Retainer, and Spring
WM05597,0000F6A -19-05FEB15-1/1
135-2 041717
PN=266
Check Chopper Drum Hardware
CAUTION: Avoid serious injury. Set park

brake, shut OFF engine, remove key, and
wait for chopper to stop rotating completely
before inspecting hardware.
T8T1741 —UN—03DEC14
Check cap screws (A) on right-hand side of chopper
drums for rounded edges. To access all cap screws,
rotate chopper flywheel.
NOTE: Replace cap screws before edges are too
rounded to be removed.
If necessary, replace rounded cap screws.

A—Cap Screw, M14 x 45 (16 or
1. If necessary, apply heat to rounded cap screws to aid 18 used)
in removal.
IMPORTANT: Apply Araldite to threads of cap
screws before installing. Specification
Cap Screws—Torque..................................................................258 N·m
2. Install new cap screws to chopper drum. (190 lb.-ft.)

WM05597,0001204 -19-06FEB15-1/1
135-3 PN=267
041717
Check Engine Intake and Exhaust Valves
Clearance
Have engine intake and exhaust valve clearance checked
and adjusted if necessary, by your authorized John Deere
dealer.
WM05597,00011EC -19-06FEB15-1/1
140-1 041717
PN=268
Flush Coolant System (Tier 2/Stage II and
Tier 3/Stage III)
CAUTION: Explosive release of fluids from

pressurized cooling system can cause
serious burns.
Shut OFF engine and remove key. Only remove
filler cap when cool enough to touch with bare
hands. Slowly loosen cap to first stop to relieve
pressure before removing completely.
NOTE: When Cool-Gard™ II or Cool-Gard™ II

PG is used, the drain interval is 3 years or High-Pressure Fluids
3000 hours of operation.
If a coolant other than Cool-Gard™ II or Drain old coolant, flush the entire cooling system, replace
Cool-Gard™ II PG is used, reduce the drain interval thermostats, and fill with recommended clean coolant.
to 2 years or 2000 hours of operation.
Cool-Gard is a trademark of Deere & Company
Continued on next page WM05597,000138D -19-13AUG15-1/2
145-1 041717
PN=269
1. Slowly open the engine cooling system surge tank

cap (A) to its first stop to relieve pressure and allow
coolant to drain faster.
2. Open water pump drain valve (B) and engine block
drain valve (C) on left-hand side of engine. Drain
CQ280164 —UN—13FEB08
coolant from engine block.
IMPORTANT: Thermostats must be removed to allow
entire cooling system to be flushed.
3. Remove thermostats now, if not previously done.

Install cover (without thermostats) and tighten cap
screws to 20 N·m (15 lb·ft).
4. Close all drain valves after coolant has drained. Fill the
cooling system with clean water. Run the engine for
about ten minutes to stir up possible rust or sediment.
5. Stop engine and immediately drain the water from
system before rust and sediment settle.
NW271170 —UN—15MAY06
6. After draining water, close drain valves and fill the
cooling system with clean water and Heavy Duty
Cooling System Cleaner, such as Fleetguard®
Restore® and Restore PLUS™. Comply with the
manufacturer's instructions.
7. After cleaning the cooling system, drain cleaner and fill
with water to flush the system. Run the engine about Water Pump Drain Valve
ten minutes, then drain out flushing water.
8. Close drain valves on engine block and water pump.
Install thermostats using a new gasket.
IMPORTANT: Air must be expelled from cooling
system when system is refilled. Loosen
NW271180 —UN—23MAY06
temperature sending unit fitting in cylinder head
or plug in thermostat housing to allow air to
escape when filling system. Retighten fitting or
plug when all the air has been expelled.
9. Add coolant to coolant tank until it reaches

bottom of filler neck. See Fill Cooling System in
Engine Block Drain Valve
10. Run engine until it reaches operating temperature. A—Surge Tank Cap C—Engine Block Drain Valve
This mixes the solution uniformly and circulates it B—Water Pump Drain Valve
through the entire system. Normal coolant temperature
varies from 76—94°C (170—202°F).
11. After running the engine, check coolant level and
entire cooling system for leaks.
Fleetguard is a trademark of Cummins Filtration
Restore is a trademark of Restore, Inc.
Restore PLUS is a trademark of Fleetguard Inc.
WM05597,000138D -19-13AUG15-2/2
145-2 041717
PN=270
Replace Thermostats and Gaskets (Tier

IMPORTANT: John Deere Liquid Coolant Conditioner
2/Stage II And Tier 3/Stage III) does not protect against freezing. Coolant
For information and procedures on replacing the conditioner prevents rust, scale, and
thermostats and gaskets, see your authorized John Deere liner cavitation.
dealer.
WM05597,00011ED -19-06FEB15-1/1
Replace Torsional Dampener Blocks

Replace torsional dampener rubber blocks between
engine and pump drive gear case.
WM05597,00011EB -19-06FEB15-1/1
145-3 041717
PN=271
Grease Front Wheel Hub Bearings
1. Carefully pry hub cap (A) off the front wheel hub
assembly.
2. Inspect the bearing inside hub for adequate grease. If
T8130000204 —UN—21JAN13
the grease has hardened or is extremely dirty, remove
it from the hub.
3. To add grease to the front hub assembly:
a. Elevate the front wheel off the ground (see Jack
Locations section).
b. Apply three pumps of grease into the grease fitting
(B), and disconnect the grease gun.
c. Rotate the wheel assembly for three turns. A—Hub Cap B—Grease Fitting
Reconnect the grease gun and repeat this
procedure until fresh grease discharges from all
locations on the bearing.
d. Pack the hub cap (A) with fresh grease and reinstall
it on the hub assembly.
KR43067,0000CD9 -19-01MAR13-1/1
Change Engine Vibration Dampener, Engine

Isolators, Cooling Package Isolators and
Chopper Vibration Isolators
OU90500,00003EC -19-15APR15-1/1
150-1 041717
PN=272
Maintenance—As Required
Cab Tilt Procedure
Raising the cab
T8T1659 —UN—26NOV14
T8T1656 —UN—14APR15
1. Park machine on level surface.
2. Completely lower base cutter.
NOTE: If base cutter must be in raised position,
safety stops MUST be engaged.
T8130000394 —UN—30JAN13
3. Completely lower crop dividers and topper.
4. Engage topper boom safety stop and lower boom onto
stop.
5. Shut OFF engine, remove key, and install lockout tag.
IMPORTANT: Avoid damaging windows and
doors on cab.
• Verify that ALL loose objects are removed A—Pump Handle C—Cab Tilt Lever
from cab before tilting. B—Cab Pump D—Raised Position
• Remove all objects from refrigerator
(if equipped).
• Verify that windows and doors are tightly 7. Turn cab tilt lever (C) to raise position (D).
closed and latched.
CAUTION: Do not leave the cab partially tilted.
6. Open left-hand engine compartment door. Locate and
remove pump handle (A) from inside left-hand door.
Insert pump handle into cab pump (B).
IMPORTANT: Cab tilt lever must be in lower
position whenever not in use.
Continued on next page WM05597,0001146 -19-18MAY15-1/4
155-1 041717
PN=273
T8T1661 —UN—26NOV14
T8T1780 —UN—13JAN15
A—Cab Safety Stop
8. Operate pump handle to tilt cab. Be sure to tilt cab

completely until cab safety stop (A) falls into place.
WM05597,0001146 -19-18MAY15-2/4
Lowering the Cab

T8T1877 —UN—13JAN15
T8T1878 —UN—13JAN15
A—Cab Tilt Lever B—Lower Position C—Pump
1. Verify that area beneath cab is clear of personnel and 2. Turn cab tilt lever (A) to lower position (B).
equipment.
3. Insert pump handle into pump (C).
IMPORTANT: Cab tilt lever must be in lower
position whenever not in use.
Continued on next page WM05597,0001146 -19-18MAY15-3/4
155-2 041717
PN=274
4. Pull cab tilt lock release cord (A) and operate pump
until cab is completely seated.
A—Release Cord
T8130000399 —UN—30JAN13
WM05597,0001146 -19-18MAY15-4/4
Clean Cab Glass 5. Clean outside of remaining windows from platform.

1. Completely lower base cutter and drop dividers. 6. Clean interior glass surfaces from inside cab.
2. Raise topper boom, engage boom cylinder safety 7. Clean all lens on lights, flashers, and reflectors.
3. Shut OFF engine and remove key.
4. Clean outside of harvester windshield from ground
level with a long-handled windshield squeegee.
WM05597,00011B8 -19-06FEB15-1/1
Wash Machine
IMPORTANT: USING HIGH-PRESSURE WASHERS:
Direct pressurized water at electronic/electrical
components or connectors, bearing seals,
hydraulic seals, fuel injection pumps, or
T6642EJ —UN—18OCT88
other sensitive devices may cause product
malfunctions. Reduce pressure and spray
at a 45—90° angle.
• Wash machine starting at the top and working

downward.
• Wash machine regularly, especially if it is exposed to
herbicides, pesticides, road salt, or other chemicals.
• Wash chopper mechanism periodically to avoid bacteria • Inspect painted surfaces during washing. Watch for
growth. The chopper system is most important in chips and scratches and repaint any areas where paint
controlling quality cane samples. has been damaged.
• Do NOT wash machine in direct sunlight.
• Do NOT use strong soaps, detergents, chemicals, or Consult your John Deere dealer for a full line of cleaners,
cleaning agents containing acids, caustics, or abrasives. waxes, and touch-up paints to maintain your machine’s
• All cleaning agents should be rinsed promptly and not appearance and finish protection.
be allowed to dry on the paint surface.
WM05597,00011B7 -19-16JAN15-1/1
155-3 041717
PN=275
Windshield Washer Reservoir

NOTE: Windshield fluid reservoir is located inside engine
compartment door on left-hand side of machine.
T8120002519 —UN—18DEC12
As necessary, check and refill reservoir (A) with clean
water or automobile windshield washer solution.
A—Windshield Washer Fluid

Reservoir
KR43067,0000C9F -19-25JAN13-1/1
Do Not Modify Fuel System

IMPORTANT: Modification or alteration of the
high-pressure fuel pump, the injection timing,
or the fuel injectors in ways not recommended
by the manufacturer will terminate the warranty
obligation to the purchaser.
In addition, tampering with fuel system which
alters emission-related equipment on engines
may result in fines or other penalties, per EPA
regulations or other local emission laws.
RG13868 —UN—07FEB05
Do not attempt to service fuel pump, fuel rail,
or fuel injectors yourself. Special training and
special tools are required. (See your authorized
servicing dealer or engine distributor.)
Avoid seizure of internal precision parts in
high-pressure fuel pump or fuel injection rail.
Never steam clean or pour cold water on pump Fuel System
or rail while these components are still warm.
WM05597,0000873 -19-01MAR13-1/1
155-4 041717
PN=276
Fill Fuel Tank

CAUTION: Handle fuel carefully. Do not refuel
machine while smoking or near an open flame
or spark. Set park brake, shut OFF engine, and
remove key before filling fuel tank.
T8T1777 —UN—07JAN15
Do not overfill fuel tank. Bodily injury can
result from fuel splash back. Leakage can
result from expansion of fuel.
IMPORTANT: Clean dirt and debris form cap and

fill tube before removing cap.
1. Remove fuel tank cap (A).

A—Fuel Tank Cap
2. Remove strainer from tank and clean if necessary.
Install strainer.
3. Fill fuel tank with recommended fuel. 4. Install fuel tank cap and verify that cap is fully closed.
NOTE: Keep fuel tank full to reduce buildup
of condensation.
WM05597,0000F58 -19-06FEB15-1/1
Fuel Shutoff Valve

CAUTION: Set park brake, shut OFF engine and
remove key before servicing fuel tank.
Fuel shutoff valve (A) is accessible from the left-hand
CQ298952 —UN—15APR15
engine compartment.
A—Fuel Shutoff Valve
OU90500,00003ED -19-15APR15-1/1
155-5 041717
PN=277
Drain Fuel Tank
T8T1226 —UN—12NOV14
T8T1227 —UN—18SEP14
Some Parts Removed For Clarity Some Parts Removed For Clarity
A—Flange Head Cap Screws (5 B—Shield

used) C—Drain Plug
CAUTION: Set park brake, shut OFF engine, and IMPORTANT: Be careful not to lose O-ring
remove key before performing maintenance work. on drain plug.
1. Close fuel shutoff valve. See Fuel Shutoff Valve in 4. Remove and retain drain plug (C).
this section.
IMPORTANT: Apply High Temperature Form-In-Place
2. Remove and retain flange head cap screws (A) and Gasket to threads of drain plug before installing.
shield (B).
5. Install previously removed drain plug.
IMPORTANT: Capture and dispose of flammable
materials in accordance with local laws 6. Install previously removed shield and flange head cap
and regulations. screws.
3. Place approved container below fuel tank.

WM05597,0000F59 -19-06FEB15-1/1
155-6 041717
PN=278
Service Fuel Tank

1. Close fuel shutoff valve (A), lift and turn cap lock (B),
and remove cap (C).
2. Remove shield and drain plug (D). See Drain Fuel
Tank in this section.
T8T1232 —UN—22SEP14
3. Remove fill strainer (E).
4. Clean the inside of the fuel tank by rinsing with clean
diesel fuel.
5. Dispose of waste according to employer and
6. When tank is empty, remove the fuel line shutoff valve
and the suction strainer (F).
7. Clean suction and fill strainers with solvent.
IMPORTANT: Apply High Temperature Form-In-Gasket
to threads of drain plug and suction
T8T1233 —UN—22SEP14
strainer before installing.
8. Install strainers, shutoff valve, and drain plug.

IMPORTANT: Use a backup wrench on strainer when
tighten fitting to prevent overtightening
of strainer.
9. Hand tighten fittings and turn two full turns (720°) with
a wrench.
10. Fill fuel tank with recommended fuel. Keep fuel tank
full to reduce the buildup of condensation.
11. If necessary, bleed fuel system. See Bleed Fuel
System in this section.
T8T1234 —UN—22SEP14
A—Fuel Shutoff Valve D—Drain Plug
B—Cap Lock E—Fill Strainer
C—Cap F— Suction Strainer
WM05597,00010DA -19-06FEB15-1/1
Bleed Fuel System If engine will not start after filter changes, turn ignition key
NOTE: Normally the fuel system is self-priming and ON for 60 seconds to prime the fuel system. It may be
self-bleeding, and does not require a bleeding necessary to turn the key off and on again to reprime the
procedure by the opeartor. system before starting.
JR07957,00002E8 -19-26FEB13-1/1
155-7 041717
PN=279
Engine Air Filters Maintenance

IMPORTANT: Only clean the primary filter if restriction
air filter code 107.00 is activated.
Removing Engine Air Filters
CQ298927 —UN—24MAR15
IMPORTANT: Replace the primary filter when
occurs the first event below:
• If damages are found at the inspections.
• After every three cleanings1.
CQ298928 —UN—24MAR15
• Every 500 hours.
5. Completely clean the inside of the housing using
a damp cloth. Do not remove safety filter (D) until
housing is clean.
IMPORTANT:
not remove and reinstall the same filter without. A—Snap Latches (6 used) C—Primary Filter
• The safety filter admits no cleaning. B—Dust Cover D—Safety Filter
• Always change the safety filter:
- Every 1500 hours.
- If the filter is dirty. 6. Unscrew safety filter (D) in a counterclockwise
- Every three primary filter changes. direction to remove. Safety filter stops dirt that would
pass through damaged primary filter.
1
After each cleaning and inspection, make a mark with pen on the
filter element to control the amount of cleanings.
Continued on next page OU90500,00003C1 -19-08APR15-1/4
155-8 041717
PN=280
Cleaning Engine Primary Filter

IMPORTANT: In normal conditions it is possible to
clean the primary filter 3 times before replacing it.
1. Thoroughly inspect the dirty primary filter to ensure
CQ294576 —UN—07MAY13
that there is no damage in the filter. If there is any sign
of damage in the filter, discard the filter.
IMPORTANT:
• Never wash, brush or knock elements.
• If using compressed air, the air must be
directed from the inside (clean side) of the
filter. The air must be dry and the maximum
pressure allowed is 5 bar (72.5 psi), the nozzle
should be 1/8 in. to 1/4 in. and held no closer
than 50 mm (2 in.) from the filter media. CAUTION: Never clean the safety filter.
• Ensure that contaminant does not enter or Replace if dirty.
come in contact with the clean side of the filter.
IMPORTANT: Never run engine without both
2. After the cleaning process is complete, inspect the filters in place.
filter again to ensure that no damage occurred during
cleaning. If there is any sign of damage to the filter,
discard the filter.
OU90500,00003C1 -19-08APR15-2/4
Inspecting Engine Primary Filter

Air restriction indicator will not signal correctly if a filter has
a break or is not correctly sealed in air cleaner housing.
Throw away filter that has even the slightest damage. If
gasket is broken or missing, install a new element.
CQ294575 —UN—07MAY13
1. Hold a bright light (A) inside filter and check carefully
for holes. Discard any filter that has even the slightest
hole.
2. Be sure outer screen (B) is not dented. Vibration
would quickly wear a hole in filter.
3. Be sure filter gasket (C) is in good condition. Press the
gasket on the new filter to see if it springs back. Make
sure that the new filter has a highly compressible released. If gasket is damaged or missing, replace
gasket that springs back when finger pressure is filter.
Continued on next page OU90500,00003C1 -19-08APR15-3/4
155-9 041717
PN=281
Installing Engine Air Filters

1. Clean gasket sealing surface on new filters before
NOTE: Use only John Deere recommended
CQ298928 —UN—24MAR15
engine air filters.
2. Install a new safety filter (D) and new primary filter (C)
or reinstall primary filter (C) after cleaning.
3. Install dust cover (B) and snap latches (A).

B—Dust Cover D—Safety Filter
CQ298927 —UN—24MAR15
OU90500,00003C1 -19-08APR15-4/4
Remove and Install Air Conditioning Fresh

Air Filter
1. Loosen the knob (A) and remove the dust cover (B).
2. Remove fresh air filter (C).
3. Clean inside the filter housing and dust cover using a
damp cloth.
4. Clean or replace fresh air filter.
5. Reinstall the components in the reverse order.
CQ298929 —UN—24MAR15
A—Knob C—Fresh Air Filter
B—Dust Cover
OU90500,00003C6 -19-24MAR15-1/1
155-10 041717
PN=282

Recirculation Filter
1. Remove the cover (A) pulling it down.
2. Remove recirculation filter (B).
NOTE: Pull by plastic edge to not damage the
recirculation filter.
3. Clean inside the filter housing and cover using a damp

cloth.
4. Clean or replace recirculation filter.
CQ298930 —UN—24MAR15
5. Reinstall the components in the reverse order.
A—Cover B—Recirculation Filter
OU90500,00003C7 -19-24MAR15-1/1
Clean Radiators
CAUTION: Cooling radiators may be HOT.
Allow engine to cool before touching surfaces
or using water for cleaning.
IMPORTANT: Shut OFF engine and remove key
T8T565 —UN—13JUN14
before servicing cooling radiators.
1. Open latches (A) of cooling tower and open door (B)

to right-hand side of machine.
CAUTION: Radiator door is heavy. Support weight

of door until it rests on door stop.
A—Latch (3 used) B—Door
Continued on next page WM05597,00013BB -19-11SEP15-1/2
155-11 041717
PN=283
T8140000088 —UN—03MAR14
T8140000089 —UN—03MAR14
2. Pull pin (A) up and swing radiator assembly (B)
outward.
3. Remove and retain cap screws (C) and access panels
(D).
IMPORTANT: When using high-pressure air or
water, be careful of fin damage to coolers.
Straighten bent fins. Bent fins decrease
cooler performance.
4. Clean radiator assembly using compressed air or

water sprayed from the back outward. Leave radiator
assembly swung open.
T8T668 —UN—27JUN14
5. On front side of cooling tower, remove cap screws (C)
and access panel (D).
6. Clean large radiators using compressed air or water
sprayed from inside the cooling tower outwards.
7. Install previously removed access panels and cap Tier 2/Stage II and Tier 3/Stage III
screws.
8. Place radiator assembly back in tower and close A—Pin C—Cap Screws (24 used)
radiator door. Engage latches. B—Radiator Assembly D—Access Panels (2 used)
WM05597,00013BB -19-11SEP15-2/2
155-12 041717
PN=284
Checking Cooling System

serious burns.
Shut off engine. Only remove filler cap when
cool enough to touch with bare hands. Slowly
loosen cap to first stop to relieve pressure
before removing completely.

temperature sending unit fitting at rear High Pressure Fluids
of cylinder head or plug in thermostat
housing to allow air to escape when filling
system. Retighten fitting or plug when all 2. Thoroughly inspect all cooling system hoses. Replace
the air has been expelled. hoses when hard, flimsy, or cracked.
1. Check entire cooling system for leaks. Tighten all

clamps securely.
RG,RG34710,4077 -19-01JAN96-1/1
Draining Cooling System

1. Release pressure by turning radiator cap slowly to first 4. Check coolant hoses for cracks or leaks and check
stop, then removing cap. belts for cracks and wear. Replace if necessary.
2. Open petcock on the rear of engine to drain the engine 5. Tighten all hose clamps.
block. Open the petcock located above the crankshaft
pulley to drain the system. 6. Check radiator for dirt, damage, leaks, and loose or
broken mountings. Clean radiator fins.
3. Capture coolant in a container. Dispose of waste
coolant properly.
T803324,0000584 -19-17FEB05-1/1
Fill Cooling System

1. Close petcocks on engine. 5. Inspect radiator cap, if gasket is damaged, replace
2. To help avoid air pockets, add coolant slowly. Fill at 11 cap. Start engine and observe coolant level. Add
L (3 US gallons) per minute or less. coolant, if necessary, when the level stabilizes.
3. The factory recommended antifreeze is JD Cool Gard 6. Stop the engine and install radiator cap (A).
pre-diluted antifreeze. JD antifreeze/coolant can 7. Every 25 hours reverse blow or wash the radiator to
also be used in either a pre-diluted mixture or as a remove accumulated dirt and trash.
concentrate mixed with 40 to 60 percent of quality
distilled water. Specification
Cooling System—Capac-
4. Add coolant to expansion tank as needed. ity.................................................................................................... 69,6 L
NOTE: Air will bleed through the surge tank when (18.4 U.S. gal)
cap is removed.
GB52027,000054A -19-22MAY09-1/1
155-13 PN=285
041717
Bleed Air From Coolant System

serious burns.
Shut off engine. Only remove cap when cool
enough to touch with bare hands. Slowly
loosen cap to first stop to relieve pressure
before removing completely.
JG50163,000028D -19-25JAN13-1/2
IMPORTANT: Use coolant as specified in Fuel,

Lubricants and Coolant section.
1. Remove cap from top tank (de-aeration tank) of

cooling system.
2. Remove EGR cooler (if equipped) vent plug (A) from
rear of cooler.
RG14831 —UN—05APR06
3. Fill high pressure coolant circuit at top tank.
4. Begin filling coolant recovery tank (if equipped).
5. When air is purged and coolant is visible coming out of
vent hole on EGR cooler (if equipped), reinstall EGR
cooler vent plug and tighten to specification.
EGR CoolerVent Plug
Specification
EGR Cooler (if
A—Plug to Bleed Air from EGR
equipped) Vent Plug to
Cooler (if equipped)
Cooler—Torque.............................................................. 20 N•m (15 lb-ft)
10. Shut off engine and allow to cool. Observe coolant

6. Complete filling coolant recovery tank (if equipped) to level dropped below Full Hot in recovery tank (if
Full Hot mark. equipped).
NOTE: Coolant level in recovery tank will drop the first NOTE: It is normal for coolant level to go down
few cycles unless there is a leak. with first few cycles and then range between
Full Hot and Full Cold.
7. Install top tank (de-aeration) cap. Start engine and run
at idle for 1 to 5 minutes. IMPORTANT: It is normal for top (de-aeration) tank to
8. Shut off and remove top tank cap. Fill high pressure be partially full of air when cap is removed and
circuit tank and reinstall cap. system completely de-aerated. When inspecting
top tank, if it is at least 1/2 full, do not add
9. Start engine and warm up for 15 minutes. If coolant additional coolant. Topping off tank may cause
recovery tank loses coolant to ground, repeat previous coolant to be expelled onto the ground and
step and top off top tank until coolant loss stops. may cause coolant pump cavitation.
Loosing coolant to ground indicates air in high
pressure system is being discharged through coolant 11. Monitor coolant recovery (if equipped) tank for two
recovery tank. days. Refill recovery tank or top tank as required.
IMPORTANT: If coolant level does not drop below
Full Hot, there is a leak in cooling system.
Engine damage may result.
JG50163,000028D -19-25JAN13-2/2
155-14 041717
PN=286
Flush Coolant System

serious burns.
Shut OFF engine and remove key. Only remove
filler cap when cool enough to touch with bare
hands. Slowly loosen cap to first stop to relieve
pressure before removing completely.
NOTE: When Cool-Gard™ II or Cool-Gard™ II

PG is used, the drain interval is 3 years or
3000 hours of operation. High-Pressure Fluids
If a coolant other than Cool-Gard™ II or

Cool-Gard™ II PG is used, reduce the drain interval Drain old coolant, flush the entire cooling system, replace
to 2 years or 2000 hours of operation. thermostats, and fill with recommended clean coolant.
Cool-Gard is a trademark of Deere & Company
Continued on next page WM05597,00011EE -19-09FEB15-1/2
155-15 041717
PN=287
1. Slowly open the engine cooling system surge tank

cap (A) to its first stop to relieve pressure and allow
coolant to drain faster.
2. Open water pump drain valve (B) and engine block
drain valve (C) on left-hand side of engine. Drain
CQ280164 —UN—13FEB08
coolant from engine block.
IMPORTANT: Thermostats must be removed to allow
entire cooling system to be flushed.
3. Remove thermostats now, if not previously done.

Install cover (without thermostats) and tighten cap
screws to 20 N·m (15 lb-ft).
4. Close all drain valves after coolant has drained. Fill the
cooling system with clean water. Run the engine for
about ten minutes to stir up possible rust or sediment.
5. Stop engine and immediately drain the water from
system before rust and sediment settle.
NW271170 —UN—15MAY06
6. After draining water, close drain valves and fill the
cooling system with clean water and Heavy Duty
Cooling System Cleaner, such as Fleetguard®
Restore® and Restore PLUS™. Comply with the
manufacturer's instructions.
7. After cleaning the cooling system, drain cleaner and fill
with water to flush the system. Run the engine about Water Pump Drain Valve
ten minutes, then drain out flushing water.
8. Close drain valves on engine block and water pump.
Install thermostats using a new gasket.
NW271180 —UN—23MAY06
temperature sending unit fitting in cylinder head
or plug in thermostat housing to allow air to
escape when filling system. Retighten fitting or
plug when all the air has been expelled.
9. Add coolant to coolant tank until it reaches

bottom of filler neck. See Fill Cooling System in
Engine Block Drain Valve
10. Run engine until it reaches operating temperature. A—Surge Tank Cap C—Engine Block Drain Valve
This mixes the solution uniformly and circulates it B—Water Pump Drain Valve
through the entire system. Normal coolant temperature
varies from 76° to -94° C (170° to -202°F).
11. After running the engine, check coolant level and
entire cooling system for leaks.
Fleetguard is a trademark of Cummins Filtration
Restore is a trademark of Restore, Inc.
Restore PLUS is a trademark of Fleetguard Inc.
WM05597,00011EE -19-09FEB15-2/2
155-16 041717
PN=288
Add Hydraulic Oil

1. Park harvester on the level surface.
NOTE: Platform must be level, elevator in the raised
position and the topper all the way down. Allow 30
minutes for oil to level after shutting down the engine.
T8T316 —UN—01MAY14
2. When oil is cold, oil level must be at the center of the
sight gauge (A). Add oil when oil level is below that
position.
3. Remove protective cover and clean quick-disconnect
fitting (B) on rear of tank. Clean the fitting (C) on the
pump hose and attach it to quick-disconnect fitting on
the tank.
4. Remove and retain vent cap (D) on the side of
T8130003032 —UN—02DEC13
5. Pump oil into hydraulic reservoir until it reaches the
center of the sight gauge.
7. Remove pump hose and replace protective cover.
A—Sight Gauge C—Fitting

B—Quick-Disconnect Fitting D—Vent Cap
AS09261,00001E0 -19-22MAR17-1/1
155-17 041717
PN=289
Change Hydraulic Oil

1. Remove and retain hydraulic reservoir vent cap (A)
to allow venting.
2. Remove and retain drain plug (B) at bottom rear of
T8T2329 —UN—13APR15
3. Drain oil into an approved container.
4. While oil is draining into a container, replace

hydraulic filters. See Change Hydraulic Filters in
A—Vent Cap C—Access Cover
NOTE: Be sure to replace tank cover with O-ring to B—Drain Plug
maintain cleanliness of the system.
IMPORTANT: Be careful not to damage or lose O-ring

when removing access cover (C). 8. Fill hydraulic tank. See Add Hydraulic Oil in this
section.
5. After oil has finished draining, remove and retain cap 9. Install previously removed vent plug.
screws and access cover and clean tank inner surface.
10. Prime hydraulic system by cranking engine ten sec.
6. Clean or replace O-ring and install access cover. If engine starts before the ten sec., turn off switch to
Torque cap screws to specification. stop engine and crank engine again.
Specification
Hydraulic Reservoir
11. Start engine and run for 5 min. Shut OFF engine.
Access Cover Cap 12. Check hydraulic system for leaks. Check sight gauges
Screws—Torque............................................................................49 N·m for oil level. Add more oil if necessary.
(36 lb.-ft.)
7. Install previously removed drain plug.

OU90500,00003F5 -19-15APR15-1/1
Remove and Install Base Cutter Blades

brake, shut OFF engine, remove key, and wait
for base cutter to stop completely rotating
T8130002468 —UN—04OCT13
before replacing blades.
Avoid serious injury from sharp edges. Wear
gloves when handling blades.
1. Raise base cutter and engage base cutter safety stops.

3. Raise base cutter shield on wheel machines.
4. Remove and retain cap screws and flange nuts (A) A—Cap Screw, M12.7 x 25 and B—Base Cutter Blade (5 used
and base cutter blade (B) from base cutter disk. Flange Nut, M12.7 (2 used per disk)
per blade)
Repeat for remaining blades.
5. Service base cutter blades (See Base Cutter Blade
Service in this section) or replace blades, if necessary.
Specification
6. Install blades and hardware. Tighten to specification. Base Cutter Blade Cap
Screw—Torque............................................................................ 110 N·m
(80 lb.-ft.)
WM05597,0000E58 -19-10DEC14-1/1
155-18 PN=290
041717
Base Cutter Blade Service

• After the edge of a base cutter blade (A) is worn, rotate
the blades to opposite disk so unused side of blade can
be used. A
• When blades are worn on both sides, replace them.
•
T8T1231 —UN—22SEP14
Some blades may be reused by cutting approximately
76 mm (3 in.) (B) off the worn end of the blade. This will
give you a straight-sided blade with a new cutting edge.
Mount blades back onto disks using different mounting
holes, and rotate when necessary.
B
A—Base Cutter Blade B—Measurement
WM05597,00010DB -19-22SEP14-1/1
Remove and Install Chopper Blades

brake, shut OFF engine, remove key, and
wait for chopper to stop completely rotating
T8T642 —UN—16SEP14
IMPORTANT: Note orientation of blades before

removal. Install replacement blades in
same orientation.
1. Remove and retain cap screws (A) and discard

chopper blade (B). A—Cap Screws (7 used) B—Chopper Blade
IMPORTANT: Apply anti-seize to threads of cap

screws before installing.
3. Rotate flywheel to access remaining chopper blades
2. Install new blades and retain with previously removed and replace as necessary.
cap screws.
WM05597,000138F -19-13AUG15-1/2
4. Verify that chopper blades (A) pass close to swipe

plate (B) without contact. Adjust if necessary.
a. Loosen hardware (C).
b. Adjust position of swipe plate (B).
c. Tighten hardware. T8T2932 —UN—13AUG15
5. Check blade timing and adjust as necessary.

See Check and Adjust Chopper Timing in
A—Blade C—Hardware (5 used)

B—Swipe Plate
WM05597,000138F -19-13AUG15-2/2
155-19 041717
PN=291
Adjust Billet Deflector Shield

NOTE: Billet deflector shield (A) is used to direct cane
billets to different heights in primary extractor
chamber. Correct adjustment allows for increased
control of cane quality and reduction of crop loss.
T8T666 —UN—27JUN14
1. Remove and retain hardware (B).
2. Adjust the deflector shield based on type of cane
being harvested.
• THICK BARREL CANE: When cutting thick barrel
cane, adjust deflector shield to the highest position.
This position deflects billets to a height closest to
the primary extractor fan.
• MEDIUM BARREL CANE: When cutting medium A—Billet Deflector Shield B—Hardware (2 used)
barrel cane, adjust deflector shield to the medium
position. This position aids in the cleaning process
and prevents billets from being discharged through prevents light billets from being discharged through
primary extractor blades. primary extractor blades.
• THIN BARREL CANE: When cutting thin barrel 3. Install previously removed hardware.
cane, adjust deflector shield to the lowest position.
This position aids in the cleaning process and
WM05597,0000FCC -19-09FEB15-1/1
Adjust Chopper Deflector Plate (CH670)
T8T4849 —UN—20SEP16
A—Nut (4 used) C—Sill Roller

B—Gap D—Chopper Deflector Plate
1. Loosen nuts (A). Specification

2. Adjust gap (B) between the sill roller (C) and chopper Chopper Deflector
deflector plate (D) to specification. Plate—Gap............................................................................... 10-15 mm
(7/16-5/8 in)
3. Tighten nuts.
AS09261,00000FA -19-12OCT16-1/1
155-20 PN=292
041717
Remove and Install Topper Blades
CAUTION: Avoid possible serious injury. Shut

OFF engine, remove key, and wait for topper to
stop completely rotating before replacing blades.
T8T1663 —UN—26NOV14
Avoid possible serious injury from sharp edges.
1. Remove hardware (A) and blade (B) from severing

disk.
2. Install new blades with serrated side (C) facing
upwards. Tighten hardware to specification. Whole Topper
Specification
Topper Blade Cap
Screws—Torque............................................................................34 N·m
(25 lb.-ft.)
NOTE: Whole topper uses eight blades
T8130000510 —UN—27FEB13
Shredder topper uses 38 blades.
A—Cap Screws and Lock Nuts C—Serrated Side

(2 used per blade)
B—Blade (8 used)
Shredder Topper
WM05597,0000E55 -19-23JAN15-1/1
155-21 041717
PN=293
Remove and Install Vine Cutter Knives (If

Equipped)
CAUTION: Avoid serious injury. Set park brake,
T8140000091 —UN—03MAR14
shut OFF engine, remove key and wait for
all harvesting functions to stop completely
before servicing machine.
1. Park machine on a flat, level surface.

2. Raise topper boom, engage boom cylinder safety
4. Set park brake, shut off engine, and remove key. A—Hardware (5 used) C—Vine Cutter Knife
B—Knife Holder D—Guard
CAUTION: Knives have sharp cutting edges
and can cause serious injury. Wear gloves
when handling knives. 7. Retain with previously removed hardware
5. Remove and retain hardware (A) and knife holder (B). 8. Verify crop divider scrolls DO NOT contact knives.
Remove and discard vine cutter knife (C) from crop Adjust as necessary.
divider. 9. Tighten hardware to specification.
CAUTION: Vine cutter knives are shipped Specification
with guards (D). Do not remove guards until Hardware—Torque......................................................................140 N·m
installation is complete. (105 lb.-ft.)
10. Repeat procedure on opposite side of machine.

6. Install new vine cutter knife and previously removed
knife holder to crop divider.
NOTE: Verify that vine cutter knife edge is flush
with knife holder edge.
WM05597,0000E54 -19-10DEC14-1/1
Remove and Install Side Knife Blades (If

Equipped)
CAUTION: Avoid possible serious injury. Set
T8140000092 —UN—03MAR14
park brake, shut OFF engine, remove key,
and wait for side knives to stop rotating
Avoid possible serious injury from sharp edges.
1. Remove and retain cap screws and lock nuts (A) and
discard blades (B).
2. Install new blade with serrated edge facing away from
side knife plate. Tighten to specification.
A—Cap Screw and Lock Nut (2 B—Blade (3 used per side)
Specification used per blade)
Triangle Style Side
Knife Blade Cap
Screws—Torque............................................................................34 N·m
3. Repeat for remaining blades.
(25 lb.-ft.)
WM05597,0000E56 -19-23JAN15-1/1
155-22 PN=294
041717
Adjust Shredder Topper Shear Plates (If

Equipped)
CAUTION: Avoid serious injury. Shut OFF

engine, remove ignition key, and wait for
T8130000509 —UN—27FEB13
topper to completely stop rotating before
adjusting shear plates.
1. Rotate topper drum so shear plate (A) is in line with

blade.
2. Loosen socket head cap screws (B).
A—Shear Plates B—Socket Head Cap Screws (2
3. Adjust shear plate up until it makes contact with used)
bottom of blade.
NOTE: If shear plate does not make contact with bottom
of blade, shear plate must be replaced. See 5. Verify topper drum rotates freely.
your authorized John Deere dealer.
6. Repeat on remaining shear plate.
4. Tighten socket head cap screws.
WM05597,0000860 -19-28FEB13-1/1
155-23 041717
PN=295
Remove and Install Primary Extractor Fan

Blades
CAUTION: Avoid possible serious injury or
death. Set park brake, shut OFF engine, wait
for harvesting functions to stop completely,
remove key, and turn OFF battery disconnect
switch before servicing primary extractor.
T8T2929 —UN—12AUG15
IMPORTANT: When replacing extractor blades,
always use John Deere blades.
Always replace blades as a complete set. Do
not install new blades with used blades.
Replace primary extractor blades when one blade has

worn below minimum thickness.
1. Set park brake, shut OFF engine, wait for harvesting
functions to stop completely, remove key, and shut
OFF battery disconnect switch.
NOTE: Arrow on gauge must point up.
T8T2898 —UN—22JUL15
2. Place opening (B) of supplied gauge (C) over blade at
location (A) on all four blades.
3. Blade life is determined by how far gauge goes over
blade.
Green Area (D) Blades are in good condition. No
replacement needed.
Yellow Area (E) Blades are in acceptable condition.
Replacement needed soon. A—Location D—Green Area
Red Area (F) Blades are fully worn. Replace B—Opening E—Yellow Area
blades now. C—Gauge F— Red Area
Continued on next page WM05597,0001384 -19-13AUG15-1/2
155-24 041717
PN=296
CAUTION: Avoid possible serious injury or

death. Set park brake, shut OFF engine, wait
for harvesting functions to stop completely,
remove key, and turn OFF battery disconnect
switch before servicing primary extractor.
IMPORTANT: Always replace blades as a complete

set. Do not install new blades with used blades.
1. Park machine on flat, level surface. Set park brake,

shut OFF engine, shut OFF battery disconnect switch,
and remove key.
T8T2930 —UN—13AUG15
2. Clean primary extractor fan and surrounding area.
3. Remove and retain cap screws (B) and fan blades (A).
IMPORTANT: Apply Thread Lock and Sealer
(High Strength) to threads of cap screws
before installing.
4. Install new fan blades and retain with previously A—Fan Blade (4 used) B—Hardware (16 used)
removed cap screws.
5. Verify that fan blades do not contact extractor housing
when rotated by hand.
6. Check fan operation. See Start Up Procedure After
Extractor Blade Replacement in this section.
WM05597,0001384 -19-13AUG15-2/2
Start Up Procedure After Extractor Blade

Replacement
CAUTION: Avoid serious injury or death.

Stay clear of rotating extractor fan. Always
wear appropriate protective clothing and
TS677 —UN—21SEP89
safety equipment. Verify that all personnel
have evacuated extractor operating area
before start-up.
1. Remove all tools and loose items from extractor area.

2. Start engine and operate extractor fan at 100—200
rpm. Check for fan vibration.
3. Slowly increase rpm until full speed is achieved. 4. If no vibration is observed, proceed with primary
Check for fan vibration. If vibration is observed, extractor calibration procedure. See Calibration
shut OFF engine immediately, remove key, and wait Procedures section.
for harvesting functions to stop completely before
investigating problem.
WM05597,0000FCE -19-09FEB15-1/1
155-25 041717
PN=297
Adjust Primary Extractor Chain Tension
CAUTION: Avoid serious injury or death, Shut

OFF engine, remove ignition key, and wait
for harvesting functions to completely stop
T8120002636 —UN—07JAN13
before servicing extractor.
NOTE: Tension is adjusted on the right-hand side

of extractor hood.
1. Loosen jam nut (A).

2. Turn adjustment nut (B) to increase or decrease chain
tension.
• Clockwise rotation (C) — increase chain tension A—Jam Nut C—Increase Tension Rotation
• Counterclockwise rotation — decrease chain tension B—Adjustment Nut D—Extractor Chain
3. Adjust tension until chain (D) does not sag around

hood ring. Do not overtighten.
WM05597,0001217 -19-23FEB15-1/1
Track Shoe Inspection Torque
T8130002948 —UN—18NOV13
T8130000218 —UN—21JAN13
A—Cap Screws (4 used on each

shoe)
Inspect for loose cap screws (A) using this procedure: the torque-turn method. If the torque is higher, it is
acceptable.
1. Mark bolt head and the adjacent surface of the track
shoe. Specification
Cap Screws—Torque..................................................................407 N·m
2. Loosen bolt approximately 1/8 of a turn (45°). (300 lb.-ft.)
3. Tighten bolt until the two marks align.
4. Read the torque at this point. If the torque is below
specification, loosen all four bolts and retighten by
OU90500,00003D9 -19-02APR15-1/1
155-26 PN=298
041717
Service—Electrical System
Welding Near Electronic Control Units
IMPORTANT: Do not jump-start engines with arc
welding equipment. Currents and voltages are
too high and may cause permanent damage.
1. Disconnect the negative (-) battery cable(s).
2. Disconnect the positive (+) battery cable(s).
3. Connect the positive and negative cables together. Do
not attach to vehicle frame.
4. Clear or move any wiring harness sections away from
welding area.
5. Connect welder ground close to welding point and
away from control units. 6. After welding, reverse Steps 1—5.
DX,WW,ECU02 -19-14AUG09-1/1
Keep Electronic Control Unit Connectors

2. If a connector is not in use, put on the proper dust cap
Clean or an appropriate seal to protect it from foreign debris
IMPORTANT: Do not open control unit and do not and moisture.
clean with a high-pressure spray. Moisture, 3. Control units are not repairable.
dirt, and other contaminants may cause
permanent damage. 4. Since control units are the components LEAST likely
to fail, isolate failure before replacing by completing a
1. Keep terminals clean and free of foreign debris. diagnostic procedure. (See your John Deere dealer.)
Moisture, dirt, and other contaminants may cause the
terminals to erode over time and not make a good 5. The wiring harness terminals and connectors for
electrical connection. electronic control units are repairable.
DX,WW,ECU04 -19-11JUN09-1/1
Battery Disconnect Switch

Battery Disconnect Switch (A)—Disconnects harvester
batteries from electrical system. Turn switch OFF before
performing any service, maintenance, or cleaning.
NOTE: Turn battery disconnect switch OFF if machine
T8T1990 —UN—03FEB15
is stored longer than 25 days. If storage period
is longer than 90 days, remove negative lead to
batteries to minimize load to batteries.
A—Battery Disconnect Switch
WM05597,00013AF -19-10SEP15-1/1
160-1 041717
PN=299
Fuse Center
NOTE: Fuse center is on front, left-hand side of harvester.
1. Remove and retain cap screws (A) and electrical panel

cover (B).
2. Press tabs (C) inward to open fuse cover (D).
A—Cap Screws (3 used) C—Tabs (2 used)

B—Electrical Panel Cover D—Fuse Cover
T8T2017 —UN—24FEB15
Continued on next page AS09261,00001E1 -19-05APR17-1/2
160-2 041717
PN=300
F102— (For Future Use) F14— Dome Light and Power

F101— Rear Controller Mirrors—15 A
Power—60 A F15— Recirculation Fan Power
F100— Front Controller 1—20 A
Power—60 A F16— Recirculation Fan Power
F1— Control Unit Cab Power 2—20 A
1—30 A F17— Seat Compressor—20 A
F102
F2— Control Unit Cab Power F18— Engine Control Unit
2—30 A Power 1—25 A
F3— Cab Power Module A F19— Engine Control Unit F101
Power 1—30 A Power 2—25 A
F4— Cab Power Module A F20— Transfer Pump—15 A
Power 2—25 A F21— Front Control Unit
F5— Cab Power Module A Power—10 A
F100
Power 3—20 A F22— Rear Control Unit
Power 4—30 A F23— Propulsion Control Unit
Power 5—25 A F24— (For Future Use)
F8— Miscellaneous Cab Power F25— Rear Battery
1—20 A Auxiliary—25 A
F9— Miscellaneous Cab Power F26— Battery Auxiliary—25 A
2—15 A F27— Engine Control Unit F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8
F10— Automatic Temperature Power 3—25 A
Control Unit Power—10 F28— Cab Unswitched
A Power—10 A
F11— Accessory Power—20 A
F12— Miscellaneous Cab
Power 3—30 A F9 F10 F11 F12
F13— Auxiliary Power
Outlets—15 A
F13 F14 F15 F16
F17 F18 F19 F20
T8T648 —UN—25JUN14
F21 F22 F23 F24 F25 F26 F27 F28
AS09261,00001E1 -19-05APR17-2/2
160-3 041717
PN=301
Check and Clean Ground Connections
T8130000224 —UN—23JAN13
T8T2954 —UN—03SEP15
Viewed With Cab Tilted
A—Engine Ground Strap B—Cab Ground Strap
Check engine ground strap (A) and cab ground strap (B) NOTE: Cab must be tilted to access cab ground strap.
for fraying or damage. Verify that connection points are
clean and tight.
WM05597,00013A8 -19-03SEP15-1/1
Check Lights, Connectors, and Harnesses

Inspect all wiring, connectors, lights, bulbs, and clamps for
damage, broken wires, and tightness. Clean area around
connectors and verify all lights function properly.
WM05597,00011B9 -19-06FEB15-1/1
160-4 041717
PN=302
Handle Batteries Carefully

The harvester comes equipped with two maintenance-free
12 volt batteries for John Deere engines.
Checking electrolyte level is not necessary. You can
cause battery damage when trying to remove caps.
1. Wear eye protection and rubber gloves.
2. Always remove negative (-) battery terminal first and
reinstall it last.
3. Never check battery charge by placing a metal object
across the posts. Use a voltmeter or hydrometer.
4. Use proper jump-start procedure.

accessories contain lead and lead composites.
Wash hands after handling.
Sulfuric acid in battery electrolyte is poisonous.
Acid can burn skin, damage clothing, and cause
blindness if splashed into eyes.
Avoid acid hazards by:
• Wear protective equipment when
handling batteries.
• Avoid spills and drips.
• Use proper jump start procedures.
Skin contact with acid:
1. Flush area with water.
2. Apply baking soda or lime to help Swallowed acid:
neutralize acid.
3. Seek medical attention. 1. Drink large amount of water or milk.
2. Drink antacid product, beaten eggs,
Eye contact with acid: or vegetable oil.
1. Flush eyes with clean water for 10-15 minutes. 3. Get medical attention immediately.
2. Get medical attention immediately.
KR43067,0000CA3 -19-25JAN13-1/1
160-5 041717
PN=303
Service Batteries
Battery Access

components contain lead and lead compounds.
These materials have been known to the State
of California to cause cancer and reproductive
harm. ALWAYS wash hands after handling.
NOTE: Batteries are on left-hand side of cab platform.
1. Remove and retain cap screws (A).

2. Remove and retain battery cover (B).
A—Cap Screws (4 used) B—Battery Cover
T8T2018 —UN—24FEB15
Continued on next page WM05597,0000E9F -19-21APR15-1/3
160-6 041717
PN=304
Battery Care
CAUTION: Gases given off by battery can explode.

Keep sparks and flame away from batteries. Use
a flashlight to check battery electrolyte levels.
T8T2019 —UN—24FEB15
NEVER check battery charge by placing a
metal object across terminals. Use a voltmeter,
hydrometer, or battery tester.
ALWAYS remove NEGATIVE (-) battery connection
first, and reconnect it last.
1. Keep batteries clean by performing the following:

a. Turn battery disconnect switch to OFF position.
b. Remove cap screws and battery compartment cover.
c. Disconnect negative terminals (A) on both batteries.
d. Disconnect positive terminals (B) on both batteries.
e. Wipe batteries with a clean cloth.
f. Clean posts (C) and terminals (D) with solution of
1-part baking soda to 3-parts water.
g. Reconnect positive terminals FIRST and tighten.
h. Reconnect negative terminals LAST and tighten.
T8120002575 —UN—04JAN13
i. Apply thin coating of petroleum jelly and baking
soda mixture on posts and terminals.
j. Install battery compartment cover and cap screws.
2. Keep batteries fully charged, especially during
cold-weather operation (see Use a Booster
Battery/Battery Charger in Operating the Engine
section for proper procedures).
A—Negative (-) Terminals (2 C—Battery Posts (4 total)
used) D—Battery Terminals (4 total)
B—Positive (+) Terminals (2
used)
Continued on next page WM05597,0000E9F -19-21APR15-2/3
160-7 041717
PN=305
Battery Replacement
1. Turn battery disconnect switch to OFF position.
2. Remove cap screws and battery compartment cover.
3. Disconnect negative terminals (A) on both batteries.
T8T2020 —UN—24FEB15
4. Disconnect positive terminals (B) on both batteries.
5. Remove and retain hardware (C) and strap (D).
6. Install new batteries in reverse order of removal
procedure.
CAUTION: Dispose of batteries properly.

Follow local laws and regulations for the safe
A—Negative (-) Terminals (2 C—Hardware (3 used)
disposal of used batteries. used) D—Strap
B—Positive (+) Terminals (2
If replacing one or both batteries, a new battery must meet used)
or exceed the following specifications at -18°C (0°F).
Specification
(2) 12 V Maintenance-
Free Battery—Cold
Cranking Amps
(minimum)........................................................................................ 1100
Reserve Capacity—min-
utes.................................................................................................... 350
WM05597,0000E9F -19-21APR15-3/3
Safety Rules When Replacing Halogen Bulbs
CAUTION: Halogen bulbs (A) contain gas

under pressure. Handling a bulb improperly
could cause it to shatter into flying fragments.
To avoid possible injury:
• Turn light switch OFF and allow bulb to cool
before changing bulbs. Leave switch OFF
until bulb change is complete.
• Wear eye protection when changing bulb.
• Handle bulb by its base. Wear protective gloves
or avoid touching light bulb surface.
• Use a clean cloth and alcohol to remove
any fingerprints from glass bulb before
installing. Skin oil deposited on bulb will cause
overheating and premature failure.
• Do not drop or scratch bulb.
• Keep moisture away from bulb.
• Do not operate bulb outside of its enclosure.
H59774 —UN—30AUG99
Bulb has a high internal pressure and if cracked

or broken it could explode and cause injury.
• Place used bulb in new bulb carton and dispose
of properly. Keep out of reach of children.
A—Halogen Bulb
WM05597,0000E1D -19-10FEB14-1/1
160-8 041717
PN=306
Replace Cab Headlight Bulb

1. Disconnect wiring harness connector (A) from
headlight assembly (B).
2. Rotate light housing toward outside of cab.
3. Turn bulb assembly (C) counterclockwise and remove.
H96621 —UN—25MAY10
NOTE: Replacement light bulbs are sensitive to
skin contact. Wear protective gloves or avoid
touching light bulb surface.
4. Replace bulb.
5. Push in bulb assembly and turn clockwise to install
into housing.
6. Rotate light housing to previous operating position and
connect wiring harness.
7. Repeat on remaining lights as needed.
H96622 —UN—25MAY10
A—Connector C—Bulb Assembly
B—Headlight Assembly
WM05597,0000EDC -19-09DEC14-1/1
Adjust Cab Headlights

NOTE: Light assemblies can be adjusted as needed
to achieve correct lighting angles.
Vertical Adjustment: Loosen cap screw (A). Rotate light

assembly up or down to desired position and tighten cap
H96624 —UN—25MAY10
screw. Repeat on remaining lights as needed.
Horizontal Adjustment: Rotate light assembly left or right
to desired position. Repeat on remaining lights as needed.
A—Cap Screw
WM05597,0000EDD -19-09DEC14-1/1
160-9 041717
PN=307
Replace Cab Halogen Light Bulb

1. Remove screws (A) and face plate lens (B) from
housing.
2. Squeeze clips (C) to remove bulb assembly (D).
H96625 —UN—25MAY10
3. Remove and replace bulb.

4. Attach bulb assembly using clips on light bulb base.
5. Align face plate lens with connector inside housing
and retain with screws.
A—Screws C—Clip
B—Face Plate Lens D—Bulb Assembly
H96626 —UN—25MAY10
WM05597,0000EDE -19-09DEC14-1/1
Adjust Cab Halogen Lights

Loosen cap screw (A). Rotate light assembly up or down

to desired position and tighten cap screw. Repeat on
H96628 —UN—25MAY10
remaining lights as needed.
A—Cap Screw
WM05597,0000EDF -19-09DEC14-1/1
Replace Topper Boom Light

NOTE: Light Emitting Diode (LED) lights are sealed units
and must be replaced as an assembly.
1. Remove and retain nut (A) and cap screws (B).

T8T4681 —UN—22AUG16
2. Remove and retain bracket (C) from light assembly (D).
A—Nut C—Bracket
B—Cap Screws D—Light Assembly
Continued on next page AS09261,00000BA -19-06SEP16-1/2
160-10 041717
PN=308
3. Disconnect wiring harness (A) from light assembly (B).

Discard previously installed light assembly.
4. Install replacement light assembly in reverse order.
A—Wiring Harness B—Light Assembly
T8T4680 —UN—23AUG16
AS09261,00000BA -19-06SEP16-2/2
Adjust Topper Boom Light

Loosen nut (A). Rotate light assembly (B) up or down to
desired position and tighten nut.
A—Nut B—Light Assembly
T8T4702 —UN—24AUG16
AS09261,00000BB -19-02SEP16-1/1
Safety Rules When Replacing High Intensity Discharge (HID) Xenon Lights
CAUTION: Handling bulb improperly could

cause it to shatter into flying fragments.
To avoid possible injury:
• Turn light switch OFF and allow bulb to cool
before changing bulbs. Leave switch OFF
until bulb change is complete.
• High voltage is conducted by electrical
connection between lights and ballast unit;
this connection must never be disconnected
without first disconnecting vehicle wiring
harness to ballast.
• Wear eye protection when changing bulb.
• Handle bulb by its base. Wear protective gloves
or avoid touching light bulb surface.
• Use a clean cloth and alcohol to remove
• Do not operate bulb outside of its enclosure.
Bulb has a high internal pressure and if cracked
any fingerprints from glass bulb before or broken it could explode and cause injury.
installing. Skin oil deposited on bulb will cause
overheating and premature failure.
• Place used bulb in new bulb carton and dispose
of properly. Keep out of reach of children.
• Do not drop or scratch bulb.
• Keep moisture away from bulb.
WM05597,0000E22 -19-10FEB14-1/1
160-11 041717
PN=309
Replace High Intensity Discharge (Xenon) Light Bulb (If Equipped)
CAUTION: Avoid serious injury or death from

electrical shock or lamp explosion. Lamps
are powered by 25,000 V. Before working on
HID-Xenon lights or ballast, ensure that lights
are turned OFF, engine is shut OFF, park
brake is set, key is removed, and appropriate
H96644 —UN—27MAY10
eye protection is worn.
If lights were previously operated, wait a minimum
of five minutes before servicing bulb.
NOTE: High intensity discharge (HID) Xenon lights (A)

are on both sides of cab as shown.
A—HID-Xenon Lights
WM05597,0000EE0 -19-09DEC14-1/2
H96646 —UN—27MAY10
H96634 —UN—26MAY10
1. Rotate light housing (A) toward outside of cab.
2. Disconnect wiring harness connector (B) from light
assembly.
3. Remove socket head cap screws (C) and remove rear
housing (D).
H96635 —UN—26OCT10
4. Pry locking tab (E) and remove HID-Xenon bulb (F).
IMPORTANT: Handle bulb by the base and
avoid touching glass.
5. Remove and replace bulb.

6. Install rear housing to light housing and retain with
socket head cap screws.
A—Light Housing D—Rear Housing
7. Connect wiring harness and rotate light housing to B—Connector E—Locking Tab
C—Socket Head Cap Screws (3 F— HID-Xenon Bulb
previous operating position. Used)
WM05597,0000EE0 -19-09DEC14-2/2
160-12 041717
PN=310
Adjust High Intensity Discharge (Xenon)

Lights (If Equipped)
Vertical Adjustment: Loosen cap screw (A). Rotate light
H96647 —UN—27MAY10
assembly up or down to desired position and tighten cap
screw. Repeat on remaining lights as needed.
Horizontal Adjustment: Rotate light assembly left or right
to desired position. Repeat on remaining lights as needed.
A—Cap Screw
WM05597,0000EE1 -19-09DEC14-1/1
Replace Beacon Light Bulb
H96613 —UN—25MAY10
H96614 —UN—25MAY10
1. Push down on lens (A) and turn counterclockwise to
remove.
2. Pry clip (B) from locking tab (C).
3. Remove bulb assembly (D) from connector (E).
H96615 —UN—25MAY10
4. Replace bulb and install in reverse order.

A—Lens D—Bulb Assembly

B—Clip E—Connector
C—Locking Tab
WM05597,0000EE2 -19-09DEC14-1/1
160-13 041717
PN=311
Replace Front Turn Signal Bulb
CQ298953 —UN—15APR15
T8T772 —UN—09JUL14
A—Cap Screws (4 used) B—Light Cover D—Lens
C—Screws (3 used) E—Bulb
1. Remove and retain cap screws (A) and light cover (B). 5. Push and turn clockwise bulb (E) to install into front
2. Remove and retain screws (C) and lens (D). turn signal assembly.
3. Push and turn bulb (E) counterclockwise and remove. 6. Install previously removed lens (D), screws (C), light
cover (B), and cap screws (A).
4. Replace bulb.
WM05597,00012CE -19-21APR15-1/1
Replace Tail Lights

1. Remove and retain cap screws (A) and cap screws
and washers (B).
2. Remove tail light assembly (C) and disconnect wiring
T8140000082 —UN—27FEB14
harness connector (D).
3. Remove and retain lock nuts and washers (E).
A—Cap Screws (2 used) D—Wiring Harness Connector

B—Cap Screws and Washers E—Lock Nuts and Washers (2
(2 used) used)
C—Tail light Assembly
CQ298793 —UN—21NOV14
Continued on next page OU90500,00003EF -19-15APR15-1/2
160-14 041717
PN=312
4. Remove and retain screws (A) and lens (B).

5. Push and turn bulb (C) or (D) counterclockwise and
remove.
6. Replace bulb.
7. Push and turn clockwise bulb (C) or (D) to install into
tail light assembly
NOTE: There is a left-hand and right-hand light assembly.
When installed, the red lenses MUST be in bottom
and outside position and yellow lens in top position.
CQ298794 —UN—19SEP14
8. Install in reverse order.
9. Repeat on remaining tail light.
A—Screws (2 used) C—Hazard and Turn Signal

B—Lens Bulb
D—Taillight Bulb
OU90500,00003EF -19-15APR15-2/2
Replace Field Lights T8140000068 —UN—11FEB14
T8140000069 —UN—11FEB14
Left-Hand Side Of Elevator Shown Left-Hand Side Of Cooling Tower Shown
A—Connector B—Bulb Assembly C—Hardware
NOTE: Field lights are on both sides of elevator 2. Remove and retain hardware (C).
and cooling tower.
3. Replace bulb assembly and retain with previously
1. Disconnect wiring harness connector (A) from bulb removed hardware and connect wiring harness
assembly (B). connector.
WM05597,0000EE5 -19-09DEC14-1/1
160-15 041717
PN=313
Replace Cab Interior Light

1. Remove lens cover (A) and replace bulb (B).
H96618 —UN—02JUN10
2. Install bulb and lens cover in reverse order.
A—Lens Cover B—Bulb
WM05597,0000EE6 -19-25MAR14-1/1
Replace Map Light

1. Remove map light assembly (A) and disconnect wiring
harness connector (B).
2. Remove and replace map light assembly.
3. Install and orient map light assembly in reverse order
H97965 —UN—13SEP10
as shown.
A—Map Light Assembly B—Connector
WM05597,0000EE7 -19-25MAR14-1/1
160-16 041717
PN=314
Wheels and Tires
Service Tires Safely
CAUTION: Explosive separation of a tire and rim

parts can cause serious injury or death.
Do not attempt to mount a tire unless you
have the proper equipment and experience
to perform the job.
Always maintain the correct tire pressure. Do not inflate

the tires above the recommended pressure.
Never weld or heat a wheel and tire assembly. The heat
can cause an increase in air pressure resulting in a tire
explosion. Welding can structurally weaken or deform
the wheel.
When inflating tires, use a clip-on chuck and extension
hose long enough to allow you to stand to one side and
NOT in front of or over the tire assembly. Use a safety
cage if available.
Check wheels for low pressure, cuts, bubbles, damaged
rims or missing lug bolts and nuts.
DX,RIM1 -19-27OCT08-1/1
Tire Information
IMPORTANT: If installing a tire with a different
brand than what is listed, consult maximum
pressure rating on tire.
Tire Sizes and Pressures
Tire Size kPa bar psi
14 x 17.5 (10PR) 415 4.1 60
Front
14 x 17.5 (14PR) 550 5.5 80
23.5 x 25 (20PR) 370 3.7 54
Rear
23.5 R25 (28PR) 345 3.4 50
WM05597,0001162 -19-12NOV14-1/1
165-1 041717
PN=315
Wheels and Tires
Grease Front Wheel Hub Bearings

1. Carefully pry hub cap (A) off the front wheel hub
assembly.
2. Inspect the bearing inside hub for adequate grease. If
T8130000204 —UN—21JAN13
the grease has hardened or is extremely dirty, remove
it from the hub.
3. To add grease to the front hub assembly:
a. Elevate the front wheel off the ground (see Jack
Locations section).
b. Apply three pumps of grease into the grease fitting
(B), and disconnect the grease gun.
c. Rotate the wheel assembly for three turns. A—Hub Cap B—Grease Fitting
Reconnect the grease gun and repeat this
procedure until fresh grease discharges from all
locations on the bearing.
d. Pack the hub cap (A) with fresh grease and reinstall
it on the hub assembly.
KR43067,0000CD9 -19-01MAR13-1/1
Recommended Tools for Changing Tire

• 20 Ton Service Jack
CAUTION: Avoid serious injury or death. The
• 20 Ton Floor Stand
wheel assembly weighs approximately 454 KG
• Heavy Duty Wheel Lift
(1000 lb), without fluid. In some application tires
• Torque Wrench
may be filled with fluid increasing this weight.
• Air Hose and Pressure Gauge
Use proper lifting device when servicing tires.
• Safety Cage
Recommended Tools:
KR43067,0000C88 -19-25JAN13-1/1
165-2 041717
PN=316
Wheels and Tires
Change a Tire
Removing Wheel
T8T585 —UN—10JUN14
A—Guard Rails C—Wheel Assemblies
B—Wheel Cap Screws (8 used on
front, 16 used on rear)
CAUTION: Avoid injury or death. Chock all NOTE: See Jack Locations section for proper
wheels before servicing tires. jack placement.
1. Park machine on a firm and level surface. 7. Support machine with floor stand or blocks.
2. Shut OFF engine, set park brake, and remove key. 8. Position wheel lift under the wheel. Fasten a safety
chain around upper portion of the tire.
3. Chock all wheels.
9. Remove wheel bolts and pull the wheel assembly (C)
4. Remove guard rails (A) as necessary to access wheels. away from machine.
5. Loosen wheel cap screws (B) before lifting harvester
off the ground. CAUTION: Use proper tire handling equipment
to pull wheel from machine.
6. Using 20 ton floor jack at proper jack point, slowly
raise wheel off the ground.
Continued on next page WM05597,0000FA5 -19-09FEB15-1/2
165-3 041717
PN=317
Wheels and Tires
Installing Wheel
T8T550 —UN—11JUN14
A—Wheel C—Guard Rails
B—Wheel Cap Screws (8 used on
front, 16 used on rear)
1. Clean and inspect all fastening hardware before

Wheel Cap Screws Torque—Specification
installation. Replace as necessary.
Front—Torque.............................................................................230 N·m
(170 lb.-ft.)
CAUTION: Use proper tire handling equipment Rear—Torque..............................................................................529 N·m
to install wheel on machine. (390 lb.-ft.)
IMPORTANT: Apply anti-seize to threads of wheel 3. Remove floor stand and lower machine to the ground.
bolts before installing. 4. Check wheel cap screw torques again.
2. Position wheel (A) using a wheel lift. Guide the wheel 5. Check tire air pressure.
onto hub and install wheel cap screws (B). Tighten
to specification. 6. Install all previously removed guard rails (C).
WM05597,0000FA5 -19-09FEB15-2/2
Tire Performance of the tire carcass is in the optimum range and maximum
tire performance can be expected. If this combination of
Tires are designed to carry a specified load at a specified design factors is altered for any reason, tire performance
inflation pressure when mounted on a recommended will be reduced.
width rim. When these conditions are met, the deflection
JR07957,00002E7 -19-21FEB13-1/1
Checking Tire Pressure the pressure rises somewhat as the air or fluid becomes
warm. A tire that has sufficient pressure when it is hot
Tires filled with air or fluid should be tested when the tires may be under-inflated when it cools down.
are cold and before the vehicle is put into operation since
AG,T803584,174 -19-07JUN00-1/1
165-4 PN=318
041717
Wheels and Tires
Tire Failure maintained. Inflation pressure checks are particularly

important in fluid-inflated tires. The air volume is relatively
More tires go out of service prematurely from small and any air loss will result in a much greater decrease
under-inflation than for any other reason. Some types in pressure than when the tire is inflated with air only.
of tire use will subject the sidewall of the tire to a severe
folding action when the proper inflation pressure is not
AG,T803584,175 -19-07JUN00-1/1
Proper Air Inflation

Inflation pressures should be checked every day and
should be properly maintained. Recommended inflation
pressures based on actual load on tires should be
used. For accurate inflation, use a special low-pressure
gauge with 1 lb increments. Gauges should be checked
occasionally for accuracy. They may get out of order and
corrections in the reading may be required.
Proper inflation, shown here, provides good tire
contact with the ground. This causes the least
amount of wear in the optimum traction.
CM982500026 —UN—04JAN00
AG,T803584,176 -19-07JUN00-1/1
Tire Over-Inflation
Over-inflation results in tire carcass deformations. The
tread is more rounded which concentrates treadwear at
the centerline area. Traction is reduced in high torque
service because ground contact of the tread shoulder
area is reduced and the harder carcass with reduced
flexing characteristics does not work as efficiently. The
tightly stretched over-inflated carcass is more subject to
weather checking and impact break damage.
Over-inflation, shown here, is less common except
where weights or attachments are removed from the
unit without deflating the tires.
CM982500027 —UN—04JAN00
AG,T803584,178 -19-07JUN00-1/1
165-5 041717
PN=319
Wheels and Tires
Under-Inflation
Tire overload or under-inflation has the same effect of
deforming the tire. Under such conditions the tread on
the tire will wear rapidly and unevenly, particularly in the
shoulder area. Radial cracking in the upper sidewall area
will be a problem. With under-inflated drive tires in high
torque applications, sidewall buckles will develop leading
to carcass breaks in the sidewall. Rim slip can also be a
problem with under-inflation. While an under-inflated drive
tire may pull better in some soil conditions, this is not
generally true and not worth the high risk of tire damage
that such an operation invites.
Under-inflation, shown here, causes bulk. This is a
CM982500028 —UN—04JAN00
common condition with agricultural tires.
AG,T803584,179 -19-07JUN00-1/1
Sidehill Harvesting both rear tires by 0.3 bar (4 PSI) over the recommended
field service inflation. When only one tire is in the down
When harvesting back and forth on the side of a hill, the position, it is only necessary to increase the pressure in
rear tires on each side of a unit will alternately be on the that tire.
down side. It is then necessary to increase pressure of
AG,T803584,181 -19-07JUN00-1/1
165-6 041717
PN=320
Tracks
Track Components
T8T1099 —UN—02SEP14
A—Idler Wheel C—Carrier Roller E—Drive Sprocket G—Track Shoe
B—Track Tension Adjuster Fitting D—Rear Axle Cover F— Track Roller (8 per track)
WM05597,00010AC -19-02SEP14-1/1
Carrier Roller Lubrication

Check carrier rollers for leaks regularly. If shaft plug is
missing, fill with oil and insert new plug, or replace roller.
1. Park harvester on level surface.
2. Remove shaft plug (A) and install the lubrication fitting.
T8130000222 —UN—22JAN13
3. Attach lubrication gun nozzle and pump oil in until
it comes out from around the fitting. This indicates
correct level.
NOTE: If escaping oil from around the fitting is
dirty or mixed with water, keep pumping until
escaping oil is completely clean.
4. Remove the connection and reinstall plug.

A—Shaft Plug
An alternate way to lubricate the carrier roller is to place
the machine at a 20° angle away from the shaft plug. Oil
can then be fed in with an oil can or gun. Allow time for the
oil to travel down the shaft and out into the bearing areas.
KR43067,0000CE2 -19-25JAN13-1/1
170-1 041717
PN=321
Tracks
Remove and Install Track Shoes
T8130002948 —UN—18NOV13
T8130000218 —UN—21JAN13
A—Cap Screws (4 used)
1. Lubricate the threads of cap screws (A).

Specification
IMPORTANT: Apply anti-seize to threads of cap Track Shoe Cap
screws before installing. Screws—Torque Turn..............................................407 N·m + 120° Turn
(300 lb.-ft.) + 120° Turn
2. Install cap screws, shoe, and nuts on the chain link.
NOTE: The initial torque draws the parts together tightly,
NOTE: Rounded side of nuts are pointed away from shoe. and an additional 1/3 turn (120°) stretches the cap
screw for good retention. Stretching stresses the cap
3. Tighten cap screws to initial torque specification screw until some permanent deformation occurs.
using a crisscross sequence. Repeat sequence for
additional turn.
OU90500,00003C0 -19-24MAR15-1/1
Track Alignment
One of the most important factors to check to ensure a A simple field test to check the load distribution is to drive
good service life is correct track alignment. All the rollers the machine on a hard surface for about 1 km (5/8 mile).
should be central to a line from the sprocket tooth center Check the rollers for correct oil level prior to this test. Feel
to the front idler center. each roller with your hand and note the temperature of
Another vital check is that all bottom track rollers are each one, any rollers that feel hotter than the others would
level. Misalignment from wear, bearing failure, or a indicate that they are carrying more than their share of
distortion in track frame causes uneven distribution of the the load.
weight among the rollers. Rapid failure will occur with
uncorrected uneven load distribution. A new bottom roller
should never be used along with worn ones.
OU64006,0000194 -19-19MAY06-1/1
170-2 PN=322
041717
Tracks
Track Tension Adjustment
T8130000219 —UN—21JAN13
A—Chain Pin C—Distance E—Fitting
B—Carrier Roller D—Fitting Base
IMPORTANT: The track adjustment procedure should

Specification
be performed under the same conditions in
Track Chain to Track
which the machine is used. Dirt buildup must
Frame—Distance...................................................................32—38 mm
not be removed from the track, if buildup
(1.25—1.5 in.)
conditions exist on the job.
3. If track tension adjustment is necessary:
1. Move the harvester forward a distance of twice its
length. Allow the harvester to come to a complete • If measurement is more than specification, the chain
stop when one of the chain pins (A) is centered on is too tight. Loosen base of grease fitting (D) until
the carrier roller (B). grease escapes. Tighten fitting.
• If measurement is less than specification, the chain
2. Measure the distance (C) between the track chain and is too loose. Add grease to fitting (E) until the proper
track frame. measurement is reached.
WM05597,0001193 -19-09DEC14-1/1
170-3 PN=323
041717
Jack Locations
Jack Locations
T8130000220 —UN—21JAN13
CAUTION: Avoid serious injury or death. Do
NOT support machine weight with lifting
device. Position blocks or stands under
machine after lifting.
Consider height of machine when lifted to
avoid overhead obstructions.
T8T426 —UN—16MAY14
IMPORTANT: Using jack locations other than two front
and two rear shown can cause machine damage.
NOTE: Jack locations are on both sides of machine

at front and rear.
To raise the harvester with a jack or similar lifting device:

A—Rear Jack Location B—Front Jack Location
• Position jack under rear jack location (A) on rear frame
at area near tow points.
• Position jack under front jack location (B) on front frame
at crop divider mounting area.
WM05597,0000F8D -19-14JUL14-1/1
175-1 041717
PN=324
Fire Prevention
Recommended Fire Prevention inspection or cleaning, always set park brake, shut OFF
engine, and remove key.
The machine must be inspected periodically throughout
the harvest day. Buildup of crop material and other debris Your machine is equipped with a general-purpose fire
must be removed to ensure proper machine function and extinguisher and a pressurized water fire extinguisher.
to reduce the risk of fire. The extinguisher must be checked daily when entering
or exiting the cab and when working around machine to
Regular and thorough cleaning of machine combined ensure that it is in working condition. Fire extinguishers
with other routine maintenance procedures listed in the must be replaced or professionally serviced after any
Operators Manual greatly reduces the risk of fire, chance usage.
of costly downtime, and improves machine performance.
For further information, see Machine Cleanout section.
Always follow all safety procedures posted on the machine
and in the Operator’s Manual. Before carrying out any
WM05597,0000F13 -19-09FEB15-1/1
Fire Prevention
1. Machines should be cleaned of debris at least daily,
particularly around engine, exhaust, and steering
components. The buildup of crop debris in the engine
compartment, on the engine, and near any moving
parts is a fire hazard.
2. Before tilting cab, remove debris from platform area
around sides and at back of cab.
3. Machines should be inspected at least daily for
potential fire hazards in electrical, exhaust, steering,
fuel, hydraulic, and brake systems. Repairs should be
made immediately.
4. Service personnel should be instructed on what to do
CM989999028 —UN—10NOV00
when a fire starts, how to use the fire extinguisher,
and must follow such instructions. Operators should
be required to demonstrate an ability to use fire
suppression equipment.
5. Hydraulic leaks and accumulation of grease, fuel,
and oil (including spillage) should be eliminated
immediately.
6. The radiator and the engine cooling system should
be cleaned and serviced daily to maintain moderate
engine temperatures.
7. Any portable extinguisher or fire suppression system operations and/or when the fuel system is open to the
carried on the machine that has been previously atmosphere.
used should be recharged or replaced before the 10. Do not weld where hydraulic hoses or electrical wiring
machine resumes operation. A partially discharged can be damaged. Depressurize hydraulic hoses
extinguisher has reduced capability and may not work and move or protect. Move or protect electrical
a second time. wiring/harnesses.
8. Before welding or brazing on any part of machine, the 11. Rotate the billet deflector down and remove any trash
part and surrounding area should be cleaned and a and/or debris daily. Return billet deflector to its normal
fire extinguisher should be made readily available. operating position.
9. Smoking, naked flames, and so forth, should not
be permitted around any machine during fueling
AS09261,00000A1 -19-12OCT16-1/1
180-1 041717
PN=325
Fire Prevention
Fire Extinguisher Operation
H90363 —UN—05DEC07
3-6 M
Your machine is equipped with a general-purpose fire 3. Pull safety pin from top of extinguisher.
extinguisher and a pressurized water fire extinguisher. 4. Hold extinguisher upright by handles and aim hose at
Extinguishers must be checked daily when entering or base of flames.
exiting the cab and when working around machine to 5. Squeeze handles to discharge fire extinguisher.
ensure that it is in working condition. Fire extinguishers 6. Move nozzle back and forth, covering flames with a
must be replaced or professionally serviced after any cloud of powder.
usage.
Inspection Checklist:
Fire Extinguisher Recommendations:
At least once per month, inspect fire extinguisher and
General-Purpose Fire Extinguisher: ensure the following:
• Use extinguisher for grease, oil, electrical, and chemical 1. Is fire extinguisher positioned in designated location
fires.
on landing?
Pressurized Water Fire Extinguisher: 2. Are there any obstructions to proper access or
visibility?
• Use extinguisher for crop material buildup or crop 3. Are operating instructions on nameplate legible and
debris fires. facing outward?
Use of Fire Extinguisher: 4. Are safety seals broken or missing?
5. Is extinguisher full (checking by gauge and by lifting
The diagram shows the recommended method to extinguisher)?
extinguish a fire. Always aim towards base of fire. 6. Is there any physical damage, corrosion, leakage, or a
clogged nozzle?
The following are basic steps for the use of a fire
extinguisher: IMPORTANT: When inspection of fire extinguisher
reveals a deficiency, extinguisher must
1. Remove fire extinguisher from bracket and carry to be serviced or replaced.
area of fire.
2. Approach area of fire with wind to your back.
WM05597,0000EDB -19-08APR14-1/1
180-2 041717
PN=326
Fire Prevention
Charge Water Fire Extinguisher

NOTE: Water fire extinguisher is shipped uncharged.
Prior to delivery of machine the water fire
extinguisher must be charged.
When an antifreeze charge is used to freeze
protect extinguisher, a complete discharge
and maintenance is required.
H92727 —UN—10SEP08
CAUTION: Before attempting to recharge ensure
that extinguisher is completely depressurized.
1. Discharge all remaining pressure and water (or

antifreeze solution) making sure that there is no
remaining air pressure.
2. Loosen nut (A) and remove valve assembly (B) from A—Nut C—Cylinder
cylinder (C). B—Valve Assembly
IMPORTANT: Fire extinguisher must not be exposed

to freezing temperatures unless protected 3. Fill cylinder with 9.5 L (2.5 gal.) of clean water or
with antifreeze. See instructions decal on antifreeze solution.
extinguisher for further information.
NOTE: Fluid level will be approximately 15.2 cm (6
NOTE: Corrosion inhibitor must be used, if water includes in.) below the top of the cylinder.
high levels of chlorides (40 ppm).
WM05597,0000EDA -19-25MAR14-1/3
CAUTION: Hand tighten nut to specification. Over

tightening with wrench will damage valve.
4. Install valve assembly (A) and tighten nut (B) to

specification.
Specification
H92728 —UN—08SEP08
Nut—Torque.....................................................................11.3—11.9 N·m
(100—105 lb-in)
5. Remove cap from pressurizing valve (C).

NOTE: Set pressure regulator on air compressor to
no more than 175 kPa (1.75 bar, 25 psi) higher
than gauge operating pressure.
A—Valve Assembly C—Pressurizing Valve
CAUTION: Never leave fire extinguisher B—Nut
connected to a regulator of a high-pressure
source for an extended period of time. Do
not over pressurize fire extinguisher. Fire NOTE: Check nut, gauge, pressurizing valve, cylinder
extinguisher may rupture if over pressurized. welds, and valve orifice for leaks using leak
detection fluid or a solution of soapy water.
6. Pressurize fire extinguisher to specification using air
or nitrogen. 7. Install previously removed cap on pressurizing valve.
Specification
Fire Extinguisher—Pres-
sure............................................................................................. 690 kPa
6.9 bar
(100 psi)
Continued on next page WM05597,0000EDA -19-25MAR14-2/3
180-3 041717
PN=327
Fire Prevention
8. Install pin (A) with ring facing towards front of

extinguisher and install tamper seal.
9. Install hose and nozzle assembly (B) in holder (C).
10. Install fire extinguisher on machine.
H92729 —UN—08SEP08
A—Pin C—Holder
B—Hose and Nozzle Assembly
WM05597,0000EDA -19-25MAR14-3/3

sparks.
tank outdoors.
flammable liquids.
DX,FIRE1 -19-12OCT11-1/1
Prepare for Emergencies

Be prepared if a fire starts.
Keep a first aid kit and fire extinguisher handy.
Keep emergency numbers for doctors, ambulance service,
hospital, and fire department near your telephone. TS291 —UN—15APR13
DX,FIRE2 -19-03MAR93-1/1
180-4 041717
PN=328
Fire Prevention
Remove Accumulated Crop Debris

The buildup of leaves and crop debris in the engine
compartment, on the engine, and near moving parts is
a fire hazard. Check and clean these areas frequently.
Before performing any inspection or service, set park
brake, shut OFF engine, remove key, and turn OFF
battery disconnect switch.
AS09261,00000AC -19-11AUG16-1/1
Fire Extinguishers
A general-purpose fire extinguisher and a pressurized
water fire extinguisher with mounting brackets are
installed on your machine.
Read label on extinguishers and become familiar with
instructions on how to use and maintain them. Once
extinguisher is discharged, no matter for how long, it must
be recharged.
IMPORTANT: Pressurized water fire extinguisher must
not be exposed to freezing temperatures unless
protected with antifreeze. See instructions decal
on extinguisher for further information.
H92841 —UN—16SEP08
General-Purpose And Water Fire Extinguisher
WM05597,0000DDF -19-07APR14-1/1
Fire Extinguisher Locations
CAUTION: General-purpose fire extinguisher must

be at least a 6 kg (13 lb.) dry chemical or similar
and meet local government laws and regulations.
T8T546 —UN—10JUN14
A pressurized water fire extinguisher (A) and

general-purpose fire extinguisher (B) are on the left-hand
side of the cooling package.
A—Water Fire Extinguisher B—General-Purpose Fire

Extinguisher

WM05597,0000DE0 -19-09JAN15-1/1
180-5 041717
PN=329
Fire Prevention
In Case of Fire
CAUTION: Avoid personal injury.
Stop machine immediately at the first sign of fire. Fire

may be identified by the smell of smoke or sight of flames.
Because fire grows and spreads rapidly, get off the
machine immediately and move safely away from the fire.
Do not return to the machine! The number one priority
is safety.
Call the fire department. A portable fire extinguisher can
put out a small fire or contain it until the fire department
arrives; but portable extinguishers have limitations.
Always put the safety of the operator and bystanders first.
If attempting to extinguish a fire, keep your back to the 1. Pull the pin. Hold the extinguisher with the nozzle
wind with an unobstructed escape path so you can move pointing away from you, and release the locking
away quickly if the fire cannot be extinguished. mechanism.
Read the fire extinguisher instructions and become familiar 2. Aim low. Point the extinguisher at the base of the fire.
with their location, parts, and operation before a fire starts.
Local fire departments or fire equipment distributors may 3. Squeeze the lever slowly and evenly.
offer fire extinguisher training and recommendations.
4. Sweep the nozzle from side-to-side.
If your extinguisher does not have instructions, follow
these general guidelines:
DX,FIRE4 -19-22AUG13-1/1
Clean Engine Compartment
CAUTION: Do not clean engine or engine

compartment with engine running. Dirt, oil,
leaves, and crop debris in engine compartment
and on engine is a fire hazard. Direction of wind,
type of crop and its moisture content can all
have an effect on where and how debris can
accumulate. Check and clean this area frequently.
At least daily and after tilting cab, inspect engine

compartment and remove debris. Pay special attention
CQ298955 —UN—15APR15
to large battery cables and high temperature areas of
engine system including: manifold, turbocharger, air
preheat ducts, exhaust ducts, muffler and other exhaust
items. Check and repair any insulation wraps to eliminate
openings that collect debris.

WM05597,00013B7 -19-10SEP15-1/1
180-6 041717
PN=330
Machine Cleanout
Clean Out Machine (Periodic)
Cleaning Information
CAUTION: ALWAYS wear proper protective

equipment when cleaning machine.
IMPORTANT: Crop material and other debris can
accumulate in various areas, causing a fire
hazard. Direction of wind, type of crop, and
crop moisture content can all effect where
and how much crop material and debris can
accumulate. Inspect and clean these areas
throughout the harvest day.
The machine must be inspected periodically throughout • Fuel tank

the harvest day. Buildup of crop material and other debris • Crop dividers
must be removed to ensure proper machine function to • Base cutter gear case
reduce the risk of fire. • Extractor fans
• Chopper gear case
Regular and thorough cleaning of machine combined • Elevator
with other routine maintenance procedures listed in the • Ground drive components
Operators Manual greatly reduce the risk of fire, chance • Feed rollers
of costly downtime, and improve machine performance.
There are other areas that require regular cleaning but
Primary areas that must be inspected and cleaned are: these areas provide the greatest impact on fire prevention.
Using compressed air can ease cleaning.
• Engine compartment
• Pump drive gear case and hydraulic hoses Always follow all safety procedures posted on the machine
• Wiring harnesses, sensors, and control units and in the Operators Manual. Before carrying out any
• Exhaust inspection or cleaning, always shut OFF engine, set park
• Cooling tower brake, and remove key.
185-1 041717
PN=331
Machine Cleanout
Engine Compartment
T8130000238 —UN—23JAN13
CQ298956 —UN—15APR15
Inspect and clean areas around the engine. Primary areas
that must be cleaned are:
1. Turbocharger
2. Underneath Engine
3. Exhaust Manifold
T8130000324 —UN—23JAN13
AS09261,00001E5 -19-05APR17-2/14
Pump Drive Gear Case and Hydraulic Hoses

Inspect and clean areas around the pump drive gear case.
T8T2429 —UN—24APR15

185-2 041717
PN=332
Machine Cleanout
Wiring Harnesses, Sensors, and Controllers
T8T414 —UN—15MAY14
T8T415 —UN—15MAY14
T8T416 —UN—15MAY14
T8T417 —UN—15MAY14
Shield Removed For Clarity
Inspect and clean areas around the electrical components.

Primary areas that must be cleaned are:
1. Battery Compartment
2. Cab Connections
3. Controller Units
T8130000323 —UN—23JAN13
Tier 2/Stage II and Tier 3/Stage III

185-3 041717
PN=333
Machine Cleanout
Exhaust
Inspect and clean areas around exhaust.
T8T5251 —UN—05APR17
AS09261,00001E5 -19-05APR17-5/14
Cooling Package
Inspect and clean areas around the cooling package.
1. Fan (Motor, Blades, Grill)
2. Radiators and Intake Screen
T8T419 —UN—15MAY14
AS09261,00001E5 -19-05APR17-6/14
Fuel Tank
Inspect and clean areas around the fuel tank (Shutoff
valve, vent, filler cap, and filters).
T8T422 —UN—15MAY14
185-4 041717
PN=334
Machine Cleanout
Crop Dividers
Inspect and clean areas around the crop dividers. Primary
areas that must be cleaned are:
1. Top and Bottom of Scroll
2. Motor and Hoses
3. Lift Arms and Cylinder
T8T566 —UN—13JUN14
AS09261,00001E5 -19-05APR17-8/14

Inspect and clean areas around the base cutter assembly.
1. Legs, Side Shields, and Disks
2. Above Gear Case, Motors, Hoses, and Under Shields
T8T427 —UN—16MAY14
T8130000328 —UN—23JAN13
185-5 041717
PN=335
Machine Cleanout
Extractor Fan—Primary and Secondary
T8T2921 —UN—10AUG15
T8T176 —UN—11APR14
Inspect and clean areas around the extractor. Primary 2. Chain
areas that must be cleaned are: 3. Rotation Ring
4. Fan Assembly and Ring
1. Rotation Motor
AS09261,00001E5 -19-05APR17-10/14
Chopper Gear Case (Style A) and Chopper

Gear Case (Style B)
T8T5041 —UN—18NOV16
T8T2450 —UN—07MAY15
Chopper Gear Case (Style A) Chopper Gear Case (Style B)

Inspect and clean areas around the chopper assembly. 1. Flywheel
Primary areas that must be cleaned are: 2. Drive Motors and Hoses
185-6 041717
PN=336
Machine Cleanout
Elevator
T8130000354 —UN—24JAN13
T8130000355 —UN—24JAN13
Inspect and clean areas around the elevator. Primary

areas that must be cleaned are:
1. Discharge, Motors, Tension Housing, and Secondary
Extractor (if equipped)
2. Hinge and Raise and Lower Cylinders
3. Swing Table, Basket, and Sprockets
T8T161 —UN—22SEP14
4. Elevator Chain Guides, Wear Strips, Frame, and Cart
Guard
T8T1779 —UN—13JAN15
185-7 041717
PN=337
Machine Cleanout
Drive Components
T8T423 —UN—15MAY14
T8T568 —UN—13JUN14
Inspect and clean areas around the drive components. 2. Tracks, Drive Sprocket, Idlers, Rollers, Axles, and
Primary areas that must be cleaned are: Suspension Components.
1. Wheels, Final Drives, Axles, Suspension Components,
and Steering Linkage.
AS09261,00001E5 -19-05APR17-13/14
Feed Rollers
Clean feed rollers of excess mud and leaf trash.
T8T567 —UN—13JUN14
AS09261,00001E5 -19-05APR17-14/14
Clean Out Machine (Annual)
CAUTION: To prevent injury, never clean

machine with engine running and harvesting
functions engaged.
The following instructions are recommended when

cleaning out machine for storage or before transporting
machine on highways.
CAUTION: Sound horn to clear every-

T8140000383 —UN—25MAR14
one from area.
1. Drive machine over end rows or bumps to loosen and

shake off dirt. Shut OFF engine, set parking brake,
and remove key.
2. Drive machine onto blocking so one side is about
150 mm (6 in.) higher, or park on incline so dirt and
water run out.
Continued on next page WM05597,00012D5 -19-08MAY15-1/9
185-8 041717
PN=338
Machine Cleanout
CAUTION: If working with compressed air, wear

goggles and dust mask for personal protection.
Air hose must have a 2 m (6 ft.) wand (end).
IMPORTANT: Start at top of machine and work down.
H39607 —UN—11OCT88
3. Lower topper boom and crop dividers.
5. Shut OFF engine, set parking brake, remove key, and
block wheels.
WM05597,00012D5 -19-08MAY15-2/9
6. Open or remove the following doors, guards, and

shields:
a. Raise base cutter shield (A). Repeat for opposite
side of machine.
T8130000225 —UN—23JAN13
A—Base Cutter Shield
WM05597,00012D5 -19-08MAY15-3/9
b. Open engine compartment doors (A) on both sides

of machine.
A—Engine Compartment Door
T8T2428 —UN—24APR15
185-9 041717
PN=339
Machine Cleanout
c. Turn shield latch (A) and open door of chopper

system.
A—Shield Latch
T8T2455 —UN—08MAY15
WM05597,00012D5 -19-08MAY15-5/9
d. Remove quick-lock pins (A) and chopper curtain

(B), to access feed rollers.
A—Quick-Lock Pins (2 used) B—Chopper Curtain
T8T551 —UN—12JUN14
WM05597,00012D5 -19-08MAY15-6/9
e. Tilt cab forward and engage safety stop (see Cab Tilt
Procedure in Maintenance—As Required section).
T8T552 —UN—12JUN14
185-10 041717
PN=340
Machine Cleanout
f. Remove hardware and front access panels (A).

g. Open radiator door (B).
A—Front Access Panels (2 B—Radiator Door

used)
T8T553 —UN—12JUN14
185-11 041717
PN=341
Machine Cleanout
T8T1982 —UN—07MAY15
7. Starting at the top of machine and working downward, 13. Fuel Tank (fill cap, vent, shutoff, and drain valves)
clean the following areas of the machine: 14. Engine Compartment (sides and below engine,
hoses, mounts, pump drive gear case, pumps,
1. Cab (outside and underneath) valves)
2. Cooling Tower (fan, motor, radiators, hoses, 15. Topper and Boom (pivots, hinge points, hoses,
screens, door) motors, gathering and severing disks)
3. Exhaust 16. Knockdown Roller (motors, rollers, cylinders,
4. Top of Engine (turbocharger, hoses, manifolds) hoses)
5. Platform, Ladders, and Brush Rails 17. Crop Dividers (scrolls, side knives, motors, hoses,
6. Primary Extractor—Exterior (hood, hoses, chain, lift cylinders, and arms)
motor, ring) 18. Base Cutter (blades, legs, motors, around gear
7. Primary Extractor—Interior (fan blades, inner ring, case, hoses)
hood) 19. Drive Components (tracks or wheels, motors,
8. Elevator (elevator discharge flap, hoses, chain, and hoses, final drives, suspension)
slats, wear strips, screens, basket, swing table) 20. Glass, Lights, Reflectors, and Reflective Tape
9. Secondary Extractor (hood, hoses, chain, motor,
ring, fan blades) 8. Inspect entire machine for missing hardware,
10. Chopper (motors, gear case, flywheel, hoses, damaged parts, or leaks. Repair as necessary.
blades)
11. Feed Rollers (rollers, mat, floating arms, motors) 9. Install all previously removed panels, shields, and
12. Hydraulic Reservoir (fill coupler, vent, fittings) guards. Close and latch all doors and covers.
WM05597,00012D5 -19-08MAY15-9/9
185-12 041717
PN=342
Storage
Prepare Machine for Storage
1. Slide open cooling tower screen and clean the
following with air, water, or a vacuum: IMPORTANT: Do not use high-pressure washer spray
directly on bearings. High-pressure water can
• Screen get past most seals and cause damage. Dry
• Radiator these areas, then lube and run machine.
• Hydraulic oil cooler
• Engine oil cooler 9. Repaint areas where needed.
2. Clean air pre-cleaner. 10. Lubricate entire machine and grease threads on
adjusting bolts.
3. Clean outside of engine with a safe solvent.
11. Check all fasteners for proper torque.
CAUTION: Do not use gasoline to clean engine. 12. Fill fuel tank to prevent condensation.
4. After warming up and shutting off engine, drain oil. IMPORTANT: When fuel is stored in the machines
Replace oil filter and fill with correct oil. Add 0.66 L fuel tank or farms storage tank for extended
(22 oz.) of corrosion inhibitor to fresh oil. Run engine periods, or if there is a slow turn over of fuel,
to circulate. add a fuel conditioner to stabilize the fuel and
prevent water condensation. Contact your John
5. Drain, flush, and refill cooling system with 50/50 Deere dealer for recommendations.
mixture of antifreeze and water.
For prolonged machine storage, the best
6. Charge batteries completely. Specific gravity should practice is to drain BioDiesel and fill machine
equal 1.260. with regular petroleum diesel fuel. Otherwise use
• Up to 25 days of storage—Turn battery disconnect BioDiesel stabilizer (anti-oxidant) additives or
switch to OFF position. fully formulated BioDiesel conditioners. Contact
• Up to 90 days of storage—Disconnect negative (-) your John Deere dealer for recommendations.
lead to batteries.
• More than 90 days of storage—Remove and clean 13. Every 60—90 days start engine and turn air
batteries. Store them in a cool dry place and keep conditioning ON. Run engine at slow idle for several
them charged. minutes for compressor seal lubrication. Outside
temperature should be above 5°C (40°F) for proper
7. Drain water separator bowls. air conditioning operation.
8. Clean machine inside and out.
WM05597,0000F6E -19-09DEC14-1/1
Remove Machine From Storage

1. Charge batteries completely. Specific gravity equals
1.260. 5. Clean inside of air filter housing and install new
elements.
2. Reinstall/reconnect batteries. Turn battery disconnect
switch to ON position. 6. Clean inside of cab air filter housings and install new
elements.
3. Check the following fluid levels. Add fluids as
necessary. 7. Check tires for inflation and condition.
8. Inspect fire extinguisher by following maintenance
• Radiator coolant instructions on fire extinguisher label. Recharge or
• Engine oil replace as necessary.
• Hydraulic oil
• Pump drive gear case oil 9. Inspect hoses, harnesses, and clamps for damage
• Fuel and wear.
• Chopper gear case oil
• Base cutter gear case oil 10. Review machine operators manual.
4. Check drive belt tension.
WM05597,0000FFF -19-10DEC14-1/1
190-1 041717
PN=343
Troubleshooting
Engine your John Deere dealer. If any problems remain, use
the following information to solve engine problems.
NOTE: Before troubleshooting the engine, first retrieve all
fault codes on the armrest display and relay them to
Symptom Problem Solution
Engine Will Not Crank Weak battery. Replace battery.
Corroded or loose battery connections. Clean battery terminals and

connections.
Defective main switch or start safety Repair switch as required.

switch.
Starter solenoid defective. Replace solenoid.
Starter defective. Replace starter.
Hard to Start or Will Not Start Poor fuel quality. Drain fuel and replace with quality fuel
of the proper grade.
Slow cranking speed. Check for problem in the

charging/starting system.
Too high viscosity crankcase oil. Drain crankcase oil and replace with
correct viscosity oil.
Electronic Control Unit problem. See your John Deere dealer.
Engine Misfiring or Runs Irregularly Electronic Control Unit problem or See your John Deere dealer.
basic engine problem.
Lack of Engine Power Poor fuel quality. Drain fuel and replace with quality fuel
Plugged fuel filter. Replace fuel filters.
Engine overloaded. Reduce engine load.
Improper crankcase oil. Drain crankcase oil and replace with

correct viscosity oil.
Electronic Control Unit problem or See your John Deere dealer.

Engine Emits Black or Gray Improper type of fuel. Drain fuel and replace with quality fuel
Exhaust Smoke of the proper grade.
Fuel injectors dirty. See your John Deere dealer.
High pressure fuel pump out of time. See your John Deere dealer.
Turbocharger not functioning. See your John Deere dealer.
Continued on next page KR43067,0000C66 -19-25JAN13-1/4
195-1 041717
PN=344
Troubleshooting
Engine burning oil. See Lubrication System

troubleshooting later in this section.
Air cleaner restricted or dirty. Replace air cleaner element as

required.
Defective muffler/exhaust piping Replace muffler or defective piping.

(causing back-pressure).
Engine Emits White Exhaust Smoke Improper type of fuel. Drain fuel and replace with quality fuel
Low engine temperature. Warm up engine to normal operating

temperature.
Defective thermostat. See your John Deere dealer.
Defective fuel injectors. See your John Deere dealer.
Engine compression too low. See your John Deere dealer.
Coolant entering combustion chamber See your John Deere dealer.

(failed cylinder head gasket or cracked
cylinder head).
Engine Idles Poorly Poor fuel quality. Drain fuel and replace with quality fuel
Air leak on suction side of air intake Check hose and pipe connections for
system. tightness; repair as required.

Excessive Fuel Consumption Engine overloaded. Reduce engine load.
Air cleaner restricted or dirty. Replace air cleaner element as

required.
Compression too low. See your John Deere dealer.
Leaks in fuel supply system. Locate source of leak and repair as

required.
Improper type or poor quality of fuel. Drain fuel and replace with quality fuel
Improper valve clearance. See your John Deere dealer.
195-2 041717
PN=345
Troubleshooting
Fuel injectors defective. See your John Deere dealer.
Improper turbocharger operation. Inspect turbocharger. See your John

Deere dealer.
Fuel in Oil Cracked cylinder head. See your John Deere dealer.
Low-Pressure System - Fuel Plugged fuel filter. Replace fuel filter.

Pressure Low
Restricted fuel line. Locate restriction, repair as required.
Faulty high-pressure fuel pump. See your John Deere dealer.
Abnormal Engine Noise Worn main or connecting rod bearings. See your John Deere dealer.
NOTE: Variable geometry
turbocharger recycles after
starting engine, causing a
momentary revving sound in the
engine. This is normal.
Do not confuse the whine heard
during turbocharger run down
with noise which indicates a
bearing failure. The whine
heard during turbocharger run
down is normal.
Excessive crankshaft end play. See your John Deere dealer.
Loose main bearing caps. Check bearing clearance; replace

bearings and bearing cap screws as
required. See your John Deere engine
distributor or servicing dealer.
Worn connecting rod bushings and See your John Deere dealer.
piston pins.
Scored pistons. See your John Deere dealer.
Worn timing gears or excess backlash. See your John Deere dealer.
Excessive valve clearance. See your John Deere dealer.
Worn camshaft lobes. See your John Deere dealer.
Worn rocker arm shaft(s). See your John Deere dealer.
Insufficient engine lubrication. See Lubrication System

troubleshooting later in this section.
Turbocharger noise. See Air Intake troubleshooting later in

this section.
195-3 041717
PN=346
Troubleshooting
Engine Overheats Engine overloaded. Reduce engine load.
Low coolant level. Fill radiator to proper level; check

radiator and hoses for loose
connections or leaks.
Faulty radiator cap. Replace radiator cap.
Stretched belt or defective belt Check automatic belt tensioner; check

tensioner. belts for stretching. Replace as
required.
Low engine oil level. Check oil level. Add oil as required.
Cooling system needs flushing. Flush cooling system.
Defective or wrong type of See your John Deere dealer.

thermostats.
Defective temperature gauge or Check coolant temperature with
sender. thermometer and replace, if
necessary.
Improper type or poor quality of fuel. Drain fuel and replace with quality fuel
KR43067,0000C66 -19-25JAN13-4/4
195-4 041717
PN=347
Troubleshooting
Electrical System
Undercharged System Excessive electrical load from added Remove accessories or install higher
accessories. output alternator.
Excessive engine idling. Increase engine rpm when heavy

electrical load is used.
Poor electrical connections on battery, Inspect and clean as necessary.

ground strap, starter, or alternator.
Defective battery. Test batteries.
Defective alternator. Test charging system.
Battery Uses Too Much Water Cracked battery case. Check for moisture and replace as
necessary.
Battery charging rate too high. Test charging system.
Batteries Will Not Charge Loose or corroded connections. Clean and tighten connections.
Sulfated or worn-out batteries. Replace batteries.
Stretched belt or defective belt Replace belts and/or belt tensioner.

tensioner.
Starter Will Not Crank Engine drivelines engaged. Disengage engine drivelines.
Loose or corroded connections. Clean and tighten connections.
Low battery output voltage or Charge or replace batteries.

discharged battery.
Faulty start circuit relay. See your John Deere dealer.
Blown fuse. Replace fuse.
Defective main switch or start safety Repair switch as required.

switch.
Starter solenoid defective. Replace solenoid.
Starter defective. Replace starter.
Starter Cranks Slowly Low battery output. Charge batteries.
Crankcase oil too heavy. Use proper viscosity oil.
Loose or corroded connections. Clean and tighten connections.
Starter and Hour Meter function; Blown fuse on magnetic switch. Replace fuse.
Rest of Electrical System Does Not
Function
Entire Electrical System Does Not Faulty battery connection. Clean and tighten connections.
Function
Continued on next page KR43067,0000C67 -19-06DEC12-1/2
195-5 041717
PN=348
Troubleshooting
Sulfated or worn-out batteries. Replace batteries.
Blown fuse. Replace fuse.
KR43067,0000C67 -19-06DEC12-2/2
195-6 041717
PN=349
Troubleshooting
Lubrication System
Low Oil Pressure Low crankcase oil level. Fill crankcase to proper oil level.
Faulty pressure sensor. See your John Deere dealer.
Clogged oil cooler or filter. Replace filter or see your John Deere
dealer.
Excessive oil temperature. Inspect and clean oil cooler. See your
John Deere dealer.
Defective oil pump. See your John Deere dealer.
Incorrect oil. Drain crankcase and refill with correct

oil.
Oil pressure regulating valve failure. See your John Deere dealer.
Clogged oil pump screen or cracked See your John Deere dealer.
pick-up tube.
Excessive main or connecting rod See your John Deere dealer.
bearing clearance.
High Oil Pressure Incorrect oil. Drain crankcase and refill with correct
oil.
Faulty pressure sensor. See your John Deere dealer.
Oil pressure regulating valve failure. See your John Deere dealer.
Stuck or damaged filter bypass valve. See your John Deere dealer.
Stuck or damaged oil cooler bypass See your John Deere dealer.
valve.
Excessive Oil Consumption Too low viscosity crankcase oil. Drain crankcase and refill with correct
viscosity oil.
Crankcase oil level too high. Drain oil until oil level is correct.
External oil leak(s). Determine source of oil leak(s) and

repair as required.
Oil control rings not seated. See your John Deere dealer.
Oil control rings worn or broken. See your John Deere dealer.
Scored cylinder liners or pistons. See your John Deere dealer.
Worn valve guides or stems. See your John Deere dealer.
Piston ring grooves excessively worn. See your John Deere dealer.
195-7 041717
PN=350
Troubleshooting
Piston rings sticking in ring grooves. See your John Deere dealer.
Insufficient piston ring tension. See your John Deere dealer.
Piston ring gaps not staggered. See your John Deere dealer.
Front and/or rear crankshaft oil seal See your John Deere dealer.
faulty.
KR43067,0000C68 -19-25JAN13-2/2
Cooling System
Engine Overheats Lack of coolant in cooling system. Fill cooling system to proper level.
Radiator core dirty. Clean radiator as required.
Too low crankcase oil level. Fill crankcase to proper oil level.
Loose or defective fan belt. Replace fan belt as required. Check

belt tensioner.
Defective thermostat(s). See your John Deere dealer.
Damaged cylinder head gasket. See your John Deere dealer.
Defective coolant pump. See your John Deere dealer.
Defective radiator cap. Replace radiator cap as required.
Coolant in Crankcase Cylinder head gasket defective. See your John Deere dealer.
Cylinder head or block cracked. See your John Deere dealer.
Cylinder liner seals leaking. See your John Deere dealer.
Leaking oil cooler. See your John Deere dealer.
Defective oil cooler O-rings. See your John Deere dealer.
Faulty coolant pump seal; weep hole See your John Deere dealer.
plugged; coolant leaking through
bearing.
Coolant Temperature Below Normal Defective thermostat(s). See your John Deere dealer.
KR43067,0000C69 -19-06DEC12-1/1
195-8 041717
PN=351
Troubleshooting
Air Intake
Turbocharger “Screams” Air leak in intake manifold. See your John Deere dealer.
Turbocharger Noise or Vibration Bearings not lubricated (insufficient oil Determine cause of lack of lubrication;
pressure). repair as required. See your John
NOTE: Variable geometry Deere dealer.
turbocharger recycles after
starting engine, causing a
momentary revving sound in the
engine. This is normal.
Do not confuse the whine heard
during run down with noise
which indicates a bearing failure.
Air leak in engine intake or exhaust See your John Deere dealer.
manifold.
Improper clearance between turbine See your John Deere dealer.
wheel and turbine housing.
Broken blades (or other wheel Inspect turbocharger. See your John
failures). Deere dealer.
KR43067,0000C6A -19-06DEC12-1/1
195-9 041717
PN=352
Diagnostic Trouble Codes
Accessing Diagnostic Trouble Code Menu
T8120001781 —UN—09OCT12 H95846 —UN—31MAR10
Message Center
Application Softkey
Main Menu Softkey (Display) / Main Menu Switch (Armrest)
Select main menu softkey. Select message center softkey.
WM05597,000113A -19-14NOV14-1/4
Select trouble codes softkey (A).
A—Trouble Codes Softkey
T8130001513 —UN—30APR13
WM05597,000113A -19-14NOV14-2/4
Select up arrow (A) or down arrow (B) to scroll through

control unit list.
Select desired control unit (C).
NOTE: Another way to display diagnostic trouble codes is
T8130001514 —UN—30APR13
with show all menu (D). Select show all menu. This
displays all trouble codes for all control units.
A—Up Arrow C—Control Unit

B—Down Arrow D—Show All Menu
Continued on next page WM05597,000113A -19-14NOV14-3/4
200-1 041717
PN=353
Diagnostic Trouble Codes
NOTE: Select up arrow or down arrow to scroll through

trouble codes if multiple codes are displayed.

• Control Unit (A)
T8130001515 —UN—30APR13
• Trouble Code (B)
• Active (Yes or No) (C)
• Count (D)
Select desired code.
Code description (E) appears and gives more detail of
trouble code.
Select accept softkey (F) to return to previous screen.
Select return softkey (G) to return to previous screen or
until clear softkey (H) is displayed.
T8130001516 —UN—30APR13
A—Control Unit E—Code Description
B—Trouble Code F— Accept Softkey
C—Active (Yes or No) G—Return Softkey
D—Count H—Clear Softkey
WM05597,000113A -19-14NOV14-4/4
Diagnostic Trouble Code Priorities

Each diagnostic trouble code (DTC) has a priority. The machine be stopped at the earliest convenience.
priority of the DTC is indicated in the way the DTC is Diagnostic trouble code is shown on armrest display.
displayed to the operator: • Information Warning Indicator (Blue): illuminates and
flashes when diagnostic trouble code is active. Alerts
• Stop Engine Warning Indicator (Red): illuminates operator to be aware of a condition. When warning
and requires machine be stopped at once and problem is acknowledged, screen message disappears and
corrected. Diagnostic trouble code is shown on armrest indicator warning light turns OFF.
display until problem is resolved.
• Service Warning Indicator (Yellow): illuminates and
flashes when a problem exists with machine. Requires
WM05597,0000EC8 -19-19MAR14-1/1
200-2 041717
PN=354
Calibration Procedures
T8130002609 —UN—29OCT13
T8T641 —UN—19JUN14
1. Press diagnostic switch (A).
2. Select calibration softkey (B).
3. Select calibrations menu (C).
T8130002610 —UN—29OCT13
4. Select desired calibration.
5. Select accept softkey (D).
6. Follow instructions shown on display to calibrate.
7. Repeat as needed for other calibrations.

B—Calibration Softkey D—Accept Softkey Diagnostic Calibrations Page
WM05597,0000FB4 -19-14NOV14-1/1
Calibration Procedures—When to Calibrate • “Left Crop Divider Position”—Perform calibration when

left crop divider position sensor components are
This list shows all possible calibrations. Depending on replaced, serviced, or adjusted.
machine options listing shown may not match calibration
menu shown on display.
• “Right Crop Divider Position”—Perform calibration
IMPORTANT: Error codes shown on display if a when right crop divider position sensor components are
problem exists during a calibration procedure. replaced, serviced, or adjusted.
Conditions causing error must be corrected
before continuing calibration. • “Left Crop Divider Pressure”—Perform calibration when
left crop divider pressure sensor components are
• “Basecutter Height”—Perform calibration when base replaced, serviced, or adjusted.
cutter height sensor components are replaced, serviced,
or adjusted. • “Right Crop Divider Pressure”—Perform calibration
when right crop divider pressure sensor components
• “Primary Extractor OL”—Perform calibration when are replaced, serviced, or adjusted.
primary extractor fan components are replaced,
serviced, or adjusted. • “Basecutter Target Height”—Perform calibration when
base cutter height sensor and crop divider position
• “Hydro Handle Position Cal”—Perform calibration when sensor components are replaced, serviced, or adjusted.
hydro handle position sensor is replaced, serviced, or
adjusted. • “Hydro Displacement Field Cal”—Perform calibration
when pump EDC valve is replaced, serviced, or
• “Steering Wheel Position Cal”—Perform calibration adjusted.
when steering wheel input device (SID) is replaced,
serviced, or adjusted. • “Varitorque Cal”—Perform calibration when varitorque
potentiometer is replaced, serviced, or adjusted.
WM05597,0000D42 -19-02DEC13-1/1
205-1 041717
PN=355
Calibration Error Codes If calibration error codes appear while calibrating

NOTE: If error codes occur during calibration procedure, machine, see Diagnostic Trouble Codes section for further
codes show on armrest display. Conditions causing information.
error must be corrected before continuing calibration.
WM05597,0000E2F -19-09FEB15-1/1
205-2 041717
PN=356
Specifications
Fluid Capacities
IMPORTANT: See Fluids, Lubricants, and Coolant
section for recommended fluid types.
Capacity
Machine Component (Fluid) CH570 CH670
Engine Oil 33.3 L (8.8 gal) 33.3 L (8.8 gal)
Hydraulic Reservoir 405 L (107 gal) 405 L (107 gal)
Radiator (Coolant) 69.6 L (16.5 gal) 69.6 L (16.5 gal)
Fuel Tank (Diesel) 605 L (160 gal) 605 L (160 gal)
Final Drive 3.0 L (0.8 gal) 3.0 L (0.8 gal)
Chopper Gear Case (Style A) 6.6 L (1.75 gal) 6.6 L (1.75 gal)
Chopper Gear Case (Style B) 13 L (3.4 gal) 13 L (3.4 gal)
Base Cutter Gear Case (Style A) 9.5 L (2.5 gal) 13.5 L (3.5 gal)
Base Cutter Gear Case (Style B) 7 L (1.87 gal) Not equipped
Pump Drive Gear Case 7.1 L (1.87 gal) 7.1 L (1.87 gal)
Lubricated Joints (Grease) As necessary As necessary
Air Conditioning System 3.6 kg (8 lb) 3.6 kg (8 lb)
355 mL (12 oz) 355 mL (12 oz)
Cab Tilt Pump Reservoir 0.57 L (19 oz) 0.57 L (19 oz)
AS09261,00001E3 -19-22MAR17-1/1
210-1 041717
PN=357
Specifications
Component Specifications
Component Specifications
Drive Train
Transmission Double Variable Displacement Pumps:
• Pumps drive two variable displacement motors on the wheel machine

• Pumps drive two fixed displacement motors on the track machine
Brakes Park—Spring applied, hydraulic release
In Motion—Electrical signals put the opposite rear wheel motor in neutral. Steering brakes used
to aid in turning
Dynamic braking
Coolers (Hydraulic, Oil, Coolant) Reversible—Cooling fan powered by hydraulic motor
Harvesting
Chopper Reversible—Two rotating drums with three, four, or five blades per drum
Base Cutter CH570 - Adjustable Cutting Angle (approximately 11°, 14°, 17°)—Two disk type with five blades per disk
CH670 - Adjustable Cutting Angle (approximately 9°, 11°, 13°, 15°)—Two disk type with five blades
per disk
Feed Rollers Rotary drum type with five floating rollers above the cane mat and five fixed rollers below the cane mat
Primary Extractor Hydraulically driven, variable speed ceiling fan with plastic hood
Topper Reversible—Three hydraulic motors independently drive gathering drums and severing disk
Crop Dividers Reversible—single scrolls, independent height and tilt control
Outer Scrolls Hydraulically driven, crop divider-mounted
Butt-lifter Hydraulically driven with two motors, three paddle closed type
Electrical
Lights (External) Eight forward lights, two forward flashers
Two side lights
Two unloading lights
Two brake lights
Two engine compartment lights
Lights (Internal) Cab interior light
Map light
Horn Two Electrical
Miscellaneous
Cab Pressurized and filtered; air-conditioning and heat
Safety glass with left-hand and right-hand door
Windshield washer and wiper
Instructional seat
Optional Components
Transmission Pumps drive two variable displacement motors on the track machine
Secondary Extractor Hydraulically driven, fixed speed ceiling fan with plastic hood
Side Knives Hydraulically driven, crop divider-mounted
Hydraulically adjustable
Replaceable blades
Individually activated
Shredder Topper Reversible—Three hydraulic motors independently drive gathering disks and shredding drum
Extended Width Whole Topper Wider topper improves leaf and top gathering
Whole Topper Collector Extensions Improves standard topper performance in the heavy cane and cane flowers
Crop Divider Two hydraulic cylinders for the variable tilt
Butt-lifter Three paddle open, or four bar open type
Feed Rollers Sill roller after chopper to aid in billet ejection
Chopper Curtain Agitator Prevents mud buildup on the chopper curtain
In Cab Convex Mirrors Increases visibility of elevator
Elevator Speed Control Allows elevator speed reduction in the light cane
High Luminosity Field Lights Improves standard illumination
Warning Lights Two beacon lights mounted above the cab side mirrors
AS09261,00000A9 -19-13SEP16-1/1
210-2 PN=358
041717
Specifications
Engine Specifications
Engine Specifications
Type John Deere 6090H, 9.0 L
Quantity of Cylinders 6
6090HT807 Non-EGR Tier 2/Stage II
Model
6090HT806 Tier 3/Stage III
CH570 CH570 and CH670
Standard Power High Power
(Tier 2/ Stage II and Tier 3/ Stage III) (Tier 2/ Stage II and Tier 3/ Stage III)
Peak Power 272 kW (365 hp) at 2000 rpm 298 kW (400 hp) at 2000 rpm
Rated Power 239 kW (321 hp) at 2200 rpm 261 kW (350 hp) at 2200 rpm
1299 N·m (958 lb·ft) at 2000 rpm 1421 N·m (1048 lb·ft) at 2000
Torque
1037 N·m (765 lb·ft) at 2200 rpm 1134 N·m (836 lb·ft) at 2200 rpm
Air Intake Turbocharger and air-to-air aftercooled
Oil Capacity Maximum Load 33.3 L (8.8 gal)
Coolant capacity 69.6 L (18.4 gal)
Bore 118.4 mm (4.66 in)
Stroke 136 mm (5.4 in)
Displacement 9.0 L (549 in3)
Compression Ratio 16.0:1
Engine Firing Order 1-5-3-6-2-4
Electrical System 12 V Maintenance-Free Battery (2 used)
Valves Per Cylinder 2 Intake
2 Exhaust
Battery (Group 31) 925 CCA
180 min
Thermostat Start To Open 82°C
Temperature (180°F)
Thermostat Fully Open 94°C
Temperature (202°F)
Recommended Radiator 100 kPa
Pressure Cap (1 bar)
(15 psi)
Oil Pressure At Rated Speed 290 kPa
With Oil Warmed to 105°C (2.9 bar)
(220°F) (42 psi)
Oil Pressure At Low Idle 138 kPa
(minimum) (1.4 bar)
(20 psi)
Length (Tier 2/Stage II and Tier 1208 mm
3/Stage III) (47.6 in)
Width (Tier 2/Stage II and Tier 630 mm
Height (Tier 2/Stage II and Tier 1113 mm
Weight (dry) (Tier 2/Stage II 901 kg
and Tier 3/Stage III) (1986 lb)
AS09261,00000CB -19-13SEP16-1/1
210-3 041717
PN=359
Specifications
Dimensions
T8T1546 —UN—28JAN15
Track Machine Shown
NOTE: Maximum heights shown depending on

optional equipment.
Harvester Dimensions
Reference CH570 CH670
A 6.23 m (20.43 ft.) 6.23 m (20.43 ft.)
B 3.55 m (11.65 ft.) 3.55 m (11.65 ft.)
C 3.66 m (12.00 ft.) 3.66 m (12.00 ft.)
D 4.29 m (14.07 ft.) 4.29 m (14.07 ft.)
E 1.36 m (4.46 ft.) 1.36 m (4.46 ft.)
F 5.18 m (16.99 ft.) 5.18 m (16.99 ft.)
G 12.62 m (41.38 ft.) 12.62 m (41.38 ft.)
H 15.00 m (49.21 ft.) 15.00 m (49.21 ft.)
I 2.08 m (6.82 ft.) 2.80 m (9.18 ft.)
J 1.51 m (4.95 ft.) 1.99 m (6.51 ft.)
K 2.81 m (9.21 ft.) 3.74 m (12.25 ft.)
WM05597,0000F45 -19-28JAN15-1/1
Weight
Approximate Machine Weight
Sugar Cane Harvester 21 440 kg (47 275 lb.)
WM05597,0001327 -19-15JUN15-1/1
210-4 041717
PN=360
Specifications
Torque Specifications
Torque Specifications
Hardware N·m lb.-ft.
Rear Wheel Bolts (if equipped)a 529 390
Front Wheel Bolts (if equipped)a 230 170
Track Drive Sprocket Bolts (if equipped)b 529 390
Track Shoe Hardware (if equipped)a 407 300
Track Roller Mounting Hardware (if equipped)b 475 350
Rear Axle Inner Nut (if equipped) 814 600
Rear Axle Outer Bolts (if equipped) 50 37
Base Cutter Gear Case Mounting Boltsb 427 315
Base Cutter Blade Mounting Hardware 110 80
Swing Table Upper Pin Nutb 407 300
Swing Table Lower Pin Nutb 407 300
Hydraulic Tank Coverc 49 36
Hydraulic Tank Access Coverc 49 36
a
Apply Anit-Seize to threads of hardware before installing.
b
Apply Thread Lock and Sealer (High Strength) to threads of hardware before installing.
c
Apply Thread Lock and Sealer (Medium Strength) to threads of hardware before installing.
AS09261,00000C9 -19-08SEP16-1/1
210-5 041717
PN=361
Specifications
Unified Inch Bolt and Screw Torque Values

TS1671 —UN—01MAY03
Bolt or Screw SAE Grade 1 SAE Grade 2a SAE Grade 5, 5.1 or 5.2 SAE Grade 8 or 8.2
Size Lubricatedb Dryc Lubricatedb Dryc Lubricatedb Dryc Lubricatedb Dryc
N·m lb.-in. N·m lb.-in. N·m lb.-in. N·m lb.-in. N·m lb.-in. N·m lb.-in. N·m lb.-in. N·m lb.-in.
1/4 3.7 33 4.7 42 6 53 7.5 66 9.5 84 12 106 13.5 120 17 150
N·m lb.-ft. N·m lb.-ft.
5/16 7.7 68 9.8 86 12 106 15.5 137 19.5 172 25 221 28 20.5 35 26
N·m lb.-ft. N·m lb.-ft.
3/8 13.5 120 17.5 155 22 194 27 240 35 26 44 32.5 49 36 63 46
N·m lb.-ft. N·m lb.-ft. N·m lb.-ft.
7/16 22 194 28 20.5 35 26 44 32.5 56 41 70 52 80 59 100 74
N·m lb.-ft.
1/2 34 25 42 31 53 39 67 49 85 63 110 80 120 88 155 115
9/16 48 35.5 60 45 76 56 95 70 125 92 155 115 175 130 220 165
5/8 67 49 85 63 105 77 135 100 170 125 215 160 240 175 305 225
3/4 120 88 150 110 190 140 240 175 300 220 380 280 425 315 540 400
7/8 190 140 240 175 190 140 240 175 490 360 615 455 690 510 870 640
1 285 210 360 265 285 210 360 265 730 540 920 680 1030 760 1300 960
1-1/8 400 300 510 375 400 300 510 375 910 670 1150 850 1450 1075 1850 1350
1-1/4 570 420 725 535 570 420 725 535 1280 945 1630 1200 2050 1500 2600 1920
1-3/8 750 550 950 700 750 550 950 700 1700 1250 2140 1580 2700 2000 3400 2500
1-1/2 990 730 1250 930 990 730 1250 930 2250 1650 2850 2100 3600 2650 4550 3350
Torque values listed are for general use only, based on the strength of the bolt Replace fasteners with the same or higher grade. If higher
or screw. DO NOT use these values if a different torque value or tightening grade fasteners are used, tighten these to the strength of the
procedure is given for a specific application. For plastic insert or crimped steel original. Make sure fastener threads are clean and that you
type lock nuts, for stainless steel fasteners, or for nuts on U-bolts, see the properly start thread engagement. When possible, lubricate
tightening instructions for the specific application. Shear bolts are designed to fail plain or zinc plated fasteners other than lock nuts, wheel bolts
under predetermined loads. Always replace shear bolts with identical grade. or wheel nuts, unless different instructions are given for the
specific application.
a
Grade 2 applies for hex cap screws (not hex bolts) up to 6 in. (152 mm) long. Grade 1 applies for hex cap screws over 6
in. (152 mm) long, and for all other types of bolts and screws of any length.
b
“Lubricated” means coated with a lubricant such as engine oil, fasteners with phosphate and oil coatings, or 7/8 in.
and larger fasteners with JDM F13C, F13F or F13J zinc flake coating.
c
“Dry” means plain or zinc plated without any lubrication, or 1/4 to 3/4 in. fasteners with JDM F13B, F13E or F13H zinc flake coating.
DX,TORQ1 -19-12JAN11-1/1
210-6 PN=362
041717
Specifications
Metric Bolt and Screw Torque Values

TS1670 —UN—01MAY03
4.8 8.8 9.8 10.9 12.9 12.9
4.8 8.8 9.8 10.9 12.9 12.9
Bolt or Screw Class 4.8 Class 8.8 or 9.8 Class 10.9 Class 12.9
Size Lubricateda Dryb Lubricateda Dryb Lubricateda Dryb Lubricateda Dryb
N·m lb.-in. N·m lb.-in. N·m lb.-in. N·m lb.-in. N·m lb.-in. N·m lb.-in. N·m lb.-in. N·m lb.-in.
M6 4.7 42 6 53 8.9 79 11.3 100 13 115 16.5 146 15.5 137 19.5 172
N·m lb.-ft. N·m lb.-ft. N·m lb.-ft. N·m lb.-ft.
M8 11.5 102 14.5 128 22 194 27.5 243 32 23.5 40 29.5 37 27.5 47 35
N·m lb.-ft. N·m lb.-ft. N·m lb.-ft.
M10 23 204 29 21 43 32 55 40 63 46 80 59 75 55 95 70
N·m lb.-ft.
M12 40 29.5 50 37 75 55 95 70 110 80 140 105 130 95 165 120
M14 63 46 80 59 120 88 150 110 175 130 220 165 205 150 260 190
M16 100 74 125 92 190 140 240 175 275 200 350 255 320 235 400 300
M18 135 100 170 125 265 195 330 245 375 275 475 350 440 325 560 410
M20 190 140 245 180 375 275 475 350 530 390 675 500 625 460 790 580
M22 265 195 330 245 510 375 650 480 725 535 920 680 850 625 1080 800
M24 330 245 425 315 650 480 820 600 920 680 1150 850 1080 800 1350 1000
M27 490 360 625 460 950 700 1200 885 1350 1000 1700 1250 1580 1160 2000 1475
M30 660 490 850 625 1290 950 1630 1200 1850 1350 2300 1700 2140 1580 2700 2000
M33 900 665 1150 850 1750 1300 2200 1625 2500 1850 3150 2325 2900 2150 3700 2730
M36 1150 850 1450 1075 2250 1650 2850 2100 3200 2350 4050 3000 3750 2770 4750 3500
Torque values listed are for general use only, based on the strength of Shear bolts are designed to fail under predetermined loads. Always
the bolt or screw. DO NOT use these values if a different torque value or replace shear bolts with identical property class. Replace fasteners with
tightening procedure is given for a specific application. For stainless steel the same or higher property class. If higher property class fasteners are
fasteners or for nuts on U-bolts, see the tightening instructions for the used, tighten these to the strength of the original. Make sure fastener
specific application. Tighten plastic insert or crimped steel type lock nuts threads are clean and that you properly start thread engagement. When
by turning the nut to the dry torque shown in the chart, unless different possible, lubricate plain or zinc plated fasteners other than lock nuts,
instructions are given for the specific application. wheel bolts or wheel nuts, unless different instructions are given for the
specific application.
a
“Lubricated” means coated with a lubricant such as engine oil, fasteners with phosphate and oil coatings, or M20
and larger fasteners with JDM F13C, F13F or F13J zinc flake coating.
b
“Dry” means plain or zinc plated without any lubrication, or M6 to M18 fasteners with JDM F13B, F13E or F13H zinc flake coating.
DX,TORQ2 -19-12JAN11-1/1
210-7 PN=363
041717
Interpret Product Identification Number
H105725 —UN—22AUG12
AX - John Deere Seeding Group

N4 - John Deere Ningbo Works
BM - John Deere Montenegro
NF - John Deere Tianjin Tractor Co.,Ltd
CC - John Deere Arc-les-Gray
NW - John Deere Catalão
CD - John Deere Usine De Saran
NX - John Deere Des Moines Works
CE - John Deere Iberica Getafe
PC - John Deere Intelligent Solutions Group
CJ - John Deere Nigel
PX - Industrias John Deere S.A. de C.V.
CP - John Deere Tianjin Works
PY - John Deere India Pvt. Ltd
CQ - John Deere Horizontina
RG - John Deere Power Systems
DM - John Deere Roberine Enschede
RX - John Deere Waterloo Works
DW - John Deere Davenport Works
SA - SABO Gummersbach
DX - Deere & Company
T8 - John Deere Thibodaux
EK - John Deere Orenburg
TC - John Deere Turf Care
EX - John Deere Ottumwa Works
TX - Worldwide Construction And Forestry Division
1 Manufacturer Code FD - DCEO-Mannheim
TY - John Deere Merchandise Division
FX - DCEO-Mannheim
WX - John Deere Welland Works
GX - John Deere Power Products
WZ - John Deere Fabriek Horst B.V.
HX - John Deere Harvester Works
XJ - Ashok Leyland John Deere Construction Equipment
JX - Industrias John Deere Argentina S.A.
Company, Pvt. Ltd.
JZ - John Deere Domodedovo
XU - Xuzhou XCG John Deere Machinery Manufacturing
KM - Kemper
Co., Ltd.
KV - Knoxville
YC - John Deere Jiamusi Agricultural Machinery
LG - Mannheim 5x20
YH - John Deere Harbin Works
LV - John Deere Augusta Works
YN - John Deere Tianjin Construction Works
LX - John Deere Werke Mannheim
YZ - John Deere Coffeyville Works
MC - DCEO Parts Marketing
ZT - JDI GmbH-ISB
MX - John Deere Horicon Works
ZX - John Deere Werke Zweibrucken
MY - John Deere Sirhind Works
2 Machine Model Identifier
Model Identifier Suffix
3 Machine Configuration Code Example: N, T, W, etc.
Additional Machine Information
4 Check Letter Example: A, B, C, D, etc.
5 Calendar Year of Manufacture Refer to Year of Manufacture Code table
6 Additional Information
7 Manufacturing Serial Number Example: 000001, 000127, etc.
Year of Manufacture Code

Year Code Year Code Year Code Year Code
2008 8 2018 J 2028 W 2038 8
2009 9 2019 K 2029 X 2039 9
2010 A 2020 L 2030 Y 2040 A
2011 B 2021 M 2031 1 2041 B
2012 C 2022 N 2032 2 2042 C
2013 D 2023 P 2033 3 2043 D
2014 E 2024 R 2034 4 2044 E
2015 F 2025 S 2035 5 2045 F
2016 G 2026 T 2036 6 2046 G
2017 H 2027 V 2037 7 2047 H
WM05597,0000EA6 -19-11MAR14-1/1
215-1 041717
PN=364
Identification Numbers component for any John Deere product support program.
Also, they are needed for law enforcement to trace your
Your machine has these various identification plates. The machine if it is ever stolen. ACCURATELY record these
letters and numbers stamped on these plates identify characters in the spaces provided in each of the following
a component or assembly. ALL of these characters are photographs.
needed when ordering parts or identifying a machine or
WM05597,0000BDE -19-06SEP13-1/1
Product Identification Plate
T8130001160 —UN—15APR13
Sample Identification Plate
WM05597,0000BE0 -19-06SEP13-1/1
Product Identification Number

T8T408 —UN—08MAY14
T8T688 —UN—25JUN14
Wheel Harvester Track Harvester

The product identification number plate is below engine
compartment door on left-hand side of machine.
WM05597,0000F84 -19-27JUN14-1/1
215-2 041717
PN=365
Engine Serial Number

The engine serial number plate (A) is mounted on front
side of engine.
A—Serial Number Plate
T8T2933 —UN—14AUG15
Tier 2/Stage II and Tier 3/Stage III
WM05597,00013BA -19-10SEP15-1/1
Pump Drive Gear Case Serial Number

Serial number plate is on the upper engine side of pump
drive gear case.
T8T407 —UN—08MAY14
WM05597,0000F83 -19-14JUL14-1/1
215-3 041717
PN=366
Chopper Gear Case Serial Number

Serial number plate is on the outer surface of chopper
gear case between motor and flywheel.
NOTE: Style B gear shown. Style A gear case does
not use an identification plate.
T8T4758 —UN—07SEP16
AS09261,00001E4 -19-22MAR17-1/1
Keep Proof of Ownership

1. Maintain in a secure location an up-to-date inventory
of all product and component serial numbers.
2. Regularly verify that identification plates have not
been removed. Report any evidence of tampering to
law enforcement agencies and order duplicate plates.
TS1680 —UN—09DEC03
3. Other steps you can take:
- Mark your machine with your own numbering system
- Take color photographs from several angles of each
machine
DX,SECURE1 -19-18NOV03-1/1
Keep Machines Secure

1. Install vandal-proof devices.
2. When machine is in storage:
- Lower equipment to the ground
- Set wheels to widest position to make loading more
difficult
- Remove any keys and batteries
3. When parking indoors, put large equipment in front of
exits and lock your storage buildings.
4. When parking outdoors, store in a well-lighted and
fenced area.
5. Make note of suspicious activity and report any thefts
immediately to law enforcement agencies.
6. Notify your John Deere dealer of any losses.
DX,SECURE2 -19-18NOV03-1/1
215-4 041717
PN=367
215-5 041717
PN=368
Index
Page
Page
A
Rear plate on base cutter disks
Access manager application..................................... 45-34 Adjust ................................................................ 60-13
Access the engine compartment ................................ 50-1 Remove and install blades.................................. 155-18
Accumulators Target height ........................................................... 40-2
Check pre-charge pressure .................................. 130-5 Base cutter gear case oil
Adjust Change ...................................................... 100-8, 130-3
Armrest Check level ......................................................... 105-13
Control Console................................................... 20-9 Battery
Display................................................................. 20-9 Access .................................................................. 160-6
Billet deflector shield ........................................... 155-20 Care ...................................................................... 160-6
Elevator chain tension............................................110-7 Disconnect switch ........................................ 50-1, 160-1
Front plate on base cutter disks............................ 60-13 Handling safely ..................................................... 160-5
Primary extractor chain tension .......................... 155-26 Remove and install ............................................... 160-6
Rear plate on base cutter disks ............................ 60-13 Safety.................................................................... 160-6
Row Width............................................................. 45-22 Battery disconnect switch ................................ 50-1, 160-1
Air conditioning Battery Handling, Safety
Recirculation filter ................................................155-11 Safety, Battery Handling ....................................... 10-13
Specifications........................................................ 210-1 Beacon
Air intake................................................................... 195-9 Replace light bulb ............................................... 160-13
Alarm, backup............................................................. 55-3 Belt
Antenna ...................................................................... 25-2 Check wear ......................................................... 120-10
Armrest Belt tensioner
Adjusting Inspect ................................................................ 120-10
Control console ................................................... 20-9 BioDiesel fuel.............................................................. 85-5
Display................................................................. 20-9 Blades
Controls Remove and install base cutter blades ............... 155-18
ClimaTrak automatic temperature control ......... 30-13 Remove and install chopper blades.................... 155-19
Operator interface ............................................... 30-9 Remove and install primary extractor blades...... 155-24
Display Remove and install side knife blades.................. 155-22
Navigation ........................................................... 45-1 Remove and install topper blades....................... 155-21
Switches Remove and install vine cutter knives................. 155-22
Lights................................................................. 30-14 Bleeding air from coolant system ........................... 155-14
Radio functions (if equipped)............................. 30-14 Bolt and screw torque values
Auxiliary power outlet strip........................................ 20-10 Metric .................................................................... 210-7
Avoid static electricity risk when Unified inch ........................................................... 210-6
fueling ............................................................ 10-10, 85-2 Brakes
Releasing rear brakes............................................. 80-4
B Break-in engine oil
Non-Emissions certified and certified tier
Backup alarm.............................................................. 55-3 1, tier 2, tier 3, stage I, stage II, and stage III...... 85-12
Base cutter ............................................................... 60-10 Brightness level and boundary box color.................. 45-26
Actual height ........................................................... 40-2 Alarm volume setting ............................................ 45-26
Angle.......................................................... 60-11, 60-12 Boundary box color settings.................................. 45-26
Adjust ..................................................... 60-11, 60-12 Day/night settings ................................................. 45-26
Blade................................................................... 155-19 Dim mode.............................................................. 45-26
Contour base cutter height control system Sync with cab/standalone modes ......................... 45-26
Operate ............................................................. 65-10 Butt-lifter feed roller .................................................. 60-15
Cutting pressure...................................................... 40-2
Front plate on base cutter disks C
Adjust ................................................................ 60-13
Inspect blades....................................................... 105-3 Cab
Inspect hardware ...................................................115-2 After market radios.................................................. 25-1
Lubricate .................................................... 100-9, 120-5 ClimaTrak automatic temperature control ............. 30-13
Multi-function lever Controls
Controls ............................................................... 30-6 Operator interface ............................................... 30-9
Operate ................................................................. 60-14 Display
Navigation ........................................................... 45-1
Index-1 041717
PN=1
Index
Page Page
Ground strap ......................................................... 160-4 Adjust

Lower cornerpost display ........................................ 40-2 Billet deflector shield ....................................... 155-20
Multi-function lever.................................................. 30-6 Chopper Deflector Plate .................................. 155-20
Operator controls .................................................... 20-2 Bearings
Overhead control panel........................................... 25-1 Lubricate............................................................ 120-6
Radio Change
Antenna ............................................................... 25-2 Vibration isolators.............................................. 150-1
CB mounting........................................................ 25-2 Drum hardware
Radio controls ......................................................... 25-1 Inspect............................................................... 135-3
Refrigerator (If Equipped) ....................................... 20-8 Flywheel nut...........................................................110-6
Service advisor diagnostic connector ................... 20-13 Inspect
Switches Drum hardware.................................................. 135-3
Interior light.......................................................... 35-5 Vibration isolators.............................................. 125-6
Lights........................................................ 30-14, 35-1 Inspect blades....................................................... 105-3
Map light.............................................................. 35-5 Lubricate
Radio functions (if equipped)............................. 30-14 Bearings ............................................................ 120-6
Turn signal........................................................... 35-5 Remove and install blades.................................. 155-19
Windshield washer ............................................ 20-12 Tighten flywheel nut ...............................................110-6
Windshield wiper ............................................... 20-12 Chopper curtain agitator
Tilt procedure ........................................................ 155-1 Lubricate ............................................................... 120-6
Upper cornerpost display ........................................ 40-1 Chopper Gear Case
Cab glass Serial Number ....................................................... 215-4
Clean..................................................................... 155-3 Chopper gear case oil
Cab interior light Change ...................................................... 100-7, 130-2
Replacing ............................................................ 160-16 Check level ......................................................... 105-13
Capacities Chopper system ....................................................... 60-16
Fluids .................................................................... 210-1 Operate ................................................................. 60-17
Carrier roller lubrication ............................................ 170-1 Timing
CB Adjust .................................................................110-3
Radio mounting....................................................... 25-2 Check .................................................................110-3
Chain slats Chopper timing
Remove and install ............................................... 125-8 Adjust .....................................................................110-3
Change Check.....................................................................110-3
Base cutter gear case oil ........................... 100-8, 130-3 Clean
Chopper gear case oil................................ 100-7, 130-2 Cab glass .............................................................. 155-3
Chopper vibration isolators ................................... 150-1 Clean machine............................................. 105-1, 105-13
Cooling package vibration isolators ...................... 150-1 Cleaning engine air pre-filter outer screen ............... 105-5
Engine oil and filter ......................... 100-1, 120-8, 125-1 Component specifications ........................................ 210-2
Engine vibration dampener ................................... 150-1 Components
Engine vibration isolators...................................... 150-1 Location .................................................................. 90-2
Final drive oil................................... 100-9, 115-1, 120-1 Configure detail machine information ......................... 45-7
Hydraulic filters .......................................... 100-4, 135-2 Configure lower region information............................. 45-6
Hydraulic oil ........................................................ 155-18 Controls
Pump drive gear case oil ........................... 100-6, 130-1 Multi-function lever.................................................. 30-6
Check Overhead control panel........................................... 25-1
Elevator chain tension............................................110-7 Coolant
Seat belts .............................................................. 130-5 Diesel engine
Tire pressure......................................................... 165-4 Engine with wet sleeve cylinder liners................. 85-9
Check level Flush system............................................ 145-1, 155-15
Base cutter gear case oil .................................... 105-13 John deere COOL-GARD II coolant extender........85-11
Chopper gear case oil......................................... 105-13 Mixing with concentrate, water quality ...................85-11
Engine coolant ...................................................... 105-2 Testing freeze point............................................... 85-10
Engine oil .............................................................. 105-1 Warm temperature climates.................................. 85-10
Fuel ....................................................................... 105-2 Coolant pump
Hydraulic oil .......................................................... 105-2 Inspect weep hole ................................................. 125-6
Pump drive gear case oil .................................... 105-12 Cooling package
Checking engine air pre-filter.................................... 105-5 Change
Chopper.................................................................... 60-16 Vibration isolators.............................................. 150-1
Index-2 041717
PN=2
Index
Page Page
Inspect Supplemental additives........................................... 85-8

Vibration isolators.............................................. 125-5 Diesel fuel, testing
Vibration isolators Testing Diesel Fuel.................................................. 85-4
Inspect............................................................... 125-5 Display
Cooling system ......................................................... 195-8 Lower cornerpost display ........................................ 40-2
Flush ........................................................ 145-1, 155-15 Navigation ............................................................... 45-1
CoolScan .................................................................. 85-17 Upper cornerpost display ........................................ 40-1
Cornerpost Display icon identification ........................................... 45-3
Lower cornerpost display ........................................ 40-2 Display navigation ...................................................... 45-2
Upper cornerpost display ........................................ 40-1 Drain fuel tank .......................................................... 155-6
Crop divider Driving or tranporting the harvester on public roads... 55-1
Inspect wear stops .................................................110-1
Lubricate E
Outer scrolls ...................................................... 120-4
Scrolls................................................................ 120-4 Effect of cold weather on diesel engines .................... 85-7
Outer scrolls Electrical
Lubricate............................................................ 120-4 Battery disconnect switch ............................ 50-1, 160-1
Scrolls Electrical system....................................................... 195-5
Lubricate............................................................ 120-4 Adjust cab halogen lights .................................... 160-10
Crop divider outer scrolls Adjust cab headlights............................................ 160-9
Lubricate ............................................................... 120-4 Adjust high intensity discharge (xenon) lights..... 160-13
Crop divider scrolls Fuse center ........................................................... 160-2
Lubricate ............................................................... 120-4 Fuse Center
Crop dividers .............................................................. 60-3 Location............................................................. 160-2
Adjust height ........................................................... 60-6 Fuses .................................................................... 160-2
Adjust side skirts ..................................................... 60-4 Halogen bulb safety rules ..................................... 160-8
Adjust tilt ................................................................. 60-7 High intensity discharge bulb safety rules............160-11
Floating ................................................................... 65-8 Load center ........................................................... 160-2
Floating side walls................................................... 60-3 Location............................................................. 160-2
Hydraulic tilt Replace beacon light bulb................................... 160-13
Lubricate............................................................ 105-9 Replace cab halogen light bulb........................... 160-10
Manual tilt Replace cab headlight bulb................................... 160-9
Lubricate............................................................ 105-8 Replace field lights.............................................. 160-15
Multi-function lever Replace front turn signal bulb ............................. 160-14
Controls ............................................................... 30-6 Replace high intensity discharge (xenon)
Operate ................................................................... 60-7 light bulb............................................................ 160-12
Replace tail lights................................................ 160-14
D Replacing
Cab interior light .............................................. 160-16
Diagnostic readings, about, display tests ................. 45-30 Map light.......................................................... 160-16
About menu........................................................... 45-30 Elevator .................................................................... 60-19
Diagnostic readings .............................................. 45-30 Basket ................................................................... 60-17
Display tests.......................................................... 45-30 Chain slats
Tochscreen test..................................................... 45-30 Remove and install............................................ 125-8
Diagnostic Trouble Codes Chain tension .........................................................110-7
Accessing.............................................................. 200-1 Inspect bumper stops.............................................110-1
Priorities ................................................................ 200-2 Inspect slats ...........................................................115-2
Diagnostics ............................................................... 45-25 Inspect support cable.............................................110-1
Diagnostics--calibrations .......................................... 45-26 Inspect wear strips ................................................ 125-7
Diagnostics--readings............................................... 45-25 Lubricate
Diesel engine oil Chain sprocket .................................................. 120-5
Service interval for operation at high altitude........ 85-14 Operate ................................................................. 60-20
Tier 2 and stage II ................................................. 85-13 Wear strips
Tier 3 and stage III ................................................ 85-14 Inspect............................................................... 125-7
Diesel engines, cold weather effect............................ 85-7 Elevator chain sprocket
Diesel exhaust fluid Lubricate ............................................................... 120-5
Guage indicator....................................................... 40-1
Diesel fuel................................................................... 85-3
Index-3 041717
PN=3
Index
Page Page
Elevator discharge flap Engine oil

Multi-function lever Break-In
Controls ............................................................... 30-6 Non-Emissions certified and certified
Elevator swing table tier 1, tier 2, tier 3, stage I, stage II,
Lubricate ..............................................................105-11 and stage III..................................................... 85-12
Emergency exit........................................................... 20-2 Change ........................................... 100-1, 120-8, 125-1
Emissions Check level ........................................................... 105-1
Required language Diesel
EPA ..................................................................... 90-1 Service interval for operation at high altitude .... 85-14
Engine ...................................................................... 195-1 Tier 2 and stage II ............................................. 85-13
Accessing the compartment.................................... 50-1 Tier 3 and stage III ............................................ 85-14
Air filters maintenance .......................................... 155-8 Engine oil and filter
Air intake Change ........................................... 100-1, 120-8, 125-1
Inspect............................................................... 105-4 Engine oil and filter service intervals
Change Operation at high altitude...................................... 85-14
Vibration dampener ........................................... 150-1 Tier 2 and stage II
Vibration isolators.............................................. 150-1 Standard drain oil pan ....................................... 85-15
Change oil and filter ........................ 100-1, 120-8, 125-1 Tier 3 and stage IIIA
Check belt wear .................................................. 120-10 PowerTech Plus
Checking tensioner spring tension 0.12 - 0.139 L/kW oil pan............................... 85-16
Tier 2/stage II and tier 3/stage III..................... 120-10 Engine primary filter
Clean compartment............................................... 180-6 Replace................................................................. 125-3
Crankshaft dampener Engine safety filter
Inspect............................................................... 125-4 Replace................................................................. 135-1
Ground strap ......................................................... 160-4 Engine serial number................................................ 215-3
Inspect Every 100 hours
Air intake ........................................................... 105-4 Service .................................................................... 90-4
Crankshaft dampener........................................ 125-4 Every 1000 hours
Vibration isolators.............................................. 125-4 Service .................................................................... 90-5
Inspect belt tensioner.......................................... 120-10 Every 1500 hours
Inspect valves clearance....................................... 140-1 Service .................................................................... 90-5
Operating ................................................................ 50-2 Every 2000 hours
Power meter indicator ............................................. 40-1 Service .................................................................... 90-5
Replace Every 25 hours
Thermostats and gaskets .................................. 145-3 Service .................................................................... 90-3
Replace primary filter ............................................ 125-3 Every 250 hours
Replace safety filter .............................................. 135-1 Service .................................................................... 90-4
Serial number........................................................ 215-3 Every 3000 hours
Specifications........................................................ 210-3 Service .................................................................... 90-5
Speed indicator ....................................................... 40-1 Every 4500 hours
Ground speed indicator ....................................... 40-1 Service .................................................................... 90-5
Starting.................................................................... 50-2 Every 50 hours
Stop engine warning indicator................................. 40-1 Service .................................................................... 90-3
Temperature indicator ............................................. 40-1 Every 500 hours
Thermostats and gaskets Service .................................................................... 90-4
Replace ............................................................. 145-3 Exhaust pipe
Engine air filters Install....................................................................... 80-1
Maintenance ......................................................... 155-8 Remove................................................................... 80-1
Engine air intake Extractor
Inspect .................................................................. 105-4 Fan rpm................................................................... 40-2
Engine compartment
Clean..................................................................... 180-6 F
Engine coolant
Check level ........................................................... 105-2 Fan belt
Engine information screen........................................ 45-14 Check wear ......................................................... 120-10
Inspect tensioner................................................. 120-10
Feed roller
Inspect cradle stops ...............................................110-1
Index-4 041717
PN=4
Index
Page Page
Feed rollers Fill

Lubricate ..............................................................105-11 Fuel ................................................................... 155-5
Bearings ............................................................ 120-7 Hydraulic oil..................................................... 155-17
Operate ................................................................. 60-15 Flush cooling system ................................... 145-1, 155-15
Field Fresh air filter
Harvesting............................................................... 75-3 Remove and install ............................................. 155-10
Field harvesting Front turn signal
Harvesting a Large Field......................................... 75-7 Replace light bulb
Harvesting on a Headland ...................................... 75-5 Light bulb......................................................... 160-14
Harvesting Over a Ditch.......................................... 75-4 Fuel
Harvesting safety tips.............................................. 75-1 BioDiesel................................................................. 85-5
Pulling wagon on first row ....................................... 75-6 Check level ........................................................... 105-2
Field lights Diesel ...................................................................... 85-3
Replace light bulb ............................................... 160-15 Fill ......................................................................... 155-5
Fill Gauge indicator....................................................... 40-1
Fuel ....................................................................... 155-5 Handling and storing ............................................... 85-4
Hydraulic oil ........................................................ 155-17 Lubricity................................................................... 85-4
Filter Fuel filters
Air conditioning recirculation ................................155-11 Drain water.............................................................110-2
Fresh air.............................................................. 155-10 Replace................................................................. 130-5
Filters, Oil Fuel Filters
Oil Filters............................................................... 85-17 Filters, Fuel ........................................................... 85-17
Final drive Fuel prefilter
Check oil ................................................................110-2 Replace...................................................... 100-5, 130-8
Gear oil ................................................................. 85-20 Fuel shutoff valve ..................................................... 155-5
Releasing brakes .................................................... 80-4 Fuel tank
Final drive oil Drain ..................................................................... 155-6
Change ........................................... 100-9, 115-1, 120-1 Service .................................................................. 155-7
Fire extinguisher ............................................ 20-10, 180-5 Shutoff valve ......................................................... 155-5
Check.................................................................. 105-14 Fuel tank breather
Inspection checklist............................................... 180-2 Inspect .................................................................120-11
Mounting .................................................... 20-11, 180-5 Fuse center............................................................... 160-2
Operation .............................................................. 180-2 Cover .................................................................... 160-2
Recommendations ................................................ 180-2 Location ................................................................ 160-2
Use........................................................................ 180-2 Fuse panel................................................................ 160-2
First 100 hours
Service .................................................................... 90-2 G
Floating Crop Dividers
Operate ................................................................... 65-8 Gear oil
Floating crop dividers and contour base Final drive ............................................................. 85-20
cutter height control (if equipped) ............................. 45-8 Grease...................................................................... 85-20
Floor pedals................................................................ 20-2 Grease front wheel hub bearings .................. 150-1, 165-2
Adjust ...................................................................... 20-3 Ground drive
Fluid Loop hydraulic circuit .............................................. 80-4
Change Ground straps........................................................... 160-4
Base cutter gear case oil........................ 100-8, 130-3
Chopper gear case oil ............................ 100-7, 130-2 H
Final drive oil ............................... 100-9, 115-1, 120-1
Hydraulic oil..................................................... 155-18 Handling batteries carefully ...................................... 160-5
Pump drive gear case oil........................ 100-6, 130-1 Hardware torque values
Check level Metric .................................................................... 210-7
Base cutter gear case oil................................. 105-13 Unified inch ........................................................... 210-6
Chopper gear case oil ..................................... 105-13 Harvester activity monitor ......................................... 45-20
Engine coolant................................................... 105-2 Download .............................................................. 45-23
Engine oil........................................................... 105-1 Harvesting
Fuel ................................................................... 105-2 Multi-function lever.................................................. 30-6
Hydraulic oil....................................................... 105-2 Harvesting safety........................................................ 75-1
Pump drive gear case oil................................. 105-12
Index-5 041717
PN=5
Index
Page Page
Headlights Open crankcase vent ............................................ 125-9

Adjust .................................................................... 160-9 Primary extractor fan assembly .............................115-3
Adjust cab halogen lights .................................... 160-10 Safety stops
Adjust high intensity discharge (xenon) lights..... 160-13 Cab.....................................................................110-8
Replace bulb ......................................................... 160-9 Suspension.........................................................110-8
Replace cab halogen light bulb........................... 160-10 Topper ................................................................110-8
Replace high intensity discharge (xenon) Tires .................................................................... 120-10
light bulb............................................................ 160-12 Torsional dampener blocks ................................... 130-4
Horn Wheel cap screws..................................................115-4
Multi-function lever.................................................. 30-6
Hydraulic filters J
Change ...................................................... 100-4, 135-2
Hydraulic oil Jack locations ........................................................... 175-1
Change ............................................................... 155-18
Check level ........................................................... 105-2 K
Fill ....................................................................... 155-17
Hydraulic system Knives
Inspect .................................................................. 105-4 Remove and install vine cutter knives................. 155-22
Hydraulic tilt crop dividers Knockdown roller
Lubricate ............................................................... 105-9 Lower
Hydraulics Lubricate............................................................ 105-7
Oil temperature ....................................................... 40-2 Upper
Hydro-handle .............................................................. 30-6 Lubricate............................................................ 105-7
Knockdown rollers ...................................................... 60-8
I Operate hydraulically adjustable
knockdown rollers ................................................. 60-8
Identification Operate manually adjustable knockdown rollers .... 60-9
Chopper Gear Case
Serial Number ................................................... 215-4 L
Engine serial number ............................................ 215-3
Machine serial number.......................................... 215-2 Layout manager application ..................................... 45-34
Pump drive gear case Home page setup.................................................. 45-34
Serial number .................................................... 215-3 Lights
Inflation pressure Adjust cab halogen lights .................................... 160-10
Tires ...................................................................... 165-1 Adjust cab headlights............................................ 160-9
Inspect Adjust high intensity discharge (xenon) lights..... 160-13
Accumulators pre-charge pressure....................... 130-5 Adjust topper boom light ......................................160-11
Base cutter gear case mounting hardware ............115-2 Cab interior ............................................................. 35-5
Belt tensioner ...................................................... 120-10 Inspect ....................................................... 105-3, 160-4
Blades ................................................................... 105-3 Left turn signal indicator.......................................... 40-1
Chopper drum hardware ....................................... 135-3 Map light ................................................................. 35-5
Chopper vibration isolators ................................... 125-6 Park brake indicator ................................................ 40-1
Coolant pump weep hole ...................................... 125-6 Replace beacon light bulb................................... 160-13
Cooling package vibration isolators ...................... 125-5 Replace cab halogen light bulb........................... 160-10
Crop divider wear stops .........................................110-1 Replace cab headlight bulb................................... 160-9
Elevator bumper stops ...........................................110-1 Replace field lights.............................................. 160-15
Elevator slats .........................................................115-2 Replace front turn signal bulb ............................. 160-14
Elevator support cable ...........................................110-1 Replace high intensity discharge (xenon)
Elevator wear strips .............................................. 125-7 light bulb............................................................ 160-12
Engine air intake ................................................... 105-4 Replace tail lights................................................ 160-14
Engine crankshaft dampener ................................ 125-4 Replace topper boom light .................................. 160-10
Engine intake and exhaust valves clearance........ 140-1 Replacing
Engine vibration isolators...................................... 125-4 Cab interior light .............................................. 160-16
Feed rolller cradle stops.........................................110-1 Halogen bulb safety rules.................................. 160-8
Ground straps ....................................................... 160-4 High intensity discharge bulb safety rules ........160-11
Hydraulic system................................................... 105-4 Map light.......................................................... 160-16
Lights .................................................................... 105-3 Right turn signal indicator ....................................... 40-1
Lights, connectors, harnesses .............................. 160-4
Index-6 041717
PN=6
Index
Page Page
Switches....................................................... 30-14, 35-1 Mud and debris ................................................... 105-13

Turn signal .............................................................. 35-5 Machine safety features ............................................. 05-1
Load center............................................................... 160-2 Machine serial number ............................................. 215-2
Loading Maintenance
Procedure ............................................................... 80-1 Engine air filters .................................................... 155-8
Lock/unlock applications........................................... 45-34 Water fire extinguisher
Lower cornerpost display............................................ 40-2 Charging............................................................ 180-3
Lubricant Manual
Mixing.................................................................... 85-18 Storage location ...................................................... 20-1
Lubricant Storage Manual billet length adjustment ................................ 60-15
Storage, Lubricant................................................. 85-18 Manual tilt crop dividers
Lubricants, Safety Lubricate ............................................................... 105-8
Safety, Lubricants ................................................. 85-18 Map light
Lubricate Replacing ............................................................ 160-16
Base cutter................................................. 100-9, 120-5 Maximum harvester speed ....................................... 45-16
Chopper bearings ................................................. 120-6 Message center application...................................... 45-32
Chopper curtain agitator ....................................... 120-6 CAN bus information icon ..................................... 45-32
Crop divider outer scrolls ...................................... 120-4 Diagnostic address icon........................................ 45-32
Crop divider scrolls ............................................... 120-4 Diagnostic trouble codes icon ............................... 45-32
Crop dividers Electronic control unit information (ecu) icon ........ 45-32
Hydraulic ........................................................... 105-9 Message center icon............................................. 45-32
Manual............................................................... 105-8 Transfer debug files icon....................................... 45-32
Elevator chain sprocket......................................... 120-5 Metric bolt and screw torque values ......................... 210-7
Elevator swing table.............................................105-11 Mixing lubricants....................................................... 85-18
Feed rollers Moving the harvester .................................................. 55-1
Bearings ............................................................ 120-7 Multi-function lever
Pivots................................................................105-11 Controls................................................................... 30-6
Hydraulic tilt crop dividers ..................................... 105-9 Functions ................................................................ 30-6
Lower knockdown roller ........................................ 105-7 Moving the harvester .............................................. 55-1
Manual tilt crop dividers ........................................ 105-8 Propulsion ............................................................... 30-6
Primary extractor................................................. 105-10 Switches.................................................................. 30-6
Secondary extractor............................................ 105-10
Side knives.......................................................... 105-12 O
Sill roller bearing ................................................... 120-7
Steering cylinders Oil
Wheel machines................................................ 105-9 Engine
Suspension cylinders ............................................ 105-5 Tier 2 and stage II ............................................. 85-13
Track machines ................................................. 105-5 Tier 3 and stage III ............................................ 85-14
Wheel machines................................................ 105-6 Oilscan...................................................................... 85-17
Topper ................................................................... 105-8 Open crankcase vent
Track machines Inspect .................................................................. 125-9
Suspension cylinders ........................................ 105-5 Operate
Upper knockdown roller ........................................ 105-7 Contour base cutter height control system ........... 65-10
Wheel machines Secondary extractor.............................................. 60-21
Steering cylinders.............................................. 105-9 Topper system......................................................... 60-2
Suspension cylinders ........................................ 105-6 Operation
Lubricate suspension cylinders Elevator system .................................................... 60-20
Wheel machines ................................................... 105-6 Multi-function lever.................................................. 30-6
Lubrication system.................................................... 195-7 Operator controls
Lubricity of diesel fuel ................................................. 85-4 Adjust floor pedals .................................................. 20-3
Floor pedals ............................................................ 20-2
M Floor Pedals
Adjust .................................................................. 20-3
Machine clean out (annual) ...................................... 185-8 Operator's station
Machine clean out (periodic) .................................... 185-1 Adjusting
Machine cleanout Armrest................................................................ 20-9
Cab glass .............................................................. 155-3 Armrest display.................................................... 20-9
Compressed air..................................................... 105-1 Instructional seat ................................................. 20-8
Index-7 041717
PN=7
Index
Page Page
Auxiliary power outlet strip .................................... 20-10 Regional setting, languages, time/date
Emergency exit ....................................................... 20-2 settings, units of measurement
Manual storage location.......................................... 20-1 Global position satellite (gps) date/time settings... 45-30
Refrigerator (If Equipped) ....................................... 20-8 Regional setting, languages, time/date
Seat belts ..................................................... 20-9, 130-5 settings, units of measurement
Steering column .....................................................20-11 Advanced settings................................................. 45-29
Operators station Regional setting, languages, time/date
Adjusting settings, units of measurement
Left-hand armrest (Style A) ................................. 20-7 Regional/languages/units menu setting ................ 45-29
Left-hand armrest (Style B) ................................. 20-7 Remove accumulated crop debris ................. 10-21, 180-5
Operators seat (Style A)...................................... 20-5 Remove and install
Operators seat (Style B)...................................... 20-6 Elevator chain slats............................................... 125-8
Seat back (Style A).............................................. 20-7 Remove and install track shoes................................ 170-2
Seat back (Style B).............................................. 20-7 Replace
Overhead control panel .............................................. 25-1 Engine primary filter .............................................. 125-3
Engine safety filter ................................................ 135-1
P Fuel filters ............................................................. 130-5
Fuel prefilter ............................................... 100-5, 130-8
Park brake switch .............................................. 30-4, 55-2 Thermostats and gaskets...................................... 145-3
Parking the harvester ................................................. 55-3 Torsional dampener blocks ................................... 145-3
Prepare machine for storage .................................... 190-1 Row Width
Primary extractor Adjust .................................................................... 45-22
Inspect ...................................................................115-3
Inspect blades....................................................... 105-3 S
Lubricate ............................................................. 105-10
Operate ................................................................. 60-18 Safety
Remove and install blades.................................. 155-24 Backup alarm .......................................................... 55-3
Start up procedure after blade change ............... 155-25 Battery handling .................................................... 160-5
Pump drive gear case Driving or transporting harvester on public roads ... 55-1
Serial number........................................................ 215-3 Emergency exit ....................................................... 20-2
Pump drive gear case oil Fire extinguisher ........................................ 20-10, 180-5
Change ...................................................... 100-6, 130-1 Locations ................................................ 20-11, 180-5
Check level ......................................................... 105-12 Halogen bulb safety rules ..................................... 160-8
High intensity discharge bulb safety rules............160-11
Q Horn
Multi-function lever .............................................. 30-6
Quantities Machine safety features.......................................... 05-1
Fluids .................................................................... 210-1 Parking the harvester.............................................. 55-3
Remove accumulated crop debris ............. 10-21, 180-5
R Safe maintenance, practice .................................... 10-3
Seat belts ................................................................ 20-9
Radiators Tires, service safely .............................................. 10-19
Clean....................................................................155-11 Transport............................................................... 10-15
Radio Water fire extinguisher
After market radios.................................................. 25-1 Charging............................................................ 180-3
Antenna................................................................... 25-2 Safety stops
CB mounting ........................................................... 25-2 Cab
Controls................................................................... 25-1 Check .................................................................110-8
Switches (if equipped)........................................... 30-14 Suspension
Rear axle service......................................... 100-10, 120-2 Check .................................................................110-8
Recirculation filter Topper
Remove and install ..............................................155-11 Check .................................................................110-8
Recommended fire preventions................................ 180-1 Safety, Avoid High-Pressure Fluids
Refrigerator (If Equipped) ........................................... 20-8 Avoid High-Pressure Fluids .................................. 10-16
Refueling, avoid static electricity risk............... 10-10, 85-2 Safety, Handle Fuel Safely, Avoid Fires
Regional setting, languages, time/date Avoid Fires, Handle Fuel Safely........10-9,
settings, units of measurement............................... 45-28 85-1, 180-4
Index-8 041717
PN=8
Index
Page Page
Safety, Steps and Handholds Remove and install vine cutter knives................. 155-22
Use Steps and Handholds Correctly....................... 10-5 Replace engine primary filter ................................ 125-3
Seat Replace engine safety filter................................... 135-1
Adjusting Replace fuel filters ................................................ 130-5
Armrest................................................................ 20-9 Replace fuel prefilter .................................. 100-5, 130-8
Armrest display.................................................... 20-9 Track tension adjustment...................................... 170-3
Instructional seat ................................................. 20-8 Using a booster battery/battery charger.................. 50-3
Left-hand armrest (Style A) ................................. 20-7 Warning indicator .................................................... 40-1
Left-hand armrest (Style B) ................................. 20-7 Water fire extinguisher
Operators seat (Style A)...................................... 20-5 Charging............................................................ 180-3
Operators seat (Style B)...................................... 20-6 Windhield washer reservoir................................... 155-4
Seat back (Style A).............................................. 20-7 Service advisor diagnostic connector ....................... 20-13
Seat back (Style B).............................................. 20-7 Service interval chart
Seat belts ..................................................... 20-9, 130-5 100 hours ................................................................ 90-4
Secondary extractor ................................................. 60-20 1000 hours .............................................................. 90-5
Inspect blades....................................................... 105-3 1500 hours .............................................................. 90-5
Lubricate ............................................................. 105-10 2000 hours .............................................................. 90-5
Operate ................................................................. 60-21 25 hours .................................................................. 90-3
Serial number 250 hours ................................................................ 90-4
Pump drive gear case ........................................... 215-3 3000 hours .............................................................. 90-5
Serial Number 4500 hours .............................................................. 90-5
Chopper Gear Case.............................................. 215-4 50 hours .................................................................. 90-3
Service 500 hours ................................................................ 90-4
Adjust primary extractor chain tension................ 155-26 First 100 hours ........................................................ 90-2
Adjust shredder topper shear plates ................... 155-23 Shutoff valve
Air conditioning recirculation filter ........................155-11 Fuel tank ............................................................... 155-5
Base cutter blade ................................................ 155-19 Side knife
Bleeding air from coolant system........................ 155-14 Inspect blades....................................................... 105-3
Change base cutter gear case oil .............. 100-8, 130-3 Side knife blades
Change chopper gear case oil ................... 100-7, 130-2 Remove and install ............................................. 155-22
Change engine oil and replace Side knives
filter ............................................... 100-1, 120-8, 125-1 Lubricate ............................................................. 105-12
Change final drive oil ...................... 100-9, 115-1, 120-1 Sill roller bearing
Change hydraulic filters ............................. 100-4, 135-2 Lubricate ............................................................... 120-7
Change tire ........................................................... 165-3 Specifications
Check cab ground strap........................................ 160-4 Engine................................................................... 210-3
Check engine ground connection ......................... 160-4 Fluids
Check final drive oil................................................110-2 Capacities.......................................................... 210-1
Checking engine air pre-filter ................................ 105-5 Machine components............................................ 210-2
Clean radiators.....................................................155-11 Optional equipment............................................... 210-2
Cleaning engine air pre-filter outer screen............ 105-5 Tires
Component locations .............................................. 90-2 Inflation pressure............................................... 165-1
Engine air filters maintenance............................... 155-8 Size ................................................................... 165-1
Filter Torques ................................................................. 210-5
Air conditioning recirculation ............................155-11 Weight of machine ................................................ 210-4
Fresh air .......................................................... 155-10 Standard
Fresh air filter ...................................................... 155-10 Field harvesting....................................................... 75-3
Fuel tank ............................................................... 155-7 Steering
Grease front wheel hub bearings............... 150-1, 165-2 Column...................................................................20-11
Rear axle.................................................. 100-10, 120-2 Storage
Remove and install Prepare machine................................................... 190-1
Elevator chain slats ........................................... 125-8 Remove machine .................................................. 190-1
Remove and install base cutter blades ............... 155-18 Storing fuel ................................................................. 85-4
Remove and install chopper blades.................... 155-19 Switch
Remove and install primary extractor blades...... 155-24 Cab interior light...................................................... 35-5
Remove and install side knife blades.................. 155-22 Map light ................................................................. 35-5
Remove and install topper blades....................... 155-21 Turn signal .............................................................. 35-5
Remove and install track shoes ............................ 170-2
Index-9 041717
PN=9
Index
Page Page
Switches Track tension adjustment ......................................... 170-3

Air conditioner ....................................................... 30-13 Tracks
ClimaTrak automatic temperature control ............. 30-13 Carrier roller lubrication......................................... 170-1
Defrost .................................................................. 30-13 Transmission
Fan speed ............................................................. 30-13 Gear or range indicator ........................................... 40-1
Lights ........................................................... 30-14, 35-1 Transporting
Multi-function lever.................................................. 30-6 Loading procedure .................................................. 80-1
Operator interface ................................................... 30-9 Moving the harvester .............................................. 55-1
Radio functions (if equipped) ................................ 30-14 Parking the harvester.............................................. 55-3
Temperature control .............................................. 30-13 Public roads ............................................................ 55-1
Windshield washer................................................ 20-12 Pulling a machine.................................................... 80-4
Windshield wiper................................................... 20-12 Towing procedure.................................................... 80-4
Troubleshooting
T Air intake ............................................................... 195-9
Cooling system ..................................................... 195-8
Tail lights Electrical system ................................................... 195-5
Replace light bulb ............................................... 160-14 Engine................................................................... 195-1
Thermostats and gaskets Lubrication system ................................................ 195-7
Replace................................................................. 145-3
Tie down points U
Transporting machine ............................................. 80-1
Tilt procedure............................................................ 155-1 Unified inch bolt and screw torque values ................ 210-6
Tire Upper cornerpost display............................................ 40-1
Change ...................................................... 165-2, 165-3 Using a booster batter/battery charger ....................... 50-3
Pressure................................................................ 165-4
Tires V
Inspect ................................................................ 120-10
Specifications........................................................ 165-1 Varitorque ................................................................. 45-18
Tires, service safely.................................................. 10-19 Vibration dampener
Topper Engine................................................................... 150-1
Inspect blades....................................................... 105-3 Vibration isolators
Lubricate ............................................................... 105-8 Chopper ..................................................... 125-6, 150-1
Multi-function lever Cooling package ........................................ 125-5, 150-1
Controls ............................................................... 30-6 Engine........................................................ 125-4, 150-1
Operate ................................................................... 60-2 Vine cutter knives
Remove and install blades.................................. 155-21 Remove and install ............................................. 155-22
Shredder
Adjust shear Plates ......................................... 155-23 W
Topper boom light
Adjust ...................................................................160-11 Water fire extinguisher
Replace............................................................... 160-10 Charging ............................................................... 180-3
Topper system ............................................................ 60-1 Weight of machine.................................................... 210-4
Torque charts Wheel machines
Metric .................................................................... 210-7 Inspect tires......................................................... 120-10
Unified inch ........................................................... 210-6 Inspect torque ........................................................115-4
Torques Lubricate
Specifications........................................................ 210-5 Steering cylinders.............................................. 105-9
Torsional dampener blocks Lubricate suspension cylinders............................. 105-6
Inspect .................................................................. 130-4 Wheels
Replace................................................................. 145-3 Change tire ........................................................... 165-3
Towing procedure ....................................................... 80-4 Specifications........................................................ 165-1
Track Windshield
Rear axle service ..................................... 100-10, 120-2 Washer switch....................................................... 20-12
Remove and install shoes..................................... 170-2 Wiper switch.......................................................... 20-12
Tension adjustment ............................................... 170-3 Windshield washer reservoir .................................... 155-4
Track components .................................................... 170-1
Track machines
Lubricate suspension cylinders............................. 105-5
Track steer bias ........................................................ 45-17
Index-10 041717
PN=10
John Deere Service Keeps You On The Job
John Deere Parts
We help minimize downtime by putting genuine John
Deere parts in your hands in a hurry.
That’s why we maintain a large and varied inventory—to
stay a jump ahead of your needs.
DX,IBC,A -19-04JUN90-1/1
The Right Tools

Precision tools and testing equipment enable our Service
Department to locate and correct troubles quickly . . . to
save you time and money.
DX,IBC,B -19-04JUN90-1/1
Well-Trained Technicians
School is never out for John Deere service technicians.
Training schools are held regularly to be sure our
personnel know your equipment and how to maintain it.
Result?
Experience you can count on!
DX,IBC,C -19-04JUN90-1/1
Prompt Service
Our goal is to provide prompt, efficient care when you
want it and where you want it.
We can make repairs at your place or at ours, depending
on the circumstances: see us, depend on us.
JOHN DEERE SERVICE SUPERIORITY: We'll be around

when you need us.
DX,IBC,D -19-04JUN90-1/1
041717
IBC-1 PN=379
041717
IBC-2 PN=380
041717
IBC-3 PN=381

Om CXT 20713

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Om CXT 20713

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

*DCY*

CH570 and CH670 Sugar

John Deere Catalão

Continued on next page

Original Instructions. All information, illustrations and specifications in this

Adjust ComfortCommand™ Operator's

Continued on next page

Stop the Engine ..................................................50-4

Continued on next page

Diesel Engine Break-In Oil — Change Hydraulic Filters ..................................100-4

Continued on next page

Maintenance—Every 100 Hours Maintenance—Every 1500 Hours

Maintenance—Every 250 Hours Maintenance—Every 3000 Hours

Continued on next page

Remove and Install Side Knife Blades Carrier Roller Lubrication..................................170-1

Wheels and Tires Calibration Procedures

Continued on next page

Machine Identification Numbers

Follow Safety Instructions

Use Seat Belts

Support Machine Properly

Practice Safe Maintenance

CAUTION: Do not use hammer on rear

Tilt the Cab

Keep Passengers and Children Off Machine

Avoid Backover Accidents

Use Steps and Handholds Correctly

Handle Electronic Components and Brackets

Prevent Machine Runaway

Continued on next page AS09261,00000AA -19-11AUG16-1/2

during operation. Any high-speed rotating component

Service Machines Safely

Work In Ventilated Area

Install All Shields and Guards

Wear Protective Clothing

Handle Fuel Safely—Avoid Fires

Stop machine immediately at the first sign of fire. Fire

Avoid Static Electricity Risk When Refueling

Prepare for Emergencies

Avoid Hot Exhaust

Protect Against High Pressure Spray

Do Not Open High-Pressure Fuel System

Service Drive Belts Safely

Service Accumulator Systems Safely

Handling Batteries Safely

Avoid Heating Near Pressurized Fluid Lines

burst when heat goes beyond the immediate flame area.

Service Cooling System Safely

Use Safety Lights and Devices

Use Cylinder Safety Stops

Safe Transport of Harvester

Remove Paint Before Welding or Heating

Avoid High-Pressure Fluids

Use Caution on Hillsides

Use Caution On Slopes When Turning

Harvester Elevator Safety

Avoid Electrical Power Lines

Park Machine Safely

Follow Tire Recommendations

Service Tires Safely

Keep Hands Away from Knives

Avoid Contact With Moving Parts

Stay Clear of Harvesting Units

DCY